Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

VOLUME 2, PART I
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROAD WORKS)

February 2023
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

CONTENTS

SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

SECTION 01 GENERAL 1/1 to 1/26

SECTION 02 SITE CLEARANCE AND EARTHWORKS 2/1 to 2/17

SECTION 03 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION 3/1 to 3/36
SECTION 04 CONCRETE WORKS 4/1 to 4/30
SECTION 05 ANCILLARY WORKS 5/1 to 5/23
SECTION 06 WORKS IN CONNECTION WTH SERVICE 6/1 to 6/62
AUTHORITIES
SECTION 07 STREET LIGHTING 7/1 to 7/39
SECTION 08 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS 8/1 to 8/14
SECTION 09 PIPES, PIPEWORKS, MANHOLES AND 9/1 to 9/31
CHAMBERS
SECTION 10 BRICKWORK AND BLOCK WORK 10/1 to 10/3
SECTION 11 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINES AND 11/1 to 11/6
STRUCTURES
APPENDIX A SCHEDULE OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TO A/1 to A/7
BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE
SITE LABORATORY
APPENDIX B SCHEDULE OF ENGINEER’S OFFICES B/1 to B/4
AND EQUIPMENT

January 2023 Contents

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 1

General

January 2023 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT
SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

1/1 SITE ESTABLISHMENT

1/2 SITE OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER
1/3 OFFICES AND FACILITIES FOR THE CONTRACTOR
1/4 CONSTRUCTION PLANT & WORKSHOP FOR THE CONTRACTOR
1/5 CONTRACTOR’S SITE ORGANISATION
1/6 SURVEYING EQUIPMENT
1/7 LABORATORY TESTING
1/8 PROGRAMME OF WORKS
1/9 WORK SITE, SETTING OUT AND CROSS-SECTIONS
1/10 PROJECT SIGN BOARDS
1/11 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS
1/12 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND SUPPLY
1/13 APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
1/14 EXISTING SERVICES AND SERVICE DIVERSIONS
1/15 PROTECTION AND UPKEEP OF SITE AND ADJACENT AREAS AND
PROPERTIES
1/16 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT, SAFETY AND CONTROL
1/17 TEMPORARY DIVERSION OF TRAFFIC
1/18 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
1/19 SAFETY OFFICERS
1/20 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
1/21 SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS, OPERATIONS AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
1/22 RECORD DRAWINGS
1/23 ACCOMMODATION WORKS
1/24 PUBLICITY
1/25 TIDYING AND CLEARING THE SITE
1/26 SOIL INVESTIGATION
1/27 WORKS FREE FROM WATER
1/28 OTHER CONTRACTORS ON SITE
1/29 MAJOR EQUIPMENT AND PLANT
1/30 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS PREVAILING IN SHARJAH

January 2023 Section 1 - TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

1/1 SITE ESTABLISHMENT

1/1.1 The Contractor shall provide sites for the plant and workshops necessary for the
construction of the Works and shall pay any rents, easements and license fees levied in
connection therewith. RTA’s formal approval to the site for the Contractor’s plant and
workshop must be received prior to occupying the proposed site.

1/1.2 Roads and Transport Authority will not provide any area at land free of charge for the
erection of the office for the engineers and contractor.

1/1.3 The Contractor shall construct suitable entry and exit roads to and within the compound
and provide a covered parking area as specified in Appendix-B. The Contractor shall take
all necessary precautions to avoid storm water flooding within the compound and accesses.

1/1.4 The Engineer’s office shall be erected and fully equipped to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1/1.5 Within one month after the Completion of the Whole of the Works and in accordance with
the provisions of Clause 1/2.1 the whole area of the compound shall be reinstated to its
original condition and all rubbish and refuse removed.

1/1.6 The Contractor’s proposed access routes to and within the site shall be provided and
maintained as agreed with the Engineer. The Engineer may at any time withdraw his
approval for the use of any route and may order such widening, strengthening or repair
work as he considers necessary.

1/1.7 The Contractor shall employ watchmen for the security of the site establishment.

1/2 SITE OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER

1/2.1 The site offices for the Engineer shall comply with the requirements included in Appendix-
B. The offices shall be available in full working order to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within the period stipulated to commence the works in the Tender (Clause 4) and remain
so until one month after the Completion of the Whole of the Works.

1/2.2 The Contractor shall retain on site for the exclusive use of the Engineer all codes and
standards referred to in the Specification which shall remain in the custody of the Engineer
for his exclusive use until completion of the whole of the works but shall remain the property
of the Contractor.

1/2.3 All Keys for the Engineer’s site offices shall be held by the Engineer until such offices are
removed.

1/2.4 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer and his staff with daily cleaning attendance and
one full time for serving refreshments, car cleaning etc.

January 2023 1-1 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/3 OFFICES AND FACILITIES FOR THE CONTRACTOR

1/3.1 The Contractor shall make provision for installation, maintenance and removal at the
completion of the works, of his offices, sheds, and shelters. He shall provide and maintain
at his own cost sanitary facilities on site, first aid and firefighting equipment, drinking water
facilities, electricity and telephone for the duration of the Contract.

1/3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the site and the safety of public and
adjoining property and shall be liable for any claims arising from loss or damage suffered.
He shall employ watchmen for this purpose.

1/3.3 All temporary accommodation shall be maintained in an efficient condition during the period
of the Contract and shall be available for inspection by the Government Medical Officer of
Health. The Contractor must comply immediately with any instruction given by the Medical
Officer for cleaning, disinfestations and maintenance of any building to a hygienic and
sanitary condition.

1/3.4 The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of
his workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits or direction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall erect temporary fences as required by the Engineer. The site
boundary lines shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

1/3.5 The Contractor shall provide and maintain water, electricity and power required for the
works including that required by the Sub-Contractors. Pay all charges and bear all costs
for the necessary temporary installation including pipework, pumps, water tankers, storage
tanks, generating equipment, etc. and remove on completion and make good all work
disturbed.

1/4 CONSTRUCTION PLANT & WORKSHOP FOR THE CONTRACTOR

1/4.1 The Contractor shall make provision for the installation, maintenance up to the completion
of the works and removal of fully equipped workshops and stores. The Contractor shall also
provide all necessary construction plant, equipment and tools necessary for the proper
execution of the works. Plant shall include, but not be limited to, concrete and asphalt
manufacturing plant, mobile plant and sundry equipment required for any particular trade
necessary for the execution and completion of the works. All plant and equipment required
for the Contract is subject to the approval of the Engineer.

1/5 CONTRACTOR’S SITE ORGANISATION

1/5.1 The Contractor shall perform the setting out of the works as described in the Drawings and
Specification.

1/5.2 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary assistance in checking the
setting out of the works and interpreting any information used by the Contractor for this
purpose including the supply of a minimum 2 chainmen as and when required by the
Engineer.

1/5.3 The Contractor shall also provide the Engineer with similar assistance in carrying out
additional surveying works should these be found necessary for the proper execution of
the works.

January 2023 1-2 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/5.4 The Contractor shall also provide all assistance as required by the Engineer for the
measurement of the works for monthly valuation and for the final payment certificate and
also for recording the progress of the works.

1/5.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for all follow up and co-ordination with all service
authorities (Electricity, Water, Drainage, Street Lighting, Telephone, Horticulture, etc.).

1/5.6 The Contractor shall provide subject to the approval of the Engineer, qualified and sufficient
number of the Engineers, Quantity Surveyors, Supervisors, Employees and skilled and
non-skilled workmen for his supervision of the works and site administration.

1/5.7 The Contractor shall provide all unskilled labour and all necessary tools as directed by the
Engineer.

1/5.8 If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the work, the Engineer
decides that for the proper execution of a specified part of the works, shop drawings are
necessary, these drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval according to sub-section 1/21. Such drawings must be provided at
least 14 days prior to the commencement of the relevant work on site.

1/5.9 The Contractor shall not proceed with the above mentioned work until these shop drawings
are approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or
extension of time for the preparation of the shop drawings.

1/6 SURVEYING EQUIPMENT

1/6.1 The Contractor shall supply and maintain in full working order during the progress of the
works the surveying equipment specified in Appendix-B herein, and the supply of
expendable surveying material as required from time to time in connection with the works.
All equipment specified shall be new and shall remain in the custody of the Engineer for his
exclusive use until Completion of the Whole of the Works. All equipment shall be handover
to the Employer after Completion of Whole of the Works.

1/7 LABORATORY TESTING

1/7.1 Unless otherwise specified, testing of materials and completed work shall be carried out at
the Contractor’s Laboratory establishment under the supervision of the Engineer’s Material
Engineer.

1/7.2 All transportation of personal and materials on site to the testing Laboratory shall be borne
by the Contractor. For this purpose, suitable approved transport with driver shall be
maintained for this specific use by the Contractor and shall be at the sole and full-time
disposal of the Engineer.

1/7.3 Any testing which is required under the Contract which cannot be carried out by the
Contractor shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense at an approved independent
laboratory. A copy of such testing details and report shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
approval and to the Employer for information.

1/7.4 The testing of any part of the Works by an independent laboratory in way absolves the
Contractor from his responsibility to carry out his own job of control testing of the quality of
his work and the materials used.

January 2023 1-3 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/7.5 The Employer will not be held liable for interpreting test data. This will be the responsibility
of the Engineer.

1/7.6 All sampling for such tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer’s
Representative and labelled as per relevant standard sampling requirements.

1/7.7 The Contractor must make due allowance for the time required for any testing within his
planning and programme.

1/7.8 In addition, the Contractor will be required to submit a monthly laboratory testing
programme. This programme shall include the specific test requirements for the coming
month and include the type, number and approximate date that the testing will be required
in accordance with the specifications and relevant standards.

1/8 PROGRAMME OF WORKS

1/8.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a Critical Path Program and other
supporting documentation of the works within the time stipulated in the Conditions of
Contract together with details of equipment, procedures and method of work which the
Contractor intends to utilize and to follow. Due allowance must be made within the Program
for: (I) Traffic detour planning and phasing (ii) Maintenance of accesses to all the
residential, recreational, business and institutional premises affected by the works. (iii) Any
restraints and restrictions imposed by Service Authorities or the Police. (vi) Activities of
other Contractors (v) The pavement wearing course and road marking to be laid at such a
time to avoid damage by other construction activities.

1/8.2 The Contractor shall in accordance with the Conditions of Contract, submit a
comprehensive plant schedule which shall include the proposed dates of arrival or
establishment on site for each major item. Plant shall not be brought to or removed from
site without prior approval of the Engineer.

1/8.3 In addition to the Critical Path Programme, the Contractor shall if required by the Engineer
provide a detailed bar chart schedule to be used by the Engineer for monitoring the
progress of works.

1/8.4 Furthermore, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer a daily work programme showing
the activities to be undertaken for the day including laboratory tests and survey checks at
least 18 hours in advance.

1/9 WORK SITE, SETTING OUT AND CROSS-SECTIONS

1/9.1 The Employer, through the Engineer shall handover to the Contractor the work site
according to the Drawings. The work site means all land and other locations which the
Employer passes to the Contractor to construct the Works mentioned in the Contract.

1/9.2 The Contractor is responsible for all the setting out of line and levels of the Works and shall
employ adequate qualified staff to carry this out.

1/9.3 Before the commencement of the Works the Contractor will be supplied with the information
necessary to establish the lines and levels of the Works. The Engineer has shown on the
Drawings all the survey markers established but can give no warranty for their existence at

January 2023 1-4 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

the start of the Contract nor will accept responsibility for replacing any survey markers
found to be missing. Where survey markers have been established by the Engineer the
Contractor shall check the accuracy of their position and level and shall immediately notify
the Engineer of any discrepancies.

1/9.4 All setting out throughout the Works must be related to the Sharjah Municipality Datum
Levels and Survey Stations and values of Sharjah Municipality Bench Marks and survey
stations will be handed over by the Engineer and the Roads & Transport Authority to the
Contractor. Any Temporary Bench Mark (T.B.M.) to be fixed on the site shall be tied into
the Sharjah Municipality Datum.

1/9.5 The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, supply the Engineer with records in approved
form relating to all reference pegs and bench marks and shall keep such records up to date
by formal notice to the Engineer.

1/9.6 All survey reference pegs shall be carefully preserved except where construction requires
their removal, and before such removal the approval of the Engineer shall be obtained.

1/9.7 Before commencing work on any section of the Works, the Contractor shall survey and
level the original ground surface and shall prepare plans and cross-sections accordingly.
These shall, when finally agreed, be signed by the Engineer and Contractor as truly
representing the configuration of the areas in question before the commencement of the
Work. The preparation of the cross-section drawings shall comply with Clause 1/21.

1/9.8 All setting out shall be approved in writing by the Engineer before work may commence.
The centerlines are to be checked by the Sharjah Municipality Survey Section and
approved by the Engineer.

1/9.9 When necessary the Contractor shall provide at his expense sufficient and approved
templates for the purpose of controlling the finished shape of certain work. The templates
will be in accordance with the specifications and drawings where such are provided. All
templates must be approved and shall be maintained in good order to provide the section
required for the entire works.

Templates may be checked from time and any deficiencies noted shall be rectified
immediately. The Contractor shall also supply straight edges and lines when required to
control the work.

1/9.10 The Engineer will, if he deems it necessary, revise the line or grade and will require the
Contractor to adjust the stake-out accordingly.

1/9.11 Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take such levels and dimensions as
may be required for the purpose of measurement prior to disturbance of the ground. These
shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer before any surface is disturbed
or covered up.

1/9.12 Any change of the ground elevation resulting from compaction or other works provided for
in the Contract Documents shall be deemed included in such works and paid for within the
tender prices listed in the Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall consequently in no way
be entitled to any additional payment or claim whatsoever.

January 2023 1-5 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/10 PROJECT SIGN BOARDS

1/10.1 The Contractor shall provide and erect, in the location to be approved by the Roads &
Transport Authority and the Engineer, the number of Project Sign boards as described in
the Contract.

1/10.2 They shall be sign written by a skilled sign writer to show the details described in the
Contract plus any other relevant details to the approval of the Roads & Transport Authority
and the Engineer.

1/10.3 Within one month of completion of the Works the Project Sign Boards shall be dismantled
and removed by the Contractor.

1/11 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS

1/11.1 The Contractor shall arrange to have monthly record photographs of the Works taken.
These photographs shall cover such extent of the Works as the Engineer shall direct. The
days upon which the photographs are taken shall be decided by the Engineer.

1/11.2 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with one set of the monthly progress
photographs with dates imprinted on it.

One set shall comprise the following:-

- One colour negative of each photograph for an anticipated average maximum of

fifty exposures per month.
- Eight colour prints (294 x 210 mm) off each of a maximum of twenty of the
negatives as selected by the Engineer.

1/11.3 The prints are to be processed by an approved professional and shall be in colour on heavy
weight paper with matt finish. A label giving a brief description shall be affixed in the bottom
right-hand corner of each photograph. Each photograph shall be provided in an approved
clear plastic cover for binding.

1/11.4 The Copyright of all photographs shall be vested in the Employer and the negatives and
prints shall be delivered to the Engineer within 4 days of exposure. The photographs shall
not be used for any other purpose whatsoever without the Employer’s approval

1/12 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND SUPPLY

1/12.1 Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Engineer all materials used in the Works shall
be new and of the best quality as specified in the Contract.

1/12.2 All materials and equipment specified in the contract documents which are to be
incorporated in the works must be obtained from or through a Sharjah Emirate supplier and
or manufacturer who must be registered and licensed by the Sharjah Municipality. If such
specified materials or equipment is not available from the Sharjah Emirate market than any
other source is acceptable.

1/12.3 Materials delivered to the Site for the purpose of the Works, shall be accompanied by a
‘Certificate of Guarantee” signed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer.
Such Certificate shall state that the materials specifications and test results are in

January 2023 1-6 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

compliance with the specified requirement of the pertinent designations of the most recent
edition of ASTM or any other approved equivalent National Standard unless otherwise
directed. Falsification of such Certificates, Materials, Specifications or Test Results shall
be just cause for the rejection of the materials.

1/12.4 The borrow pit location if not designated in the Contract Documents shall be approved by
the Roads & Transport Authority. The Contractor shall exercise a continuous quality control
upon the extracted material to confirm its suitability for use.

No material shall be supplied to the site before the Engineer’s approval of the type of
equipment which the Contractor intends to use in the borrow pit, and for the method of
work.

1/12.5 The Contractor shall select rock quarries and shall submit laboratory tested and accepted
samples, within sufficient time before their use, in order for the Engineer to determine their
conformity with the related specifications. The Contractor shall exercise a continuous
quality control upon the extracted material to confirm its continued suitability for use.

No material shall be supplied on the site before the Engineer’s approval of the type of
equipment which the Contractor intends to use in the quarry, and for the method of work.

1/12.6 The Engineer’s acceptance of the materials does not relieve the Contractor of his total
responsibility to carry on with additional investigations in order to obtain and supply during
the progress of the works uniform material conforming to the Specifications.

1/12.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of royalties, if any, arising due to obtaining
of materials for use in the Works. No separate payment will be made by the Employer as a
royalty for materials for use in the Works.

1/12.8 Wherever in the Specifications tests on materials, tests on completed work and
construction control tests are called for or implied, they shall be carried out according to,
and the materials shall comply with, the requirements of the Specifications (latest edition)
with the priority of latest edition of standard shall be as follows:-

a. UAE & Municipality Standards

b. International Standard such as ISO
c. National Standard such as BSI & DIN
d. Others as stated in this Specification such as ASTM, etc.

The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use of the Engineer copies of each and any
codes of practice, international standards, test methods etc. relevant to the works. In
addition the Contractor shall retain on site for the use of the Engineer all manufacturers
literature relating to all the products to be used in the works, current BSI Handbook No. 3
and the Manufacturers installations instructions for all relevant products, materials
components and installations.

1/12.9 Where specific material or equipment is referred to in the Contract, it is intended only to
indicate the acceptable standard. The Contractor may offer alternative materials or
equipment of an equal standard. The Contractor must submit a statement listing proposed
alternatives together with such information and samples as the Engineer may require to
satisfy himself that the alternatives offered are of equal quality to the items specified. The
cost of submitting such samples will be borne by the Contractor.

1/12.10 The Contractor will be required to produce documentary evidence that all materials which
are not available in the local market and which have to be imported have been ordered
sufficiently in advance to ensure that no delay to the works occur. As soon as orders have

January 2023 1-7 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

been placed, copies of such orders shall be submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
be responsible for delays as a consequence of late ordering.

1/12.11 Should the Engineer discover in the Works any materials other than those approved, he
may order their removal from the site and replacement with approved materials at no cost
to the Employer and in compliance with Standard Specifications.

1/12.12 All specified materials incorporated in the Works shall be fixed or applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1/12.13 The Bills of Quantities shall NOT be used as a basis for ordering materials and the
Contractor is entirely responsible for assessing the quantities of materials to be ordered.

1/12.14 All materials or manufactured items shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and
stored in an approved manner, protected from damage and exposure to weather or
dampness during transit and after delivery to the Site. Damaged material or manufactured
items damaged during and after fixing in position shall be removed, repaired or replaced
by and at the Contractor’s expense.

1/12.15 The Contractor shall erect and maintain ample temporary and weather proof sheds for
proper storage and protection of his own and sub-contractor’s materials. Cement and other
perishable material shall have floors raised 150mm off the ground. The Contractor shall
clear away on completion and make good all areas disturbed.

1/12.16 Prior to ordering or delivering any material or manufactured items to the site, the name and
address of the supplier(s) and, where required by the Engineer, adequate samples, sample
schedules and manufacturer’s certificates of all the materials and goods to be used in the
Works shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and in the case of rejection further
samples shall be submitted until such are approved. The cost of submitting all such
samples shall be borne by the Contractor. All products/materials shall have approved
National Certificate of conformance similar to B.S.I. Quality Kite Mark or National
Agreement Certificate such as BBA for non-standard products and systems to be approved
by the Engineer and shall be verified by SCLD.

1/12.17 If judged necessary by the Engineer, the samples shall be tested for compliance at SCL.

1/12.18 All materials and equipment specified in the Contract Documents which are to be
incorporated into the Works must be obtained from or through a Sharjah Emirate Supplier
and or Manufacturer who must be registered and licensed by the Sharjah Municipality. If
such specified materials or equipment is not available from the Sharjah Emirate then any
source is acceptable.

1/12.19 Approval of a source does not mean that all the materials in the source is approved. No
source of supply shall be changed without Engineer's prior approval.

Approved samples shall be retained on site for comparison with products and materials
used in the works and shall be removed when no longer required by the Engineer.

1/12.20 Any material requiring certification as per Municipality regulations shall not be used unless
certified by Municipality - Sharjah Central Laboratory.

January 2023 1-8 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/13 APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER

1/13.1 The Contractor shall give adequate notice in writing to the Engineer requesting
inspection and approval of various stages of construction of the Works. Unless
stated otherwise in the Contract a notice period of not less than four hours of
normal working time shall be given before the work is ready for final inspection.
The Contractor shall supply printed forms for this purpose. Further stages of work
shall not proceed until the Contractor has received the written approval of the
Engineer.

1/13.2 The Contractor shall give the Engineer details of the source of materials to be
incorporated into the Works. Reasonable notice must be given by the Contractor
to allow the Engineer to carry out such tests and enquiries as may be appropriate
before giving approval.

1/13.3 When items to be incorporated into the Works are to be manufactured or fabricated
off- site the Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than seven days’ notice in
writing of the commencement of such work.

1/13.4 Where the approval of the Engineer is required under this specification, such
approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his duties or responsibilities
under the Contract.

1/14 EXISTING SERVICES AND SERVICE DIVERSIONS

1/14.1 The positions of all public and privately owned services shown on the drawings have been
based on the records of various utilities and Public Authorities and must be regarded as
approximate. The Contractor must verify this information and satisfy himself as to the exact
nature and position of all such apparatus. The Engineer does not guarantee the accuracy
of the information given on the drawings and no warranty is given or implied.

1/14.2 The Contractor shall take into account the current laws regarding the safety of service lines,
together with any amendment or additions thereto. The Contractor shall include in his
tender for anything in these laws considered to have a monetary value.

1/14.3 The cost of locating or verifying the location of existing services, liaison with the various
Service Authorities and complying with the above shall be borne by the Contractor unless
provided for elsewhere in the Contract.

1/14.4 Before opening the ground for any purpose, the Contractor must notify all concerned parties
by issue of formal “Notice of intent” and must obtain information by Formal Notice regarding
the location of all services. The Complete responsibility for obtaining this information rests
with the Contractor.

1/14.5 “Notice of Intent” shall be circulated to all concerned parties including the following:-

Roads & Transport Authority Roads Department

Sharjah Electricity and Water Authority
Emirates Telecommunication Corporation
Roads & Transport Authority
Street Lighting Section

January 2023 1-9 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Sharjah Municipality Drainage and Irrigation Department

Roads & Transport Authority Horticulture Section
Consultants for Water, Electricity and Drainage Departments.

1/14.6 Drawings and notices shall be sent in duplicate one of which shall be retained by the
addressee and the other returned to the sender duly marked to show underground services.
“Notice of Intent” will be given 14 (fourteen) days in advance of the proposed Works. In the
event that the work is not started within 8 (eight) weeks of the date of the “Notice of Intent”,
it will be deemed to have lapsed. A further Notice of Intent will then be submitted.

1/14.7 The Contractor shall furnish copies of the above Notices of Intent to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall acquaint himself with the position of all existing services and must obtain
clearance from the relevant authority before commencing any work in a particular area.
Written evidence of such clearance shall be provided to the Engineer by the Contractor. If
any underground service is encountered unexpectedly, excavation shall cease, and the
Engineer’s Representative shall be notified immediately. Emergency work, as necessary,
shall be put in hand without delay and without prejudice to the indemnity of the Employer.

1/14.8 The Contractor shall prepare records and CADD drawings showing position, levels and
types of each existing service including manholes, joint boxes and inspection chambers
etc. All record drawings shall be prepared using a Computer Aided Drafting program
approved by the Engineer.

USB Flash Drive containing the drawings data to be supplied to the Engineer in the
approved digital format for incorporation in the final record drawings.

1/14.9 The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by any public or
concerned Authority for the support and full protection of all mains, pipes, cables and other
apparatus during the progress of the Works, and shall construct and provide to the
satisfaction of the Authority concerned, all works necessary for the prevention of damage
or interruption of services.

If in the execution of the Works, by reason of any subsidence caused by, or any act of
neglect or default of the Contractor, any damage to any apparatus or any interruption of, or
delay to the provision of any service is caused, the Contractor shall report it to the Engineer
immediately and bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred by the Authority concerned in
making good such damage and shall make full compensation to the Authority for any loss,
sustained by reason of such interruption or delay.

1/14.10 The Contractor shall familiarize himself and all his employees with the dangers of working
in or near live sewers and at sewage treatment works; in particular the risks of physical
injury from the exposure to poisonous gases, of bacterial infection from contact with
sewage and of exposure to poisonous gases, which may be given off by the sewage.
Hydrogen supplied and methane are prevalent in the sewers in Sharjah, and can exist in
excavations where septic sewage from collection tanks is allowed to seep into
groundwaters. In the context of this clause the term sewer includes irrigation mains and
drains carrying ground water and/or stormwater.

1/14.11 The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the Works, afford facilities to
properly accredited agents of any Public or Utility Authority for access to all or any of their
apparatus situated in or under the site, as may be necessary for inspecting, reporting,
maintaining, removing, renewing or altering such apparatus in connection with the
construction of the Works or any other purpose whatsoever.

1/14.12 The Contractor will be fully responsible for ensuring observance of the above regulations
of his sub-contractors.

January 2023 1-10 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/14.13 Where any utility or service works are to be constructed under a separate contract by the
Employer within the Site and concurrent with the execution of the Works, the Contractor
shall cooperate with the other Contractor and shall coordinate his construction operations
to avoid interference with the other Contractor’s operations.

1/14.14 The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all necessary shop drawings of the works required
to complete the adjustment of apparatus to finished grade or specified level. The drawings
must be approved by the concerned Utility Authorities and the Engineer prior to
commencement of any work at the site. Measurement shall be for each utility facility
adjusted to finish grade or level approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor must allow in his rates for services installations for the production of
combined service drawings covering the whole of the Contract area. The drawings must
show both existing services located by trial pits and coordinated by survey and all proposed
new services. The drawings are to identify interface problems prior to production of working
drawings.

Drawings must be prepared using a Computer Aided Drafting program approved by the
Engineer, USB Flash Drive containing the drawing data of the original service locations and
those containing the drawing data of the relocated original services and of the new service
locations together with their protection area to be supplied to the Engineer for incorporation
in the final record drawings in the approved digital format.

1/14.15 The Contractor shall prepare CADD shop drawings for utility protection work and obtain the
approval of the appropriate Authority and Engineer before commencing with construction.

1/14.16 The Contractor shall relocate certain utilities to service reservation areas as specified in
the Contract. This work may only include the construction of necessary protective housing
(e.g. box culverts, slabs, concrete encased sleeves etc.) in the service reservation areas
for utility lines to be relocated. Or this work may include necessary protective housing as
described above and, in addition the relocation of specific utility lines to the service
reservation areas. In both cases the Contractor shall complete the necessary survey to
establish the lines and levels, prepare shop drawings and submit them to the Engineer for
his review and approval. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the concerned Authority
before commencing this work.

1/14.17 Any public or private service for water, electricity, drainage, etc. affected by the Works shall
not be interrupted without the written permission of the Engineer. Such permission will be
withheld until suitable approved permanent or temporary alternative service have been
provided by the Contractor or by the owner of the utility or his agents.

1/14.18 For temporary traffic diversions as may be required for the construction of road crossings,
full liaison with the Roads & Transport Authority and Sharjah Police shall be required and
the requirements of Clause 1/16 and 1/17 complied with.

1/14.19 Due allowance must be given by the Contractor when preparing the Programme of Works
to comply with this Clause 1/14.

1/15 PROTECTION AND UPKEEP OF SITE AND ADJACENT AREAS AND PROPERTIES

1/15.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect buildings, fences, roads,
passages, culverts and other apparatus if found and he shall not demolish or remove any
of these works except according to specific instructions by the Engineer. In the case of

January 2023 1-11 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

existence of buildings, ditches, excavations or any other work adjacent to the Site, the
Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and take precautions for their support and
protection at his own expense.

1/15.2 The responsibility lies with the Contractor for the repair and return to the previous condition
of items to which the Contractor’s works have caused damage.
1/15.3 The Contractor shall not be permitted to use earth works of already executed roads.

1/15.4 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that continuous access is maintained to all
properties adjacent to the works throughout the Contract period to the Engineer’s
satisfaction.

1/15.5 In pursuance of his obligations under the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall
whenever required or directed by the Engineer cover up and protect the works from weather
and from damage by his own or other workmen performing subsequent operations. He shall
provide all necessary dust sheets, hoardings, barriers and guard rails, waterways, etc. and
clear away same at completion.

The Contractor shall take all reasonable and proper steps for the protection of all places on
or about the works which may be dangerous to his workmen or any other persons or to
traffic. The Contractor shall provide and maintain warning signs, warning lamps and
barricades as necessary in all such places.

1/15.6 The Contractor shall furnish and place fresh or brackish water at his own expense for dust
control when and where construction operations require it and at locations where
specifically directed by the Engineer due to conditions created by the Contractor or his
construction operations.

1/15.7 Existing roads, accesses to houses, buildings, etc., and any new roads, whether part of the
Works or not, which are being used by the Contractor’s constructional traffic shall be kept
clean and clear of all dirt, mud and material dropped from vehicles or from tyres and any
damage caused shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall
provide, maintain and use as directed by the Engineer, suitable equipment including
mechanical road sweepers solely for this purpose throughout the course of the works.

1/16 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT, SAFETY AND CONTROL

1/16.1 The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers, traffic
control signals, lighting units, road markings and other such measures as may be
necessary for the construction of the works.

1/16.2 The Contractor shall, after consultation with Sharjah Police Traffic Department, prepare a
scheme of traffic management for carrying out the works. Such proposals shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his written approval not less than 30 days before the planned
implementation of each proposal. Prior to commencing any individual diversion or traffic
control the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer details of his overall scheme of traffic
control or diversions for the entire project giving his program of diversions etc. All diversions
must be approved by the Traffic Police and Roads & Transport Authority Roads Department
prior to implementation.

1/16.3 The Contractor shall not commence any work which affects the public highway until all
approved traffic safety measures conforming to Municipality Standards are fully operational
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 1-12 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/16.4 Temporary traffic signs conforming to Municipality Standards and approved by Roads &
Transport Authority Roads Department shall be of good design and sound construction
using reflective sign face material. They shall have a minimum face dimension of 900mm.

1/16.5 The Contractor shall maintain all signs, lamps, barriers, traffic control signals and road
markings in a clean and legible condition and shall position, re-position, cover or remove
them as required by the progress of the works.

1/16.6 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for complying with the requirements of and
coordinating with the Sharjah Police Traffic Department and Roads & Transport Authority
Roads Department in relation to the above.

1/17 TEMPORARY DIVERSION OF TRAFFIC

1/17.1 The Contractor shall construct temporary diversion ways wherever the construction of the
works will interrupt existing public or private roads or rights of way.

1/17.2 Diversions must be constructed in advance of any interference with the existing right of way
and the subsequent traffic management, safety and control must be in accordance with
Clause 1/16 and as directed by the Engineer.

1/18 FIRE PRECAUTIONS

1/18.1 Adequate precautions shall be taken against fire throughout all the Contract’s and Sub-
Contractor’s operations. Quantities of flammable materials on site shall be kept to an
absolute minimum, and shall be properly handled and stored. Gasoline and other
flammable liquids as well as pressurized gas tanks shall be stored in and dispensed from
safety containers; however, storage of such containers shall not be within the offices
building. Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall not permit fires to be
built or open type heating devices to be used in any part of the work.

1/18.2 Construction practices, including cutting and welding, and protection of adjacent materials
during construction shall be in accordance with good standard practices for such work. The
Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of approved portable fire extinguishers
distributed around the buildings and construction site.

1/18.3 The Contractor shall make arrangements for periodic inspection by the local fire authority
and shall co-operate with said authority to promptly carry out their recommendations at his
own expense.

1/19 SAFETY OFFICERS

1/19.1 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing within two weeks of the start of works
the names of responsible persons resident on the Site who will be undertaking the duties
of Safety Officers and Safety Supervisors on Site. A Safety Officer shall be in continuous
attendance on site 24 hours a day throughout the Contract period.

January 2023 1-13 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/20 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

1/20.1 The Works shall be executed in accordance with the Drawings and other such information
as may be issued or approved by the Engineer. The Contractor will be furnished with one
set of transparencies of the original drawings, free of charge.

1/21 SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS

1/21.1 The Contractor will not be permitted to execute any kind of works at site where approval of
shop/working drawings are required.

1/21.2 For any work or part thereof as requested, the Contractor shall supply four (4) copies of
shop/working drawings for approval by the Engineer. All working drawings shall be A1 size
folded to A4 size.

1/21.3 For all above mentioned drawings, the Engineer shall return to the Contractor one (1) copy
with any necessary corrections for resubmittal or marked with approval.

1/21.4 At the end of the Project, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the original negatives
of all drawings previously approved with 2 (two) sets of prints of the same.

1/21.5 In additions the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all information, scale drawings
and every assistance so that the Engineer can prepare drawings of work as executed to
form a complete record of the finished work.

All drawings must be prepared using a Computer Aided Drafting system approved by the
Engineer.

Drawings shall be plotted by the Contractor as required by the Specification.

USB Flash Drive containing the drawings data are to be supplied to the Engineer in the
approved digital format.

1/21.6 The Contractor shall record the exact location of all services apparatus excavated during
the works and shall submit drawings to the Engineer showing such information for
incorporation by the Engineer into the Record Drawings.

1/21.7 The cost related to the production of the drawings, either during construction or at the time
of delivery of the final account (for which 1 negative + 3 copies of all attachments are
necessary), shall be borne directly by the Contractor, and no separate payment shall be in
anyway considered.

1/21.8 Within sixty (60) days of the date of field staking, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for his approval the plotting of the original and final earthwork cross-sections, together with
the area and volumetric earthwork computations. The Contractor’s cross- section shall be
on transparent cross-section sheets for print reproduction.

On final approval of the Contractor’s cross-sections, the Contractor shall give the Engineer
the original transparent tracings and three (3) prints of the same along with approved
volumetric earthwork computations (in A4 size and bound). If the Contractor fails or refuses
to submit cross-sections within the specified time, the Engineer may withhold payment for

January 2023 1-14 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

all or any part of the earthwork quantities involved. All cross- sections shall be plotted on
A1 size Drawing folded to A4 size.

1/22 RECORD DRAWINGS

1/22.1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer every possible assistance with the preparation
of accurate record drawings showing works as executed complete with existing and
finished levels (top invert and formation levels plans cross and longitudinal sections
locations of all junctions manholes inlets, extent of concrete bed and structures and all
things necessary to form a complete pictorial record of the finished work). Also to be shown
are the exact locations with dimensions of existing and new service ducts, cables, pipes,
etc. All negatives of record drawings so prepared by the Engineer shall be dated and signed
by the Contractor and the Engineer as being a true record of the Works ‘as-built”.

1/23 ACCOMMODATION WORKS

1/23.1 The Contractor will be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with owners and
occupiers for carrying out accommodation works, including, where necessary, access onto
or across private land.

1/23.2 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the convenience or amenity of an owner or occupier
or of the public generally is affected by the Works, the Engineer may order the Contractor
to complete any accommodation work, or part of an accommodation work, with the utmost
expediency and irrespective of the Contractor’s overall program for the Works.

1/24 PUBLICITY

1/24.1 The Contractor or any agents or servants in his employ shall not give any information
concerning Works for publication in the press or on radio, television or cinema screen or
elsewhere without the written approval of the Engineer.

1/24.2 No advertisements shall be erected within the Site by the Contractor or any sub- contractor
without written approval of the Employer. Should any advertisement be erected within the
site without such prior approval the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to remove it
forthwith. Should such an instruction fail to be carried out within 24 hours, the Engineer
may remove the advertisement and charge the cost to the Contractor.

1/24.3 All advertisement within the site shall be removed within one month of the date of Certificate
of Substantial Completion of the Works, unless the Employer agrees in writing for any
advertisement to remain for a further period.

1/25 TIDYING AND CLEARING THE SITE

1/25.1 The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a clean and orderly condition free from
accumulation of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction period to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

1/25.2 On completion the entire site within the Right of Way are to be cleared of all construction
materials and temporary buildings, etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 1-15 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1/26 SOIL INVESTIGATION

1/26.1 Any information given about soils investigations carried out is for the Contractor’s
assistance only. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to check and confirm the existing ground
conditions and in particular the likelihood of encountering water during the course of sub-
surface construction.

1/27 WORKS FREE FROM WATER

1/27.1 Except where in the opinion of the Engineer, the route of the work necessitates
underwater construction, the Contractor shall execute all works in the dry, and shall
construct any temporary drains, water courses, pumping and other works that may be
necessary for the purpose. The Contractor shall have included for the cost of all operations
necessary to comply with this Clause within his tender.

1/28 OTHER CONTRACTORS ON SITE

1/28.1 The Contractor must extent full cooperation by way of liaison and coordination with other
Contractors who may be operating within the site of the works engaged in essential work
for the Government of Sharjah.

1/29 MAJOR EQUIPMENT AND PLANT

1/29.1 GENERAL

Equipment shall mean, where mentioned in these Specifications, all machines, tools,
equipment and all necessary parts for its operation and maintenance. Also, the laboratory
tools and instruments and/or equipment necessary for the proper construction of the road
and the proper completion of all the works.

The Contractor, shall submit, as stipulated in the “Instructions to Tenderer” a detailed list
of plant equipment which he shall undertake to bring to the site to carry out the work. The
list shall include for each piece of equipment, the type, size, quantity, manufacturer, model,
identification number and year of manufacture. The Contractor shall supply all plant and
equipment necessary for the construction of each phase of the work and it must be on the
site, inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the particular
phase of work. Any plant or equipment of portion thereof, which becomes worn or defective
shall be immediately repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1/29.2 COMPACTING EQUIPMENT

The compaction equipment for earthwork may be towed or self-propelled and shall include
a suitable combination of tamping rollers, grid rollers, segmented pad rollers, vibrating
rollers, pneumatic rollers and other compaction equipment that can satisfactorily and
uniformly obtain the required compaction.

i. Tamping or Sheepfoot Rollers: Tamping or sheepfoot rollers shall consist of metal

rollers, drums, or shells surrounded by metal studs with tamping feet projecting not

January 2023 1-16 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

less than sixteen and one-half (16.5) centimeters from the surface of the roller,
drum or shell. Tamping feet shall be spaced not less than fifteen (15) centimeters
or more than thirty (30) centimeters measured diagonally center to center and the
cross section area of each tamper foot, measured perpendicularly to the axis of the
stud, shall be not less than twenty-five and eight-tenths (25.8) square centimeters.
The weight of tamping rollers shall be such that when fully loaded, the load on each
tamper foot will be determined by dividing the total weight of the roller (loaded) by
the number of tamper feet in one (1) row parallel to the axis of the roller.

ii. Pull-Type Steel Rollers: Pull-type steel rollers shall have not less than one and two-
tenths (1.2) meter effective width of roller and shall be designed and constructed
so that the weight per linear centimetre of roller can be varied from thirty five and
seven-tenths (35.7) kilograms to at least fifty-three and six-tenths (53.6) kilograms.

iii. Self-Propelled Steel Rollers: The power mechanism shall be capable of propelling
the roller smoothly and without jerking when starting, stopping, or reversing
directions free from backlash, loose link motion, faulty steering mechanism and
worn king bolts. The steering mechanism shall have no lost motion, shall operate
readily and permit the roller to be directed on the alignment desired. The faces of
all rollers shall be smooth and free from defects which mark the finished road
surface. Rollers shall be equipped with water tanks and sprinkling devices which
shall be used for wetting the roller to prevent adherence of the placed material.

Two-axle tandem steel rollers shall weigh not less than eight (8) tones or more than
twelve (12) tones and shall have a weight per centimeter width of roll between 35
Kg and 70 Kg.

Three axle tandem steel rollers shall weigh not less than eleven (11) tons. Three
axle tandem roller shall be so constructed that the roller, when locked in position
for all treads to be in one plane, are held with a rigidity which will satisfy the
following test under full load; with the weight of the roller supported on the central
roller, the tread of the central roller shall not be more than three (3) millimeters
above the plane tangent to the tread of the end roller. With the weight of the roller
supported on the end rollers, the tread of the central roller shall not be more than
six (6) millimeters below the plane tangent to the treads of the end roller.

iv. Trench Rollers: The trench roller shall be of an approved type and shall weigh not
less than fifty-three and six tenth (53.6) kilograms per centimeter of width and shall
be equipped with water and sprinkling device that shall be used for wetting the
roller to prevent adherence of the placed material.

v. Pneumatic-Tyred Rollers: The tyres on the front and rear axles shall have wide
smooth treads and shall be staggered to provide complete coverage of the entire
area which the roller travels. The tyres shall be inflated to a pressure that has been
approved by the Engineer and the pressure shall be reasonably uniform in all tyres.
The Contractor shall provide a suitable gauge for determining air pressure in the
tyre.

Light self-propelled pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be so constructed so that they

may be loaded to provide a gross weight of at least forty (40) kilograms per
centimeter of width of tyre tread.

Heavy self-propelled pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be constructed so that they can

be loaded to provide a gross weight of not less than twenty five (25) tones and they
shall have tyre pressures of 6-6.3 Kg/Cm2 .

January 2023 1-17 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

vi. Vibration Compactors: Equipment using principle of vibration as a tamping force

shall be in good mechanical condition and shall be capable of transmitting forceful
vibrations or impacts to the various materials placed in construction. The
equipment may be the roller or pad type or a combination of roller and pad type.
Vibrating compactors shall be of the type and force approved by the Engineer.

1/29.3 HAULING AND WEIGHING EQUIPMENT

i. Hauling Equipment: Hauling equipment for aggregate shall consist of vehicles

having dump bodies suitable for dumping materials in a windrow or in spreader
boxes. The bodies shall be so constructed that their volume measurement can be
accurately determined. They shall be so constructed and maintained to prevent
loss of materials during hauling operations. The equipment shall be provided with
dump controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat. The bodies of hauling
equipment using public roads shall be fitted with tarpaulins to prevent the nuisance
of spillage.

ii. Weighing Equipment: Weighing equipment for truck-hauled material shall consist
of accurate and reliable platform scales and they shall be accurate to one percent
throughout the range of use. The scale shall have a platform of adequate length to
weigh the longest truck or truck-trailer combination which is in use on the Project,
in one operation. Scales shall be inspected and sealed or certified by an approved
scale company, as often as the Engineer deems necessary to ensure their
accuracy. The seal or certification shall show the date of the inspection. Where no
approved scale company exists or at the option of the Engineer, the Contractor
shall check and adjust the scale in the presence of the Engineer in the method
recommended by the manufacturer and/or approved by the Engineer. It is the
Contractor’s responsibility to have sufficient standard test weights for each scale
on the Site.

The Engineer, as often as he deems it is necessary, shall direct the Contractor to

check and adjust any scale on site to ensure its accuracy.

The Contractor, shall when directed by the Engineer, make weight comparisons
with other permanently located scale that met with the approval of the Engineer.
These weight comparisons shall be for the purpose of providing information on the
performance of the Contractor’s scale and will not be used as a basis for adjusting
the scale.

The approaches to the scale platform shall be maintained by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish a suitable weathertight building to enclose the

indicating mechanism and shall have adequate lighting for the scale operator’s use.

The Contractor shall on hand not less than ten (10) twenty-five (25) kilogram
weights for testing the scale.

iii. Controlled Water Distribution Equipment: Equipment for distribution of water shall
consist of distributors or tanks equipped with spray bars and, when required,
pumps to operate under pressure. The pumps shall be of sufficient capacity to
provide uniform and adequate distribution. They shall be mounted on pneumatic-
tyred trailers pulled by pneumatic-tyred equipment. The minimum capacity of any
tank shall be four (4) cubic meters where applicable.

January 2023 1-18 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The distributor equipment shall be constructed to permit accurate and uniform

distribution of the desired quantities of water per unit of surface area. The control
valves shall be constructed to permit full closing and to prevent leakage. The water
control valves shall be constructed to operate from the driver’s seat or provisions
made for an additional operator to operate the control valve while the equipment is
traveling at the proper speed for distribution.

1/29.4 MAIN PLANT FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING W ORKS

i. Equipment for Heating Bituminous Materials: Equipment for heating bituminous

materials shall be of adequate capacity to heat the material properly by circulating
the bituminous material around the system of heated coils or pipes, or by circulating
the bituminous material through a system of coils or pipes enclosed in a heated
jacket or other approved means.

The heating device shall be constructed so that it will prevent the direct flame from
a burner from striking the surface of the coils, pipes or jackets through which the
bituminous material is circulated. The heating device shall not be operated in a
manner that will injure the bituminous material.

Tankers or trucks received on the work which have defective coils, or from which
the coils have been removed, will be rejected by the Engineer unless some
satisfactory auxiliary means can be provided by the Contractor for the heating of
the bituminous material without the introduction or moisture.

The use of any equipment for the agitation of bituminous material to aid in heating
will be prohibited if it injures or in any way changes the characteristics of the
bituminous material or introduces free steam or moisture into the tank containing
the bituminous material.

Tanker or truck connections for transferring bituminous material from tankers to

distributors, supply tanks, or storage tanks shall be constructed so that they cannot
be used for any other purpose. The use of a tanker or truck connection or any other
equipment by means of which free steam can be introduced directly into the
bituminous materials as a means of agitation or auxiliary heating will be prohibited.

ii. Bitumen Distributor Equipment: Equipment for the distribution of bituminous

materials shall be equipped with the following appliances or devices:-

- Tachometers
- Pressure Gauge
- Adjustable Length Spray Bars
- Separate Power Unit & Pump on distributing System
- Heating Coils and Burner
- Thermometer well and Accurate Thermometer
- Measuring Sticks
- Quick Opening Gate in dome

All distributors and supply tanks shall be mounted on dependable motor trucks or
trailers equipped with pneumatic tyres. The units shall be so designed to ensure
that no rutting or other injury to the road surface will result. The distributor shall
have pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load produced on the road
surface shall not exceed one hundred and ten (110) kilograms per linear centimeter
of the width. They will be sufficiently powered to maintain the desired speed of the
equipment during operation.

January 2023 1-19 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The manometer designating the speed of the truck shall be a separate operating
unit attached to the truck equipped with a larger gauge approximately fourteen (14)
centimeters in diameter and graduated in units so that the speed of the trucks can
be determined within limits of approximately three (3) meters per minute or
equivalent thereto. The gauge shall be so located that it can be easily read at all
times by the driver of the distributor.

The distributor shall be equipped with either a tachometer, calibrated to indicate

revolutions per minute, attached to the pump shaft or a pressure gauge, calibrated
to indicate kilograms per square centimeter placed in the distributing system, by
which the flow of bitumen may be regulated.

The spray bars shall be constructed to permit adjustment for length in increments
of thirty (30) centimeters for any length up to seven (7) meters, to permit vertical
adjustment of all nozzles to the desired height above the road surface conforming
to the roadway crown, and to permit lateral shifting of the entire spray bar during
operation. The spray bars and nozzles shall be constructed to prevent clogging of
the nozzle during the intermittent operation and to provide positive and immediate
cut-off when distribution of oil ceases, thus preventing dripping of oil from the bar.

The power unit and pump distribution systems shall have a capacity of not less
than nine hundred fifty (950) liters per minute, shall be equipped with a by-pass
into the supply tank and shall be capable of distributing a uniform and constant flow
of bituminous material through all nozzles at a pressure between one and one
quarter (1.25) and three and one-half (3.5) kilograms per square centimeter.

The entire distributor assembly shall be so constructed and operated to ensure

accurate distribution of bituminous material at rates of from two-tenths (0.2) to
seven and five tenths (7.5) liters per square meter with uniform pressure, and with
an allowable variation from any specified rate not to exceed one tenth (0.1) liters
per square meter. Minimum capacity of the distributor shall be four thousand
(4,000) liters.

iii. Calibration and Check of Distributors: All distributors shall be calibrated and
checked before being used on the work. The calibration of the tank will be done by
the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer by the method prescribed by the
manufacturer and/or directed by the Engineer.

The operation of the distributor will be checked by the Engineer the first time it is
used and as often as he deems it necessary thereafter, and when the operation is
found to be satisfactory, a new certificate will be issued.

iv. Stationary Mixing Plants: Stationary mixing plants shall consist of measuring and
proportioning equipment and mixing equipment. They shall also include dryers
when aggregates are furnished that contain moisture in excess of the amounts
permitted for mixing. The measuring and proportioning equipment shall consist of
a system of hoppers and scales designed for proportioning and measuring by batch
weights or of continuous flow equipment so designed and operated that the flow of
materials can be accurately and continuously regulated and so arranged to permit
easy and accurate checking of the rate of flow on a weight basis. For continuous
flow mixing the proportioning equipment may be at the stockpile site so that the
individual aggregate may be blended prior to entering the drier.

The drier shall be capable of drying and heating the mineral aggregates to
specification requirements.

January 2023 1-20 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The proportioning devices for the bituminous materials and aggregates shall be so
synchronized that proper proportioning will be obtained at all times.

The design of the mixing chambers shall provide adjustment to permit a mixing
period of sufficient duration to produce a thorough and uniform mix. The approval
of and continued use of a stationary plant shall be contingent upon its ability to
proportion and mix satisfactorily the several materials in adequate quantity for the
proper progress of the work.

v. Hot Mix Plant: All equipment shall meet the approval of the Engineer, shall be kept
in good working condition, shall meet the requirements herein specified and shall
be of sufficient capacity to produce and process not less than eighty (80) tons of
mixed material per hour. All plants used by the Contractor for the preparation of
bituminous mixes and (Plant Mix) prepared mixes shall conform to all the
requirements of these Specifications except that scale requirements shall apply
only where weight proportioning is used, and in addition batch mixing plants and
continuous plants shall conform to the special requirements of these specifications.

vi. Requirements of all Plant

Uniformity: The plants shall be so designed, co-ordinated and operated to produce

a uniform mixture.

Scale: Scales for any weight box or hopper may be of either the beam or springless
dial type and shall be of a standard make and design, accurate to one (1) percent
of the maximum load that may be required.

When scales are of the beam type, there shall be a separate beam for each size
of aggregate. There shall be provided a “Tell-tale Dial” that will start to function
when the load being applied is within fifty (50) kilograms of that desired. Sufficient
vertical movement shall be provided for the beams to permit the tell-tale dial to
function properly. Each beam shall have a locking device so designed and located
that the beam can easily be suspended or thrown into action.

Dial scales shall be springless, of a standard make, and of such size that the
numeral on the dial can be read at a distance of at least (8) meters. The dial shall
be of a compounding type having full complement of index. Pointers so placed as
to give excessive parallax errors shall not be used. The scales shall be
substantially constructed, and those that easily get out of adjustment shall be
replaced with other makes when so ordered. All dials shall be so located as to be
plainly visible to the operator at all times.

Scales shall be inspected and sealed or certified as often as the Engineer may
deem necessary to ensure their continued accuracy. The initial inspection shall be
done by an approved scale company, or by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer by the method prescribed by the manufacturer and/or as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall have on hand not less than ten (10), twenty-five
(25) kilograms weights for testing the scales.

Equipment for Preparation of Bituminous Material: Tanks for the storage of

bituminous material shall be equipped to heat and hold the material at the required
temperature. The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, hot
coils, or other approved means so that the flame shall be in contact with the tank.

The circulating system for the bituminous material shall be designed to ensure
proper and continuous circulation during the operating period.

January 2023 1-21 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Provision shall be made for measuring and sampling storage tanks. Storage tanks
shall have sufficient capacity to provide for continuous operation. The storage
tanks shall be calibrated and equipped with a device whereby the Engineer may
determine the amount of asphalt on hand at any time.

Feeder for Drier: The plant shall be provided with accurate mechanical means for
uniformly feeding the aggregate into the drier so that uniform production and
uniform temperature will be obtained. A separate mechanical feeder equipped with
an adjustable gate opening shall be provided for each individual aggregate being
combined to produce the total aggregate. The feeders and gate shall be so
constructed and equipped that a continuous and uniform flow of each material will
be ensured. They shall also be installed in such a manner as to be readily
accessible for calibrating at all times.

Drier: The plant shall include a drier or driers which continuously agitate the
aggregate during the heating and drying process. The drier shall be capable of
drying and heating the mineral aggregate to specification requirements. The
burners shall be of such capacity, and they shall be so constructed and operated
that complete combustion of the fuel is obtained.

Screens: Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregates to the specified sizes
and proportions and having normal capacities in excess of the full capacity of the
mixer, shall be provided.

Bins: The plant shall include storage bins (cold & hot) of sufficient capacity to
supply the mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be arranged to
ensure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the mineral
aggregates. Separate dry storage shall be provided for Portland Cement, hydrated
lime, or other similar material when used and the plant shall be equipped to feed
such material into the mixer.

Each bin shall be provided with overflow pipes, of such size and at such location
as to prevent backing up of material into other compartments or bins. Each
compartment shall be provided with its individual outlet gate, constructed so that
when closed there shall be no leakage. The gate shall cut off quickly and
completely. Bins shall be so constructed that samples can be readily obtained. Bins
shall be equipped with adequate tell-tale devices to indicate the position of the
aggregates in the bins at the lower quarter point.

The minimum number of bins shall include at least one bin for each different
stockpile of material being used. Intermixing of material from different stockpiles in
one bin or on the ground shall not be permitted.

Bituminous Control Unit: Satisfactory means, either by weighing or metering shall

be provided to obtain the proper amount of bituminous material in the mix within
the tolerance specified. Means shall be provided for checking the quantity or rate
of flow of bituminous material into the mixer. Suitable means shall be provided for
maintaining the specified temperature of the bituminous material in the pipelines,
meters, weight buckets, and spray bars.

Thermometric Equipment: An armoured thermometer of adequate range in

temperature reading shall be fixed in the bituminous feed line at a suitable location
near the charging valve at the mixer unit.

January 2023 1-22 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The plant shall also be equipped with either an approved dial-scale mercury-
actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or other approved thermometric
instrument so placed at the discharge chute of the drier as to register automatically
or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates.

All plants whether continuous or batch type shall be equipped with two recording
thermometers. These instruments shall be provided with dust-proof cases, long
leads, and automatic recording mechanism capable of recording the desired
temperature for a period of twenty-four (24) hours on a chart not less than twenty
(20) centimeters in diameter, or on a continuous sheet. The chart for either type
shall be graduated in hours, minutes, and degrees of temperature. The maximum
time graduation shall be fifteen (15) minutes and the maximum temperature
graduation shall be five (5) degrees centigrade. Hours on the chart shall be
designated as a.m. or p.m.

The temperature recording thermometers should be installed on points or a

framework, separate from plant, to eliminate plant vibration.

They shall be located in a manner to provide easy access to the case and chart.
The bulb of one instrument shall be installed in the hot asphalt line as close as is
practicable to the spray bar discharge, the bulb of the second recording
thermometer shall be installed in the hot aggregate bin which contains the fine
aggregate. The bulb shall be located where the hot materials will flow over it during
the proportioning operation and shall not be located near the corners of the bin or
at locations where the material will collect or pack around it.

The Engineer reserves the right to pass judgment upon the efficiency of
thermometric instruments.

Control of Mixing Time: The plant shall be equipped with positive means to govern
the time of mixing and to maintain a constant time unless changed by order of the
Engineer.

Dust Collectors: The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector constructed to
waste or return uniformly to the hot elevator all or any part of the material collected
as desired.

Safety Requirements: Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and
sampling points shall be provided and guarded ladders to other points shall be
placed at all points where accessibility to plant operations is required. Accessibility
to the top of truck bodies shall be provided by a platform or other suitable device
to enable the Engineer to obtain sampling and mixture temperature data. A hoist
or pulley system shall be provided to raise scale calibration equipment, sampling
equipment and other similar equipment from the ground to the mixer platform.

All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets, and other dangerous moving parts shall be
thoroughly guarded and protected. Ample and unobstructed space shall be
provided on the mixing platform. A clear and unobstructed passage shall be
maintained at all times in and around the truck loading area. The area shall be kept
free from dropping from the mixing platform.

vii. Specification Requirements for Batching Plants Weigh Box or Hopper

The equipment shall include a means for accurately weighing each size of
aggregate in a weigh box or hopper suspended on scales and of ample size to hold
a full batch without hand raking or running over. The gate shall close tightly so that

January 2023 1-23 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

no material is allowed to leak into the mixer while batch is being weighed. Asphalt
plants shall meet requirements in accordance with ASTMD995 & ASTMD290.

Bituminous Control: The equipment used to measure the bituminous material shall
be accurate to plus minus five- tenths (0.5) percent. The bituminous material
bucket shall be a nontilting type with a loose sheet metal cover. The length of the
discharge opening or spray bar shall be not less than three-fourths (3/4) the length
of the mixer and it shall discharge directly into the mixer. The bituminous material
bucket, its discharge valve or valves and spray bar shall be adequately heated.
Steam jackets, if used, shall be efficiently drained and all connections shall be so
constructed that they will not interfere with the efficient operation of the bituminous
scales. The capacity of the bituminous material bucket shall be at least fifteen (15)
percent in excess of the weight of bituminous material required in any batch. The
plant shall have an adequately heated quick- acting, nondrip, charging valve
located directly over the bituminous material bucket.

The indicator dial shall have a capacity of at least fifteen (15) percent in excess of
the quantity of bituminous material used in a batch. The dial shall be in full view of
the mixer operator. The flow of bituminous material shall be automatically
controlled so that it will begin when the dry mixing period is over and all of the
bituminous material required for one batch will be discharged in not more than
fifteen (15) seconds after the flow has started. The section of the bituminous line
between the charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with a valve and
outlet for checking the metering device.

Mixer: The batch mixer shall be an approved type capable of producing uniform
mixture.

If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped with a dust hood to prevent loss
of dust.

The clearance of blades from all fixed and moving parts shall not exceed two and
one-half (2.5) centimeters unless the maximum diameter of the aggregate in the
mix exceeds three (3) centimeters, in which case the clearance shall not exceed
three and eight-lengths (3.8) centimeters.

Control of Mixing Time: The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time lock to
control the operations of a complete mixing cycle. It shall lock the weigh box gate
after the charging of the mixer until the closing of the mixer at the completion of the
cycle. It shall lock the bituminous material bucket throughout the dry mixing period
and shall lock the mixer gate throughout the dry and wet mixing periods. The dry
mixing period is defined as the interval of the time between the opening of the
weigh box gate and the start of introduction of bituminous material. The wet mixing
period is the interval of time between the start of introduction of bituminous material
and the opening of the mixer gate.

The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of being set at intervals as
necessary for mixing time throughout the total mixing cycle. A mechanical batch
counter shall be installed as a part of the timing device and shall be so designed
as to register only completely mixed batches.

Automation and Recording of Bituminous Concrete Plants.

The plants shall be equipped with an automatic mass measuring cycling and
monitoring systems approved by the Engineer. Recording equipment shall monitor
the batching sequence of each component of the mixture and produce a printed

January 2023 1-24 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

record of these operations. For each day's production the Engineer shall be
provided a clear, legible copy of the recording. There should be provisions so that
scales may not be manually manipulated during the printing process.

viii. Special Requirements for Continuous Mixing Plants Aggregate Proportioning:

Continuous Mixing Plants are not recommended for Roads & Transport Authority
Projects.

Weight Calibration of Aggregate Feed: The plant shall include a means for
calibration of gate opening by weighing test samples. Provisions shall be made so
that materials fed out of individual orifices may be bypassed to individual test
boxes. The plant shall be equipped to conveniently handle individual test samples
weighing not less than one hundred (100) kilograms. Accurate scales shall be
provided by the Contractor to weigh test samples.

Weight Calibration of Bituminous Material: The bituminous discharge line shall be

equipped with suitable valves and a bypass so that the asphalt pump of meter may
be readily calibrated. For each change of stockpiles, the plant shall be recalibrated.

Synchronization of Aggregate Feed and Bituminous Material Feed: Satisfactory

means shall be provided to afford positive interlocking control between the flow of
aggregate from the bins and the flow of bituminous material from the meter or other
proportioning device. This control shall be accomplished by interlocking
mechanical means or by any other positive method satisfactory to the Engineer.

Mixer: The plant shall include a continuous mixer of an approved type, adequately
heated and capable of producing a uniform mixture. It shall be equipped with a
discharge hopper with dump gates which will permit rapid and complete discharge
of the mixture. The paddles shall be adjustable for angular position on the shaft
and reversible to retard the flow of the mix. The mixer shall have a manufacturer’s
plate giving the net volumetric contents of the mixer at the several heights inscribed
on a permanent gauge. Charts shall be provided showing the rate of feed of the
aggregate per minute for the aggregate being used.

Bituminous-mix Paver: Bituminous-mix pavers shall be self-contained, power

propelled units, provided with automatically controlled activated screed or strike-
off assembly, heated if necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses
of bituminous plant mix material in lane widths applicable to the specified typical
section and thickness shown on the plans. Pavers used for shoulders and similar
construction shall be capable of spreading and finishing courses of bituminous
plant mix material in widths on the plans. Pavers shall be capable of laying one
hundred (100) tons per hour.

The machines shall employ mechanical devices such as equalizing runners,

straight-edge runners, evener arms, or other compensating devices to adjust the
grade and confine the edges of the mixer to true lines without the use of stationary
side forms.

The paver shall be equipped with a distribution system to place the mixer uniformly
in front of the screed.

The screed or strike-off assembly shall effectively produce a finished surface of a

required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving or gouging the mixture.

January 2023 1-25 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The paver shall be capable of being operated, when laying mixture, at forward
speed consistent with satisfactory laying of the mixture.

The automatic controls for the paver shall be automatic linkage arrangement so
that through the process of automatically adjusting the screed, the thickness of
asphaltic mixtures can be placed and finished to predetermined grade and a
uniform crown or cross-section.

Manually controlled bituminous-mix pavers may be used only with the written
consent of the Engineer. A manually controlled bituminous-mix paver shall be of
the self-propelled type with spread and strike-off facilities designed to spread the
mixture in such a manner that no supplemental shaping will be required.

It shall be capable of spreading the mixture evenly, with uniform density, without
segregation and shall strike off true to the cross-section. Screeds must be
constructed so as not to follow minor irregularities in the base and must be readily
adjustable to control accurately the depth spread.

No manually operated bituminous-mix paver shall be delivered to the site prior to

its approval by the Engineer.

Self-Propelled Aggregate Spreader: Self-propelled aggregate spreader shall be

approved design supported by at least four (4) wheels equipped with pneumatic
tyres on two (2) axles. The aggregate spreader shall be equipped with a means of
applying the larger cover coat material to the surface ahead of the smaller cover
coat material and with positive control so that the required amount of material will
be deposited uniformly over the full width of the bituminous material. Other types
of aggregate spreaders may be used provided they accomplish equivalent results
and are approved by the Engineer.

1/30 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS PREVAILING IN SHARJAH

The average prevailing local conditions at Sharjah City shall be assumed as follows:

Max. Ambient Temperature 55 deg.C

Min. Ambient Temperature 1 deg.C
Design Ambient Temperature 50 deg.C
Max, Metal Temperature under sun 85 deg.C
Min. Barometric Pressure 998 mb
Average Barometric Pressure 1015 mb
Max. Ambient Humidity 100%
Min. Ambient Humidity 20%
Design Ambient Humidity 80%
Max. Design Wind Velocity 160 Km/hr.
Average Yearly Rainfall 80 mm - 150 mm

The climate of Sharjah is relatively mild from November to April, and hot from May to
October with high relative humidity.

January 2023 1-26 Section 1 - General

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 2

Site Clearance and Earthworks

January 2023 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

2/1 SITE CLEARANCE DESCRIPTION

2/2 SURVEY BEFORE COMMENCEMENT
2/3 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
2/4 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE
2/5 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY NOT TO BE AFFECTED BY THE WORKS
2/6 ROAD SIGNS
2/7 DISPOSAL OF HISTORICAL ARTEFACTS
2/8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
2/9 EXCAVATION FOR ROAD CONSTRUCTION
2/10 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
2/11 EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS
2/12 BORROW PIT SITE
2/13 DEFINITION, CLASSIFICATION AND GENERAL USE OF EARTHWORKS
MATERIALS
2/14 MAIN PLANT FOR EARTHWORKS CONSTRUCTION
2/15 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
2/16 EMBANKMENT FOUNDATION
2/17 PLACING AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
2/18 MOISTURE CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
2/19 TESTING METHODS
2/20 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS
2/21 STABILISING CRUSHED MATERIAL
2/22 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
2/23 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

January 2023 Section 2 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 2 – SITE CLEARANCE AND EARTHWORKS

2/1 SITE CLEARANCE DESCRIPTION

2/1.1 This work shall consist of the removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all
buildings, fences, structures, abandoned pipelines, and any other obstruction which are not
designed or permitted to remain. It shall also include the salvaging of designated materials
and backfilling the resulting trenches, holes and pits. Site clearance areas shall be based
upon Engineer’s approval.

2/2 SURVEY BEFORE COMMENCEMENT

2/2.1 Prior to starting the site clearance, the Contractor shall carry out a thorough survey of
buildings, structures, fences trees, etc. that are to be removed. The Engineer shall be fully
informed of the results of this survey and the amount and extent of the demolition and site
clearance shall then be agreed with the Engineer.

2/3 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS

2/3.1 The Contractor shall in a careful manner, raze, remove and dispose of all buildings and
foundation structures, fences and other obstructions or any portions of which are within the
right-of-way, except utilities and those for which other provisions have been made for
removal. All designated salvageable material shall be removed, without unnecessary
damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stored by the
Contractor at specified places within the project limits or at designated storage areas as
directed by the Engineer. All such salvageable material shall be deemed the property of
the Employer

2/3.2 Foundations of building structures shall generally be removed to a depth of 1m below

ground level or more if considered necessary by the Engineer.

2/3.3 Where shown on the drawings or where directed by the Engineer, underground structures,
culverts, chambers and foundations other than building foundations shall be removed to
such a level as may be indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.

2/3.4 Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate in trench and break out
redundant pipe ducts and surrounds. Where pipes are to be removed and either salvaged
or relaid they shall be carefully removed and every precaution taken to avoid breaking or
damaging the pipe. The pipes shall be stored when necessary so that there will be no loss
or damage before relaying. The Contractor will be required to replace sections lost from
storage or damage by negligence or by the use of improper methods in their removal.

2/3.5 Trenches and pits resulting from demolition and site clearance below ground level shall be
properly cleaned out (including pumping) and filled with suitable material and compacted
in accordance with the relevant Specifications up to subgrade level or as otherwise directed
by the Engineer.

2/3.6 Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible, prior to demolition, for the
disconnection of all services and clearance from the Sharjah Municipality and all Service
Authorities.

January 2023 2-1 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/4 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE

2/4.1 Before commencing any excavation or fill, the area shall be cleared of all trees, stumps,
roots, bushes, vegetation, debris, materials or other obstructions.

2/4.2 Before removal of any trees or shrubs the Contractor shall obtain written consent from
Sharjah Municipality Horticultural Section at least two weeks in advance of the planned
removal.

2/4.3 The Engineer’s approval of any removal of trees and undergrowth must be obtained before
commencement of work. Where directed all bushes, undergrowth, etc. shall be grubbed up
and burnt or otherwise disposed of in tips off site (Sub section 2/8). Holes left by stumps or
roots shall, within one week, be filled with a suitable material, compacted to the Engineer’s
satisfaction in accordance with Specification Clause 2/17.

2/4.4 GHAF TREES

2/4.4.1 Ghaf Trees are a protected species in the United Arab Emirates they are to be pruned or
moved under the complete supervision and written approval of Sharjah Municipality
Horticulture Section.

2/4.4.2 Trees may only be moved if they represent an absolute obstruction to the works and no
diversion of services or the road alignment is possible.

2/4.4.3 Attendance on the Horticulture Section is the responsibility of the Contractor and is
included, at least the following plant:

i) Mobile crane of sufficient capacity with slinges etc. to enable the lifting of the
particular tree/trees in question.
ii) Excavator to carry out pre-tree removal works.
iii) Low Bed trailer and tractor or similar to transport the removed tree/trees to
designated areas.

2/4.4.4 The above plant will be required at both the original and new tree sites. The Horticulture
Department may also require the provision of a supply of potable water for irrigation of the
tree prior to its removal.

2/5 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY NOT TO BE AFFECTED BY THE WORKS

2/5.1 Attention is directed to the Contractor’s obligations under law and under this Contract with
regard to damage, particularly with regard to protection of property, plants and landscape
and to responsibility for damage claims.

2/5.2 Existing highways, improvements, facilities, adjacent property, services, and trees and
plants designated for preservation shall be protected from injury or damage which could
result from the Contractor’s operations.

2/5.3 The form of protection for vegetation within the site shall be of a type and standard
approved by the Sharjah Municipality Horticultural Section.

January 2023 2-2 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/6 ROAD SIGNS

2/6.1 All existing road signs, street name plates and the like affected by the works are to be
carefully taken down and stored. Signs to be re-erected shall be cleaned, provided with
new fixings where necessary and the posts re-painted in accordance with the
Specifications. Redundant signs shall be transported to the stores or depots of relevant
Authorities. Any sign, street name plate or the like damaged by the Contractor during his
operation shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s cost.

2/7 DISPOSAL OF HISTORICAL ARTEFACTS

2/7.1 Where specified, certain materials arising from the site clearance and excavation are to
remain the property of the Employer. All fossils, antiquities and other objects of interest or
value which may be found or uncovered on the site shall remain or become the property of
the Employer and upon discovery of such an object the Contractor shall forthwith:

a) Use his best endeavours not to disturb or damage the object;

b) Cease work which would endanger the object or prevent or impede its removal;
c) Inform the Engineer of the discovery and precise location of the object;

2/7.2 The Engineer will issue instructions on the procedure to be adopted which may include
conditions to permit the examination, excavation or removal of the object by a third party.

2/8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

2/8.1 Subject to the provision of Clause 27.1of the Conditions of Contract Part 1 and of the
Specification, all materials arising from site clearance which are surplus to or unsuitable for
use in the Works as per Clause 2/13.3 shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be disposed of by him either off the Site to an approved tip or if directed or otherwise
agreed by the Engineer on the Site in an approved manner.

2/8.2 Following consultation with Sharjah Municipality Public Health Department the Contractor
shall propose two sites for disposal of unsuitable or surplus material, one of which shall be
specified as having priority and which must be filled before the second is used, together
with a separate location where hard debris, such as concrete, building rubble, kerbing, road
pavement, etc. shall be disposed of. The Contractor shall seek approval for all the proposed
sites from the Sharjah Municipality before work commences and disposal at such sites shall
be at no extra cost to the Employer.

2/9 EXCAVATION FOR ROAD CONSTRUCTION

2/9.1 This work shall consist of excavating the roadway and borrow pits, removing and
satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within the limits of the Work. It shall
include all dewatering, excavation, shaping and sloping as necessary for the construction,
preparation and completion of all embankments, cutting, subgrade, shoulders, slopes,
gutters, intersections, approaches and private entrances, as directed, and in conformity to
the alignment, grades, and cross-sections shown on the plans or established by the
Engineer.

January 2023 2-3 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/10 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION

2/10.1 Excavated material shall be classified as:-

- Roadway Excavation
- Borrow Excavation

2/10.2 Roadway Excavation: includes all material of whatsoever nature, suitable or unsuitable,
excavated within the limits of the Right of Way for the preparation of the road bed. All such
material after deduction for material declared unsuitable by the Engineer, shall be
considered to be available for use at locations requiring fill. Roadway excavation shall be
sub-classified as Common Excavation and Rock Excavation.

2/10.3 Authority to identify and define the physical characteristics which determine the
classifications as “Common Excavation” and “Rock Excavation” in accordance with the
intent of the following provisions shall be vested in the Engineer.

2/10.4 Common Excavation:- shall consist of the excavation and satisfactory disposal (subject
to Clause 2/15.3) of all soils, certain strata and rock boulders less than one (1) cubic metre
in volume. Strata which are altered and weathered and are in place, but which are not firm
enough, or in the opinion of the Engineer are not rigid enough to have all the characteristics
of rock excavation shall be classified as common excavation.

2/10.5 Rock Excavation:- shall consist of the excavation and satisfactory disposal (subject to
Clause 2.15/3) of all unaltered and unweathered firm and rigid igneous, metamorphic and
sedimentary solid rock that in the opinion of the Engineer is impracticable to remove by
heavy mechanical excavating equipment (e.g. Cat.D8) or heavy duty hydraulic ripper, or
by approved pneumatic tools. These type of rocks would normally be removed by blasting
with explosives, or by heavy duty hydraulic breakers or by drilling and broaching with
wedges and sledge hammers if removed by hand. Also individual boulders or detached
pieces of rock exceeding one cubic meter in size in trenches or excavations necessitating
blasting or breaking as above.

2/10.6 Borrow Excavation:- If the demand for fill material exceeds the quantity of suitable
material obtained from the necessary roadway excavation then suitable material shall be
imported to the worksite from an approved borrow pit. The excavation, haulage and
discharge of material in its final place from a borrow pit shall be classified as Borrow
Excavation.

2/11 EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS

2/11.1 All materials removed from an excavation shall be used in the formation of the
embankment, shoulders and at such other places as directed, unless it is declared
unsuitable and ordered to be sent to tip by the Engineer. No excavated material shall be
wasted without written permission from the Engineer, and when such material is to be
wasted, it shall hauled to the approved tip (Clause 2/8) or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer.

Material suitable for top soil, base material, mineral aggregate or other specified purpose,
encountered in excavation, shall be reserved, if so directed, until it can be placed in its
proper position in the roadway. When specified or designated, top soil shall be used as
cover on embankment slopes to aid the regrowth of vegetation or other purposes.

January 2023 2-4 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/11.2 Excavated materials wasted by the Contractor without written permission of the Engineer
shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

2/11.3 During the construction of the roadway, the prepared formation shall be maintained in such
condition that it will be well drained at all times.

2/11.4 Rock, shale and other unsuitable material encountered in cuts shall be excavated to the
lateral limits and depth indicated on the plans or as otherwise directed. Any overbreakage
below the depth shown on the plans or as otherwise directed will not be paid for. Backfill of
the overbreakage shall be approved suitable material and shall have the same density
requirements as specified by the Contract and shall be at the expense of the Contractor. If
the backfill of the overbreakage area designated by the Engineer is to be a crushed
aggregate concrete or other special aggregate the entire cost of the backfill of the
overbreakage shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Undrained pockets shall not be
left in the surface of the rock, but they shall be treated as directed by the Engineer.

2/11.5 All slopes, except in solid rock or other material which, in the judgement of the Engineer,
require a modified slope, shall be trimmed accurately to the slopes shown on the cross-
section drawings, and care must be exercised that no material shall be loosened beyond
the required slopes. Side ditches if required shall be excavated in conformity to line, grade,
and cross-section as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2/11.6 In cut areas, excavation shall be for the full construction width down to ‘earthworks
formation level’. For a further depth of 15 cm the existing material shall be scarified, watered
as necessary, mixed and compacted to not less than 95% of maximum dry density as
determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (Method 3.5 or 3.6). Field density shall be determined by
BS 1377 Part 9 (Method 2.1 or 2.2).

2/11.7 The ‘improved subgrade layer’, using specified imported material, shall then be placed and
compacted to not less than 95% maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4
(Method 3.5 or 3.6) to bring the embankment level up to ‘top of improved subgrade level’.
Field density shall be determined by BS 1377 Part 9 (Method 2.1 or 2.2)

2/11.8 For cutting 1.5 meters or more in depth the technical requirements, of the Specification for
‘Excavation for Structures” (Sub-Section 2/23) shall be complied with.

2/11.9 Where excavation to the finished graded section, that is ‘earthworks formation level’, results
in a formation or slopes of unsuitable soil, the Engineer may require the Contractor to
remove the unsuitable material to a depth directed and backfill to the finished graded
section with approved material compacted in accordance with specified requirements for
embankment construction. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way that
the necessary cross-sectional measurements can be taken and agreed with the Engineer
before the backfill is placed.

2/11.10 When the Contractor is required or directed to excavate unsuitable material in fill areas,
following general clearance of the area (see Specification sub-Section 2/16 ‘Embankment
Foundation”), the depth to which these unsuitable materials are to be removed will be
determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall so schedule the work so that authorized
cross-sections can be taken before and after the material has been removed.

2/11.11 All slopes, lines and grades shall be true, correct, and accurate and according to those on
the drawings or otherwise directed and approved by the Engineer. The ‘earthworks
formation level’ in cuts shall be accurate to the authorized profile grade to plus or minus
two (2) centimeters and, for ‘top of improved subgrade’ level, plus or minus one (1)
centimeter. Where discrepancies are found in the Work the Contractor shall make
necessary corrections.

January 2023 2-5 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/11.12 The Engineer will check all or any part of the Work, as he deems necessary, to determine
conformance to the lines, grades, elevations and cross-sections.

2/12 BORROW PIT SITE

2/12.1 The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Employer for the location of the borrow pit
site. The Contractor shall be responsible to determine the quantities and quality of the
available material in the approved borrow site to meet the requirements of the Contract.
When required the borrow area shall be cleared and grubbed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 2/1

2/12.2 The Employer may at any time revoke approval of a borrow site where the Contractor is
obtaining borrow material for the Works. Upon receiving such notice from the Employer,
the Contractor shall immediately cease removing material from said borrow site. In the
event the Employer revokes approval of the borrow site, the Contractor shall locate a new
borrow pit site as specified above.

2/12.3 The Contractor shall not claim any additional payment for any costs by reason of the
necessity of changing borrow site locations due either to the shortage of the supply of
borrow material available from the borrow pit site approved by the Employer, or due to the
Employer’s decision to revoke approval of the borrow site where the Contractor is obtaining
borrow material for the Works.

2/12.4 The Contractor shall leave borrow pits in a condition acceptable to the Employer and to the
Engineer.

2/12.5 The Contractor will be solely responsible for ascertaining the location of such approved
borrow areas during the tender preparation stage. Locations, distances to the work site and
haulage from such approved borrow areas shall be taken into consideration when preparing
the unit tender price for Borrow Excavation.

2/13 DEFINITION, CLASSIFICATION AND GENERAL USE OF EARTHWORKS

MATERIALS

The following definitions of earthwork materials shall apply

2/13.1 Top Soil shall be fertile, friable soil obtained from well drained arable land and shall be free
draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy plant growth.

2/13.2 Suitable Material shall comprise all material that is acceptable in accordance with the
Contract for use in the Works. Suitable material for earthworks shall be approved soil with
a plasticity index not exceeding 6 (liquid limit shall not exceed 40% when tested according
to BS 1377: Part 2: 1990: Test 4.5) obtained from excavations within the works or from
borrow pits approved by the Engineer. It shall not contain an excess of fines (not more than
20% passing Sieve Size 0.063mm determined by BS 1377: Part 2: 1990 Clause 9.2
"Determination of particle size distribution by wet sieving") or in excess of 2% organic
material (BS 1377 Part 3). Suitable material for earthworks shall have a soaked CBR value
at 95% of maximum dry density not less than 15% when tested according to BS 1377 Part
4 (method 7). The maximum particle size shall not exceed 63 mm.

2/13.3 Unsuitable Material shall comprise:-

January 2023 2-6 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

- Rock particles exceeding 63mm in size

- Organic material (BS1377 Part 3 (method 3) containing greater than 2% (stumps
and other perishable material).
- Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
Soils of liquid limit (BS 1377 Part 2 (method 4.5)) exceeding 40% and or plasticity
index exceeding 6 (BS 1377 Part 2 method 5).
- Material containing more than 5% of water soluble salts by weight of dry soil BS
1377 Part 3 (Method 7 and 5 for water soluble chloride and sulphate respectively).
- Any other material which the Engineer may deem to be unsuitable for earthworks.
- Material containing >20% passing 0.063mm sieve.

2/13.4 Material for Improved Subgrade layer shall meet the following requirements:-

- Not more than 20% by weight passing Sieve Size 0.063mm determined by
BS1377: Part 2 : 1990 Clause 9.2 “Determination of particle size distribution by wet
sieving”.

Soaked CBR value at 95% maximum dry density (soaked) BS 1377 Part 4 (Method
7) not less than 30% MDD/OMC tested according to BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5
or 3.6).

A chemical analysis of the proposed material shall be carried out to satisfy the
following requirements:-

- The material shall be shown to have an acid soluble sulphate content of 2% or less
and a chloride content in the form of acid soluble chloride of 2% or less by dry
weight. The applicable Test methods should be in accordance with BS 1377 Part
3 (method 5) and BS 1377 Part 3 (Method 7) respectively.

When approved by the Engineer a sulphate content greater than that specified may
be acceptable when the carbonate content is in the region of 30-40% (BS 1377
Part 3 (method 6)).

Higher chloride contents may be tolerated provided that the ratio of (carbonate +
sulphate) to chloride contents is maintained at approximately 15:1.

The moisture content of the material before compaction shall not vary by more than
+/- 2% of the optimum moisture content when tested in accordance with BS 1377
: Part 2 Test 3.2.

The material shall possess satisfactory binding characteristics to enable it to be

compacted to give a smooth well-knit surface as judged by the Engineer.

2/13.5 No excavated suitable material shall be removed from the Site without the Engineer’s
written permission. Should the Contractor be permitted to remove suitable material from
the site to suit his operational requirements, then he shall make good any consequent
deficit or filling arising therefrom at his own expense.

2/14 MAIN PLANT FOR EARTHWORKS CONSTRUCTION

2/14.1 The Contractor shall employ only that plant which is suited to the soils to be handled. He
shall not at any time use plant which damages or reduces the natural strength of the soil
either in its in-situ state or during handling and placing or in its final compacted state.

January 2023 2-7 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Unsuitable or faulty plant shall be removed from the work site and borrow pits at the order
of the Engineer.

2/14.2 The Plant and equipment used for earthworks construction shall be maintained in good
working condition for the duration of the works. The Contractor shall apply adequate
quantities of plant and equipment necessary for the proper execution of the works in an
expeditious manner.

2/14.3 Main plant and equipment shall meet the requirements outlined in Clause 1/29 of these
Specifications.

2/15 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION

2/15/1 This work shall consist of constructing roadway embankment with suitable material,
including the preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed and the placing
and compacting of approved material within roadway areas where unsuitable material has
been removed. All operations will be performed in accordance with the Specifications and
in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross- sections shown on the
drawings or as established by the Engineer.

2/15.2 Compaction equipment shall conform to the number and type outlined in the Contractor’s
detailed programme of work as approved by the Engineer and satisfactory performance
shall be the basis for such approval.

2/15.3 All materials derived from excavation shall be used in the embankment unless otherwise
declare unsuitable by the Engineer.

2/15.4 Prior to the commencement of embankment the Contractor shall construct trial compaction
lengths as directed by the Engineer. The soils used in the trials shall be those encountered
along the line of the road as approved by the Engineer and/or those originating from the
approved borrow pit. The object of the trials is to determine the Field Compatibility of the
material with the plant and compaction equipment available with the Contractor. The
Engineer may order additional compaction trials when he deems them necessary.

2/15.5 During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct
construction traffic uniformly over the full width of the embankment. Damage to compacted
layers by construction traffic shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.

2/15.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments and shall replace
all sections which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been damaged or displaced due to
carelessness or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or due to natural causes, such as
storms, and not attributable to the unavoidable movement of the natural ground upon which
the embankment is made. During construction, the roadway shall be kept shaped and
drained at all times. When unsuitable material has been placed in the embankment, its
removal shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Throughout the duration of the Contract
all damage to completed earthworks attributable to rain and rainfall run-off or to any other
cause shall be made good by the Contractor without delay and whenever possible within
24 hours of such damage occurring.

January 2023 2-8 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/16 EMBANKMENT FOUNDATION

2/16.1 All debris, unsuitable material and vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface
upon which the embankment is to be placed and cleared surface shall be completely
broken up by ploughing, scarifying or stepping to a minimum depth of twenty (20)
centimetres.

2/16.2 The foundation material shall be adjusted to a moisture content within the moisture range
of +/- 3% of the optimum moisture content and compacted to not less than ninety-five (95)
percent of the Maximum Dry Density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5 or 3.6)
where the embankment is less than one and half (1.5m) metres below subgrade; and
compacted to not less than ninety (90) percent where the embankment is more than one
and half (1.5m) metres below the subgrade when tested in accordance with BS 1377 Part
9 (Method 2.1 or 2.2).

2/16.3 If the original surface upon which the embankment is to be placed is an old roadbed, the
surface shall be ploughed scarified or broken up, regardless of the height of the
embankment to be placed and compacted to a density as determined by the Engineer.

2/16.4 Where an embankment is to be placed on appreciably sloping ground, this surface shall be
benched in steps or trenched in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions, including if
necessary any under-training of the affected part of the site.

2/16.5 In circumstances where backfill has to be deposited below standing water. In such cases
the Contractor shall use only an approved granular material of maximum size not greater
than 37.5 mm and which when tested in accordance with BS 1377 Part 2 Test
9.2 or 9.3 or BS 812 Part 103 Section 103.1 (cl.7.2 or 7.3) complies with the requirements of Table
1 below. Such material shall have a ‘ten percent fines” value of not less than 5 tones when
tested in accordance with B.S. 812 Part 111 and may be deposited below water without
the associated use of compaction plant

Table-1 Free Draining Material

B.S. SIEVE SIZE % BY WEIGHT PASSING

20 mm 80 to 100
10 mm Up to 100
5 mm Not more than 85
0.600 mm Not more than 45
0.075 mm Not more than 5

2/17 PLACING AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

2/17.1 Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankments.

2/17.2 In the formation of the embankment it is strictly forbidden to push the excavated materials
from the side of the road to the embankment by means of bull dozers.

2/17.3 The fill material shall be delivered and spread in layers not exceeding 25 cm compacted
thickness. The layers of fill shall be graded, levelled, pulverized and mixed, with water
added as necessary, to ensure homogeneous conditions through the full depth of the
uncompacted layer. For field density testing refer to specification sub- section 2/19.

January 2023 2-9 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/17.4 The compacted density of the fill shall be equal to or greater than 95 (ninety-five) percent
of the Maximum Dry Density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5 or 3.6).

2/17.5 The material to be imported for the “improved subgrade layer” to be constructed above
“earthworks formation level” up to “top of improved subgrade” level as shown on the
drawings shall conform to the Specification Sub-Section 2/13 Para 4.

2/17.6 All slopes, lines and grades shall be true, correct, and accurate and according to those
shown on the Drawings or otherwise directed and approved by the Engineer. The
“earthworks formation level” in embankments shall be accurate to the authorized profile
grade to plus one (1) cm or minus two (2) centimeters and, the ‘top of improved subgrade’
level, plus or minus one (1) centimeter for 3 locations maximum each 100 m interval.
Selected material shall be placed wherever required. Where discrepancies are found in
the work the Contractor shall make necessary corrections in a manner approved by the
Engineer.

2/18 MOISTURE CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

2/18.1 When the moisture content of the embankment soil does not fall within +/- 3% of the
optimum moisture content, water shall be added and thoroughly mixed into the soil, by
approved methods or the material shall be aerated, wherever is needed to adjust the soil
to the proper moisture content.

2/18.2 The amount of water to be added shall be only that amount that will, as determined by the
Engineer by field tests, provide a moisture content in the soil within the required range plus
a reasonable amount to compensate for evaporation and other unavoidable losses. Water
added in excess of this amount shall be considered as excess water and must be removed
by aeration or other suitable means as directed by the Engineer. Satisfactory methods and
sufficient equipment shall be used for the furnishing and handling of the water so that there
will be no undue loss due to evaporation or waste. If water is added to cut areas or borrow
pits, the surface of the areas or pits shall be maintained in such a manner that will prevent
undue loss of moisture and segregation.

2/18.3 Use of saline water for earthworks will only be permitted if the percentage of water soluble
salts in the compacted fill does not exceed 5% by weight of dry soil when tested in
accordance with B.S. 1377 Part 3. Test No. 5 & 7 for (SO3 + Cl).

2/18.4 For subgrade material moisture range refer to sub-clause 2/13.4

2/19 TESTING METHODS

2/19.1 A dry density/moisture content relationship in accordance with BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5
or 3.6) will be made for each type of soil to be used in the construction of the work to
determine the Maximum Dry Density, the Optimum Moisture Content and the Moisture
Range required of the soil for satisfactory compaction. The Field Density and actual
Moisture Content of the compacted embankment shall be determined by field tests
according to BS 1377 Part 9 (method 2.1 or 2.2)

January 2023 2-10 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/20 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS

2/20.1 For the Contractor’s general guidance, the following tests will be required prior to use, and
during the construction of the embankment and of the subgrade.

EMBANKMENT
2/20.2 Soil samples for Soil classification according to BS 1377 : Part 1, Part 2 and Part 4,
laboratory moisture/density relationship tests and California Bearing Ratio shall be taken
prior to use, from any proposed source of material. Each sample shall represent not more
than 5,000 Cu.m. or part of as directed by the Engineer. Sampling shall be in accordance
with ASTM D75 : 2003, Or BS 5930 : 1999. For minimum test requirements and frequencies
please refer to “Table 1-4 in Vol.2 Part 2 – Specifications”.

2/20.3 For every completed layer of fill at least three field density tests shall be performed for every
unit of carriageway. (One unit being 2250 sq.m)

2/20.4 The Contractor shall carry out any additional compaction tests as ordered by the Engineer
at no additional cost.

IMPROVED SUBGRADE
2/20.5 Samples for Soil classification, laboratory moisture density relationship tests and CBR tests
shall be taken prior to use, from any proposed source of material. Each sample shall
represent not more than 3,000 Cu.m or as directed by the Engineer.

2/20.6 For every completed layer of subgrade, three field density tests shall be performed on each
unit of carriageway. (One unit being 1500 sq.m.)

2/20.7 The frequency of field compaction tests on the shoulders shall be three every unit
constructed or as directed by the Engineer. (One unit being 1500 sq.m.)

ROCKFILL
2/20.8 Where embankments to be compacted are formed of material consisting predominantly of
rock fragments of such size that the material cannot be placed in layers of the thickness
prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces resulting from
normal excavation methods, the material may be placed in the embankment in layers not
exceeding a thickness twice the average size of the larger rocks, except that no layer shall
exceed 600 mm of loose measurement.

Materials shall be carefully placed so that all large stones will be well distributed and the
voids completely filled with smaller earth, sand or gravel to form a solid embankment. Each
layer shall be bladed or levelled with motor grader, bull dozer or similar equipment capable
of shifting and forming the layer into a neat the orderly condition. No rocks larger than eighty
(80) mm in any dimension shall be placed in the top one hundred and fifty (150) mm of the
embankment unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Conformance to these provisions
and compaction in a manner and to a point of consolidation approved by the Engineer will
be considered as fulfilment of the requirements for the type of compaction shown on the
drawings. Normally, compaction tests will not be performed in these areas but the Engineer
reserves the right to test compaction in some other manner if he deems a test necessary
to ensure consolidation. Each layer must be approved by the Engineer before the next layer
is placed.

Embankments, which are formed of materials that contain rock but also sufficient
compatible material other than rock or other hard material to make rolling feasible, shall be
placed and compacted in the manner and to the point of consolidation approved by the
Engineer. Moisture shall be added as directed by the Engineer. Compaction tests will be

January 2023 2-11 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

made wherever the Engineer determines they are feasible and necessary. Each layer must
be approved by the Engineer before the next layer is placed.

2/21 STABILISING CRUSHED MATERIAL

2/21.1 In the event the foundation on which the embankment or the subgrade materials will be laid
is saturated by water and unstable, the Engineer may decide to lay

crushed granular material to stabilize the foundation. Stabilizing crushed material shall not be laid
directly on ground soil but it shall always be laid on geotextile fabric covering the area to
be stabilized as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.

2/21.2 Such stabilizing crushed material when tested in accordance with BS 812: Part 103:
Section 103.1: (cl.7.2 or 7.3), Or BS 1377 P.2 method 9.2 or 9.3, 1985 and 1989 shall have
the following gradation:-

BS TEST % PASSING
Sieve (mm)
50.0 100
25.0 80 - 100
14.0 60 - 85
5.0 40 - 70
2.0 20 - 50
0.85 5 - 25
0.425 0 - 10
0.180 0-2

2/21.3 The stabilizing crushed material shall have the following characteristics:-

- Los Angeles Abrasion - Not more than 30% loss

(ASTM C-131 or
ASTM c-535)

- Bulk Specific Gravity - Not less than 2.65

(ASTM C-127 and C-128)

- Absorption - Not more than 2.0%

(ASTM C-127 and C-128)

2/21.4 The stabilizing crushed material will be laid in layers of 15 cm and compacted until the
foundation is fully stabilized such that the total thickness of the stabilizing layer shall not be
less than 30 cm. Only after inspection and approval by the Engineer the Contractor may be
allowed to continue the construction of the embankment with other layers of embankment
material and/or subgrade material. The Engineer may decide, after having taken the levels
of the existing water table in the area, and keeping in consideration the finished roads
levels, to excavate portions of the foundation saturated by water, disposing of the
excavated materials, and replacing it with stabilizing crushed material.

2/21.5 Before starting any stabilizing of the foundation of the Engineer will instruct the Contractor
specifying the areas to be stabilized and the final levels to be reached with the stabilizing
crushed material.

January 2023 2-12 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2/22 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

2/22.1 In areas where the Engineer deems the use of geotextile fabric necessary, the Contractor
shall furnish the place geotextile fabric as specified and as directed by the Engineer.

2/22.2 The geotextile fabric furnished by the Contractor shall be of an approved grade suitable for
placement over fine sand. The geotextile fabric shall be a woven or non-woven fabric
consisting only of long chain polymeric filaments or yarns formed into a stable network such
that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other. The fabric shall be
stabilized against ultra violet light, inert to commonly uncounted chemicals and chemicals
properties of the in-situ soil and water, and it shall conform to the following minimum
requirements:

Weight ASTM, D 5261 - 135g/m2

Thickness under load (2KN/sq.m) ASTM D 5261 - 0.7mm

Tensile Strength (200mm width) ASTM D1682 - 1.6KN

Puncture Resilience (DIN 54307) - 1.5KN

Permeability BS 6906 Part 3 - 50 L/sq.m/s.

2/22.3 The surface to receive the geotextile fabric shall be prepared to a relatively smooth
condition free of obtrusions, depressions, and debris. The geotextile fabric shall not be laid
in a stretched condition, but shall be laid loosely with the long dimension parallel to the
centerline of the roadway. In the event that the width of the proposed area for fabric requires
more than one panel width of fabric, the panels shall be overlapped a minimum 15 percent
of the panel width. Longitudinal joints in the fabric shall have an overlap of 50cm. To prevent
slippage of the overlapping fabric, the areas of overlap shall be stabilized as approved by
the Engineer with pins, anchor blocks, or aggregate piles. In the event construction
machinery is used to place the fabric, the working platform for the machinery shall be the
soil and not the previously laid fabric.

2/22.4 Prior to placement of the granular material (Stabilizing crushed material) the Contractor
shall spread a layer of sand over the geotextile fabric as directed by the Engineer. The
aggregate material shall not be dumped directly on the fabric, nor shall haul trucks be run
on the fabric. The aggregate shall be spread by a wheeled front-end loader.

The blade or bucket shall be kept sufficiently high so that the aggregate is not being pulled
over the fabric, but being dropped at a minimum height to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2/22.5 Fabric damaged or displaced before or during installation or during placement of overlaying
aggregate material shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractor’s expense.

2/23 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

2/23.1 This work shall consist of all excavation for structures, culverts, headwalls, catch basins,
manholes, inlets, and retaining walls and shall include all necessary clearing and grubbing,
all necessary bailing, drainage, pumping, sheeting, strutting and the construction of coffer
dams or cribs, if found necessary, and their subsequent removal; also the disposal of all
material obtained from such excavation and backfilling to the level of the original ground; it

January 2023 2-13 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

shall include the removal of that portion of existing structures below the ground which is
necessitated by the construction of the new structure.

2/23.2 Prior to commencing any structural excavation work 1.5 meters or more in depth, the
Contractor shall design and submit to the Engineer for review and approval, within a
minimum period of 1 week before the intended commencement date, detailed working
drawings of the structural excavation support member materials, sizes, spacing and
engineering calculations to validate their design, including the maximum theoretical
deflections of the support members. The system shall be designed in such a manner that
no raker struts or any other support members extend through surfaces exposed in the
finished construction, and no shoring or bracing is placed under permanent structures.

2/23.3 The engineering calculations shall show lateral earth pressure for the full excavation
depths, forces at various stages of support during installation and removal and concrete
placement, the anticipated equipment loads, surcharge loads of any description, the
maximum design loads to be carried by various members of the support system and strut
preload forces.

2/23.4 If the structure support system proposed includes tieback anchors, the Contractor’s
submittal drawings shall show the profile of the soil in which each anchor is to be installed,
the design load for the full depth of the excavation, the maximum design and proof loads,
surcharge loads of any description; equipment loads, forces at various stages, support
during installation and removal, and the criteria proposed for deformation under proof loads.
Where a proposed system of tieback anchors projects beyond the vertical projection of the
Contract limit lines shown on the Drawings on to the adjoining property, the permission of
the owner shall be obtained in writing and such permission submitted to the Engineer at
the time the shop drawings of the support systems are submitted.

2/23.5 At locations where the excavation extends below the ground water table, a dewatering
system shall be provided which will effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower
the ground water levels below excavation levels, as required for the safe and proper
execution of the work and which will result in obtaining a stable, dry subgrade for the
execution of subsequent operations. The Contractor shall design dewatering methods and
settling basins so that no critical amounts of soil, sand or silt are removed during either the
initial operations or the construction operations. Complete working drawings showing the
type of dewatering and ground water control system proposed shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his review.

2/23.6 The Contractor’s submittal drawings shall show the arrangement, location and depths of
the proposed dewatering system if required. A complete description of the equipment and
materials to be used and the procedures to be followed shall be shown, together with the
standby equipment, standby power supply and the proposed location or locations of points
of discharge of water. Any required dewatering system design shall also include the
measures taken to prevent damage due to settlement of pavement, utilities, sewers,
buildings and other structures outside the excavation but within the area affected by the
procedures.

2/23.7 The designs of the structure excavation support system and the dewatering systems
specified above shall be prepared by and signed by a Professional Engineer approved by
the Engineer specializing in this type of design work. Approval of the designs and shop
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the adequacy and performance of these
temporary works.

2/23.8 Pre-Construction Inspection-prior to the beginning of construction, the Contractor and the
Engineer shall make a detailed inspection of all adjacent buildings, pavements, wells and

January 2023 2-14 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

other structures in order to determine its pre-construction condition and the Contractor shall
prepare, for the Engineer’s approval, a typed Inspection report of the findings.

2/23.9 The Report shall include photographs, drawings and sketches with levels and dimensions
illustrating the structures condition, noting in particular any existing damage or structural
inadequacy. Deficiencies and damage shall be suitably marked on the structure such that
it is not permanently defaced.

2/23.10 Three copies of the Report shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer. Once
approved, five additional copies shall be supplied to the Engineer.

2/23.11 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any
excavation so that cross-sectional elevations and measurements may be taken of the
undisturbed ground. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed
without the permission of the Engineer.

2/23.12 Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure footings shall be excavated to the
lines and grades or elevations shown on the drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer. They
shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of structures or structure footings of the full
width and length shown. The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the
Drawing shall be considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order, in writing,
such changes in dimensions of elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary, to
ensure a satisfactory foundation.

2/23.13 Unless otherwise provided for in the Drawings or Contract Documents or directed by the
Engineer structural excavation shall be carried out for a width of at least 500mm beyond
the horizontal outside limits of the foundation, footing, box culvert or structural member to
which the excavation relates. Concrete blinding or sub-foundations are not to be considered
as structure for the purpose of defining such excavation.

2/23.14 If during the progress of the work, loose or improperly compacted soil is encountered below
the structural foundation levels, or adjacent thereof, which is the result of prior removal of
utilities or structures, such material shall be completely removed within the limits as directed
by the Engineer, backfilled with suitable material and compacted to not less than 95% of
the maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5 or 3.6). Any
previous excavations encountered which would in the opinion of the Engineer be
detrimental to load distribution of new foundations to the underlaying soil, shall be
excavated and backfilled with Class 25 concrete (Clause 4/15).

2/23.15 After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, for approval
of the depth of excavation and the character of the material, prior to further structural works.
Any over excavation shall be backfilled with Class 25 concrete (Clause 4/15) at the
Contractors expense.

2/23.16 All rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of all loose material and cut to a
firm surface, either level, stepped, or serrated as directed by the Engineer. All seams or
crevices shall be cleaned and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall
be removed.

When the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final grade shall not
be made until just before the footing is to be placed and special care shall be taken not to
disturb the excavation.

When the foundation material is soft or otherwise unsuitable as determined by the

Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and backfill with approved
granular material. This foundation fill shall be placed and compacted in 150mm layers up

January 2023 2-15 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

to the foundation elevation and compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density
as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5 or 3.6)
The placing of concrete shall follow as closely as practicable the structural excavation.

2/23.17 Control of Ground Water: Prior to the commencement of construction at any particular
location, the Contractor shall install and maintain a system of standpipes and other devices
to monitor ground water level in any area which in the opinion of the Engineer is likely to
be affected by the dewatering. The number, location and depth of all standpipes shall be
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

- The Contractor shall check ground water levels at weekly or where instructed by
the Engineer, more frequent intervals and submit within 24 hours written reports to
the Engineer in a form to be agreed.

- In the case of uncontrolled flow of water into any excavation, the Engineer reserves
the right to order an immediate cessation of work and to order the Contractor to
take immediate action to control the inflow of water. Such actions and remedial
works shall be to the Engineer’s approval.

2/23.18 Notification of Damage: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any
movement or any damage not noted in the pre-construction report, to any structure. The
Contractor shall immediately cease his construction operations in the vicinity and shall take
immediate action to prevent further movement or damage. The Contractor shall keep the
Engineer fully informed of such action.

2/23.19 Remedial and Preventive Works: Should remedial works be necessary due to damage
caused to the structure or should the Engineer direct the Contractor to carry out any works
necessary to prevent damage to the structure due to the Contractor’s construction works,
the Contractor will present, without delay, detailed drawings and specifications, as
necessary, showing his proposed remedial or preventive works for the Engineer’s approval.

In either case the Contractor will suspend all construction activities in the vicinity of the
structure until such time as the remedial or preventive works are carried out to the
Engineer’s satisfaction at the Contractor’s expense.

2/23.20 Post Construction Inspection: On completion of, but prior to final acceptance of the
works, the Contractor and the Engineer shall re-examine the structure to determine any
change from the original conditions. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for
approval five copies of a report describing measures he proposes to take to correct any
damage which resulted from the construction of the works. The approved corrective
measures shall be carried out by the Contractor at his expense, to the Engineer’s
satisfaction before final acceptance of the works.

2/23.21 Utilization of Excavated Materials: All excavated material determined as suitable by the
Engineer, shall be utilized as backfill or roadway fill. The surplus material, shall be disposed
of as specified in sub-section 2/8 para 2. Excavated material shall not be deposited, at any
time, so as to endanger the partly finished structure or cause an obstruction of any kind. All
unsuitable material shall be disposed-off to approved tips.

2/23.22 Backfill: Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with excavated materials
or imported granular material approved by the Engineer. Backfill materials shall be placed
in horizontal layers not exceeding 150mm in depth after compaction to not less than 95%
of the maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (Method 3.5 or 3.6). The field
density shall be determined by BS 1377 1990 Part 9 (Method 2.1 or 2.2). Each layer of
material shall be moistened or dried as required to enable thorough compaction as

January 2023 2-16 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

specified. Backfill shall be placed to the original ground level or as indicated on the
drawings.

2/23.23 Backfill or embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of concrete structures or rigid
frame structures until the top slab is placed and cured. Backfill and embankment behind
abutments when held at the top of the superstructure shall be carried up simultaneously
behind opposite abutments. Backfill shall be carried up equally on either sides of box
culverts.

2/23.24 For frequency of testing of backfill material refer to sub-section 2/20.

January 2023 2-17 Section 2 – Site Clearance & Earthworks

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 3

Pavement Construction

January 2023 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

3/1 SOURCE OF AGGREGATES FOR PAVING LAYERS

3/2 TESTING OF AGGREGATES
3/3 APPROVAL AND INSPECTION OF AGGREGATES
3/4 STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
3/5 TIDYING-UP OF QUARRY AREA
3/6 GRANULAR SUB-BASE
3/7 AGGREGATE ROADBASE DESCRIPTION
3/8 AGGREGATE ROADBASE MATERIAL
3/9 SPREADING AGGREGATE ROADBASE
3/10 COMPACTION OF AGGREGATE ROADBASE
3/11 COMPACTION TRIALS FOR AGGREGATE ROADBASE
3/12 FINISHING OF AGGREGATE ROADBASE
3/13 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENT FOR AGGREGATE ROADBASE
3/14 WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE, DESCRIPTION
3/15 WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE MATERIAL
3/16 TRANSPORT AND SPREADING WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE
3/17 COMPACTION TRIALS OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE
3/18 COMPACTION OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE
3/19 FINISHING OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE
3/20 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE
3/21 BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES, DESCRIPTION
3/22 COARSE AGGREGATES FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE
3/23 FINE AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE
3/24 MINERAL FILLER FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE
3/25 COMBINED AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES
3/26 BITUMEN BINDER
3/27 JOB MIX FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES
3/28 EQUIPMENT FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING OPERATIONS
3/29 PREPARATION OF BITUMEN BINDER
3/30 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS MIX
3/31 PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MIX

January 2023 Section 3 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

3/32 SURFACE PREPARATION

3/33 PLACING OF THE MIX
3/34 PRELIMINARY SURVEY AND REFERENCE STRING LINE
3/35 BITUMINOUS LEVELLING COURSE
3/36 THICKNESS CORES
3/37 COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS LAYERS
3/38 RE-ROLLING OF BITUMINOUS COURSES
3/39 CONTACT SURFACES
3/40 JOINTS IN BITUMINOUS PAVING
3/41 PROTECTION OF COMPACTED LAYER
3/42 COMPACTION TRIALS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES
3/43 SURFACE TOLERANCE FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES
3/44 TOLERANCE IN BITUMINOUS PAVING THICKNESS
3/45 COMPACTION SAMPLING AND TESTING OF BITUMINOUS COURSES
3/46 WEATHER LIMITATIONS FOR PAVING OPERATIONS
3/47 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES
3/48 BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT
3/49 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT
3/50 APPLICATION AND HEATING EQUIPMENT FOR LIQUID ASPHALT
3/51 DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT, DESCRIPTION
3/52 MATERIALS FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
3/53 EQUIPMENT FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
3/54 PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE
TREATMENT
3/55 APPLICATION OF DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
3/56 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES FROM BITUMEN SPLASHING

January 2023 Section 3 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 3 – PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

3/1 SOURCE OF AGGREGATES FOR PAVING LAYERS

3/1.1 All aggregates for use in the construction of the Pavement Layers shall be obtained only
from sources approved by the Engineer.

3.1.2 The Contractor shall have determined the location, suitability and quantity of material
available before tendering as well as the cost and the amount of work required to extract,
crush, screen and clean the material and the length of haul to the job site.

3/1.3 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer, within thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled
beginning of the crushing and screening operations, with a complete report on the origin
and composition of all stone and/or gravel aggregates to be used in the Work (Aggregate
Resources Report). All materials shall comply with the specified requirements for the
various aggregates.

3/1.4 The source and manufacture of the aggregates which will meet the requirements of the
Specification is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. It is also the Contractor’s sole
responsibility to manufacture such aggregates at the rates and in the quantities required to
complete the work within the specified Contract Period.

3/1.5 The approval of the Contractor’s crushing and screening plant equipment by the Engineer
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of producing aggregates which
meet the Specifications and in the quantities required for the completion of the work within
the specified Contract Period.

3/1.6 No aggregate producing equipment shall be put into operation prior to the approval of the
equipment by the Engineer. If after the equipment is put into operation it fails to perform as
proposed, the Contractor shall provide additional equipment or replace the original
equipment with more suitable equipment, as may be directed by the Engineer.

3/1.7 The Contractor shall commence crushing and screening of aggregate immediately after the
Contractor receives approval of his aggregate sources.

3/2 TESTING OF AGGREGATES

3/2.1 Testing to ascertain the properties of all aggregate materials shall be carried out in
accordance with Clause 1/7.

3/3 APPROVAL AND INSPECTION OF AGGREGATES

3/3.1 All sources of aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the processing of
material from such sources. An individual source of aggregate is deemed to be a particular
location within a quarry or borrow pit where material of a constant specific gravity is
obtained (with possible variation due to minor changes in characteristics of rock). Test
certificates obtained by the Contractor or test performed by the Contractor at his expense
are intended to assist him in his estimate of the location, extent and quantities which will

January 2023 3-1 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

comply with the Specifications, when properly processed, and will in no way obviate the
need for future testing by the Engineer.

3/3.2 Only materials from approved sources shall be processed for incorporation into the work.
Approval of specific sources of materials shall not be considered as final approval and
acceptance of materials from such sources. The presence of weathered materials
discovered in the quarry areas shall be a cause of rejection of the source of materials.

3/3.3 After having received approval of specific sources of material the Contractor cannot change
these without prior written approval of the Engineer.

3/3.4 All processed materials shall be tested and approved before being stored on the site or
incorporated in the works and may be inspected and tested at any time during the progress
of their preparation and use. Questionable materials, pending laboratory testing and
subsequent approval shall not be unloaded and incorporated with materials previously
approved and accepted.

3/3.5 If the grading and quality of the material delivered to the site does not conform to the
grading and quality as previously inspected and tested, or does not comply with the
Specifications, the Engineer reserves the right to reject such material at the site of the work.

3/3.6 Samples must meet all test requirements as specified under the Specifications. The
Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect any and all material used or to be used, at
any time during or after its preparation, or while being used during the process of the work
or after the work has been completed. All such materials not complying with the required
specifications, whether in place or not, shall be rejected and shall be removed promptly
from the work. The Contractor shall supply or arrange with any producers or manufacturers
to supply, all necessary material, labour, tools and equipment for such inspection.

3/4 STORAGE OF AGGREGATES

3/4.1 The stockpile site shall be prepared by clearing and smoothing and must be approved by
the Engineer. Prior to any stockpiling of aggregates, cross-sections of the stockpile site
shall be taken and control points established for use in determining the quantity of
subsequently stockpiled material.

3/4.2 The equipment and methods used for stockpiling aggregates and for removing aggregates
from the stockpiles must be approved by the Engineer and shall be such that no
segregation of the aggregate will result and no foreign material will contaminate the
aggregate.

3/4.3 Material shall be stored in a manner that will ensure preservation of their specified quality
and fitness for the work. They shall be placed on hard, clean surfaces and, when required
by the Engineer they shall be placed under cover. Stored materials shall be located in such
a manner to facilitate prompt inspection and control. Private property shall not be used for
storage purposes without written consent of the owner or lessee and payment to him, if
necessary, at the Contractor’s expense.

3/4.4 The centre of the storage area shall be elevated and sloped to the sides in order to provide
proper drainage of excess moisture. The material shall be stored in such a way to prevent
segregation and to allow proper control of moisture. Aggregate stockpiles shall be built up
in layers not exceeding one (1) metre. The height of each stockpile, shall be limited to a
maximum of five (5) metres.

January 2023 3-2 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/4.5 Sufficient material must be stored in stockpiles to allow for testing and approval of such
materials prior to use in the works.

3/5 TIDYING-UP OF QUARRY AREA

3/5.1 The Contractor shall tidy-up the quarry areas on completion and ensure that side-slopes
are not steeper than 1 to 2 and in a condition acceptable to the Employer and to the
Engineer.

3/6 GRANULAR SUB-BASE

3/6.1 Description: Granular sub-base shall consist of furnishing, spreading, and compacting
sub-base in accordance with the details shown on drawings and these Specifications.

3/6.2 Materials: Granular sub-base material for Road sub-base shall consist of hard, durable
natural/screened gravel or crushed stone, and shall be free from clay balls or other
deleterious substances. Granular sub-base shall be well graded and lie within the grading
envelope stated below when tested in accordance with BS 1377:Part 2:Test 9.2. The
material should have a minimum C.B.R of 30% at 95% of maximum dry density and should
comply with Clause 3/6.4. Organic matters (BS 1377 Part 3 Method 3) shall not exceed
0.2%.

SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE PASSING

63 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
9.5 mm 40 - 85
4.75 mm 25 - 45
0.6 mm 8 - 25
0.063 mm 0 - 10

3/6.3 Construction: Road sub-base material shall be delivered to the roadbed as uniform
mixture and shall be spread in layers or windrows. Segregation shall be avoided and the
sub- base shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine materials.

Each road sub-base layer shall be spread by finisher and or grader or other approved
mechanical methods, watered, shaped to a compacted thickness not exceeding 150 mm
and compacted to the required grade and cross-section.

The compaction procedure and plant shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. At the
time of compaction, the moisture content of the laid material shall not vary by more than +/-
2% from the optimum moisture content.

The granular sub-base shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum density
determined in accordance with BS 1377 Part 4 Method 3.6. Particle size analysis of soils
for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate shall be carried out in accordance with BS
1377: Part 2: Test 9.2. The surface on completion of compaction shall be well closed, free
from movement under compaction plant and free from ridges cracks or loose material. The
finished surfaces of the road sub-base shall not vary at any point more than 10 mm above

January 2023 3-3 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

or below the grade established by the Engineer. The road sub-base shall be maintained in
a condition satisfactory to receive any subsequent base or surfacing material. Sub-base
which does not conform to the above requirements shall be reshaped or reworked, watered
and thoroughly recompacted to conform to the specified requirements.

3/6.4 Relevant Test and Standards: The following tests should be carried out and the material
shall conform with the requirements stated:

TEST STANDARD LIMIT

Sampling ASTM D75-2003 ---

Los Angeles Abrasion ASTM C-131 or C-535 30% max.
Soundness (Magnesium ASTM C-88 12% max.
Sulphate Solution) 5 cycles
Liquid Limit BS 1377:Part 2: 1990 Test 4 25% max.
Plasticity Index BS 1377:Part 2: 1990 Test 5 6 max.
Max Dry Density and optimum BS 1377 Part 4 Method 3.5 or 2.10
moisture content 3.6 Mg/m3
min.
C.B.R at 95% of Max. Dry
Density by BS 1377 Part 4 BS 1377 Part 4 Test 7 30% min.
(method 3.6) (96 hour soaked)
Field Density BS 1377:Part 9 Test 2.2 95% min.
MDD
Linear Shrinkage BS 1377:Part 2 Method 6.5 3% max.
Sulphate Content BS 812: Part 118 0.5% max.
(Acid Soluble)
Chloride Content BS 812 1% max.
(Acid Soluble) Part 117

3/6.5 Minimum Test Requirements

One sample every 3,000 cu.m or part of as directed by the Engineer shall be tested for
Grading, Plasticity Index, Maximum Dry Density, CBR and Loss by Abrasion. Three in-situ
Density test shall be made every unit of granular sub-base laid (One unit being 1,500 sq.m.)
or as directed by the Engineer. For minimum test requirements and frequencies please
refer to “Table 1-4 in Vol.2 Part 2 – Specifications”.

3/7 AGGREGATE ROADBASE DESCRIPTION

3/7.1 This work shall consist of furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate,
including binder soil if required, on a prepared subgrade or sub-base in accordance with
sub- section 3/8 to 3/13 of the Specifications, in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness
and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer.

January 2023 3-4 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/8 AGGREGATE ROADBASE MATERIAL

3/8.1 All aggregate roadbase material shall be free from dirt, shale or other deleterious matter
and shall be of such quality that it will bind readily to form a stable aggregate roadbase.

Aggregate roadbase shall consist of uniform mixtures of gravel and/or crushed gravel with
sand, silt and clay, conforming to the specified gradation limits.

3/8.2 The requirements for aggregate roadbase are:-

Liquid Limit BS 1377 : Part 2 : Test 4.5 25% maximum

Plasticity Index BS 1377 : Part 2 : Test 5 6 maximum
Sand Equivalent ASTM D-2419 40 minimum
Loss by Abrasion ASTM C-131 or C-535 30% maximum
Flakiness Index (BS812 Part 105 Section105.1) 35 maximum
(Coarse Aggregate)
Elongation Index (BS812 Part 105 Section 105.2) 35 maximum
(Coarse Aggregate)
Soundness (ASTM C-88) 12% maximum
(Magnesium Sulphate 5 cycles)
Organic matter content (BS1377 0.2% maximum
Part 3 Method 3)
Acid Soluble Chlorides (BS812 Part 117) 1% maximum
(Combined Aggregate)
Acid Soluble Sulphate (BS EN 1744-1 : 1998) 0.5% maximum
(Combined Aggregate)
Maximum Dry Density 2.20 Mg/m3 minimum
BS 1377 : Part 4 : Test 3.6
CBR on Remoulded Samples after 80% minimum
4 days soaking at 100% of the
maximum dry density
(BS 1377 : Part 4 : Test 7)
Water absorption tests 2.3% maximum
ASTM C128/127 2.0% maximum

Sampling method to be in accordance with ASTM D75-2003.

3/8.3 The gradation limits when tested in accordance with BS 1377 : Part 2 : Test 9.2 shall be as
follows:-

50 mm 100
37.5 mm 70 – 100
28 mm 55 – 85
20 mm 50 – 80
10 mm 40 – 70
5 mm 30 – 60
2.36 mm 20 – 50
0.425 mm 10 – 30
0.063 mm 5 – 15

January 2023 3-5 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/9 SPREADING AGGREGATE ROADBASE

3/9.1 Aggregate roadbase shall be spread on subgrade or sub-base which has been approved
by the Engineer. Aggregate roadbase which has been placed on a subgrade or sub-base
not approved by the Engineer shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.

The material shall be spread using a paving machine or spread box operated with a
mechanism which levels off the material at an even depth and without delay. If necessary,
the material may be a spread with the grader as and when approved the Engineer.

3/9.2 Aggregate roadbase shall be spread on the approved subgrade in layers not exceeding
fifteen (15) centimeters in compacted depth.

3/9.3 The material shall be handled in a manner which avoids segregation. Segregated materials
shall be remixed until uniform. Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent rutting of the
subgrade or sub-base during the spreading of aggregate road base materials. No hauling
or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the
weather or road conditions are such that the hauling operations will cause cutting or rutting
of the subgrade or cause contamination of aggregate roadbase material.

3/10 COMPACTION OF AGGREGATE ROADBASE

3/10.1 The moisture content of the aggregate roadbase material shall be adjusted prior to
compaction, by watering with approved sprinkler trucks or by drying out, as directed by the
Engineer, to that required to obtain the specified density for aggregate roadbase.
Aggregate roadbase shall be compacted to One Hundred (100%) percent of the maximum
dry density, as determined according to BS 1377 : Part 4 : Test 3.6 at a moisture content
between +/- 1.5% of the O.M.C. The field density and actual moisture content shall be
determined according to BS 1377 : Part 9 : Test 2.2. Water used in mixing and compacting
road base material shall contain not more than 500 ppm of chloride expressed as CL. when
tested in accordance with ASTM D-512.

3/10.2 The aggregate roadbase shall be compacted by means of approved compaction equipment
progressing gradually from the outside of the road towards the centre with each succeeding
pass uniformly overlapping the previous pass. Rolling shall continue until the entire
thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density.
Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient blading in a manner approved by the Engineer,
to ensure a smooth surface free from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and
crown.

3/10.3 The surface of the material shall on completion of compaction be well closed, free from
movement under the compaction plant and free from compaction planes, ridges, cracks, or
loose material.

3/10.4 Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by means of
mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained.

3/10.5 The Contractor shall program his operations to avoid the drying out of the sub-base during
construction. If any layer of aggregate roadbase material, or part thereof, is permitted to
dry out after compaction, or does not conform to the required density or finish, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, rework, water and recompact the material, as directed
by the Engineer, to the density specified, before the next layer of aggregate roadbase or
subsequent pavement layers is placed.

January 2023 3-6 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/11 COMPACTION TRIALS FOR AGGREGATE ROADBASE

3/11.1 If directed by the Engineer, prior to the commencement of the aggregate roadbase
operations, the Contractor shall construct trial lengths not to exceed 250 meters. The
materials used in the trials shall be those approved for use as aggregate roadbase, and
the equipment used shall be that according to the Contractor’s approved detailed program
of work.

3/11.2 Trial lengths may not form part of the permanent works but may be permitted in the
construction of temporary detours of sufficient length.

3/11.3 The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor’s equipment, the
loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified compact layers depths, the
field moisture content, and the relationship between the number of compaction passes and
the resulting density of the material.

3/11.4 The Contractor may proceed with the aggregate roadbase work only after the methods and
procedures established in the compaction trials have been approved by the Engineer.

3/12 FINISHING OF AGGREGATE ROADBASE

3/12.1 Immediately prior to the placing of the first layer of the next pavement course on to the
aggregate roadbase the final layer of aggregate roadbase shall be at the specified density
and to the required grade and section. In order to maintain these requirements while placing
the next course it may be necessary mechanically sweep or cleaned with compressed air
to remove the loose material and if necessary to water and reshape the surface of the
aggregate roadbase. This work shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

3/12.2 The surface of the finished aggregate roadbase will be tested with a three (3) metre
straightedge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variations of the surface from the
testing edge of the straight edge between any two (2) contacts with the surface shall at no
point exceed twelve (12) millimeters when placed on or parallel to the centreline, or twelve
(12) millimeters when placed perpendicular to the centreline of the roadway. The aggregate
cross section as shown on the drawings and shall not vary by more than ten (10) millimeters
from the required elevation. All humps and depressions and thickness deficiencies
exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected by removing the defective work or by
adding new material as directed by the Engineer.

3/13 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENT FOR AGGREGATE ROADBASE

3/13.1 One sample every 1,000 cu.m or part of as directed by the Engineer shall be tested for
Grading Plasticity Index, Sand Equivalent, Maximum Dry Density, C.B.R and Loss by
Abrasion. Three in-situ Density tests shall be made per unit (900 sq.m) of aggregate road
base laid or as directed by the Engineer. For minimum test requirements and frequencies
please refer to “Table 1-4 in Vol.2 Part 2 – Specifications”.

January 2023 3-7 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/14 WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE, DESCRIPTION

3/14.1 This work shall consist of furnishing and placing one or more courses of high quality
crushed aggregate, bound by means of carefully controlled moisture content, on the
prepared subgrade or sub-base in conformity to the line, level and thickness shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

3/15 WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE MATERIAL

3/15.1 The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed rock (each particle shall have a minimum of
one crushed face - DM DCLD Test Method DMS-8) and the fine aggregate shall be crushed
rock or naturally occurring material. The aggregate shall conform to the following gradation:

SIEVE SIZE (BS) PERCENT PASSING

50 mm 100
37.5 mm 95 – 100
20 mm 60 – 80
10 mm 40 – 60
5 mm 25 – 40
2.36 mm 15 – 30
0.6 mm 8 – 22
0.063 mm 2–8

The particle size shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of BS 1377 Part
2 (Method 9.2 or 9.3).

3.15.2 The gradation shall be adjusted as required or as directed by the Engineer within the above
limits to ensure the mix has adequate binding properties.

3/15.3 Wet-mix road-base material as a combined aggregate mix shall have physical properties
which do not exceed the following values;

Liquid Limit BS 1377 : Part 2 : Test 4.5 25%

Linear Shrinkage (BS 1377 Part 2 Method 6.5) 3%
Plasticity Index BS 1377 : Part 2 : Test 5 6
Aggregate Crushing Value (BS 812 Part 110) 25%
Water Absorption (ASTM C128/C127) 2.0% max.
Flakiness Index (BS 812 Part 105 Section 105.1) 30
Elongation Index (BS 812 Part 105 Section 105.2) 30
Los Angeles Abrasion Loss 30%
(ASTM C-131 or C-535)
Soundness Loss (ASTM C88) 5 cycles 12%
(Magnesium Sulphate)
Organic matter content (BS 1377 Part 3 Method 3) 0.2%
Chloride Content (Acid Soluble) 1% max.
BS 812 Part 117
Sulphate Content (Acid Soluble) 0.5% max.
BS EN 1744-1 : 1998

January 2023 3-8 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Dry density/moisture content relationship as per BS 2.30Mg/m3

1377: Part 4 : Test 3.7 minimum

The sand equivalent shall not be less than 45 (ASTM D-2419). For water absorption test
shall be ASTM C128 and ASTM C127. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D75-
2003.

3/15.4 The moisture content of the wet-mix macadam at the time of laying shall be the optimum
+/- 1%. Water required to achieve this moisture content shall be added at the mixing plant.
Moisture determination shall be in accordance with BS 1377: Part 2 : Test 3.2.

3/16 TRANSPORT AND SPREADING WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE

3/16.1 Transport vehicles carrying the plant mixed material shall have a capacity suited to the
output of the mixing plant and the site conditions and be capable of discharging cleanly.
Material when mixed shall be removed at once from the mixer transported directly to the
point where it is to be laid and protected from the weather both during transit from the mixer
to the laying site and whilst awaiting tipping.

3/16.2 The material shall be placed and spread evenly. The material shall be spread using a
paving machine or spreader box operated with a mechanism which levels off the material
at an even depth and without delay. Except where otherwise specified, the material shall
be laid and compacted in layers of maximum thickness of 150 mm.

3/17 COMPACTION TRIALS OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE

3/17.1 If directed by the Engineer, prior to the commencement of the Wet-mix Macadam
Roadbase operations, the contractor shall construct trial lengths, not to exceed 250 metres.
The materials used in the trials shall be those approved for use as Wet-mix Macadam
Roadbase and the equipment used shall be that according to the Contractor’s approved
detailed programme of work.

3/17.2 Trial lengths may not form part of the permanent works but may be permitted in the
construction of temporary detours of sufficient length.

3/17.3 The objective of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor’s equipment,
the loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified compacted layer depths,
the field moisture content, and the relationship between the number of compaction passes
and the resulting density of the material.

3/17.4 The Contractor may proceed with the Wet-mix Macadam Roadbase work only after the
methods and procedures established in the compaction trials have been approved by the
Engineer.

3/18 COMPACTION OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE

3/18.1 The material shall be compacted to a field density equal to or greater than 100% of
maximum dry density value obtained when tested in accordance with BS 1377: Part 4 :
Test 3.7 : 1990 and shall have a minimum 4 days soaked CBR of 80% at 100% (BS1377 :

January 2023 3-9 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Part 4 : Test 7 : 1990). Field density tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377
: Part 9 : Test 2.2.

3/18.2 Compaction shall be completed as soon as possible after the material has been spread.

3/18.3 Special care shall be taken to obtain full compaction in the vicinity of both longitudinal and
transverse joints.

3/18.4 The surface of any layer of material shall on completion of compaction be well closed free
from movement under compaction plant and free from compaction planes, ridges, cracks
or loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good
to the full thickness of layer and recompacted.

3/18.5 Where directed by the Engineer a Sieve analysis shall be carried out on the material
recovered from 5 consecutive field density tests. Where this sieve analysis shows oversize
material content of 10% or greater the area of construction will be removed and the source
of the material rejected until further notice. Where considered necessary other areas of
work which were carried on using material from the same source shall be tested in a similar
manner.

3/19 FINISHING OF WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE

3/19.1 Immediately prior to the placing of the first layer of the next pavement course on to the Wet-
mix Macadam Roadbase the final layer of Wet-mix Macadam Roadbase shall be at the
specified density and to the required grade and section. In order to maintain these
requirements while placing the next course it may be necessary to water and reshape the
surface of the Wet- mix Macadam Roadbase. This work shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.

3/19.2 The surface of the finished Wet-mix Macadam Roadbase will be tested with a three (3)
metre straight edge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variations of the surface
from the testing edge between any two (2) contacts with the surface shall at no point exceed
ten (10) millimeters when placed on or parallel to the centerline, or ten (10) millimeters
when placed perpendicular to the centerline of the roadway. The Wet-mix Macadam
Roadbase shall be compacted to the thickness and cross sections as shown on the
drawings and shall not vary by more than ten (10) millimeters from the required elevation.
All humps and depressions and thickness deficiencies exceeding the specified tolerance
shall be corrected by removing the defective work or by adding new material as directed
by the Engineer

3/19.3 Before placing the next construction layer or applying prime coat, the wet-mix roadbase
shall be mechanically swept then cleaned with compressed air to remove loose material.
As soon as possible after cleaning of the surface, the wet-mix roadbase shall be sealed by
the application of a prime coat as specified. Should the surface of the material be allowed
to dry out before the seal is applied, it shall be lightly watered and re-compacted
immediately prior to spraying with prime-coat. In the event of a section of wet mix roadbase
failing to comply, either by level or degree of compaction, and where the full depth of the
layer has been allowed to dry out, it shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s
expense, with fresh material. Watering and re-mixing in place will not be permitted.

January 2023 3-10 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/20 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR WET-MIX MACADAM ROADBASE

3/20.1 One sample every 1,000 cu.m. or part of as directed by the Engineer shall be tested for
Grading Plasticity Index, Sand Equivalent value, maximum Dry Density, C.B.R. and Loss
by Abrasion.

3/20.2 For compaction and moisture content on the shoulders; and each layer of carriageway
three tests per unit (one unit being 750 sq.m) or as instructed by the Engineer.

3/20.3 Special care shall be taken to obtain full compaction in the vicinity of both longitudinal and
transverse joints.

3/21 BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES, DESCRIPTION

3/21.1 This work shall consist of the construction of the following hot-mix bituminous courses
which shall be either Asphaltic Concrete or Dense Bitumen Macadam as shown on the
drawings.

Bitumen Paving Courses shall consist of coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, filler material,
and bitumen binder.

3/22 COARSE AGGREGATES FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE

3/22.1 Coarse aggregate, which is the material retained on a 4.75mm sieve for asphaltic concrete
and a 3.35mm sieve for DBM mixes, shall consist of crushed rock or crushed gravel. It shall
be clean, hard, tough, durable and sound, and shall be of uniform quality and free from
decomposed stone, shale, clay, lumps and other deleterious substances. Sampling of
coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM D75.

3/22.2 Crushed gravel for use as coarse aggregate shall consist of the product obtained by
crushing material that has first been screened in such a manner that not less than ninety
(90) percent of the material to be crushed is retained on the 50mm British Standard sieve
size.

3/22.3 Percentage of partially crushed faces with minimum one crushed face shall be 100% by
weight of each (stockpile) of aggregate. In addition, at least 85% by weight of each separate
stockpile of aggregate shall have all faces crushed. This 85% value may be reduced to
50% for certain categories of road where indicated on the drawings.

Crushed face determination shall be as per Sharjah Municipality Laboratory Test Method
DMS 7 and DMS 8.

3/22.4 Each and every stockpile of coarse aggregate shall have properties which comply with the
following values:-

Los Angeles Abrasion Loss (ASTM C-131 or C-535)

Base Course and Binder Course 30% max.
Wearing Course 25% max.

Aggregate Crushing Value (BS 812 Part 110)

Base Course and Binder Course 25% max.
Wearing Course 20% max.

January 2023 3-11 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Soundness Loss (ASTM C88) 10% max.

Magnesium Sulphate (5 cycles)

Acid soluble chlorides (BS812 Part 117) 0.1% max.

Acid soluble Sulphates (BS EN 1744-1 : 1998) 0.5% max.

Flakiness Index (BS 812 Part 105 Section 105.1)

Base Course and Binder Course 30 max.
Wearing Course 25 max.

Elongation Index (BS 812 Part 105 Section 105.2)

Base course and Binder Course 30 max.
Wearing Course 25 max.

Water Absorption (ASTM C127) 2.0% max.

3/23 FINE AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE

3/23.1 Fine aggregate shall consist of the material passing a 4.75 mm sieve for asphaltic concrete
and a 3.35mm sieve for DBM mixes.

3/23.2 Fine aggregate including filler shall be obtained from 100% crushed gravel or crushed rock
pre-screened to exclude natural uncrushed fine material or weathered unsound fines. The
use of dune sand shall not be permitted.

3/23.3 Fine aggregate shall have properties which comply with the following values:-

Soundness Loss (ASTM C-88) 10% max.

Magnesium Sulphate (5 cycles)

Plasticity Index Non-Plastic

(BS 1377:Part 2 : Test 5)

Acid Soluble Chlorides 0.1% max.

(BS 812 Part 117)

Acid Soluble Sulphates 0.5% max.

(BS EN 1744-1 :1998)

Water Absorption (ASTM C128) 2.3% max.

Sampling of find aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM D75.

3/24 MINERAL FILLER FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSE

3/24.1 When the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregates is deficient in material
passing the ASTM No. 200 sieve, mineral filler shall be added as approved by the Engineer
at the Contractor’s expense.

January 2023 3-12 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/24.2 Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of limestone or cement in accordance
with ASTM D-242. It shall be thoroughly dry and free from organic substances and clay and
meet the grading requirements following:-

MINERAL FILLER
B.S. SIEVE ASTM SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE BY
MASS PASSING
600 micron No. 30 100
300 micron No. 50 95 - 100
150 micron No. 100 90 - 100
75 micron No. 200 70 - 100

3/25 COMBINED AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES

3/25.1 The combined mineral aggregate shall meet the following physical requirements:-

Sand Equivalent (ASTM D-2419) determined

after all processing except for addition of asphalt binder 65 minimum

Plasticity Index (BS 1377:Part 2:Test 5) Non Plastic

3/25.2 When tested according to ASTM C-117 and ASTM C-136, the combined mineral aggregate
shall conform to Table 1 for Asphaltic Concrete and Tables 2, 3 and 4 for Dense Bitumen
Macadam.

Table 1 - Aggregate Grading for Asphaltic Concrete

SIEVE SIZE TOTAL PASSING (BY WEIGHT)

SQUAREOPENINGS BASE BINDER WEARING
ASTM COURSE COURSE COURSE
37.5 mm 100
25 mm 80 - 100 100 100
19 mm 62 - 92 80 - 100 86 - 100
12.5 mm -- 63 - 85 69 - 87
9.5 mm 45 - 75 57 - 77 58 - 78
4.75 mm 30 - 55 40 - 60 40 - 60
2.36 mm 20 - 40 25 - 45 25 - 45
0.85 mm 15 - 30 15 - 30 15 - 30
0.425 mm 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22
0.18 mm 6 - 15 6 - 15 6 - 15
0.075 mm 2-8 2-8 2-8

January 2023 3-13 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Table 2 - Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Roadbase

B.S. TEST SIEVE AGGREGATE, CRUSHED ROCK OR GRAVEL

mm Percentage by mass passing
50 100
37.5 95 - 100
28 70 - 94
14 56 - 76
6.3 44 - 60
3.35 32 - 46
0.300 7 - 21
0.075 2-8

Note: The aggregate shall be in a surface dry condition prior to mixing.

Table 3 - Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Basecourse

AGGREGATE, CRUSHED ROCK OR GRAVEL

B.S. TEST SIEVE Percentage by mass Passing for
Finished Thickness of Base Course
mm mm mm mm
65 - 80 50 - 60 35 - 45
50 100 -- --
37.5 95 - 100 100 ---
28 70 - 94 90 - 100 100
20 --- 71 - 95 95 - 100
14 56 - 76 58 - 82 65 - 85
10 --- --- 52 - 72
6.3 44 - 60 44 - 60 39 - 55
3.35 32 - 46 32 - 46 32 - 46
0.300 7 - 21 7 - 21 7 - 21
0.075 2-8 2-8 2-8

Table - 4 - Aggregate Gradation for Dense Bitumen Macadam Wearing Course

AGGREGATE, CRUSHED ROCK OR GRAVEL

B.S. TEST Percentage by mass Passing for Finished
SIEVE Thickness of Wearing Course

mm mm mm mm
35 - 50 25 - 30 20
28 100 --- ---
20 95 - 100 100 ---
14 70 - 90 95 - 100 100
10 55 - 75 70 - 90 95 - 100
6.3 40 - 60 45 - 65 55 - 75
3.35 25 - 40 30 - 45 30 - 45
1.18 15 - 30 15 - 30 15 - 30
0.075 2-6 2-6 2-6

January 2023 3-14 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/25.3 The gradings given in Tables 1,2,3 and 4 represent the extreme limits which shall determine
suitability of aggregate for use from all sources of supply. The aggregate as finally selected
for use in the work shall have a grading within the limits designated in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4
as appropriate and for Table 1 may with the Engineer’s agreement.

3/25.4 The coarse aggregate, shall show no detrimental amount of stripping when tested in
accordance with ASTM D-1664. The minimum value of non stripped area shall be 95%. If
stripping occurs, the aggregate shall be rejected and an approved method of treatment
specified to change the material from a hydrophilic to a hydrophobic state as directed by
the Engineer, or an approved additive shall be used with the bituminous binder.

3/25.5 When necessary to improve the coating of aggregate by bitumen, additives of approved
type will be added to the bituminous material in such percentage as required to obtain
satisfactory results in the affinity with bitumen test performed in accordance with ASTM
D1664. The approved additive will be used in accordance with Technical Specifications
issued by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer after appropriate testing.

3/25.6 No extra payment will be made for required anti-stripping additives.

3/26 BITUMEN BINDER

3/26.1 Bitumen Binder for the “Bituminous Paving Courses” shall be Bitumen Binder penetration
grade 60 - 70 unless otherwise specified as 40 - 50.

3/26.2 The bitumen shall be prepared by refining crude petroleum by suitable methods and shall
be homogeneous, free from water and shall not foam when heated to 175 degrees C
(347F).

3/26.3 Bitumen penetration grade 60 - 70 and 40 - 50 shall conform to the requirements of Table
Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D140.

Table 5 - Bitumen Penetration Grade 60 - 70 & 40 – 50

60 - 70 PEN 40 - 50 PEN
TEST ASTM MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.

Penetration at 25 deg.C D5 60 70 40 50
100g, 5 sec., (0.1MM)

Flash Point, Cleveland D92 232 -- 232 --

Open Cup, deg.C.

Ductility at 25 deg.C, cm D113 100 -- 100 --

Solubility trichloroethylene, D2042 99 -- 99 --

%

Thin film oven test 3.2mm, D1754 -- 0.80 -- 0.80

163 deg.C, 5 hours loss on
heating %

January 2023 3-15 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

60 - 70 PEN 40 - 50 PEN
TEST ASTM MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.

Penetration of residue D5 52 -- 55 --
% of original

Ductility of residue at D113 50 -- -- --

25 deg.C, 5 cm/[Link]

Kinematic Viscosity D2170 240 -- 280 --

(Centistokes) at 135 deg. C

Softening Point D36 48 52 51 55

Ring & Ball apparatus

3/26.4 A sample of the bitumen that the Contractor proposes to use in the work, together with a
statement as to its source and properties shall be submitted to and approved by the
Engineer at least 45 days before the asphalt work begins.

3/26.5 No bitumen other than that represented by the approved sample shall be used by the
Contractor except with the written consent of the Engineer. Blending of bitumen from
different refineries will not be permitted.

3/26.6 For Asphaltic Concrete the percentage range of bitumen by weight of total mix to be added
to the aggregate shall be as prescribed in Table 6: For Dense Bitumen Macadam the range
shall be as prescribed in Table 9.

Table 6 : Bitumen Content for Asphaltic Concrete

PAVEMENT BITUMEN PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT OF

COURSE TOTAL MIX INCLUSIVE OF TOLERANCE

Base 3.2 to 4.4

Binder 3.4 to 4.4
Wearing 3.4 to 4.4

3/27 JOB MIX FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING COURSES

3/27.1 The mix approved for use in the works shall be designed using Marshall tests and field
trials with the following recommendations taken into account:-

For base course the Marshall shall be modified by substituting all aggregate sizes over 25
mm with an equal weight of aggregate sizes in the next lower grading sizes as specified in
Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4.

The combined aggregate gradation should be adjusted within the allowable limits to
achieve maximum stability whilst not going below the minimum requirement for void
content.

January 2023 3-16 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The minimum bitumen binder content according to the results of the Marshall Method of
Mix design should be used provided that it will still satisfy the durability, the stability and
the void content requirements.

Prior to final approval, the proposed job mix, but with a bituminous content at the upper
percentage limits shall be compacted to refusal, (400 to 600 blows) and the resulting voids
in the mix shall not be less than 2% for asphaltic concrete or 3% for DBM.

The final job mix must display the Marshall characteristics specified in Table 8 for Asphaltic
Concrete and Table 9 for Dense Bitumen Macadam.

3/27.2 Determination of VIM, VMA, VFB shall be in accordance with DMS 9.

3/27.3 At least thirty (30) days prior to the date he intends to begin production of plant-mix
“Bituminous Paving Course” Mixes, and after receiving approval of the aggregates and
bitumen from the Engineer the Contractor shall make a written request for the approval of
the job-mix formula from the Engineer. The job-mix formula will be prepared by the
Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer in the Laboratory. The job-mix design and
binder calibration factor shall be checked at the Sharjah Municipality Central Laboratory.

3/27.4 The laboratory job mix formula shall fix a single definite percentage of aggregate passing
each required sieve size, a single definite percentage of bitumen binder to be added to the
aggregate, at a temperature with tolerance as per the viscosity temperature chart at which
the mix is to be emptied from the mixer, and at a temperature with tolerance as per the
viscosity temperature chart at which the mix is to be delivered to the work site.

3/27.5 The laboratory job mix formula shall be used for the basis of approval of the job standard
mixture.

3/27.6 Trials areas having lengths of at least 30 m and to the specified layer thickness shall be
laid outside the area of the permanent work by the Contractor for the Engineer’s approval,
before the start of the permanent work. At least two samples of non-compacted material
from the trial area shall be taken in accordance with ASTM D-979 and shall be analysed at
Sharjah Central Laboratory to determine the aggregate grading and binder content.
Stability, flow, Marshall density and voids shall be determined for Marshall Specimens
which are made from plant and site samples. The results shall be submitted to the Engineer
and shall be approved by him before further mixing or laying is carried out. A method
statement regarding laying trial to be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to the
trial.

3/27.7 Trial areas may form part of a temporary traffic detour subject to the approval of the `mixes.
If the trial areas form part of the temporary traffic detour they shall not be paid for under the
relevant Bill item.
3/27.8 Should the laboratory job mix formula after passing the mixing plant and laid and
compacted with approved plant fail to produce a satisfactory trial area, the mix proportions
may be modified by agreement with the Engineer, as necessary and within the
requirements of Table 7, 8 and 9 as applicable to produce a mix of satisfactory workability
and acceptable surface finish subject to the mix being rechecked in accordance with the
preceding Clauses of 3/27. After approval of the trial area by the Engineer this mix shall be
designated the ‘Job Standard Mix’ and shall thereafter be the approved mix.

3/27.9 All mixes produced shall conform to the Job Standard Mix approved by the Engineer, within
the ranges of tolerance specified in Table 7 (within the limits of Table 1, 6 and 8 for Asphaltic
Concrete and Tables 2, 3, 4 and 9 for Dense Bitumen Macadam). Each day the Engineer
shall take as many samples of the materials and mix as he considers necessary and
minimum of one sample for every 300 tons laid or part thereof for checking their required

January 2023 3-17 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

characteristics. When unsatisfactory results or changed conditions make it necessary, the

Engineer shall instruct the Contractor to establish a new job-standard following approval of
the new mix design in accordance with the preceding Clauses of 3/27.

3/27.10 Should a change in a material be encountered or should a change in a source of material

be made, a new Job-Standard Mix shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with
the preceding Clause of 3/27 and approved by the Engineer before the mix containing the
new material is delivered. Job materials will be rejected if they are found not to have the
characteristics required by the approved Job Standard Mix.

Table 7 - Job Mix Tolerance

Aggregate retained on 4.75 mm sieve or larger +/- 5%

Aggregate passing 4.75 mm sieve and retained +/- 4%

on 0.85 mm sieve

Aggregate passing 0.85 mm sieve and retained +/- 2%

on 0.075 mm sieve

Aggregate passing 0.075 mm sieve +/- 1.0%

Bitumen Binder +/- 0.2%

Temperature of mixing and placing 0

+/- 10 C

Table 8 - Properties of Mix for Asphaltic Concrete

PROPERTIES BITUMINOUS BITUMINOUS BITUMINOUS

BASE BINDER WEARING
COURSE COURSE COURSE
Number of
Compaction blow at 75 75 75
each end of
specimen
Stability 9800 9800 9800
(Marshall)
Minimum N
Flow (0.25 mm) 8- 16 8- 16 8- 16

Minimum 1225 1225 1225

Stiffness
N/0.25mm)
Percent air voids 4-8 4-8 4-8

Percent voids in 13 14 15
mineral aggregate,
minimum % (V.M.A)

Percent voids filled 50 - 65 50 - 70 50 - 70

with bitumen (V.F.B)

January 2023 3-18 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

PROPERTIES BITUMINOUS BITUMINOUS BITUMINOUS

BASE BINDER WEARING
COURSE COURSE COURSE

Loss of Marshall Max. 25% Max. 25% Max. 25%

Stability in accordance
with DMS 10

Filler/Bitumen Ratio 0.6 - 1.5 0.6 - 1.5 0.6 - 1.4

Table 9 - Properties of Mix for Dense Bitumen Macadam

BASE WEARING
DESCRIPTION COURSE COURSE
ROAD
MIN. BASE MAX. MIN. MAX.
Marshall specimens No. of
Comp. blow each end of 75 -- 75 --
specimen

Voids in Mix (%) 7 11 6 9

Voids in Mineral Aggregate 14 20 14 20

(%)

Stability (Marshall) 7350 -- 9800 --

Minimum (N)

Flow (0.25mm) 8 16 8 16

Minimum stiffness 919 -- 1225 --

N/0.25mm)

Bitumen Content (% of total 3.2 4.0 3.5 4.1

mix)

Voids filled with Bitumen (%) 48 60 48 60

Loss of Marshall Stability in

accordance with DMS 10 - 25% - 25%

3/27.11 Samples of bituminous paving course mixes shall be taken from the mixing plant and/or
behind the paver prior to compaction, as per ASTM D979, check compliance with the
approved job mix requirements including Tables 1, 6, 7 and 8 for asphaltic concrete and
Tables 2, 3, 4, 7 and 9 for Dense Bitumen Macadam.

3/27.12 The density of the compacted mixes shall be related to the daily Marshall Density which
shall be determined by making four Standard Marshall specimens from samples of the mix
taken from the mixing plant or paver. The density of each sample shall be determined and
compared with the mean value. Any individual result which varies from the mean by more
than 0.015 gm/cc shall be rejected. Marshall tests shall be repeated on a daily basis to
establish the daily Marshall Density for that particular day’s production. The daily Marshall
Density shall not vary from the Job Mix Design Density by more than +/- 1.0%.

January 2023 3-19 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/27.13 The assistance of the Engineer in the preparation of the job standard mix in no way relieves
the Contractor of the responsibility of producing a bituminous mix meeting the requirements
of the Specifications.

3/28 EQUIPMENT FOR BITUMINOUS PAVING OPERATIONS

3/28.1 Method statement and equipment list shall be according to the type and number outlined
in the Contractor’s detailed Programme of Work, as approved by the Engineer.
Requirements for major plant are outlined in Clause 1/29 of these Specifications.

3/28.2 In addition to the above requirements, trucks used for hauling bituminous mix shall have
tight, clean, smooth metal beds which have been thinly coated with a minimal amount of
paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material to prevent the mix from adhering to
the beds. When required by the Engineer, each vehicle shall be equipped with a canvas
cover or other suitable material of such size as to protect the mix from the weather.

3/28.3 Rolling equipment shall be self-propelled. The wheels on the rollers shall be equipped with
adjustable scrapers and the rollers shall have water tanks and sprinkling apparatus, which
shall be used to keep the wheel wet and prevent the surface material from sticking.

3/29 PREPARATION OF BITUMEN BINDER

3/29.1 The heating of the bitumen binder for mixing and compacting shall be in accordance with
ASTM D6926:2004.

3/30 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE FOR BITUMINOUS MIX

3/30.1 i) Coarse and fine aggregate shall be stored at the asphalt plant in such a manner that the
separate stockpiles will not become intermixed. The stockpiles shall be of sufficient size to
provide a minimum quantity of one week’s continuous production of asphalt mix. Taken into
consideration the frequency of aggregate testing as mentioned in Clause 3/47.2 aggregates
brought to the asphalt plant to supplement stocks should be tested and approved prior to
placing in the existing approved stockpiles.

ii) The cold bins shall be calibrated with the materials to be used and the setting shall be
such as to produce a combined gradation in accordance with the job mix formula. The
proportioning shall be such that surpluses and shortages in the hot bins will not cause
breaks in the continuous operations. All the above shall be as approved by the Engineer.

iii) The materials shall be thoroughly dried and heated so that their temperature is within
+/- 8 deg.C of the temperature needed to satisfy the viscosity requirements of the asphalt
cement. The moisture content of the heated and dried materials shall not exceed 0.5 per
cent. The quantity of materials fed through the drier shall in all cases be held to an amount
which can be thoroughly dried and heated within the limits specified.

3/30.2 Immediately after heating, the aggregate or aggregates shall be screened into at least five
(5) sizes and conveyed into separate bins ready for batching and mixing with bituminous
material. When the aggregates supplied are of such size and grading that separating into
five (5) bins is impractical, the number of required separations may be reduced to four (4)
or to three (3) with the approval of the Engineer. The efficiency of the screening operations
shall be sufficient to produce, at plant operating capacity, gradations in each of the sizes of

January 2023 3-20 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

heated and dried aggregates which are reasonably uniform and result in the production of
a mix complying with the limits specified for the aggregate gradation.

3/31 PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MIX

3/31.1 Dried aggregate as specified and prepared as prescribed above shall be combined in the
plant conforming to ASTM D995 - 88 in the approved proportions. The bitumen binder shall
be introduced into the mix in the proportion specified by the job-mix formula.

3/31.2 The initial mixing time will be designated by the Engineer. Mixing time may be increased
by the Engineer if additional time is necessary to obtain a homogeneous mix and
satisfactory coating.

3/31.3 The batch plants, timing shall begin at the start of the introduction of the bitumen into the
pugmill.

3/31.4 The length of mixing time for continuous plants will be determined by the following formula
or other approved methods:-

Pugmill dead load capacity in Kg

Mixing time in seconds =--------------------------------------------
Pugmill output in Kg/second

3/31.5 The temperature of the aggregate immediately prior to mixing shall be within +/- 8 deg.C of
the temperature of the asphalt cement and the temperature of the aggregate and asphalt
prior to mixing shall be approximately that of the completed mix as defined in the job mix
formula approved by the Engineer. The mix temperature shall be within the limits set out in
the job mix formula when emptied from the mixer.

3/32 SURFACE PREPARATION

3/32.1 When the Bituminous Mix is placed on a prepared roadbase and whether or not a prime
coat is designated on the Drawings, the Granular Roadbase shall be even and firm and
within the construction tolerance specified for the roadbase to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

3/32.2 When the paving layer is constructed on an existing bituminous surface, the surface shall
be cleaned of all foreign material and broomed free of dust. In addition any loose, broken
or shattered bituminous material along the edges of the existing surface shall be removed,
and the exposed subgrade and a sufficient width of the shoulder adjacent to the edge of
the existing surface to receive the new bituminous mix shall be shaped, bladed, compacted
and broomed and primed to provide a uniform firm subgrade for the new surface course.

3/32.3 The existing bituminous surface, base, or subgrade shall be removed if broken, shattered,
or unstable. The areas shall be excavated to a depth as directed by the Engineer, and
refilled with the Bituminous Mix according to the Specifications.

3/32.4 Prior to the placing of the mix, when designated on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer, a prime coat or tack coat shall be applied to the roadbase or surface in
accordance with the Specification for Prime Coat or Tack Coat.

January 2023 3-21 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/33 PLACING OF THE MIX

3/33.1 All bituminous mixes shall be introduced to the paver at a temperature not less than 135
deg.C and not more than 163 deg.C. Mixes outside this temperature range shall be
discarded.

3/33.2 The bituminous mix shall be spread and finished to crown and grade by automatically
controlled bituminous paver. Bituminous mix may be spread and finished by hand methods
only where machine methods are impractical as determined by the Engineer.

3/33.3 The automatically controlled paver shall lay the bituminous mix without tearing the surface
and shall strike a finish that is smooth, true to cross-section, uniform in density and texture,
free from hollows, transverse corrugations and other irregularities.

3/33.4 The paver shall be operated at a speed which will give the best results for the type of paver
being used and which co-ordinates satisfactorily with the rate of delivery of the mix to the
paver, to provide a uniform rate of placement without intermittent operations of the paver.

3/33.5 The mix shall be delivered to the paver in time to permit completion of spreading, finishing
and compaction of the mix during daylight hours.

3/33.6 The longitudinal joints in successive layers shall be offset not less than fifteen (15)
centimeters. The width of surface or top course placements shall conform to traffic lane
edges as shown on the Drawings.

3/33.7 The leading half of half roadway paving shall not get ahead of the trailing half of the
pavement by more than one (1) average full-day of paving and, in no case, shall the leading
half be more than one half (1/2) kilometer ahead of the trailing half without the written
permission of the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the
Engineer may suspend paving on the leading half until such time, as the Contractor shall
pave the trailing half to a point approximately even with the leading half.

3/33.8 Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, where successive layers are to be placed, the
surface of the existing layer shall be swept clean with a power broom, or by other means
as approved by the Engineer, and a tack coat applied. Tack coat may not be required where
the delay between courses laying is less than 48 hours and when the surface is fresh and
clean and at the discretion of the Engineer. The rate of application of tack coat to be
between 0.2 to 0.6 L/m2.

3/33.9 Asphaltic concrete mixes, except levelling courses shall be laid in an uncompacted
thickness such that, after rolling the thickness of the compacted layer shall be:-

Base Course : Min. 6 cm Max. 10 cm

Binder Course : Min. 5 cm Max. 8 cm
Wearing Course : Min. 4 cm Max. 6 cm.

However, DBM thicknesses shall be as specified in tables 3 and 4.

3/33.10 The maximum thickness for layers may be increased slightly when such increase is more
adaptable to total pavement thickness and when in the opinion of the Engineer it is not
detrimental to placement and rolling conditions.

January 2023 3-22 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/34 PRELIMINARY SURVEY AND REFERENCE STRING LINE

3/34.1 The Contractor shall make the necessary survey required for the reference grade. When
the survey is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall erect and maintain an
approved reference string line and operate the paver to conform to the reference string line
for the initial layer and/or any other layers as directed. Elevation control points stakes for
the first layer of bituminous paving course shall be set at a maximum spacing of twenty (20)
metres. For subsequent layers, control points shall be set at ten (10) metres maximum
spacing. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain an approved mobile string line for all
layers not laid with the erected string line. The string line shall be erected parallel to the
reference grade, and the bituminous mix shall be spread at a constant elevation above,
below or at the string line elevations as directed.

3/34.2 The use of the automatically controlled bituminous paver, to provide both longitudinal and
traverse control, shall include the furnishing and maintaining of a string line, fixed or mobile,
by the Contractor. The longitudinal and traverse controls shall operate independently of
each other, to the extent that the surface of the bituminous mix will conform to the string
line and will be uniform in cross-section and crown.

3/34.3 The Contractor shall establish the centre-line points and shall maintain the location of the
points until the completion of the surfacing or as directed. When directed by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall erect a string line, to be used as a guide for the finishing machine, in
order to maintain a uniform edge alignment. If any other method is proposed by the
Contractor, it shall first be approved by the Engineer.

3/35 BITUMINOUS LEVELLING COURSE

3/35.1 A levelling course, consisting of a layer of bituminous material of variable thickness may be
used to eliminate irregularities in existing surfaces or based and to vary existing cross-
section elements of roadways.

3/35.2 In areas where levelling courses are required, as shown in the Drawings or determined by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall make a survey of existing surface or base. When the
survey is approved, the Engineer will determine and inform the Contractor of the precise
locations and thickness of levelling course to obtain the smoothest possible riding surface.
Upon receipt of the locations and thickness from the Engineer, the Contractor shall proceed
with the placement of the Levelling Course.

3/36 THICKNESS CORES

3/36.1 The depth of each bituminous paving course shall be measured by cored samples. The
Contractor shall furnish and operate an approved core drill for cutting samples from the
compacted mix on the road. The equipment shall be capable of cutting the mix without
shattering the edges of the specimen or otherwise disturbing the density of the specimen.
The nominal size of Cored samples shall be ten (10) centimeters in diameter for binder
course and wearing course and fifteen (15) centimeters in diameter for base course and
road base.

3/36.2 Cores extracted for thickness measurement may be used for density determination and
density samples may be used for thickness measurements. Determination of thickness and
density of core samples shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D3549 & ASTM
D1188 or ASTM D2726 respectively and as required by Engineer.

January 2023 3-23 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/37 COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS LAYERS

3/37.1 After spreading and strike off, and as soon as the mix conditions permit the rolling to be
performed without excessive shoving or tearing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and
uniformly compacted. Rolling will not be prolonged to an extent that cracks appear.

3/37.2 Rollers shall be of the steel-wheel and pneumatic tyre type and shall be in good condition,
capable of reversing without backlash, and shall be operated at speeds slow enough to
avoid displacement of the bituminous mix. The number and weight of rollers shall be
sufficient to compact the mix to the required density while it is still in a workable condition.
The use of equipment which results in excessive crushing of the aggregate will not be
permitted. A minimum of three (3) rollers, one (1) steel-wheel and two (2) pneumatic-tyre
type, shall be used with each spreading operation for each lane.

3/37.3 The Contractor shall provide adequate back-up equipment for use in the event of
mechanical failure, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3/37.4 Initial or breakdown rolling shall be done by means of either a tandem power steel roller or
three-wheel roller followed by a pneumatic-tyre roller or as agreed by the Engineer. Rolling
shall begin as soon as the mix will bear the roller without undue displacement. Rolling shall
be longitudinal, beginning at the low side of the spread of material and proceeding toward
the high side, overlapping on successive passes by at least one half (1/2) the width of the
near wheels. Alternate passes of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths.

3/37.5 The motion of the roller shall at all times be slow enough to avoid displacement of the mix.
To prevent adhesion of the mix to the rollers, the wheels of the rollers shall be kept properly
moistened with water, but an excessive of water will not be permitted. Under no
circumstances shall the use of diesel fuel or any other asphalt stripping agent be used for
preventing adhesion of the asphalt to the roller wheels.

3/37.6 Final compaction and finish rolling shall be done by means of a tandem power steel roller,
unless otherwise directed. When the specified density is not obtained, changes in the size
and/or number of rollers shall be made as corrective measures, to satisfy the density
requirements.

3/37.7 Rollers shall be operated by competent and experienced roller men and shall be kept in
operation continuously if necessary, so that all parts of the pavement will receive
substantially equal compaction at the time desired. The Engineer will order the mixing plant
to cease operation at any time proper rolling is not being performed.

3/37.8 The road density requirements shall be equal to or greater than ninety eight (98) percent
of the average Marshall density of each day’s production for wearing course and ninety
seven (97) percent of the average Marshall density of each day’s production for asphaltic
road base and binder course mixes. However, densities in excess of 101.8% shall not be
permitted.

3/37.9 Any mix that becomes loose, broken, mixed with foreign material, or which is in any way
defective in finish or density, or which does not comply in other respects with the
requirements of the Specification shall be removed, replaced with new materials, and
finished in accordance with the Specifications.

3/37.10 Coring to be done after 24 hours of completion of the compaction.

January 2023 3-24 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/38 RE-ROLLING OF BITUMINOUS COURSES

3/38.1 Should any bituminous course fail to achieve the specified density, at the discretion of the
Engineer rerolling may be allowed subject to the following conditions:-

a. The densification to be achieved shall be 1% or less.

b. Only PTR’s to be used weighing no greater than 18 tons.
c. Re-rolling to take place within 72 hours from the time of the initial rolling of the asphalt.
d. Re-rolling to take place at the time of the day when the asphalt has attained its
maximum natural temperature.
e. Re-rolling to be applied for a maximum of two hours.
f. Re-rolling to be carried out in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative.
g. The section of the works in question shall be cored for density determination
immediately after the completion of re-rolling.
h. If after re-testing, the density achieved is 0.5% below the specified density, the
asphaltic material will be accepted in the works subject to a 20% reduction to the billed
rates. If, on the other hand, the density is greater than 0.5% below the specified
density, the asphaltic material shall be removed and new material to the specification
laid at the Contractor’s cost.

3/39 CONTACT SURFACES

3/39.1 Contact surfaces between the bituminous paving and of kerbing, gutters, manholes, and
other appurtenances shall be painted with a thin uniform coating of tack coat as approved
by the Engineer.

3/40 JOINTS IN BITUMINOUS PAVING

3/40.1 Joints between old and new pavement or between successive day’s work shall be made,
to ensure thorough and continuous bonding between the two. All construction joints in
previously laid material shall be constructed by cutting the material back vertically for its full
depth to expose a fresh surface.

3/40.2 Before placing the fresh mix against a cut joint or against old joint or against old pavement,
the contact surface shall be sprayed or painted with a thin uniform coat of tack coat. Where
a finishing machine is used the longitudinal joint shall be made by overlapping the screed
on the previously laid material for a width of at least three (3) centimeters and depositing a
sufficient amount of mix so that the joint formed will be smooth and tight.

3/41 PROTECTION OF COMPACTED LAYER

3/41.1 The Contractor shall protect all sections of newly compacted pavement from traffic until
they have hardened sufficiently to the approval of the Engineer. On heavily trafficked roads
during the summer months a minimum period of 7 days must elapse before the newly
compacted pavement is trafficked.

January 2023 3-25 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/42 COMPACTION TRIALS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES

3/42.1 Prior to the commencement of the bituminous paving operations, the Contractor shall
construct trial lengths, of at least 30 meters. The materials used in the trials shall be those
approved for use in the bituminous paving courses and the equipment used shall be that
according to the Contractor’s approved detailed Method Statement and equipment list and
the programme of work.

3/42.2 The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor’s equipment, the
loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified compacted layer depths,
and the relationship between the number of compaction passes and the resulting density
of the material.

3/42.3 The Contractor may proceed with the bituminous paving operations only after the method
and procedures established by the Compaction trials have been approved by the Engineer.

3/43 SURFACE TOLERANCE FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES

3/43.1 At final compaction the finished surfaces of the individual layers shall fall within the following
maximum tolerances, measured with a 3 m straightedge laid in any direction

- Base Course 6 mm
- Binder Course 6 mm
- Wearing Course 4 mm

3/43.2 i) The rideability of the finished wearing course when tested with a Laser Road Surface
Testing Machine shall have an IRI (International Roughness Index) not exceeding the
following values:

Average value over a 400 metre section <0.90

Peak value over a 25 metre section <1.5

(Not more than 2 values per 400 meters)

ii) The amplitude of the longitudinal profile of the road, filtered between (a) 1 metre and 3.3
meters and (b) 3.3 meters and 13 meters shall not exceed the following values:

1m - 3.3 m <1.8 mm
3.3 m - 13 m <3.5 mm

3/43.3 All humps and depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected by
removing the defective work and replacing it with new material as directed by the Engineer
at the Contractors cost.

3/43.4 Tolerance on finished surface levels shall be:-

Road surface +/- 6 mm

Base courses +/- 6 mm

January 2023 3-26 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/44 TOLERANCE IN BITUMINOUS PAVING THICKNESS

3/44.1 The thickness of the bituminous paving courses shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D3549.

3/44.2 For the purpose of establishing an adjusted unit rate for bituminous paving courses, units
to be considered separately are defined as three hundred (300) linear meters in each traffic
lane. The last unit in each lane shall be three hundred (300) linear meters plus the fractional
part of three hundred (300) meters remaining. At least three cores (in sets of two (2)) shall
be taken at random from each unit being sampled.

3/44.3 Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramps, etc. will be considered
as one unit and the thickness of each unit shall be determined separately. Small irregular
unit areas may be included as part of another unit. At such point as the Engineer may select
in each unit, three cores shall be taken for each unit of bituminous paving course. One unit
shall represent an area of not more than 1125 sq.m.

3/44.4 If the core so taken is not deficient by more than three (3) millimeters from the specified
thickness, full payment will be made. If the core is deficient in thickness by more than three
(3) millimeters, from the specified thickness, two (2) additional cores shall be taken from
the area represented and if the average of the three (3) cores is not deficient by more than
three (3) millimeters from the specified thickness, full payment will be made.

If the average thickness of three (3) cores is deficient by more than three (3) millimeters, but not
more than ten (10) millimeters, or fifteen (15) percent (whichever is less), from the specified
thickness, an adjusted unit price as provided in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for the
area represented by these cores.

3/44.5 In calculating the average thickness of each bituminous paving course, measurements
which are in excess of the specified thickness by more than three (3) millimeters will be
considered as the specified thickness plus three (3) millimeters, and measurements which
are less than specified thickness by more than ten (10) millimeters or fifteen (15) percent
(whichever is less), will not be included in the average.

3/44.6 When the measurement of any core is less than specified thickness by more than ten (10)
millimeters, or fifteen percent (whichever is less), the actual thickness of the bituminous
paving course in this area will be determined by taking additional cores at not less than
three (3) metre intervals parallel to the centre-line in each direction from the affected
location until, in each direction, a core is found which is not deficient by more than ten (10)
millimeters, or fifteen (15) percent (whichever is less). Asphalt areas which are deficient by
more than ten (10) mm or 15% (whichever is less) shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense. Exploratory cores for deficient thickness may be used in average for
adjusted unit price. (Refer to the Bill of Quantities - Preambles for Pavement Construction
for price adjustments).

3/45 COMPACTION SAMPLING AND TESTING OF BITUMINOUS COURSES

3/45.1 The density of the mix as placed and compacted on the road shall be determined from
cores cut from the compacted courses on the road at locations specified by the Engineer.
Samples shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM D979 in sets of two (2) from the same
location on the road. The frequency of testing shall be three (3) sets of samples per traffic
lane per three hundred (300) linear meters per layer or a minimum of one (1) set per day
for shorter runs, or as directed by the Engineer and such additional tests to determine limits

January 2023 3-27 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

of area deficient in density, or for recheck. The density of these samples will be referred to
as “Road Density”.

3/45.2 The Contractor shall cut the samples with an approved core drill in the presence of the
Engineer. The equipment shall be capable of cutting the material without shattering the
edges of the specimen. The nominal size of samples shall be ten (10) centimeters in
diameter for binder course and wearing course and fifteen (15) centimeters in diameter for
base course and road base.

3/45.3 All test holes shall be filled and made good with approved material by the Contractor at his
expense.

3/46 WEATHER LIMITATIONS FOR PAVING OPERATIONS

3/46.1 Hot bituminous mix shall be placed when the air temperature is eight (8) degrees C or
above, and when the weather is not dusty, foggy or rainy and when the existing surface is
free from moisture. Bituminous mix shall not be placed during sand storms.

3/46.2 No paving operations shall be started if rain is imminent.

3/47 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES

3/47.1 Bitumen Material: One sample shall be tested for penetration and softening point ring ball
test every 80 tons or part thereof.

3/47.2 Aggregate: Initially one sample for each stockpile every 1000m3 or part thereof shall be
taken and all the required tests shall be performed. The stockpile volume may be increased
to 4000m3 if consistent satisfactory results are obtained for initial samples.

3/47.3 Bituminous mix: One sample of mix shall be obtained from at least every 300 tons or part
thereof and tested for bitumen content ASTM D6307-2005 (ignition method) for
determination of binder content. grading (ASTM D5444 for gradation of extracted
aggregate.) Density in accordance with ASTM D-1188 or D-2726 and as required by the
Engineer. Stability in accordance with ASTM D 6926:2004 and voidage contents in
accordance with DMS 9 shall be determined on Marshall Specimens.

3/47.4 Loss of Marshall stability shall be tested for at least every 7,000 tons shall be in accordance
with DMS 10.

3/47.5 Thickness cores and compaction cores shall be taken as specified in Clause 3/44 and 3/45
respectively.

3/48 BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT

3/48.1 Bituminous Prime Coat shall consist of supplying and applying liquid asphalt to a previously
prepared and approved subgrade, subbase, aggregate base course or wet mix road- base
in accordance with this Specification.

3/48.2 Material for Prime Coat shall be:-

January 2023 3-28 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Liquid Asphalt: for prime coat shall be medium curing cut back asphalt MC-70 to the
requirements of ASTM D-2027 as modified by Table 10 or as directed by the Engineer.
Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D140.

Table 10 - Medium Curing Liquid.

TEST ASTM REF. MIN MAX.

*Saybolt Furol Viscosity at 50 deg. C. D88 60 120

sec.

*Flash Point, Tag open Cup, deg.C D3143 38 --

*Distillation D402

- Distillate (% of total distillation to

360 deg.C)
To 225 deg. C - 20
To 260 deg.C 20 60
*To 316 deg.C 65 90

Residue from distillation to 360 deg. C, 55

percent by volume difference.

Tests on residue from distillation:

D5 120 250
- Penetration 25 deg. C, 100g 5 sec.
- Ductility 25 deg. C, cm D113 100 --
- Solubility in trichloro ethylene % D2042 99 --
Water percent D95 - 0.2

3/48.3 Prime coat shall be applied at a rate of not less than 0.7 litres per square metre and not
more than 1.5 litres per square metre.

3/48.4 The exact rate of application, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined
by the Engineer following trials to be carried out by the Contractor.

3/48.5 The surface to be prime coated shall be uniformly smooth and firm and true to the grades
and cross-sections shown on the drawings within specified tolerances, and so maintained
throughout prime coating. Prime coat shall not be placed on a soft, uneven base. Any holes,
depressions or irregularities shall be repaired by the removal of loose and unsuitable
material and its replacement with suitable material compacted to produce a dense, even
surface of uniform texture. When required, the surface to be primed shall be lightly bladed
and compacted and the Engineer may instruct a light application of water to facilitate
penetration. Priming will not be permitted when the surface is wet.

3/48.6 Prime coat shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is less than 13 deg. C or
during rain, fog, dust storms or other unsuitable weather. The application temperature for
MC-70 liquid asphalt shall be between 50 deg. C and 80 deg. C as approved by the
Engineer. It shall be applied to one lane of the carriageway width at a time. When applied
in two or more lanes there shall be a slight overlap along adjoining edges. Overlapping will
not be permitted at transverse joints and thick paper shall be used to protect the previous
application.

January 2023 3-29 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/48.7 Traffic shall be kept off the prime coat until it has penetrated the subgrade or roadbase and
fully cured. It should be left undisturbed for a period of 48 hours or as otherwise directed
by the Engineer.

3/48.8 The Contractor shall furnish and spread at his cost sufficient clean fine sand, of an
approved quality, to blot up areas which show an excess of prime coat.

3/48.9 The primed surface shall be maintained in a good, clean condition at all times until the next
course is placed. Any surface irregularities or holes in the primed surface, however caused,
shall be repaired and corrected to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

3/49 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

3/49.1 Bituminous tack coat shall consist of supplying and applying emulsified asphalt diluted with
an equal quality of water (1:1) to a previously prepared bituminous base course or binder
course or to an existing bituminous surface, in accordance with this specification.

3/49.2 The materials for bituminous tack coat shall be slow setting emulsified asphalt, grade SS-
1h (anionic) conforming to the requirements of ASTM D977. Sampling shall be in
accordance with ASTM D140.

3/49.3 The tack coat (diluted emulsion) shall be applied in quantities of not less than 0.2 liters per
square metre and not more than 0.5 liters per square metre.

3/49.4 Immediately before applying the tack coat, all loose material, dirt, clay or other
objectionable material, shall be removed from the surface with a power broom or blower
supplemented with hand brooms, as directed by the Engineer. After the cleaning operation,
and prior to the application of the tack coat, an inspection of the area to be coated will be
made by the Engineer.

3/49.5 The application temperature for the tack coat shall be between 10 deg. C and 60 deg. C as
directed by the Engineer. The material should not be applied when the ambient temperature
is less than 13 deg. C or during rain, fog, dust storms or other unsuitable weather.

3/49.6 After application the surface shall be allowed to dry to the proper condition of tackiness to
receive the following pavement course. Tack coat shall be applied only so far in advance
to pavement course to obtain the proper condition of tackiness and the Contractor shall
protect the tack coat from damage during this period.

3/49.7 If the completed tack coat is damaged by rain or dust, it shall be allowed to dry, cleaned by
power broom or blower and, if required by the Engineer, an additional light application of
tack coat shall be applied. No additional payment shall be made for this work.

3/49.8 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, a tack coat is not necessary, the Contractor shall
clean, at his expense the existing surface free of dust and other deleterious material as
paragraph 4 above.

3/50 APPLICATION AND HEATING EQUIPMENT FOR LIQUID ASPHALT

3/50.1 A self-powered pressure distributor should be used for applying asphalt mixture. The
distributor shall have pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load produced on
the base surface shall not exceed 110 Kg per centimeter of tyre width, and shall be so

January 2023 3-30 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

designed and equipped as to distribute the bituminous material uniformly at even heat on
variable width of surface at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.2 to 7.5 liters per
sq.m. with a pressure range of 1.25 Kg to 5.2 Kg per sq.m. and with an allowable variation
from any specified rate not exceeding 5 percent. Distributors and booster tanks shall be so
maintained at all times that no dripping of bituminous material will occur from any part of
the equipment.

3/50.2 Distribution equipment shall include an independently operated bitumen pump,

technometer pressure gauges, volume measuring devices, a thermometer for reading the
temperature of tank contents, and a hose attachment for applying bituminous material to
spots unavoidably missed by the distributor. The distributor shall be equipped for circulation
and agitation of the bituminous material during the heating process.

3/50.3 The equipment for heating shall consist of steam coils and equipment for producing steam,
so designed that steam will not be introduced into the material. In the event of storage tanks
being used, an armoured thermometer with a range from 10 deg. C to 150 deg. C shall be
fixed to the tank so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be determined at
all times.

3/50.4 Other heating facilities may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3/51 DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT, DESCRIPTION

3/51.1 This work shall consider of a wearing surface composed of a bituminous prime followed by
two (2) applications of bituminous seal coats with each seal coat receiving an application
of cover material in accordance with the Specifications and in conformity with the lines
shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer.

3/52 MATERIALS FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

3/52.1 Prime Coat: The prime coat shall be medium curing cut-back asphalt grade MC-70. The
rate of application shall be between 1.00 to 1.75 liters per square metre as specified by the
Engineer.

3/52.2 Seal Coat: The seal coat shall be 85/100 as per ASTM D946 penetration grade bitumen.
The bitumen may be cut back with up to 2% by weight of kerosene to improve adhesion to
the stone. The characteristics of the bitumen are shown in the following table:-

85-100 AS PER ASTM D946 PENETRATION GRADE BITUMEN

TEST METHOD OF MIN. MAX.
TESTING (ASTM)
Penetration at 25 deg. C 100 g, 5 D-5 85 100
sec.
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup, D-92 232 --
deg.C
Ductility at 25 deg. C,cum D-113 100 --
Solubility in trichoro ethylene, % D-2042 99 --
Thin film oven test 3.2 mm 163 D-1754 1.0
Deg. C 5 hours loss on heating
percent

January 2023 3-31 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

85-100 AS PER ASTM D946 PENETRATION GRADE BITUMEN

TEST METHOD OF MIN. MAX.
TESTING (ASTM)
*Penetration of residue percent of D-5 47 --
original
*Ductility of residue at 25 deg. C 5 D-113 75 --
cm/min cm

3/52.3 Cover Material: Aggregate for cover material shall be screenings of crushed stone which
are clean, tough, durable and free from dirt and other objectionable matter. The
percentages of wear shall not be more than thirty (30) as determined by ASTM C-131.
When subjected to five (5) cycles of magnesium sulphate soundness testing, as determined
by ASTM C-88, it shall have a weight loss not greater than ten (10) percent and a flakiness
index of not greater than 30 (BS 812: Part 105: Section 105.1) and ACV of 20% (BS 812
Part 110). Elongation Index not greater than 30 (BS 812:P105; Sec105.2) No less than
sixty (60) percent by weight of crushed stone shall consist of crushed pieces having two or
more faces produced by fracture when tested by Municipality standard test method DMS
8. Aggregate shall conform to the following gradations and shall be approved by the
Engineer.

DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

3/4” 1/2” 3/8” 1/4” No.4 No.10 No.30 No.200

First
70-90 0-15 -- 0-2 -- -- --
Course 100

Second
-- 100 90-100 60-85 0-25 0-5 0-2
Course --

3/53 EQUIPMENT FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

3/53.1 The equipment used by the Contractor shall include a power broom or a power blower, or
both; a self propelled, pneumatic-tyred roller, or steel-wheeled tandem roller (4 to 8 tons)
or both; self-propelled aggregate spreading equipment that can be adjusted to spread
accurately the specified amount per square metre; a bitumen distributor and equipment for
heating the asphaltic materials.

3/53.2 Other equipment may be used in addition to the specified equipment when approved or
requested by the Engineer.

3/54 PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE

TREATMENT

3/54.1 HEATING OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS shall be with equipment as specified. The use
of any method or agitation or heating that introduces free steam or moisture into the
bituminous material is prohibited. Materials heated to temperatures above twenty eight (28)
degrees C higher than the maximum application temperature specified shall be considered
as overheated and shall be rejected until the material can be resampled and retested. The

January 2023 3-32 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

reacceptance or final rejection will be made by the Engineer on the same requirements
under which the material was originally tested.

3/54.2 If aggregates are deemed by the Engineer to be dusty or dirty they shall be washed after
which their use shall not be permitted until all free water has evaporated or been drained.

3/55 APPLICATION OF DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

3/55.1 After the prime coat has been applied and has thoroughly penetrated the surface and cured
as specified, the Contractor shall apply 85/100 penetration bitumen and shall apply the
cover material and roll and manipulate the surface, all in accordance with the requirements
specified hereinafter. The material shall be uniformly applied at the rate designated to the
surface being sealed.

3/55.2 Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor in a uniform,

continuous speed over the section to be treated and within the temperature range specified.
The quantity of bituminous material to be used per square metre shall be within the limits
hereinafter specified and as directed by the Engineer.

3/55.3 A strip of building paper, at least one (1) metre in width and with a length equal to that of
the spray bar of the distributor plus thirty (30) centimetres, shall be used at the beginning
of each spread. The paper shall be removed and disposed of in an approved manner. The
distributor shall be moving forward at proper application speed at the time the spray bar is
opened. Any skipped areas or deficiencies shall be corrected in an approved manner.
Junctions of spreads shall be carefully made to ensure a smooth riding surface.

3/55.4 The length of spread of bituminous materials shall not be in excess of that which trucks
loaded with cover coat material can immediately cover.

3/55.5 The spread of bituminous material shall not be more than fifteen (15) centimeters wider
than the width covered by the cover coat material from the spreading device. Under no
circumstances shall operations proceed in such a manner that bituminous material will be
allowed to chill, set up, dry or otherwise impair retention of the cover coat.

3/55.6 The distributor, when not spreading, shall be so designed that the spray bar or mechanism
will not drip bituminous material on the surface of the travelled way.

3/55.7 Distribution of the bituminous material shall be so regulated and sufficient bituminous
material must remain in the distributor at the end of each application so that there will be a
uniform distribution of bituminous material. In no case shall the distributor be allowed to
expel air with the bituminous material thereby causing uneven coverage.

3/55.8 The angle of the spray nozzles and the height of the spray bar shall be so adjusted and
frequently checked so that uniform distribution is ensured. If the raise of the spray bar as
the load is excessive and contributes to drilling and streaking of the seal course, the frame
of the distributor shall be blocked or snubbed to the axle of the truck to maintain a constant
height of the spray bar above the road surface. The distribution shall cease immediately
upon any clogging or interference of any nozzle and corrective measures shall be taken
before distribution is resumed.

3/55.9 Application of Aggregate: Immediately following the application of the bituminous material,
cover material shall be spread with an approved aggregate spreader in quantities as
specified by the Engineer and within the limits specified herein. Spreading shall be

January 2023 3-33 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

accomplished in such a manner that the tyres of the trucks or aggregate spreader at no
time contact the uncovered and newly applied bituminous material.

3/55.10 The operations of distributing bituminous material shall not be in excess of one hundred
(100) linear meters ahead of the spreading of the aggregate.

3/55.11 Procedures of starting, stopping or turning of any piece of equipment which results in
displacement of the cover material or damage to the seal courses shall be prohibited.

3/55.12 The spreading equipment shall be of such width and arrangement that as the aggregate is
placed, complete coverage will be obtained. No brooming, dragging or blading of the cover
material shall be permitted prior to initial rolling. Any rearrangement of the cover material
shall be done by hand methods.

Overlapping the applications of cover material shall be avoided and all spillage shall be
removed from the surface. Before rolling, the bituminous material shall be uniformly
covered.

3/55.13 The rates of application for bituminous material and aggregate for “Double Bituminous
Surface Treatment” shall be within the following limits:

RATES OF APPLICATION OF ASPHALT AND AGGREGATE FOR DOUBLE

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

85/100 PENETRATION AGGREGATE

KG/SQ.M KG/SQ.M
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.

First application 0.70 1.10 12.5 15.00

(Course

Second 0.70 0.90 6.5 8.5

application
(Course)

/55.14 Manipulation: Immediately after the application of bituminous material and aggregate to the
road surface and after the aggregate has been rearranged as may be necessary to provide
uniform and complete coverage, the surface shall be sufficiently rolled with an approved
pneumatic-tyred roller to embed the aggregate thoroughly into the bituminous material.
Sufficient rollers shall be provided such that the initial rolling consisting of a single pass of
a 10-12 ton tandem steel wheel roller followed by at least two (2) complete coverages with
the pneumatic- tyred roller shall be completed with thirty (30) minutes after the cover
material is applied. The rollers shall be operated on each coverage so that each succeeding
trip of the roller will overlap at least fifty (50) percent of the width of the previous trip. No
blading or dragging of the aggregate will be permitted for the first seal coat. Any
rearrangement of the cover material before or during the initial rolling shall be done by
approved hand methods. Rolling shall be continued after the rolling specified above is
completed until a maximum amount of the aggregate is satisfactorily embedded in the
bituminous material. Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be operated at a maximum speed of
eight (8) kilometres per hour.

3/55.15 Second Seal Coat: Unless otherwise designated on the drawings, or directed by the
Engineer, the second seal coat shall not be applied for 48 hours after the application of the
first seal coat.

January 2023 3-34 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3/55.16 Immediately prior to the second application of bituminous material for sealing, the surface
shall be cleaned in an approved manner for all dust and excess cover material which is not
embedded in the first application of bituminous material for sealing. Care shall be exercised
not to dislodge any cover material which is embedded in the bituminous material. The
second seal coat shall be applied as previously specified. Brooms or drag brooms shall not
be used to shift the cover material until the initial rolling with the pneumatic-tyred roller is
completed and until the bituminous material has cooled and set up sufficiently to hold the
cover material, preferably not earlier than the day following the application of the second
seal coat. Any rearrangement of the cover material during the initial rolling shall be done
by approved hand methods.

3/55.17 The rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edge of the shoulder and
then progress towards the inner edge. Rolling shall continue until the entire surface has
been completely covered at least three (3) times with a pneumatic tyred roller. Maximum
speed of rollers shall be as previously specified.

3/55.18 Additional Manipulation of Completed Surfaces: The Contractor shall manipulate the
surface for a period of five (5) days after the second seal coat has been applied. The
manipulation shall consist of the application of additional aggregate or additional dragging
and rolling or all of these operations to portions of the surface that, as determined by the
Engineer, require such additional treatment. The manipulation shall also include the
dragging and one (1) complete rolling over the entire surface each day from the time the
surface is completed until and including the fifth (5th) day after. A light blade equipped with
a broom drag shall be operated immediately ahead of the roller throughout all rolling during
the manipulation period. The daily dragging and rolling under manipulation may be omitted,
if in the opinion of the Engineer, the weather and roadbed conditions are such that the
dragging and rolling would not be beneficial to the surface.

3/55.19 Aggregate and additional manipulation ordered by the Engineer, in this work, will not be
paid for separately but will be considered subsidiary to the item of ‘Double Bituminous
Surface Treatment” included in the “Bill of Quantities”.

3/55.20 Except for times when it is necessary for hauling equipment and/or pilot trucks to travel on
the newly applied seal coat, traffic of all types shall be kept off the seal coat until it has had
time to set properly. The minimum traffic free period shall be 24 hours.

3/55.21 Weather Limitations: Surface treatment operations shall be carried on only when the
surface is dry, when the atmospheric temperature is above fifteen (15) degrees C, and
when the weather is not dusty, foggy or rainy. The above requirements may be waived, but
only when so directed and in writing by the Engineer.

3/56 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES FROM BITUMEN SPLASHING

3/56.1 When bituminous materials are being applied the surface of all structures, wheel guards,
guard rail, kerbs and gutters, and other roadway appurtenances shall be protected in an
approved manner to prevent them from being splattered with bituminous material or marred
by equipment operation. In the event that any appurtenances become splattered or marred,
the Contractor shall at his own expense, remove all traces of bituminous materials, and
repair all damage, and leave the appurtenances in an approved condition.

3/56.2 Surface Preparation

The finished surface of the cement substrate shall have a maximum tolerance of +/-3mm
when measured with a 3m straightedge laid in any direction.

January 2023 3-35 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The surfaces shall be cleaned of all dirt and debris. Grease or oil if found on the surface of
concrete shall be cleaned using a strong solution of detergent mixed with water and the
surface shall be washed clean.

Application of Polyurethane Based Surface- Conipur Encapsulated Sandwich System

(ESW) or Equivalent

A coat of primer is applied over the substrate concrete prior to laying of polyurethane binder.
The base layer should be laid before the primer looses its adhesiveness. The base layer
consisting of black SBR granules and polyurethane binder shall be mixed as per
manufacturers recommendation and laid using pavers. The thickness of the base layer
shall be 7mm.

Over the base surface the poresealer shall be sprayed to seal all the pores found on the
base surface.

The top surface shall consist of specifically formulated Polyurethane and coloured Ethylene
Propylene Dien Mixing Polymerisat (EPDM) granules with sizes varying from 0.5mm to
1.5mm. The spray application should have a minimum thickness of 3mm.

A layer of sealing lacquer shall be applied over the sprayed Ethylene Propylene Dien Mixing
Polymerisat (EPDM) granules with a suitable spray machine to give a uniform and smooth
surface.

3/56.3 Lane Marking

The contractor shall provide lane marking, other signs and numbering on jogging tracks as
per the requirement of the client. The lane marking shall be provided with the material and
in the manner as recommended by the sports surface material supplier.

3/56.4 Surface Tolerance

At final completion of the sports surface the finished individual layers shall fall within the
following maximum tolerances.

Base course- +/- 3mm

Final surface course +/- 3mm

The finished surface shall have a maximum tolerance of +/-3mm when measured with a
3m straightedge laid in any direction.

All humps and depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected by the
contractor at his own cost.

January 2023 3-36 Section 3 – Pavement Construction

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 4

Concrete Works

January 2023 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT
SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION
4/1 CEMENT
4/2 AGGREGATES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4/3 FINE AGGREGATES
4/4 COARSE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE
4/5 COMBINED AGGREGATE
4/6 WATER FOR CONCRETE
4/7 APPLICABLE TESTS AND CODES
4/8 REINFORCEMENT BARS
4/9 BAR SCHEDULES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
4/10 BAR CUTTING AND BENDING
4/11 PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT
4/12 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
4/13 SPACER BLOCKS
4/14 ADMIXTURES
4/15 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION
4/16 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
4/17 QUALITY CONTROL
4/18 CONCRETE DESIGN LIMITS
4/19 CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE
4/20 TOLERANCES IN PROPORTIONING THE MATERIALS
4/21 ASSEMBLY AND HANDLING MATERIALS
4/22 MIXING CONCRETE
4/23 READY MIXED CONCRETE
4/24 TRANSPORT AND PLACING
4/25 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
4/26 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
4/27 CURING CONCRETE
4/28 EARLY LOADING
4/29 CONCRETING AT NIGHT
4/30 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER
4/31 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENT FOR CONCRETE
4/32 FORMWORK
4/33 CLASSES OF FINISH
4/34 MORTAR
4/35 EXTENT OF POURS

January 2023 Section 4 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 4 – CONCRETE WORKS

Concrete work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing structures of the
forms, shapes and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed in accordance with
the details shown on the Drawings and these Specifications.

4/1 CEMENT

Sulphate Resisting Cement

4/1.1 Sulphate Resisting Cement shall comply with BS 4027 or ASTM C150 Type 5. In addition
the cement shall comply with the following:-

- The acid soluble alkali level measured as (Na2 0+0.658 K2 0) shall not exceed
0.6% by weight determined in accordance with BS EN-196 Part 2:1995.
- The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290 KJ/Kg at 7 days when tested in
accordance with BS 4550 : Part 3 Section 3.8.
- The maximum limit for Tricalcium Aluminates content is 3.5% when tested
according to BS EN 196 : Part 2 : 1995.
- The specific surface shall be not greater than 375 m2/kg and not less than 280
m2/kg when tested in accordance with BS EN 196-Part 6.
- Cement strength generally shall be class 42.5N or other classes in accordance
with BS 4027 and Engineer’s requirements.

Ordinary Portland Cement

4/1.2 Ordinary Portland Cement shall conform to the requirements of BS 12 or ASTM C150 Type
1 with the following amendments:-

- The acid soluble alkali level measured as Na2 0+0.658 K20 shall not exceed 0.6%
by weight determined by the test method described in BS EN 196 Part 21.
- The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290 KJ/Kg at 7 days when tested in
accordance with BS 4550 : Part 3 Section 3.8.
- The specific surface (fineness) shall be not greater than 375 m2/kg and not less
than 280 m2/kg when tested as described in BS EN 196 :Part 6.
- Ordinary Portland Cement shall contain not less than 4% and not more than 13%
of Tricalcium Aluminates by weight.
- Cement strength generally shall be class 42.5N or other classes in accordance
with BS 12 and Engineer’s requirements.

Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement

4/1.3 Moderate sulphate resisting Portland Cement shall comply with ASTM C150 Type 2 but
containing not less than 4% and not more than 8% proportion by weight of tricalcium
aluminates with the following amendments. In either case the cement shall not contain
more than 2.5% proportion by weight of sulphur trioxide.

- The acid soluble alkali level measured as Na2 0+0.658 K20 shall not exceed 0.6%
by weight determined by the test method described in BS EN196-21.
- The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290 KJ/Kg at 7 days when tested in
accordance with BS 4550 : Part 3 Section 3.8.
- The specific surface (fineness) shall not be greater than 375 sq.m/Kg and not less
than 280 sq.m/Kg when tested as described in BS EN 196 : Part 6.

January 2023 4-1 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/1.4 Each cement batch shall bear manufacturer’s name and batch number. Type of cement
shall be the same as mentioned in the approved analysis report. Each separate
consignment of cement shall be tested by the manufacturer before delivery and certified
copies of such tests shall be supplied to the Engineer before any part of the consignment
is used in the works. The Engineer reserves the right to order a re-test of cement at any
time. Approval of cement does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to produce
concrete of the specified strength.

4/1.5 Cement shall be delivered to site in bulk, or with the Engineer’s approval, may be supplied
in sealed bags, which shall bear the manufacturer’s name and the date of manufacture.
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer’s batch test
certificate and certificate of guarantee.

4/1.6 Each consignment of cement shall be kept separate, identified and used in order of
delivery.

4/1.7 Any consignment not used within 2 months from the date of manufacture will not be allowed
to be used in the works.

4/1.8 One brand only of cement as approved by the Engineer shall be used throughout the works
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer in writing.

4/2 AGGREGATES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4/2.1 Except as may be modified hereunder the aggregate (fine and coarse) for all types of
concrete shall comply in all respects with BS 882 “Concrete aggregates from natural
sources” and the fine aggregate shall also comply with Sharjah Municipality Administrative
Order No. 143/91.

4/2.2 The aggregates used in the permanent works shall be naturally occurring or crushed
materials obtained only from approved sources.

4/2.3 Before any material from a particular source is used, the Contractor shall obtain
representative samples of fine and coarse aggregates and carry out the necessary tests
and analyses to show that the samples comply with the Specification. During the progress
of the works, the grading and chemical characteristics may be checked at frequent
intervals.

4/2.4 The results of these tests, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer and his approval shall be
obtained before any of the material is used in the works. Part of each sample will be
required for concrete trial mixes and part shall be retained for comparison with subsequent
deliveries.

4/2.5 Sampling for testing and analysis shall be carried out, where applicable, in accordance with
BS 812 Part 102.

4/2.6 The maximum size of the aggregate shall not be larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension
between sides of the number for which the concrete is to be used and not larger than 3/4
of the maximum clear distance between reinforcing bars.

4/2.7 Fine aggregate shall be natural or crushed sand and beach sand shall not be permitted for
use in concrete mixes.

January 2023 4-2 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/2.8 Coarse aggregate shall be crushed aggregate obtained from a quarry approved by the
Engineer.

4/2.9 Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer coarse aggregate shall be delivered to site in
separate sizes according to the maximum specified aggregate size for each grade of
concrete.

4/2.10 Each and every stockpile of aggregate shall meet the requirements of Table 4.1.

4/2.11 The frequency of testing of aggregates shall be in accordance with Table 4.2. or as directed
by the Engineer.

Table 4.1 - Limits for Physical, Chemical and Mechanical Properties of Aggregates
for Concrete

SR. KIND OF TEST PERMISSIBLE LIMITS

NO. REQUIREMENT METHODS
BS 812 : FINES COARSE
ASTM:

1. Grading BS EN 933-1- Standard Standard

1997

2. Material finer than BS EN 933-1-

0.075 mm Natural, 1997 or ASTM max. 3% max. 1%
uncrushed/crushed C117:2004 max. 7% max. 1%
rock

3. Clay lumps and friable C142 max. 1% max. 1%

particles

4. Light weight pieces C123 max. 0.5% max. 0.5%

5. Organic impurities for fine C40 The colour of the supernatant liquid
aggregate is lighter than standard colour
solution

6. Water absorption C128/C127 max. 2.3% max. 2.0%

7. Specific Gravity (apparent) C128/C127 min. 2.60 min. 2.60

8. Shell content in BS EN 933-

aggregates 7:1998 max.10%
Coarser than 4 mm

January 2023 4-3 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SR. KIND OF TEST PERMISSIBLE LIMITS

NO. REQUIREMENT METHODS
BS 812 : FINES COARSE
ASTM:

9. Particle shape
Flakiness index Part [Link] max. 25*
Elongation index 105-1 max. 25*
Part [Link]
Partially crushed faces of 105-2
Aggregate (with at least 100%
one crushed face) DMS 8

10. Acid soluble Chlorides, CL. Part 117,

Appendix C
For reinforced concrete
made with SRPC max. 0.03% max.0.01%
cements max. 0.03% max 0.02%
OPC & MSRPC cements

For mass
concrete max.0.03% max 0.02%
made with max.0.03% max.0.04%
SRPC cements
OPC & MSRPC cements max. 0.03% max 0.01%

For prestressed concrete &

11. steam
Acid structural
soluble concrete
sulphate, S03 BS EN max. 0.3% max. 0.3%
1744-
1:1998

12. Soundness, MgS04 (5 C88 max. 12% max. 12%

cycles)

13. Mechanical
Strength 10% Part 111 min. 100KN
fines value Part 112 max. 30%
or Impact value
C131/C535 max. 30%
Los Angeles Abrasion

14. Drying Shrinkage Part 120 max. 0.05%

15. Potential Reactivity

Note 2 Of Aggregates, C289 Innocuous Innocuous
Chemical Method

Of Cement-Aggregate C227 6 month 10%

Combination expansion 0.
max.

January 2023 4-4 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

* The index shall be 25% for combined aggregates and should not exceed more
than 30% for individual sizes.

Note 1: There is no requirement of shell content in sands passing 5mm sieve size.

Note 2: Aggregates may initially be assessed for its reactivity in accordance with ASTM
C289 and if potential reactivity is indicated, then mortar bar tests in accordance with ASTM
C227 shall be carried out.

Table 4.2 - Frequency of Routine Tests on Aggregates

SR. KIND OF REQUIREMENT - TEST TEST FREQUENCY RATE

NO. METHOD

1. Grading – BS EN 933-1-97 3
Each 2 weeks or per 500 m
whichever is more frequent.

2. Material finer than 0.075 mm - do -

- BS EN 933-1-97 or ASTM C 117

3. Clay lumps and Friable Particles - do -

-ASTM C142

4. Organic impurities ASTM C40 - do -

5. Water absorption - ASTM C128/C127 - do -

6. Specific Gravity - ASTM C128/C127 - do -

7. Shell content – BS EN 933-7:1998 - do -

8. Particle shape BS812 : Part 105 - do -

Section 105.1 ; BS812: Part 105
Section 105.2

9. Acid soluble chlorides, CL: BS812 : Part - do -

117-1988
Appendices A&B
- Appendix-C

10. Acid soluble sulphates, - do -

S03 – BS EN 1744-1:1998

11. Soundness, Mg S04 (5 cycles) - do -

ASTM C88

January 2023 4-5 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SR. KIND OF REQUIREMENT - TEST TEST FREQUENCY RATE

NO. METHOD

12 Mechanical Strength

10% Fines or impact value - do –

-BS812 : Parts 111, 112

Los Angeles abrasion - - do -

ASTM C131/C535

13. Moisture variation in sand - by Twice daily

Moisture Meters

14. Drying Shrinkage At the start of the project and

BS812 : Part 120 whenever there is a change in
the source of supply

15. Potential Reactivity: At the start of the project and

wherever there is a change in the
of aggregates (ASTM C295, C289) source of supply

of Carbonate (ASTM C586)

of Cement aggregate combination

(ASTM P214 and C227)

Frequency of testing may be amended by the Engineer based on previous test results

Note : Drying Shrinkage and potential reactivity of aggregates shall be determined initially
at the start of the project or whenever there is a change in the source of supply.

4/3 FINE AGGREGATES

4/3.1 The gradation of fine aggregate shall be in accordance with BS 882 latest edition.

4/3.2 Each batch of aggregate delivered to site shall be kept separate from previous batches and
shall be stored for at least 3 (three) working days before use to allow inspection and tests
to be carried out.

4/3.3 Fine Aggregate shall be clean sharp natural and/or crushed sand and shall comply with BS
882.

4/3.4 The Contractor shall mechanically wash aggregate to remove salts and other impurities in
order to meet the requirement specified.

January 2023 4-6 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/4 COARSE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE

4/4.1 Coarse aggregate shall be prepared as single sized aggregate and blended to produce
normal size grading. The combined grading shall be within the appropriate grading limits
given in BS882.

4/4.2 Aggregates that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement in an amount
sufficient to cause excessive expansion of concrete shall not be used.

4/4.3 The Contractor shall mechanically wash aggregate to remove salts and other impurities in
order to meet the requirement specified.

4/5 COMBINED AGGREGATE

4/5.1 Approved coarse aggregate and fine aggregate in each batch shall be combined in
proportions as specified in BS 882 and as approved by the Engineer. However, in no case
shall materials passing the 0.075mm, sieve exceed three (3) percent by weight of the
combined aggregate.

4/5.2 The combined aggregate gradation used in the work shall be as specified, except when
otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer. Changes from gradation to another shall
not be made during progress of the work unless approved by the Engineer.

4/6 WATER FOR CONCRETE

4/6.1 The Contractor shall make his own arrangement and obtain approval for the supply of
water.

4/6.2 The mixing water should be clear, apparently clean and free from matter harmful to
concrete in its fresh or hardened state. Potable water can be used. Water of questionable
quality should comply with the physical tests of Table 4.3 and chemical limitation listed in
Table 4.4. Water shall also meet the requirement of BS 3148.

4/6.3 The temperature of water for concrete should not be less than 5 degree Celsius nor more
25 degree Celsius. Water may be cooled to not less than 5 degree Celsius by the gradual
addition of chilled water or ice but on mixing, no ice particles should be present in the mix.
Alternatively, flaked ice may be used. The ice to be used should be crushed and should be
the product of frozen water, which complies, with acceptance criteria of Tables 4.3 and 4.4.

4/6.4 Water for curing concrete shall not contain impurities in sufficient amounts to cause
discoloration of the concrete. Sources of Water shall be maintained at such depth and the
water shall be withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass and other foreign
matter.

January 2023 4-7 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Table 4.3 - Acceptance Criteria and Physical Tests for Mixing Water

LIMITS ASTM
TEST

Compressive strength, min.% 90 C109

control at 7 days

Setting time, deviation from from 1:00 early C191

control, h:min. to 1:30 later

Table 4.4 - Chemical Limitations for Mixing Water

SR. NO. MAX. CONCENTRATION LIMIT, PPM TEST METHOD

1. Chloride as Cl 250 ASTM D512

2. Sulphates as SO4 350 ASTM D516

3. Alkali carbonates and 500 ASTM D513

bicarbonates
4. Total dissolved solids, including 2000 BS1377 : Part
1, 2 & 3 above 3 : Test 8
5. PH min.7/max.9 ASTM D1293

4/7 APPLICABLE TESTS AND CODES

4/7.1 All concrete, aggregate, cement and water shall be sampled and tested during construction
as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All test samples shall be supplied by
the Contractor at his expense. Samples shall be obtained in accordance with BS 812, BS
3148, BS 1881 and BS EN196. Testing shall be at the frequencies stated in the
Specifications or relevant standards. All sampling shall be carried out by the Engineer.

4/7.2 Workability: Workability shall be assessed by the following tests the requirements for
which shall be as specified elsewhere in the documents.

Slump test shall be performed according to BS 1881 Part 102.

Compaction factor shall be performed according to BS 1881 Part 103.
Vebe time shall be performed according to BS 1881 Part 104.
Flow test shall be performed according to BS 1881 Part 105.

4/7.3 Compression Test: The Compression tests shall be performed on cubes 150 x 150 x 150
mm as described in BS 1881 Part 116. Sampling, making test cubes and curing of cubes
shall be in accordance with BS 1881 Parts 101, 108 and 111 respectively.

January 2023 4-8 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/8 REINFORCEMENT BARS

4/8.1 All reinforcement bars shall be of a deformed type in accordance with BS 4449- 1997,
except that plain bars may be used where specifically indicated on the Drawings. Hot rolled
plain round bars shall be in accordance with Grade 250 of BS4449-1997.

4/8.2 All steel reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications for Deformed
High Yield Steel Bars grade 460 Type 2, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or
specified by the Engineer.

4/8.3 Certification: Three (3) copies of a mill test report shall be furnished to the Engineer for
each lot of steel reinforcement bars proposed for use on the project.

4/8.4 Identification: The bars in each lot shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer and/or
fabricator before being offered for inspection. The tag shall show the manufacturer’s test
number and lot number and other applicable data such as Heat number that will identify
the material with the certificate issued for that lot of steel.

4/8.5 The fabricator shall furnish three (3) copies of a certification which shows the heat number
or numbers from which each size of bar in the shipment was fabricated.

4/8.6 The Engineer reserves the right to sample and inspect all reinforcement steel upon its
arrival at the work site. The Contractor shall provide a certificate confirming that samples
taken from the bars delivered to the works comply with BS 4449. The frequency of sampling
and testing shall be in accordance with BS 4449.

4/8.7 All reinforcement bars shall be free from detrimental dirt, mill scale, loose rust, paint,
grease, oil or other foreign substance, fins, or tears. There shall be no evidence of visual
flaws in the bars, test specimens or on the sheared ends of the bars.

4/8.8 Uncoated reinforcement shall be grit-blasted before use to remove rust, oil, grease, salt
and other deleterious materials and where pitting has occurred the causes and products
thereof. Repeated blasting may be required when the reinforcement is in position, or
partially cast in. Partially set concrete adhering to exposed bars during concreting
operations shall be removed.

4/8.9 The minimum thickness of concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the
drawings. Only approved concrete spacers shall be used. The concrete shall be of similar
grade to the main concrete and shall have non-metallic ties.

4/9 BAR SCHEDULES AND SHOP DRAWINGS

4/9.1 Before ordering reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall check the bar schedules and adjust
them if necessary to the approval of the Engineer. Bar schedules shall show the weight of
each bar, the total weight of each bar size and the total weight of bars, and bending
diagrams for bars in accordance with BS 4466.

4/9.2 The Contractor shall provide and submit to the Engineer for approval any working drawings
additional to the Contract Drawings, which may be found necessary for the production of,
revised bar schedules or for the completion of the works.

January 2023 4-9 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/9.3 The approval of working drawings, or revised bar schedules by the Engineer shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such drawings or
schedules.

4/10 BAR CUTTING AND BENDING

4/10.1 Reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS 4466. Cutting or bending by
the application of heat is not permitted. Welding of reinforcement shall only be permitted
when approved in writing by the Engineer. If such approval is given then the workmanship
shall be in accordance with BS 5135. The Contractor shall submit full technical details of
his proposed procedures prior to seeking approval.

4/10.2 Hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent again, having once been bent.
If the Engineer gives approval to bend mild steel reinforcement projecting from the
concrete, the internal radius of bend shall not be less than four times the nominal size of
the bar.

4/11 PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT

4/11.1 Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the Contract
Drawings. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all bar intersections shall be tied
together using 1.2mm diameter steel wire or No. 18 gauge stainless steel wire as indicated
on the drawings and the ends of the tying wire shall be turned into the main body of the
concrete.

4/11.2 Metal supports, approved by the Engineer, shall be provided and used to retain the
reinforcement at proper distances from the forms. Supports under horizontal bars at the
bottom of base slabs shall be spaced at not more than eighty (80) diameters of the bar. All
reinforcement shall be so rigidly supported and fastened that displacement will not occur
during construction. Reinforcing steel shall be inspected in place and must be approved by
the Engineer before any concrete is deposited.

4/11.3 No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where described in the Contract
Drawings or where approved by the Engineer.

4/11.4 Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from the concrete at construction or other joints
shall not be bent out of position during the periods in which concreting is suspended, except
with the approval of the Engineer.

4/12 WELDED WIRE FABRIC

4/12.1 Welded wire fabric to be used for the reinforcement of concrete shall conform to the
following requirements:

- Dimensions: Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to the size and dimensions
shown on the Drawings.

- Properties: Wire fabric furnished under this specification shall conform to the
requirements for “Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement” AASHTO
M55-81 or to BS4483.

January 2023 4-10 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/13 SPACER BLOCKS

4/13.1 Spacers as approved by the Engineer shall be of such material and design as will be
durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete
cover.

4/13.2 Spacer blocks made from cement, sand and small aggregate shall match the mix
proportions of the surrounding concrete so far as is practicable with a view to being
comparable in strength, durability and appearance.

4/14 ADMIXTURES

4/14.1 Unless agreed by the Engineer neither admixtures nor cements containing additives shall
be used.

4/14.2 Where the use of admixture had been agreed by the Engineer, they shall conform to the
requirements of Type A, Type D, Type F or Type G as specified in ASTM C494 and shall
be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Primary tests of cube strength and other tests shall be carried out using the combination of
aggregates cements and admixtures proposed for use.

4/14.3 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the use of any approved admixtures.

4/14.4 Approved methods and equipment shall be used for dispensing and incorporating the
admixture into the concrete. The dispensing unit shall be designed so that the discharge of
the admixture is visible.

4/15 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION

4/15.1 Concrete shall be as shown in the Table of 4.5. The number of mixes may require to be
increased.

The criteria given in the Table are designed to produce concrete of the required strength
and durability.

If the maximum aggregate size is 10mm then the cement content stipulated for the class of
concrete given in table 4.5 shall be increased by 40 Kg per m3.

Table 4.5 Table of Mixes without any Admixture or Additive

CONCRETE MAX. MIN. MAX. FREE CHARACTERISTIC CUBE

CLASS SIZE QTY. OF WATER / STRENGTH CCS
AGG. CEMENT CEMENT
RATIO
MM. KG PER M3 7-DAY 28-DAY
N/MM2 N/MM2
45/20 20/40 400 0.425 33 45
40/20 20/40 370 0.475 30 40
37/20 20 350 0.50 26 37
35/20 20 330 0.525 25 35

January 2023 4-11 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

CONCRETE MAX. MIN. MAX. FREE CHARACTERISTIC CUBE

CLASS SIZE QTY. OF WATER / STRENGTH CCS
AGG. CEMENT CEMENT
RATIO
MM. KG PER M3 7-DAY 28-DAY
N/MM2 N/MM2
30/20 20 310 0.55 20 30
25/20 20 275 0.60 16 25
15/20 20 250 0.65 10 15

The CCSs are for concrete which has been cured at a temperature of 23 degrees C +/- 2
degree C, and are the values below which no more than 5% of the test results fall. The 7-
day strengths shall be used only as a guide.

4/15.2 Concrete shall comply with BS 8110 except where BS 8007 or this specification differs.
Sampling for test purposes shall comply with BS 1881 Part 101 (on site) & Part 125 (in
laboratory)

If the air-entertainment is specified the average air content at the time of placing measured
in accordance with BS 1881 Part 106 shall be:

Concrete containing 20mm

Maximum size aggregate 5% + 1%

Concrete for water-retaining shall be watertight and shall comply with the recommendations
of BS 8007.

Concrete for paving or precast units shall be tested to BS EN 12390-5 and shall have a
minimum flexural beam strength of 3.5 N/mm2 at 28 days. If the concrete has a specified
CCS of 40N/mm2 or greater, then the minimum flexural strength shall be 4N/mm2.
If concrete specimens are cured at higher temperatures or for longer periods than BS 1881
Part 111 requires, the adjusted CCS shall be calculated as follows:

100f’/f = A+B log {24D(T+12)/1000}

f’ = adjusted CCS
f = specified CCS
T = curing temperature
D = age at testing in days
A&B = are coefficients given in the following table

The above equation applies only to OPC, MSRPC and SRPC.

Recorded Cube Strength N/mm2 A B

Less than 15 10.0 67.5

15 - 35 20.0 60.0
Greater than 35 30.0 52.5

January 2023 4-12 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

This calculation may be applied for curing at temperatures up to 27 deg.C.

Before placing concrete the Contractor shall obtain approval of the mixes proposed for
each class of concrete and the average target strengths. The mixes shall be designed to
achieve the minimum workability for the Contractor to place and compact the concrete with
the equipment proposed for use.

The mean strength shall exceed the CCS by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation
expected from the concreting plant, except that no standard deviation less than 3.5 N/mm2
shall be used as a basis for designing a mix. Unless otherwise approved a standard
deviation of 7 N/mm2 shall be used for initial mixes.

4/15.3 The ultimate compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined on test specimens
obtained and prepared in accordance with BS 1881. Part 108. BS 5328 Part IV to be
referred in case of marginal failures to attain the minimum specified strength.

4/15.4 Mixes for structural concrete shall be designed by the Contractor. The class of concrete
(shown on the drawings) is denoted by the 28 day characteristic cube strength and the
maximum size of aggregate.

4/15.5 The chloride and sulphate levels in the concrete mix shall comply with the following
requirements:-

Maximum Limits of acid soluble Chloride and Sulphate content as a percentage by Weight
of Cement in the Mix.

SR. TYPE OF CONCRETE CHLORIDES AS CL SULPHATES AS SO3

NO. (CLAUSE 10.2, (CLAUSE 10.3,
BS1881, PART 124) BS1881, PART 124)

a. For reinforced
concrete
if made with 0.30 3.70
OPC/MSRPC 0.06 3.70
if made with SRPC

b. Prestressed concrete
& Heat-cured
reinforced concrete 0.10 3.70

c. For mass concrete

if made with
OPC/MSRPC 0.60 3.70
if made with SRPC 0.12 3.70

Note: The OPC and MSRPC cements can also contain chlorides, the relevant standard BS
12 allows upto 0.1% Cl. Therefore any chloride content present in the cement has to be
taken into account while computing total C1 in the mix. In case the cement contains the
maximum limit of 0.1%, then the aggregates, water and admixtures used for prestressed
concrete or heat cured reinforced concrete should be absolutely free of chlorides.

January 2023 4-13 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/16 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

4/16.1 Concrete Mix Design and Trial Mixes shall be verified by Municipality.

Preliminary laboratory tests shall be carried out to determine the mixes to satisfy the
specification with the approved materials.

Trial mixes shall be tested to determine the following properties of mixes proposed for initial
field tests:

a) Bleeding in accordance with ASTM C232 (non-vibrating) shall not exceed 0.5%.
b) Drying shrinkage in accordance with BS 1881 Part 5.
c) Air content if applicable BS EN 12350 Part 7.
d) Free water/cement ratio
e) Workability BS 1881 Part 102.
f) Fresh and hardened concrete densities BS 1881 Parts 107 and 114
respectively.
g) Compressive strength BS 1881 Part 116.
h) Water depth of penetration BS EN 12390 Part 8. (maximum 10mm at 28 days)
(maximum 15mm at 7 days)
i) Chloride permeability to ASTM C1202 (maximum 2000 coulomb at 28 days).
j) Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) of concrete shall be as per BS 1881 Part
208. limit for ISTA test:0.2ml/m2/[Link].
k) Water absorption of hardened concrete – BS 1881:P-122:1983 limit 2.0%max.

If the values obtained are unacceptable, the mixes shall be re-designed.

4/16.2 At least 35 days before commencement of concreting trial mixes shall be prepared under
full-scale site conditions and tested in accordance with BS 1881.

Samples of concrete incorporating the reinforcing details to be used shall be cast and
examined, before hardening using hand tools, and after hardening by coring to assess the
mixes. Cores shall be taken in accordance with BS 1881 Part 120.

Trial mixes shall be made on each of three days; the workability shall equate to the
designed target value. Six cubes from each mix shall be taken, three for test at 28 days.

Further trial mixes shall be made if the range (the maximum minus the minimum of the
three cube results in any batch) exceeds 15% of the average of that batch, or if the range
of the three batch averages exceeds 20% of the overall average of the batches.

The mixes shall be tested to determine the following properties:

a) Bleeding in accordance with ASTM C232.
b) Air content if applicable BS EN 12350 Part 7.
c) Free water/cement ratio.
d) Tensile strength in accordance with BS EN 12390 – 5 and ASTM C 496.

The average 28-day CCS of the three trial mixes shall not be less than the designed mean
strength, and the results of the above tests shall be acceptable before the mix is approved.
Otherwise the mix shall be re-designed.

4/16.3 The Engineer will review the Contractor’s trial-mixes and crush the test cubes at seven (7)
and twenty-eight (28) days. The Engineer will then determine which of the trial mixes shall
be used. If none of the trial mixes for a class of concrete meets the Specifications, the
Engineer will direct the Contractor to prepare additional trial- mixes. No class of concrete

January 2023 4-14 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

shall be prepared or placed until its job-mix proportions have been approved by the
Engineer.

4/16.4 The approval of the job-mix proportions by the Engineer or his assistance to the Contractor
in establishing those proportions, in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of
producing concrete which meets the requirements of these Specifications.

4/16.5 The Engineer may also require practical tests to be made on the Site by filling trial moulds
to confirm the suitability of the mix for the works, the type of plant used for mixing, the
method of compaction used and the formwork face intended for use in the works.

4/16.6 All costs connected with the preparations of trial-mixes and the design of the job- mixes
shall be borne by the Contractor.

4/16.7 In the event, any Concrete mix that is currently being used in another running Municipality
project, is proposed by the contractor for used in this contract, then prior to according
approval, the Engineer will ensure that,

1. All copies of test reports pertaining to the proposed mix submitted by the contractor
comply with Specification requirements as stated in this contract and

2. The mix proposed complies with clause 4/16 of this contract by verifying it at SCL.

Note: Any mix that is obsolete and currently not in use shall be accepted at all for re-
approval.

4/17 QUALITY CONTROL

4/17.1 Test Cubes

Cubes shall be manufactured in an on-site laboratory, specially equipped for the purpose,
in controlled conditions. They shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested to BS
1881 : Part 108, 111 and 116. The method of compacting cubes shall be as approved and
shall be means of vibrating table in the laboratory or 25mm vibrating poker on site.

4/17.2 Sampling Cubes Cylinders

A sample of concrete shall be taken at random on eight separate occasions during the first
five days of using a mix at least one sample being taken each day. The standard deviation
shall be calculated from at least 40 individual cube results each representing separate
batches of similar concrete produced by the same plant under the same supervision. The
current margin for the plant shall be thus established as 1.64 times the standard deviation.

Thereafter one sample shall be taken at random for each class of concrete in accordance
with Clause 4/31 of the Specification.

In addition to the above requirements, at least one sample shall be taken from each
individual structural unit, or part of a unit, when the latter is the product of a single pour.

From each sample three cubes shall be made for testing at 28 days and three for testing
at 7 days for control purposes.

Six cylinder samples shall also be taken to determine the split tensile strength of the
concrete 3 at 7 days and 3 at 28 days, in accordance with ASTM C 496. These samples

January 2023 4-15 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

shall be taken from every 100 batches, but at least once a week during concreting
operations, and shall coincide with samples taken for test cubes.

The frequency of sampling may be required to be varied if directed by the Engineer.

The procedures shall be repeated when materials or design mixes are changed.

Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete cylinder shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
496:1996.

4/17.3 Cube Strength Results

The results will be acceptable if:

i. The average strength determined at the age of 28 days from a sample of three of
more cube test results exceed the specified CCS by 0.5 times the current margin
ii. No individual result of the sample is less than that (Specified CCS minus 3 N/mm2),
iii. Number of individual results in the sample below specified CCS is not more than
one.

If any of the above criteria is not satisfied, the unit represented by the sample is
questionable and the following actions may be instructed as appropriate:

i. Cutting and testing cores from placed concrete

ii. Non-destructive testing of placed concrete
iii. Load-testing relevant structural units
iv. Cutting-out and replacing defective concrete

If the range of individual cube strengths made from the same sample exceeds 15% of the
mean then the method of making, curing and testing cubes shall be checked. In the event
of a sample having a range exceeding 20% then the result shall be unacceptable and the
Engineer may order any of the following actions.

i. Changing the mix

ii. Improving quality control
iii. Cutting and testing cores from placed concrete
iv. Non-destructive testing of placed concrete

In the event cutting and testing of cores are required, the Contractor shall cut cores from
approved locations and test them to BS 1881 as modified by BS 6089.

4/17.4 Durability Tests

Concrete shall be tested for durability properties by undertaking absorption and

permeability tests where appropriate, or directed by the Engineer, as directed below:

Water absorption tests shall be carried out in the laboratory on 75mm diameter cores cut
at an age of 24 to 28 days to enable the tests to be carried out between 28 and 32 days in
accordance with BS 1881 Part 122. The upper acceptable limit for absorption after 30
minutes shall be 2%.

Tests in accordance with the method described in Depth of Water Penetration – BS EN

12390; Part 8 shall be carried out. The maximum acceptable penetration at seven days
shall be 15 mm. The maximum acceptable penetration at 28 days shall be 10 mm.

January 2023 4-16 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/17.5 Other Tests:

When instructed by the Engineer concrete shall be tested for drying shrinkage and wetting
expansion, for which 75 x 75 mm prisms shall be prepared and tested in accordance with
Test 5 of BS 1881 (1970) Part 5 or BS 6073 Part 1 Appendix D. The maximum acceptable
limits shall be:

Drying Shrinkage : 0.05%

Wetting Expansion : 0.03%

Cubes may be required and trials carried out to determine stripping times for formwork, the
duration of curing and to check testing and sampling errors.

The air content of air-entrained concrete shall be determined (ASTM C231) for each batch
produced until consistency has been achieved, when batches may be tested. The
maximum value shall not exceed 2%.

Compaction factor, slump, vebe or other workability tests shall be carried out as required
during concreting of permanent works to control workability at the batching plant at the site
of the pour. The degree of workability shall be as for the trial mixes; permitted tolerance
shall be in accordance with BS 5328.

4/18 CONCRETE DESIGN LIMITS

4/18.1 The following will be designated by the Engineer within the limits of the Specifications.

a) The minimum cement content in kg. per cubic metre of concrete

b) The maximum allowable water/cement ratio including surface moisture, but
excluding water absorbed by the aggregates.
c) Slump or Slumps designated at the point of delivery.
d) Changes requested by the Contractor in mix proportioning previously approved
shall be made only with the agreement of the Engineer.
e) When, in the opinion of the Engineer, cement is being lost due to windy conditions,
the Contractor shall add additional amounts of cement as directed by the Engineer.
No additional payment shall be made for the added cement.
f) Failure of the mixed concrete to meet specifications as determined by the Engineer
will be grounds for the Engineer to reject the concrete.
g) Bleeding limitations when tested in accordance with ASTM C232.

4/19 CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE

4/19.1 The Consistency of concrete shall be determined in the field by the Slump Test. The
consistency of concrete at the time of delivery will be designated by the Engineer and shall
not vary by more than 25 mm from the designated consistency.

4/20 TOLERANCES IN PROPORTIONING THE MATERIALS

4/20.1 Cement

In the case of bagged cement it shall be measured as packed by the manufacturer; a sack
of cement shall weigh fifty (50) kilograms.

January 2023 4-17 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Measurement for proportioning all cement shall be accurate to within two (2) percent
throughout the range of use. Only full bags, undamaged or unbroken will be permitted.

4/20.2 Water

The mixing water shall be measured by weight or by volume. In either case the
measurement shall be accurate to within one (1) percent throughout the range of use.

4/20.3 Aggregate

The aggregates shall be measured by weight to an accuracy within two (2) percent through-
out the range of use.

4/21 ASSEMBLY AND HANDLING MATERIALS

Assembly

4/21.1 Aggregates shall be assembled in such quantities that sufficient material approved by the
Engineer is available to complete any continuous pour necessary for any element. The
batching site shall be of adequate size to permit the stockpiling of sufficient, unsegregated
materials, having proper and uniform moisture content, to ensure continuous and uniform
operation. Aggregates shall enter the mixer in a manner approved by the Engineer and in
such a manner to ensure that no matter foreign to the concrete or matter capable of
changing the desired proportions is included. In the event two (2) or more sizes or types of
coarse or fine aggregates are used on the same project, only one (1) size or type of each
aggregate may be used on one continuous concrete pour.

Stockpiling of Aggregates

4/21.2 All aggregates shall be stockpiled before use in order to prevent segregation of material, to
ensure a uniform moisture content and to provide uniform conditions for proportioning plant
control.

4/21.3 The use of equipment or methods of handling aggregates which result in the degradation
and contamination of the aggregates is strictly prohibited. Bulldozers with metal tracks shall
not be used on coarse aggregate stockpiles. All equipment used for handling aggregates
shall be approved by the Engineer.

4/21.4 Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in the manner approved by the Engineer, and in addition,
every precaution shall be taken to prevent segregation. Segregation shall be prevented by
making no layer higher than one and one-half (1.5) meters and if two (2) or more layers are
required, each successive layer shall not be allowed to ‘cone’ down over the next lower
layer.

4/21.5 Aggregates shall not be stockpiled against the supports of proportioning hoppers and
weighing devices.

Segregation

4/21.6 Segregated aggregates shall not be used until they have been thoroughly remixed and the
resultant pile is of uniform and acceptable gradation at any point from which a
representative sample is taken. The Contractor shall re-mix aggregate piles when ordered
by the Engineer.

January 2023 4-18 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Transporting of Aggregates

4/21.7 If aggregates are to be transported from a central proportioning plant to the mixer in batch-
boxes or dump trucks, such equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to carry the full volume
of materials for each batch of concrete. Partitions separating batches shall be approved by
the Engineer and shall be adequate and effective to prevent spilling from one compartment
to another whilst in transit or being dumped.

Cement

4/21.8 Cement shall be stored in a dry weather-proof shed with a raised wooden floor or in a silo
and shall be delivered in quantities sufficient to ensure that there is no suspension or
interruption of the work of concreting at any time. If stored in sheds, each consignment shall
be kept separate and distinct.

4/22 MIXING CONCRETE

4/22.1 The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. The
accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked
against accurate weights and volumes when required by the Engineer.

4/22.2 The mass of cement and of aggregate indicated by the mechanism employed shall be
within a tolerance of 2% of the respective mass per batch agreed by the Engineer. The
mass of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water
contained in them. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of
free water contained in the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the
Contractor by a method approved by the Engineer immediately before mixing begins and
further as the Engineer requires.

4/22.3 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mixer
manufactured in accordance with BS 1305. Where appropriate the batch capacity, method
of loading, mixing time and drum speed shall conform to the details furnished in accordance
with the requirements of BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix
proportions being used. The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the
tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when
it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerance by adjustment. The period of mixing,
judged from the time that all the ingredients including water are in the mixing drum shall be
as ordered by the Engineer’s representative but shall not be less than 2 minutes or 20
revolutions of the drum whichever is the longer.

All plants shall be equipped with an approved automatic cycling and monitoring system
installed as part of the batching equipment. The system shall include equipment for
accurately proportionating the various components of the mixture by mass. Admixtures may
be measured volumetrically. The automatic proportioning system shall be capable of
consistently delivering each constituent within the tolerances specified. All records of
batches shall show the batch weights, the batch number, the day, the month, the year and
the time of day to the nearest minute for each batch. This information shall be imprinted on
the record so that each batch may be permanently identified. The Engineer will be provided
with a clear and legible copy of all batch records for concrete supplied for the project.

4/22.4 Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before any fresh concrete is mixed.

January 2023 4-19 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/22.5 The method of discharge from the mixer shall be such as to cause no segregation whether
partial or otherwise of the concrete materials.

4/22.6 The Contractor shall ensure that the constituent materials of the concrete are sufficiently
cool to prevent the concrete from stiffening in the interval between its discharge from the
mixer and compaction in its final position. Precautions shall include the shading of
aggregate stockpiles and the use of chilled water.

4/23 READY MIXED CONCRETE

4/23.1 Ready mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328, batched off the site, may be used only with
the agreement of the Engineer and shall comply with all requirements of the Contract.

4/23.2 The Concrete shall be carried in purpose-made agitators, operating continuously, or truck
mixers. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 1 hour of the
introduction of cement to the aggregates, unless a longer time is agreed by the Engineer.
The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight
of the constituents of each mix.

4/23.3 When truck mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under the supervision, either at
the Site or at the central batching plant as agreed by the Engineer but in no circumstances
shall water be added in transit.

4/23.4 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge
performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 4251. Mixing shall continue for the
number and rate of revolutions recommended in accordance with Item 9 in Appendix B of
BS 4251 or, in the absence of the manufacturer’s instructions, mixing shall continue for not
less than 100 revolutions at a rate of not less than 7 revolutions per minute.

4/23.5 Pumping concrete through delivery pipes may be permitted but only with the prior approval
of the Engineer.

4/23.6 Re-mixing of concrete which has commenced to set shall not be allowed and in no case
shall such concrete be used in the Works.

4/23.7 Coarse aggregate shall be kept in identified stockpiles from which samples can be collected
and tested as specified.

4/23.8 The concrete supplier is required to certify that the C1 content in the mix being delivered is
within the limits specified in Clause 4/15.5. The C1 and SO3 content shall be checked at
frequent intervals.

4/24 TRANSPORT AND PLACING

4/24.1 The method of transport and placing concrete shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Concrete shall be so transported and placed that contamination, segregation or loss of the
constituent materials does not occur.

4/24.2 All formwork and reinforcement shall be clean and free from standing water immediately
before placing concrete.

January 2023 4-20 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

No concrete work shall be stopped or temporarily discontinued within forty-five (45)

centimeters of the top of any finished surface, unless such work is finished with a coping
having a thickness less than forty-five (45) centimeters in which case the joint shall be
made at the under edge of the coping.

Concrete in simple slab spans shall be placed in one (1) continuous operation for each
span, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or approved by the Engineer.

4/24.3 Prior to placing any concrete on natural surfaces a blinding layer of Class 15 concrete shall
be laid to a minimum of 75mm thickness unless otherwise specified on the drawings. The
blinding shall be suitably cured prior to subsequent concrete placement. The blinding shall
be clean and free from any dust or impurities prior to subsequent concrete placement.

4/24.4 No concrete shall be placed in a foundation until the extent of excavation and the character
of bearing material have been approved and no concrete shall be placed in any structure
until the placement of reinforcing steel and the adequacy of the forms and falsework have
been approved.

4/24.5 Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the Works until the Engineer’s approval has
been given. If concrete has not started within 24 hours of such approval being given,
approval shall again be requested. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the
area between construction joints. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ
concrete, which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction joint
is formed in accordance with the Specification. When the concrete has been in place for 4
hours, or less as directed by the Engineer, further concrete shall not be placed against it
for a further 20 hours.

4/24.6 Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not more than 32 deg.C unless
otherwise specified. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of
discharge from the mixer unless carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously,
when the time shall be within 1 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 30
minutes of discharge from the agitator.

4/24.7 Except where otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal
layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 400mm where internal vibrators are used or
300mm in all other cases.

4/24.8 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall not be dropped into place from a
height exceeding 2m. When trunking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used
in such a way as to avoid segregation. Where steep slopes are required for placing concrete
with chutes, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that
reverse the direction of the movement. Chutes and the use of chutes must be approved by
the Engineer. All chutes shall be kept clean and free from coating of hardened concrete by
thoroughly flushing with water after each run. The water used for flushing shall be
discharged clear of the concrete already in place.

4/24.9 No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Underwater concrete shall be placed in
position by tremies, or by pipeline from the mixer.

4/24.10 Full details of the method proposed shall be submitted in advance to the Engineer and his
approval obtained before placing begins. Where the concrete is placed by the tremie, its
size and method of operation shall be in accordance with BS 8004. During and after
concreting under water, pumping or dewatering operations in the immediate vicinity shall
be suspended until the Engineer permits them to the continued.

January 2023 4-21 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/24.11 Approved measures shall be taken to avoid premature stiffening of concrete placed in
contact with hot, dry surfaces. Surfaces including reinforcement against which concrete is
to be placed shall be shielded against the direct rays of the sun and shall be sprayed with
water to prevent excessive absorption by the surface of water from the fresh concrete.

4/24.12 A complete record shall be kept of the date, time, temperature and conditions of placing
the concrete in each portion of the work and shall be available for inspection by the
Engineer at any time.

4/24.13 Unless otherwise shown on the drawings all concrete placed below ground level shall have
a minimum protection to its outside faces as follows:

Underside - Protected by the laying of a grade 1000 approved polyethylene sheeting on

the blinding concrete. The sheeting shall be returned up the outside faces of the concrete
and suitably sealed.

Sides - Coated with 3 coats of an approved bitumen rubber latex emulsion flexible damp
and vapour-proof liquid membrane conforming to BRE Digest No. 54.

4/25 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE

4/25.1 All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer, it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators. Sufficient
vibrators in serviceable condition shall be on site so that spare equipment is available in
the event of breakdown. A 50mm diameter internal vibrator shall be deemed capable of
compacting 20 Cu.m/hr. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than
10,000 cycles per minutes.

4/25.2 Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where immersion vibrators are
used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided.

4/25.3 Concrete shall not be subject to vibration between 4 and 24 hours after placing.

4/25.4 Vibrators shall be so manipulated as to work the concrete thoroughly around the
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners and angles of the forms. Vibrators
shall not be used as a means to cause concrete to flow or its position in lieu of placing. The
vibration at any point shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish compaction. After initial
set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends
of projecting reinforcement.

4/26 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

4/26.1 The position and detail of any construction joints not described in the Contract shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be so arranged to minimize the formation
of shrinkage cracks.

4/26.2 The timetable for the depositing of concrete between construction joints should be so
arranged that no face of concrete shall be left for more than 20 minutes before fresh
concrete is deposited against it. Pauses for meals, servicing of machines, changes of shift,
etc. and the distribution of concrete among the positions where work may be proceeding
simultaneously must be carefully organized to ensure that the above mentioned interval
shall not be exceeded.

January 2023 4-22 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/26.3 When the continuous placement of concrete in any structural member is interrupted or
delayed, for any reason, for a period long enough for the previously partially placed
concrete to take its initial set, the Engineer shall declare such joint a cold joint and the
Contractor shall immediately remove the previously partially placed concrete from the
forms. No extra payment will be made for the initial placement or the removal of concrete
which is wasted because of a cold joint.

The Engineer may suspend all or any part of subsequent concrete work until he deems the
Contractor has corrected the cause for the cold joint occurrence.

4/26.4 Where dowels, reinforcing bars or other adequate ties are not required by the drawings,
keys shall be as made by embedding water soaked bevelled timbers in soft concrete. The
key shall be sized as shown on the details, or as directed by the Engineer, which shall be
removed when the concrete has set. In resuming work the surface of the concrete
previously placed shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, scum, laitance or other soft material
with stiff wire brushes, and if deemed necessary by the Engineer, shall be roughened with
a steel tool. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with clean water and painted
with a thick coat of neat cement mortar, after which the concreting may proceed.

4/26.5 Expansion joints shall be constructed at the locations, of the materials and to the
dimensions shown on the drawings.

4/26.6 The upper surface of lifts of concrete walls and columns shall be horizontal and if the
formwork extends above the joint on the exposed face, it shall be cleaned of adhering
concrete before the next lift is placed. The concrete placed immediately above a horizontal
construction joint shall not be the first batch through the mixer and shall be thoroughly
compacted and worked against the existing concrete.

4/26.7 In the case of vertical surfaces, a 1:1 slurry of cement and concreting sand shall, wherever
possible, be well worked into them immediately before the fresh concrete is placed.

4/26.8 Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts the reinforcement projecting above the
lift being cast shall be adequately supported to prevent movement of the bars during the
casting and setting of the concrete.

4/26.9 Wherever possible laitance and all loose material shall be removed while the concrete is
still green and no further roughening shall then be required. Where this is not possible, it
shall be removed by mechanical means provided the concrete has been in position for
more than 24 hours. The roughened surface shall then be washed with clean water.

4/27 CURING CONCRETE

4/27.1 Immediately after compaction and for 14 days thereafter, concrete shall be protected from
the harmful effects of weather, including rain and rapid temperature changes, and from
drying out. The methods of protection shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
Engineer’s approval will be conditional upon the proposed curing method proving to be
satisfactory on site. Only water curing shall be allowed for bridges and retaining walls,
which shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 14 days.

4/27.2 The method of curing used shall minimize the loss of moisture from the concrete. On
concrete surfaces which are to be water-proofed, and for bridge superstructures including
piers, abutments, retaining walls and culverts curing membranes shall not be used. Details
of all curing methods to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

January 2023 4-23 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/27.3 For the bridges retaining walls and culverts exposed and stripped concrete surfaces shall
be kept damp using soaked hessian sheeting. Polythene sheet covering shall be used
where directed by the Engineer to minimize evaporation. The hessian sheeting shall be
maintained continuously damp for a minimum period of 14 days after casting. The water
used for this purpose shall be of the same quality as that allowed in mixing the concrete.

4/27.4 Whenever approved by the Engineer, membrane curing of concrete with an approved liquid
may be used as an alternative to curing with water except that membrane curing liquid shall
not be applied to surfaces of concrete from which the shuttering has been stuck, until the
concrete has been inspected and approved by the Engineer’s representative.

4/27.5 Concrete curing compound shall be of an approved type which shall be readily
distinguishable upon the concrete surface for at least four hours after application. The
colour, if any, shall become inconspicuous within seven days after application.

4/28 EARLY LOADING

4/28.1 Concrete shall at no time be subject to loading, including its own weight, which will induce
a compressive stress in it exceeding 0.25 of its compressive strength at the time of loading
or of the specified 28 day strength whichever is lower.

4/28.2 For the purpose of this Clause, the assessment, of the strength of the concrete and the
stresses produced by the loads shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

4/28.3 No superstructure load shall be placed upon finished piers or abutments until the Engineer
so permits, but in no case shall any load of any kind be placed until the curing has been
completed. The Contractor shall not place any temporary loads on deck slabs. Bridge deck
slabs shall be opened to traffic or construction equipment only when so permitted by the
Engineer.

4/29 CONCRETING AT NIGHT

4/29.1 No concrete shall be mixed or placed when the light is insufficient, unless an adequate and
approved artificial lighting system is operated and such night work is approved by the
Engineer.

4/30 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER

4/30.1 When the rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete is expected to approach 1
Kg/m2 per hour (estimated from following chart) or when the shade air temperature is 35
deg.C and rising, precautions shall be taken, including the following:-

a) Dampening the forms.

b) Reducing the concrete temperature to the lowest practical level by procedures
such as:-

i) Shading the aggregate

ii) Cooling the mixing water before use
iii) Screening the mixing plant and transporting vehicles from wind, rain and
sun

January 2023 4-24 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

c) Erecting windbreaks and sunshades at the concrete placing location.

d) Reducing the time between the placing of the concrete and the start of curing to
the minimum possible.
e) Minimizing evaporation (particularly during the first few hours subsequent to
placing the concrete) by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying.

4/30.2 All precautions to be taken shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval and the Contractor
shall demonstrate that all approved precautions are available for use prior to the Engineer
granting approval to any concreting operation.

4/30.3 The temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 32 deg.C nor shall concrete
be mixed or placed when the shade air temperature is 40 deg.C or above, or is expected
to reach such a level during concreting, without special permission from the Engineer.

4/31 MINIMUM TEST REQUIREMENT FOR CONCRETE

4/31.1 Any one set of 6 cubes for each class of concrete and for each particular application
represent a maximum quantity of concrete as shown in Table 4.6. The point of sampling of
fresh concrete shall be at delivery into the construction unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Each set of cubes shall be made from a separate batch.

4/31.2 Portland Cement : Sampling shall be as BS EN 196-7.

4/31.3 Water : One (1) - gallon sample shall be obtained prior to use from each source and at least
once every week for quality testing.

Table 4.6 - Sampling Rates

SR. NO. TYPE OF STRUCTURES SAMPLING REPRESENT

A VOLUME OF M3 *

1. Critical structures e.g. 10

masts, cantilevers, columns

2. Intermediate structures e.g. 50

beams, slabs, bridge decks

3. Heavy concrete construction 100

e.g. breakwaters, solid rafts

4/32 FORMWORK

Construction

4/32.1 Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the concrete,
together with all temporary constructions required for their support.

4/32.2 All formwork shall be of such quality and strength as will ensure rigidity throughout the
placing, ramming, vibration and setting of the concrete without visible deflection.

January 2023 4-25 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/32.3 All formwork shall be so constructed that there shall be no loss of material from the
concrete. After setting, the concrete shall be in the position and of the shape and
dimensions prescribed. The finished surface of exposed concrete shall be of a quality
specified on the drawings and approved by the Engineer.

4/32.4 Unless otherwise provided on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, all exposed edges
shall be bevelled by using dressed, mill-cut, triangular moulding, having twenty (20)
millimeters sides.

All carved surfaces shall be formed with approved plywood or steel.

The Contractor shall in all cases request the approval of the formwork by the Engineer’s
representative in sufficient time to allow an inspection to be made and shall not commence
concreting until such approval is obtained. The period between the Contractor’s request for
approval and his intention to commence concreting shall not less than one clear normal
working day and the Engineer’s representative may require a longer period if, in his opinion,
the formwork is of such complexity as to require it.

Such approval shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.

4/32.5 Where internal metal ties are permitted, they or their removable parts shall be extracted
without damage to the concrete and the remaining holes filled with mortar. No permanently
embedded metal part shall have less than 40mm cover to the finished concrete surface or
the specified cover to the reinforcement whichever is the greater.

4/32.6 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval strength and deflection
calculations and drawings of the formwork he proposes to use. The Contractor shall ensure
that adequate time is given to enable the Engineer to examine the calculations and
drawings and also to inspect the formwork before concrete is placed within it.

Falsework

4/32.7 Detailed drawings for falsework and centering shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer for approval. The drawings must be approved by the Engineer
before the work is started.

4/32.8 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval at least one (1) month before
commencing work, details of his proposed system of falsework, including detailed drawings
and calculations. Falsework shall be capable of accommodating temperature changes
without causing damage to the concrete.

4/32.9 Falsework and centering shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary
rigidity to support all loads placed upon it without appreciable settlement or deformation.
Falsework columns shall be supported on wood or metal bases to support all falsework that
cannot be founded on rock, shale or thick deposits of other compact material in their natural
beds. Falsework shall not be supported on any part of the structure, except the footings,
without the written permission of the Engineer. The number and spacing of falsework
columns, the adequacy of sills, caps and stringers and the amount of bracing in the
falsework framing shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

4/32.10 All timber shall be of sound wood, in good condition and free from defects that might impair
its strength. If the vertical members are of insufficient length to cap at the desired elevation
for the horizontal members, they shall preferably be capped and frames constructed to the
proper elevation. Ends of the vertical members shall be cut square for full bearing to
preclude the use of wedges. If vertical splices are necessary, the abutting members shall

January 2023 4-26 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

be of the same approximate size, the ends shall be cut square for full bearing, and the
splices shall be scabbled in a manner approved by the Engineer.

4/32.11 All steel members shall be in good condition, free from damage, kinks, corrosion or any
other defect, which might impair their strength.

4/32.12 The Contractor shall compute the form settlement and deflection required for bridges so
that when the final settlement is complete, the structure will conform to the required camber,
section and grade as shown on the drawings.

4/32.13 The Engineer will check and approve the Contractor’s computations. Long, tapered
hardwood wedges or screw jacks shall be used in all falsework construction and shall be
so placed that they can be adjusted to give proper form alignment. The Contractor shall, if
required by the Engineer, provide means of adjusting forms to offset any excessive
settlement, if screw jacks are used, they shall be adequately braced and secured in such
a manner that will prevent tipping of the jacks in any direction.

4/32.14 The Contractor shall provide means for accurately measuring settlement in falsework
during placement of concrete, and shall provide a competent observer to observe and
correct the settlement.

4/32.15 In designing forms and centering, concrete shall be regarded as a liquid. In computing
vertical loads, a weight of twenty four hundred (2,400) kilograms per cubic metre shall be
assumed, and not less than thirteen hundred and sixty (1,360) kilograms per cubic metre
shall be assumed in computing horizontal pressure.

4/32.16 The Engineer may refuse permission to proceed with other phases of the work if he deems
the falsework unsafe or inadequate to support properly the loads to which it will be
subjected.

4/32.17 The review or approval of falsework drawings by the Engineer or permission to proceed
with the work shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for successful erection or
satisfactory results.

Tolerance

4/32.18 The formwork shall be set to such lines and levels as to ensure that the following tolerances
are not exceeded in the structures as cast.

For all buried concrete +25mm - 12mm

In addition, concrete surfaces that are to be waterproofed, abrupt irregularities in the

surface finish shall not exceed 3mm.

- For soffit edge beams and +/- 3mm but not more sides of parapet plinths than 3mm
in 3.5m.
- For all other concrete +/- 6mm but not more than 3mm in 3.5m.

Preparation of Formwork before Concreting

4/32.19 The inside surfaces of forms shall, except for permanent formwork, or unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer, be coated with a release agent approved by the Engineer. Release
agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall
not come into contact with the reinforcement. Different release agents shall not be used in
formwork to concrete which will be visible in the finished works. A panel shall be constructed

January 2023 4-27 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

utilizing the proposed release agent for the Engineer’s approval. The surface of the panel
shall not exhibit discoloration or any significant retard of the surface mortar strength.

4/32.20 Immediately before concreting all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out. All formwork shall
be inspected and approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed in it but such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the safety, accuracy or
efficiency of the work.

Removal of Formwork

4/32.21 The Engineer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to strike any
formwork.

4/32.22 At the time of striking any formwork, the concrete shall be of sufficient age and strength for
it to withstand the effects of striking, including the effect of thermal shock or the loss of
surface durability upon premature exposure, and to be able to withstand the resulting
stresses without adverse effects.

4/32.23 The time at which the formwork is struck shall be the Contractor’s responsibility but the
minimum periods between completion of placing concrete in a section of the works and the
removal of forms shall be as follows:-

Sides of beams, walls and columns 2 days Soffits of beams and slabs (props left in)
7 days

Removal of props (beams and slabs) 14 days

Soffits of precast beams 7 days

4/32.24 Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without
disturbing the soffit forms and, if props are to be left in place when the soffits forms are
removed, these props shall not be disturbed during the striking.

4/32.25 Formwork shall be removed without damage to the concrete.

4/32.26 Where it is intended to re-use formwork it shall be thoroughly cleaned and made good to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4/33 CLASSES OF FINISH

Formed Surfaces

4/33.1 The class of finish of formed surfaces shall be as shown on the drawings.

4/33.2 Class F1 : As struck.

4/33.3 Class F2: The irregularities in the finish shall be no greater than those obtained from the
use of wrought thicknessed square edged boards arranged in a uniform pattern. The finish
is intended to be left as struck but imperfections such as fins and surface discoloration
shall, if required, be made good by methods approved by the Engineer.

4/33.4 Class F3: The formwork shall be lined with a material approved by the Engineer to provide
a smooth finish of uniform texture and appearance. This material shall leave no stain on
the concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to its backing that it imparts no blemishes. It
shall be of the same style and obtained from only one source throughout.

January 2023 4-28 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/33.5 The Contractor shall make good any imperfections in the finish as required by the Engineer.
Internal ties and embedded metal parts will not be allowed.

4/33.6 Class F4: The requirements for Class F4 are as for class F4 except that internal ties and
embedded metal parts will be permitted. The ties shall be positions as described in the
Contract or as agreed by the Engineer.

4/33.7 Permanently exposed concrete surface to Classes F4, F3 and F2 finish shall be protected
from rust and stains of all kinds.

4/33.8 Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all formwork joints for exposed surfaces of
concrete to Class F2, F3 and F4 finish shall form a regular pattern with horizontal and
vertical lines continuous throughout each structure and all construction and movement
joints shall coincide with these horizontal or vertical lines.

4/33.9 Remedial Treatment of Surfaces

An inspection of the concrete surface shall be carried out immediately after removing the
formwork, and any remedial treatment to surfaces proposed by the Contractor shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be carried out without delay. Portions of
the structure which cannot be finished or properly repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer shall be removed.

4/33.10 Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the
Engineer, shall be rejected.

Unformed Surfaces

4/33.11 Class U1 Finish. The concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a plain
surface as described in the Contract. No further work shall be applied to the surface unless
it is used as a first stage for a Class U3 finish.

4/33.12 Class U2 Finish. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent laitance from being
worked to the surface, a Class U1 finish shall be floated by hand or machine sufficiently to
produce a uniform surface free from screed marks.

4/33.13 Class U3 Finish. When moisture has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, a Class U1 finish shall be
steel-trowelled under firm pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free from
trowel marks.

4/33.14 Class U4 Finish. This finish is for bridge decks that are to receive approved waterproofing
systems. The concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a plain surface.
When the concrete has sufficiently hardened to prevent laitance being worked to the
surface it shall be floated to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks and exposed
aggregate. Finally the surface shall be textured by brushing or otherwise to the
waterproofing manufacturer’s requirements as agreed by the Engineer. The accuracy of
the finished surface shall be such that it does not deviate from the required profile by more
than +/- 5mm over a 3m gauge length or have any abrupt irregularities more than 3mm.

Special Finishes

4/33.15 Where special finishes are specified in the drawings or in a particular specification the
Contractor shall make trial panels for the formed finishes specified for inspection and
approval by the Engineer.

January 2023 4-29 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

4/34 MORTAR

4/34.1 Mortar shall be mixed by approved mechanical mixers. Mortars containing plasticisers shall
not be over mixed. Mixers shall be kept clean at all times.

4/34.2 Mortar shall be used within thirty minutes after mixing. Hardened mortar shall not be used
in the work and shall be removed immediately from the site. Mortar shall be prepared in the
following proportions with the addition of a minimum quantity of water for workability.

4/34.3 Mortar (3:1)

Sand/Cement mortar (3:1) shall be composed for one part of cement to three parts of sand
by volume. This type of mortar shall be used in block work where high strength is required.

4/34.4 Mortar (4:1)

Sand/Cement with plasticiser mortar (4:1) shall be composed of one part of cement to four
parts of sand with a mixture of an approved plasticising agent, added in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.

4/34.5 The sand used in mortar must be dry when proportioning. Allowance for bulking shall be
made when gauging by volume. The mean compressive strength at 28 days for each mortar
shall conform to BS 5628 : Part 1.

4/34.6 Sand shall be natural sand or crushed natural stone or a combination of both as specified
in BS 1200.

4/35 EXTENT OF POURS

4/35.1 The limit of individual pours and the height of lifts shall be as approved. The sequence of
pours shall be arranged to minimize thermal and shrinkage strains.

4/35.2 For walls, the length of panel placed at one time shall not exceed 6m, adjacent panels shall
not be placed within 2 days, but shall be placed as soon as practicable thereafter.
Subsequent vertical lifts shall not be poured within 2 days.

4/35.3 Bridge decks, floors, roofs and ground slabs shall be placed in an approved sequence of
panels. ‘Chequerboard” placing shall be avoided. Adjacent panels shall not be placed within
3 days, and then only provided that the concrete in the first pour has cooled down to below
38 degrees centigrade or ambient temperature. Placing of adjacent panels shall take place
as soon as practicable after the above criteria have been satisfied. Panels shall be 5m x
5m and any pour exceeding 25 m2 will only be considered for approval of substantiated by
calculations.

January 2023 4-30 Section 4 – Concrete Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 5

Ancillary Works

January 2023 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

5/1 PAVING DESCRIPTION

5/2 PAVING BLOCKS
5/3 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BLOCKS
5/4 BLOCK LAYING REQUIREMENTS
5/5 KERBS DESCRIPTION
5/6 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE OF KERBS
5/7 KERB LAYING
5/8 PAVEMENT MARKING DESCRIPTION
5/9 MATERIALS FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS
5/10 APPLICATION OF THERMOPLASTIC
5/11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TESTING
5/12 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS
5/13 ROAD MARKING PAINT (FOR TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS, ETC.)
5/14 ROAD SIGNS, DESCRIPTION
5/15 REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGN MATERIALS
5/16 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGNS
5/17 GUARANTEE OF ROAD SIGNS BY CONTRACTOR
5/18 PAVEMENT REPAIRS
5/19 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR PAVEMENT REPAIRS
5/20 RAISING OR LOWERING MANHOLE COVER TO FINISHED LEVELS
5/21 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL SAFETY FENCING
5/22 HEAVY DUTY CAT’S EYES (REFLECTIVE STUDS)
5/23 REFLECTIVE STUDS OPTICAL REQUIREMENTS
5/24 REFLECTIVE STUDS MINIMUM MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
5/25 REFLECTIVITY
5/26 INSTALLATION OF REFLECTIVE STUDS
5/27 STONE PITCHING SLOPE TREATMENT, DESCRIPTION
5/28 MATERIALS FOR STONE PITCHING
5/29 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR STONE PITCHING
5/30 GABIONS
5/31 CHAIN LINK FENCING

January 2023 Section 5 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

5/32 STEEL AND METAL WORK

5/33 ALUMINIUM FOR PARAPETS
5/34 FASTENINGS FOR ALUMINIUM PARAPETS
5/35 PAINT AND OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS
5/36 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES FOR STRUCTURES
5/37 RUBBERISED BITUMEN EMULSION
5/38 WATERSTOPS
5/39 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS
5/40 COLD APPLIED JOINT SEALANT
5/41 BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT
5/42 LOCKABLE MEDIAN BOLLARD
5/43 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM FOR THE PROTECTION OF EXPOSED
CONCRETE SURFACES
5/44 GEOGRIDS
5/45 LITTER BIN

January 2023 Section 5 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 5 – ANCILLARY WORKS

5/1 PAVING DESCRIPTION

5/1.1 This work shall consist of covering certain areas (footpaths, parking areas, etc.) with paving
blocks in accordance with the Specifications, the Drawings and the Engineer’s instructions.

5/2 PAVING BLOCKS

5/2.1 Paving blocks shall be concrete blocks, coloured where specified, laid on a sand laying
course. Their thickness shall be 6 cm on sidewalks and 8 cm on parking areas unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

5/3 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BLOCKS

5/3.1 The materials, dimensions and tolerances, test for compressive strength, test for water
absorption and certificate of compliance for paving blocks shall conform to the requirements
of Local Order No. 44/90. Water absorption and abrasion resistance shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of the particular specification.

5/4 BLOCK LAYING REQUIREMENTS

Laying Course

5/4.1 The laying course shall consist of sharp black sand containing not more than 3% silt and
clay by weight and not more than 10% retained on 4 mm. sieve. The sand shall be obtained
from a single source, allowed to drain before use and shall be covered with suitable
sheeting to minimize moisture changes. Permissible sulphate and chloride content shall
not exceed 0.3% and 0.5% respectively (expressed as a percentage by weight). Chloride
content test : BS 812, Part 117, Sulphate content: test: BS 812, Part 118.

5/4.2 The profile of the laying course before compaction shall be similar to that of the finished
surface. During laying the sand shall be uniform in moisture content and shall be carefully,
screened to form a smooth compacted surface to receive the paving blocks. The maximum
deviation from the design levels shall be 5 mm.

5/4.3 The edge restraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all
permanent obstacles within the area, such as manhole covers, shall be adjusted to the
correct finished levels.

Surface Course

5/4.4 The paving blocks shall be laid on the sand laying course in such manner as not to disturb
the blocks already laid. Each block shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they
fit closely together. The joints between blocks shall not exceed 3 mm. Laying of the paving
blocks shall commence at right angles to the main pavement axis starting at one end of the

January 2023 5-1 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

area. The paving blocks shall be laid in a herringbone pattern unless otherwise shown on
the drawings or instructed by the Engineer at 450 to the main pavement axis.

5/4.5 Where blocks do not fit the edge restraints or other obstructions such as manholes or
upstands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks.

5/4.6 Blocks shall be cut using only a mechanical block splitter.

5/4.7 Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked
after laying the first three rows of blocks and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin
to open the blocks shall be knocked together using a hide mallet.

5/4.8 After each 20 sq.m. or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer, has been laid
the blocks shall be compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator.

5/4.9 The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35 sq.m. and have a compaction
force of 12-24 Kn and a frequency of approximately 75 to 100 Hz.

5/4.10 A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90
degrees to each other. Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand
layer is apparent. The laying course shall have a compacted thickness of 50 mm. Fine dry
sand with a particle size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving, and further
passes of the plate vibrator made in each direction, until the said is no longer absorbed into
the joints.

5/4.11 The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrained edge during
laying.

5/4.12 No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the 1 m strip at the temporarily
unrestrained edge.

5/4.13 On completion, the finished surface level, shall be within 5 mm of the design level and the
maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge shall
not exceed 3 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks shall not differ by more than 1 mm.
Any areas of paving which do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, the sand
laying course adjusted and the paving blocks re-laid to the correct levels.

5/5 KERBS DESCRIPTION

5/5.1 This work shall consist of the construction of kerbs in accordance with the Specifications
and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical sections shown on the Drawings or
established by the Engineer. These Specifications refer to the following types of precast
kerbs to be constructed. Non-Mountable Kerbs, Dropped Kerb, Heel Kerb, Quadrants and
Flush Kerb. All kerbs and edgings shall be hydraulically pressed and shall comply with the
requirements of BS 7263 Part 1. They shall be uniform in colour, free from cracks, flaws or
other defects and they shall have well defined arises.

5/6 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE OF KERBS

5/6.1 Materials shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 4 “Concrete” of the
Specifications and as specified herein.

January 2023 5-2 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/6.2 Kerbs shall be prepared with a concrete mixture containing not less than 400 Kg/m 3 of
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement. The aggregate shall meet the requirements of the
General Specifications for concrete work except grading of aggregates.

5/6.3 The 28 day characteristics cube strength of the concrete shall be 40 N/mm2 determined on
cubes specimens, and not less than 75% of this figure after 7 days.

5/6.4 Non-Mountable Kerb, Dropped Kerb, Flush Kerb and Heel Kerb elements shall only be
precast from concrete produced in a fully automatic batching plant.

5/6.5.1 Sampling shall be carried out as per BS 7263 Part 1.

5/6.5.2 Tests shall be carried out on the concrete mix prior to commencement of manufacture to
ascertain the strength and surface finish requirements can be met. If the required strength
and surface finish is not obtained, then the Engineer may order revisions to be made in
order to achieve the specified requirements. Mix design changes and any other work
considered necessary to meet requirements shall be subsidiary to the pay item.

5/6.6 The Consultant shall collect samples as per standard sampling method and submit them
for testing. All results shall pass before commencing this work.

5/6.7 Elements shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.

5/6.8 Non-Mountable and Dropped Precast Kerbs shall be formed by elements 900 mm long
where required to be laid in straight lines but may be reduced to 250 mm long or curve
kerbs may be used where required to be laid to curves depending on the radii of the curves.

5/6.9 The finished products shall be of solid appearance with clean planar faces, be free of
segregation, honeycombing, pits, broken corners or other defects and there shall be no
evidence of external rendering.

5/6.10 Bull noses and curved faces shall be of constant radius with a smooth change from radius
to plain face.

5/6.11 Tolerances of manufacture shall be three (3) millimeters in any one dimension and end
faces shall be truly perpendicular to the base.

5/6.12 Transverse strength and water absorption requirements shall be in accordance with BS
7263 Part 1.

5/7 KERB LAYING

5/7.1 Elements shall be set to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Under no
circumstances will it be permitted for levels to be set by direct measurement from pavement
layers.

5/7.2 Unless otherwise indicated, elements shall be laid either directly onto a wet concrete base
or on to a sand/cement (3:1) mortar bedding, two and half (2.5) centimeters thick, on a
previously laid concrete base on approved subgrade. The dimensions of the base shall be
as shown on the Drawings. The concrete base shall be constructed of Concrete Class
25/20.

5/7.3 No pavement layers shall be laid against kerbing until such time as the backing is complete,
back filled and approved by the Engineer.

January 2023 5-3 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/7.5 Joints between radius kerbs, shall have a clear width of four (4) millimeters and be filled
with a sand/cement (3:1) mortar with one fifth (1/5) part hydrated lime and sufficient water
to make the mixture plastic and easily smoothed. A grooving tool shall be used to produce
a smooth, circular section groove not more than three (3) millimeters deep in all joints.
Grouted joints shall be cured by an approved method to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Joints
between straight kerbs shall not be filled.

5/7.6 Immediately after any concrete is in place and for 7 days thereafter the kerbs, base backing
and mortared joints shall be fully cured and protected from drying out and against the
harmful effects of weather, including rain and rapid temperature changes. The method of
protection shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The use of coloured curing
membranes will not be permitted. Concrete not properly cured and protected will be
rejected and shall be removed from the works.

5/7.7 At each 9 meters or as directed by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings, the joint
between kerbs shall be filled with an approved joint filler 10 mm thick to form an expansion
joint. The filler shall extent through the kerb, bed, backing and channel, and shall be
trimmed to the finished shape of the kerb and channel.

5/7.8 At access points the kerbs, including the bed backing shall be dropped to show a face of
75 m or as otherwise shown on the Drawings.

5/7.9 At the end of any kerb run, the end kerb section shall be sloped down to ground level, if
applicable, and angled away from the road at 30 degrees.

5/7.10 All kerbs shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous material prior to approval. 5/7.11
Kerbs shall be laid within a tolerance of plus or minus three (3) millimeters, at each end of
an element, to the lines and grades given on the Drawings.

5/7.12 All kerbs shall be painted unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. (Refer to Sub- section
5/13 or paint).

5/7.13 Any excavated surface for the concrete bedding shall be watered and compacted to a
minimum of 95% maximum Dry Density (BS1377 : Part 9 Method 2.1 or 2.2)

5/8 PAVEMENT MARKING DESCRIPTION

5/8.1 This work shall consist of supplying thermoplastic road marking material for marking of the
pavement as outlined herein. It shall include the marking of the centreline, the shoulder
strip or edge, the barrier lines, the cross walks and any other markings required on the
pavement for the control and direction of the traffic. Refer to the Sharjah Municipality
"Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual".

5/8.2 The pavement markings shall be painted on the road to the dimensions and in the location
as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

5/8.3 The Contractor shall set out the markings and obtain the Engineer’s approval before
commencing the work.

January 2023 5-4 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/9 MATERIALS FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS

5/9.1 The materials used shall conform to the B.S. (British Standard) Specification for Road
Marking Materials (Superimposed type) BS 3262, (Part 1) & where modified in this
Specification. Glass Beads shall be in accordance with BS 6088.

5/9.2 The road marking material shall consist of light coloured aggregate, pigment & extender,
bound together with hard wearing resins, plasticised with oil as necessary.

5/9.3 The grading of various ingredients shall be such that the final product, when in a molten
state, can be sprayed on the surface in accordance with BS 3262 Part 3.

5/9.4 The aggregate shall consist of light coloured silica sand, calcite, calcined flint or quartz, in
accordance with paragraph 3 of BS 3262 (Part 1)

5/9.5 Glass Beads incorporated in the mixture shall be minimum 70% of spherical, & free from
flaws and not less than 80 percent shall be transparent glass. The grading of the Glass
Beads shall be as stated in BS 6088 (Class).

5/9.6 The pigment material shall be titanium dioxide (in accordance with Clause 4 of BS 3262
(Part 1) and shall be not less than 10 % by weight of the mix for white pigment. The lead
chromate content of the road marking material shall not exceed 5% by mass. A suitable
yellow pigment should be substituted for all or part of the titanium dioxide where yellow
pigment material specified.

5/9.7 The extender shall be whiting power added to assist the dispersion the pigment and impart
body to the mixture (in accordance with paragraph 2.3 of BS 3262 Part 1).

5/9.8 The binder shall not contain more than 5 percent of resin or other acidic material, it shall
consist mainly of hydrocarbon resins plasticised with mineral oil.

5/9.9 The viscosity of the melted binder at the spraying temperature must be such as to produce
a thermoplastic mix of the required spraying properties.

5/9.10 The composition and proportion of constituents of the laid material as found on analysis
shall comply with the requirements of Table 1 of BS 3262 (Part 1), reproduced below:

CONSTITUENT(S) PERCENTAGE BY MASS OF TOTAL

MIXTURE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
Binder (resin & oil) 18 22

Aggregate, pigment and

Extender and Glass Beads 78 82

Solid Glass Beads 20 --

5/9.11 The grading of the combined aggregate, pigment extender and where specified Solid glass
beads sampled in accordance with paragraph 7 of BS 3262 Part 1 shall be as follows:

a – 100% by mass passes a 2.8 mm BS 410 test sieve

b – 65% to 95% by mass passes a 0.600 mm BS 410 test sieve.

January 2023 5-5 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/9.12 The capacity of each container shall be not less than 20 Kg or not more than 110 Kg.

5/9.13 Each container shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name, batch number and
date of manufacture (Refer to Clause 10 of BS 3262 Part 1).

5/9.14 Container shall be made of a material which does not contaminate the contents & will
protect the contents from contamination.

5/10 APPLICATION OF THERMOPLASTIC

5/10.1 Application shall be by mobile sprayer, either hand propelled or self-propelled. 5/10.2 The
road surface shall be dry, and free from loose, detritus, mud, or other extraneous
matter. Where old paint or thermoplastic material are present, the manufacturer shall be
consulted as to whether or not the surface is suitable.

5/10.3 A tack coat should not be necessary when the thermoplastic is applied to carriageways.
Where it is considered necessary to use a tack coat, this shall be rubberized type
recommended by the manufacturer of the thermoplastic material.

5/10.4 In addition to the glass beads included in the mix, an additional quantity of glass beads
(Class B) shall be sprayed on the thermoplastic line at the time of application. The rate of
application shall be at the rate of about 0.5 Kg/m2.

5/10.5 The thermoplastic material shall be applied in intermittent or continuous lines of thickness
1.2 ± 0.3mm. For special lettering, arrows or symbols the material shall be applied by hand
methods. The finished lines shall be free from raggedness at all edges and be true in place
with the road surface. The upper surface shall be level uniform and free from streaks,
blisters, lumps and other defects.

5/10.6 Application of thermoplastic material to new pavement construction should be preceded by

wire brushing to remove bitumen rich surface mortar. Sufficient compatible mineral oil
plasticiser should be incorporated in the thermoplastic material to reduce levels of early
shrinkage in the material and subsequent cracking of the asphalted pavement structure.

5/11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TESTING

5/11.1 The thermoplastic material shall meet the performance requirements of the following table.

THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
PROPERTY MINIMUM MAXIMUM

Relative Density BS 3262 : P3 2.0 (approx.) --

Softening Point C BS 2000 : P 58 95 --
Luminance BS 3262 : P1 (White as delivered) 70 --
(White as re-melted) 65
(Yellow as delivered) 50
(Yellow as re-melted) 45
Heat Stability (White) 65
(BS 3262 : P1) (Yellow) 45
Flow Resistance after 48 hours BS 3262 :P1 -- 25
Skid Resistance BS 3262 : P1 45 --

January 2023 5-6 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/12 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS

5/12.1 The Contractor shall control the traffic in such a manner as to protect the freshly marked
surface from damage. The traffic control shall be so arranged as to give minimum
interference to the travelling public. Signs, barricades, flagmen and control devices shall
be supplied by the Contractor & a system of spaced warning flags or blocks shall be used
to protect the fresh marking until it has dried as required. Any lines, stripes or marking which
become blurred or smeared by the traffic shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own
expense.

5/13 ROAD MARKING PAINT (FOR TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS, ETC.)

5/13.1 Road marking paint shall be by an approved manufacturer. It shall be suitable for applying
by brush or mechanical means to cement concrete or bituminous pavement to give a
chemically stable film of uniform thickness and shall be either chlorinated rubber, epoxy or
alkyd based.

5/13.2 White paint shall contain not less than 6% by mass of titanium dioxide as a pigment,
conforming to Type A (anatase) or Type R (rutile) as specified in BS 1851.

5/13.3 Yellow paint shall be standard colour BS 381C No. 355, except where an alternative shade
has been specified in the Contract, and obtain not less than 6% by mass of a suitable yellow
pigment.

5/13.4 The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers and stored in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The paint shall be applied without the use
of thinners or other additives.

5/13.5 Paint shall be applied at a covering rate recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer.

5/13.6 Where markings are to be reflectorised with ballotini it shall be sprayed uniformly on to the
wet paint film at the rate of 400-500 g/sq.m. Ballotini shall comply with the requirements of
BS 3262 Clause 15.

5/13.7 Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and dry. Markings
shall be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and free from streaks.
Carriageway lane and edge lines shall be laid by approved mechanical means to a regular
alignment.

5/14 ROAD SIGNS, DESCRIPTION

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/15 REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGN MATERIALS

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

January 2023 5-7 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/16 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD SIGNS

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/17 GUARANTEE OF ROAD SIGNS BY CONTRACTOR

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/18 PAVEMENT REPAIRS

5/18.1 This work shall consist of the various types of repairs to existing pavement described
herein, necessary to correct structural failures, grade elevations, and deterioration and/or
to prepare the existing pavement surface prior to placing bituminous pavement overlays.
The Engineer on site shall investigate and find out causes of failure and he shall instruct
the Contractor on the type of repair. The Contractor shall provide assistance in such
investigation as instructed by the Engineer.

5/18.2 The materials required for the various pavement repair items shall be as specified and shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 3 of these Specifications.

5/18.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all the equipment and labour
necessary to perform the work described for the various types of pavement repair items in
accordance with these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

5/19 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR PAVEMENT REPAIRS

Repair of Potholes (Isolated Holes in the Pavement of Less Than One Square Metre)

5/19.1 The Contractor shall cut the failed pavement back to solid material with pneumatic asphalt
cutting tools. Make the cut square or rectangular with faces straight and vertical. One pair
of faces shall be at right angles to the direction of traffic.

5/19.2 Remove the cut pavement and loose unsuitable material from the hole and cart away and
dispose at a location designated by the Engineer.

5/19.3 If soil is removed, fill the excavation with granular road-base material which has been
premixed to optimum moisture content. Place the material in 150 mm layers and compact
each layer to not less than 98% of the maximum dry density as determined according to
BS 1377 Part 9 Method 2.1/2.2 with mechanical compactors. The same treatment is to be
applied on subsoil before filling the excavation with granular roadbase material.

5/19.4 Wire broom clean the cut edges of the pavement and paint with tack coat.

5/19.5 Prime the compacted soil or the upper surface of the roadbase layer with a light coating of
prime coat as directed by the Engineer.

January 2023 5-8 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/19.6 Fill the hole with Bituminous Base Course and/or Wearing Course as appropriate and
compact in lifts not exceeding 5 cm to the same level as the adjacent surface. Vibratory
compactors shall be used to compact the hot-mix bituminous layer.

5/19.7 Check levels of the patch with a straight edge and make corrections as directed by the
Engineer

Repair to Failed Pavement

5/19.8 The Contractor shall cut the failed pavement to solid material with pneumatic asphalt cutting
tools. Make the cut square or rectangular with faces straight and vertical. One pair of faces
shall be at right angles to the direction of traffic. Vertical faces may be stepped where
instructed by the Engineer.

5/19.9 Remove the cut pavement and excavate the underlying soil to a depth of not less than 300
mm. The Engineer may, when deemed necessary order substantially greater depths of
excavation payable as common excavation. Cart away and dispose all cut pavement and
excavated soil at a location designated by the Engineer.

5/19.10 Thoroughly compact the subsoil with mechanical compactors to 98% of Maximum Dry
Density in accordance with the standard test methods given in Section 2 of the
Specification.

5/19.11 Fill the excavation to the bottom of the pavement with granular roadbase material which
has been premixed to the optimum moisture content. Place the materials in 150 mm layers
and compact each layer to 98% Maximum Dry Density with mechanical compactors in
accordance with the standard test methods given in Section 2 of the Specification.

5/19.12 Wire broom clean the edges of the pavement and paint with tack coat.

5/19.13 Lightly prime the compacted roadbase layer with prime coat as directed by the Engineer.

5/19.14 Place and compact wearing course or base course as applicable in the excavation in 50
mm layers to the same level as the adjacent surface. The lower layer shall be compacted
with a vibratory compactor and the top layer shall be compacted with a steel wheel roller
by first compacting the hot-mix bituminous layer 150mm from the two traffic edges and then
by rolling in the direction of traffic. The drive wheel of the roller shall be in a forward position.
Use of asphalt pavement finisher will depend on the size of the area being patched.

5/19.15 Check levels of the repair with a straight edge and make corrections as required.

Repair of Depressed Pavement

In case where the pavement has depressed but the asphalt has not fractured and the
pavement appears stable, the Contractor shall:

5/19.16 Cold plane and remove the supper 5 cm of the pavement starting just back from the
depression. Cart away and dispose of the removed pavement at a location designated by
the Engineer.

5/19.17 Wire broom clean the surface and lightly tack the surface and the edges with tack coat (do
not exceed 0.23 litres per square metre of tack coat).

5/19.18 Fill the cut with bituminous base course or wearing course as applicable and compact with
a steel wheeled roller by first compacting the hot asphaltic concrete 150 mm from the two

January 2023 5-9 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

traffic edges and then by rolling in the direction of traffic. The drive wheel of the roller shall
be in the forward position.

5/19.19 Check the level of the repair with a straight edge and make corrections as required.

5/20 RAISING OR LOWERING MANHOLE COVER TO FINISHED LEVELS

5/20.1 The Contractor shall barricade the immediate work site to protect workmen and motorists
without closing the entire carriageway width to traffic. A single lane should be closed for
such operations.

5/20.2 Cut and remove sufficient asphalt pavement, if any, and concrete from the manhole to
permit removal of the cover and frame without damaging the reinforcing steel, cart away
and dispose of the rubble at a site designated by the Engineer. Raising or lowering of
manhole cover will be executed as per details shown on the drawings or as otherwise
specified.

5/20.3 Before starting any adjustment activity the Contractor shall obtain approval from the
concerned Authority to which the manhole belongs.

5/20.4 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval shop drawings for each manhole
affected by the work showing existing and new levels and a statement of the methodology
that will be followed.

5/20.5 Payment will be made upon receipt by the Engineer of a certificate issued by the concerned
Authority stating their approval of the works.

5/21 METAL BEAM GUARD RAIL SAFETY FENCING

5/21.1 Safety fencing shall comprise untensioned corrugated rails, channel-section, posts,
blocking-out pieces, nuts, bolts and washers for fixings, and end anchorages.

5/21.2 Steelwork shall be mild steel Grade 43A to BS 4360, and shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabricating in accordance with BS 729 to the thickness shown on the Drawings.

5/21.3 Fencing shall be erected to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawings to
produce a flowing alignment. The Contractor shall adjust the elevation of any rail as
required.

5/21.4 The rail section shall be such that when freely supported over a 3 m clear span, with the
road face uppermost, and centrally loaded with a point load of 1000 Kg, the deflection
measured at the centre of the span shall not exceed 40 mm.

5/21.5 Adjacent rails shall be connected by bolted lap of joints made in the relevant direction to
prevent vehicles striking rail ends.

5/21.6 Guardrail posts may be driven into the ground as detailed on the drawings provided that:-

i) The accuracy of placing will permit the rail mounting to be erected to present a
flowing alignment.

January 2023 5-10 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

ii) A representative sampling of driven posts selected by the Engineer shall

satisfactorily withstand a test load of 10 KN applied horizontally at the level of the
centre of the rail with a deflection at that level not exceeding 200 mm. Where the
previous cannot be met all posts shall be set into Class 25/20 concrete or as
detailed on the drawings.

iii) Driven posts shall have a protective coating of bituminous paint over the length
which is to penetrate the ground and extend 75mm above the finished ground level.
The bituminous paint shall be of high quality with excellent adhesion properties. A
sample of the paint together with the manufacturers specifications shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to use.

5/21.7 The ends of safety fences shall terminate with a mitred end rail and anchorage flared away
from the line of fence.

5/21.8 Site drilling or cutting of beams and posts shall not be permitted without approval. Flame
cutting shall not be permitted.

5/21.9 Minor surface damage to steel components shall be repaired by cleaning with a wire brush
to remove all corrosion products, the application of two coats of rust inhibiting paint, and
two coats of approved cold galvanizing paint or similar over the damaged area.

5/21.10 The horizontal alignment of fences shall not depart from the road alignment by more than
30 mm overall, and the relative deviation shall not be more than 10 mm in any two
successive rail lengths.

5/21.11 The height of the uppermost edge of the rail shall not depart from the dimensions shown
on the drawing by more than 30 mm, nor shall the relative deviation from this line be more
than 5 mm in any two successive rail lengths.

5/22 HEAVY DUTY CAT’S EYES (REFLECTIVE STUDS)

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/23 REFLECTIVE STUDS OPTICAL REQUIREMENTS

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/24 REFLECTIVE STUDS MINIMUM MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/25 REFLECTIVITY

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

January 2023 5-11 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/26 INSTALLATION OF REFLECTIVE STUDS

(Refer to Sharjah Municipality “Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual” Chapter 5 All
Clauses)

5/27 STONE PITCHING SLOPE TREATMENT, DESCRIPTION

5/27.1 This work shall consist of the placement of stone pitching on mortar bedding on slopes at
the locations shown on the plans, or as ordered by the Engineer, in accordance with these
Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-section
shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

5/28 MATERIALS FOR STONE PITCHING

5/28.1 Stone for pitching shall be hard, sound, durable, stones as approved by the Engineer.
Samples of the stone to be used shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before
any stone is placed.

5/28.2 Tests for specific gravity and absorption, shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C-
127. The minimum apparent specific gravity shall be two and seven- tenths (2.7) and the
maximum absorption shall be two (2) percent. The stone shall not have an abrasion loss
greater than thirty five (35) percent when tested in a Los Angeles Abrasion Machine in
accordance with ASTM C535.

5/28.3 The size and shape of the stones shall be such to allow for proper placement. The widths
of the stone shall not be less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times their respective thickness
and lengths of not less than (2) times their respective widths. The minimum width shall be
100 mm.

5/29 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR STONE PITCHING

5/29.1 The bed upon which the stones are to be placed shall be excavated to the required grades
and lines as shown on the plans or as directed and approved by the Engineer. A footing
trench shall be excavated along the toe of the slope as shown on the plans or as directed
by the Engineer. All footings trenches and excavations shall be approved by the Engineer
prior to placement of stones or concrete. Subgrade or base should be firm and well
compacted as approved by the Engineer. Stones shall not be placed on a mortar bed as
detailed on the Drawings.

5/29.2 Stones shall be arranged in such a way that the largest stones are at the bottom of the
slope. The surfaces of the stone shall be cleaned of adhering dirt and clay and shall be
moistened immediately prior to grouting.

5/29.3 The space between stones of stone pitching shall be filled with grout consisting of one (1)
part Portland Cement and three (3) parts of fine aggregate, and one-fifth (1/5) part of
hydrated lime with sufficient water to produce a plastic mix as approved by the Engineer.
Immediately after pouring, the grout shall be spaded and rodded into place with suitable
spades, trowels or other approved method, and broomed into the spaces until the voids are
completely filled. The exposed surface of the rocks shall project not less than 40 mm and
not more than 80 mm above the grout surface. The grouted stone pitching shall be cured

January 2023 5-12 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

by an approved method for a minimum period of four (4) days. Immediately after the
expiration of the curing period, the exposed surface shall be cleared of all curing mediums.

5/29.4 Joints as detailed on the drawings will be provided at a maximum interval of 12 meters.

5/30 GABIONS

Description

5/30.1 Gabions shall consist of furnishing and placing wire mesh boxes rectangular in shape filled
with clean and uniform rocks larger than the mesh openings in accordance with the
drawings, and these Specifications.

Gabions shall be of approved quality.

Materials

5/30.2 Wire mesh shall consist of galvanized steel fabricated in double twist woven hexagonal
shape and with the following requirements:-

Wire Diameter Mesh Size

Boxes 2.7 mm 8 cm x 10 cm
Mattresses 2.2 mm 6 cm x 8 cm

5/30.3 The rocks shall consist of clean solid rock non-friable and resistant to weathering and frost
action meeting the following requirements:-

Bulk Specific Gravity (ASTM C128/C127) Not Less than 2.70.

Absorption (ASTM C128/C127) Max. 2%
Soundness by Magnesium Sulphate Max 12% (ASTM C88).

5/30.4 The rock shall be greater than 150 mm in size.

5/30.5 Excavation required for the placement of gabions shall be made in accordance with the
dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed. Gabions shall be constructed in units
to the dimensions indicated on the drawings.

5/30.6 The sides, ends, and diaphragms shall be lifted into a vertical position, and located together
with binding wire to form the base.

5/30.7 The binding shall be carried out in a continuous lacing operation, the wire being passed
through each mesh and around both selvedges which must be tied together with two round
of turns after every second mesh.

5/30.8 Assembled gabions may be placed in position for filling singly, or wired together in groups
suitable for man-handling. The baskets shall be securely wired together at all corners and
edges in the same manner as described above. Where there are more than one course of
gabions, the one in the upper course must be laced to those below. Gabions shall be slightly
over-filled to allow for subsequent settlement.

January 2023 5-13 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/31 CHAIN LINK FENCING

5/31.1 The chain link fencing shall be PVC coated and erected according to the lines shown on
the drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. The fencing components shall have
a five year corrosion warranty from the manufacturer.

5/31.2 The Contractor shall supply shop drawings showing all fixing and erection details, for
approval prior to erection.

5/31.3 Steel posts, mesh, braces and struts shall conform to the requirements of BS 1722 Part 1
and they shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with BS 729 and then polyester
coated to a minimum thickness of 60 microns.

5/31.4 Polyester coating shall conform to the requirements of BS 6496 and BS 6497.

Mechanical Tests

Flexibility (Conical Mandrel) Pass 3 mm

Adhesion (2 mm Crosshatch) BS 3900 - E6. Pass GTO

Erichsen Cupping BS 3900 - E4 Pass > 7 mm
Hardness (400 gms) BS 3900 - E2 Pass - No
Penetration to substrate

Impact Resistance BS 6496 Clause 16 Pass 2.3J

direct and reverse

Chemical and Durability Tests

Salt spray ASTM B 117 @ 35 deg. C ) Pass at 1000 hrs.

Acetic Acid/Salt spray BS 6496 Clause 15) No corrosion area
more than 2 mm from scribe

Cyclic Humidity BS 3900 - F2 Pass at 1000 hrs

no blistering or
loss of gloss

Distilled Water Immersion Pass - no blistering

BS 3900-G5 or loss of glass
after 24 hours.

Sulphur Dioxide BS 3900 - F8 Pass - no blistering

loss of gloss, or
discoloration after 240 hours.

Exterior Durability BS 6496 Excellent Performance.

Clause 4.0 Slight even loss of
12 months Florida 40 [Link] gloss, no checking, cracking or flaking.

- Chalking None in excess of minimum

in ASTM D659:1980.

January 2023 5-14 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/32 STEEL AND METAL WORK

5/32.1 Steel for the fabrication of bridge parapets and signs gantries shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4, Part 1, BS 5400, BS 4360 and BS 4848 as appropriate.

5/32.2 Fixing bolts and accessories complying with BS 5400, BS 4190 and BS 4320 as
appropriate.

5/33 ALUMINIUM FOR PARAPETS

5/33.1 Extruded sections shall conform to the following requirements:-

Posts Alloy 6082 TE to BS 1474

Other Locations Alloy 6082 TF to BS 1474.

5/33.2 Casting shall be in alloy LM6M to BS 1490.

5/34 FASTENINGS FOR ALUMINIUM PARAPETS

5/34.1 Holding down bolts shall be of stainless steel A4-80 to BS 6105.

5/34.2 Aluminium parapets in contact with concrete shall have bearing pads of rubber/fabric, new
and unvulcanised.

5/34.3 All other fastening shall be of stainless steel 315S16 quality to BS 970 Part 4.

5/35 PAINT AND OTHER PROTECTIVE COATINGS

5/35.1 All paints forming any one painting system shall be obtained from one manufacturer and,
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the source of supply shall not be changed after
the Engineer’s approval has been given. Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers of not
more than 5 litres capacity and these shall be used in strict order of delivery.

5/35.2 The Contractor shall obtain from the paint manufacturer paint ready for the use specified
under the contract. The paints shall be adequate in all respects for the purpose intended.

5/35.3 The system of protection for all non-galvanized steel work shall be as follows:-

- Prime Coat: Inter zinc QHA 027/028 (or equivalent) minimum dry film thickness
65 microns.
- Second Coat: Intergard EBA 070/EBA 100 JB (or equivalent) natural
M.I.O. minimum dry filter thickness 100 microns.
- Third Coat: Intergard EBA 070/EBA 100 JB (or equivalent) silver grey
M.I.O minimum dry film thickness 100 microns.
- Fourth Coat: Intergard EFK 724 (or equivalent) epoxy finish grey minimum dry film
thickness 50 microns.

Total dry film thickness - 315 microns (minimum)

January 2023 5-15 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The coating shall have a minimum adherence to the steel work of 2.5 Mpa when tested
with an adhesive tester.

5/35.4 Prior to painting the steel work shall be grit blasted to SA 2-1/2 Swedish Standard 055900
or by other approved method to equivalent standard. Before the steel surface shows signs
of flash rusting the first coat of zinc primer shall be applied. If the steel does flash rust then
the cleaning process is to be repeated.

5/35.5 Steel work specified as galvanized shall be hot-dipped galvanized to the standard required
by BS 729.

5/36 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES FOR STRUCTURES

Waterproofing Bridge Deck Slab - Type 1

General

Type 1

5/36.1 Deck waterproofing shall be composed of a proprietary membrane of a polyester

reinforced, SBS (Styrene-Butadiene Styrene) polymer modified bitumen sheet sprayed or
torched applied to primed concrete deck as detailed on the drawings.

Materials

5/36.2 Membranes shall comply with the requirements of Technical Memorandum BE 27 (Bridges)
Waterproofing and Surfacing of Bridge Decks and the system shall be certified by the
British Board of Agreement. A service performance guarantee shall be submitted by the
Contractor in respect of materials and application for all waterproofing works. Materials
shall have the following physical properties.

- Minimum thickness 1.5 mm

- Flexibility Over 20 m dia. Mandrel -20 deg.C
- Longitudinal Elongation at Constant
temperature (20 deg.C, 100 mm/min.) 54%
- Longitudinal Elongation with Thermal
shock (20 deg.C., 100 mm/min.) 57%
(-10 deg.C., 10 mm/min.) 42%
- Longitudinal Tear Resistance at
Constant Temperature (20 deg.C.,
100 mm/min.) 180 N/mm.
- Adhesion to Concrete at 20 deg.C > .40 Mpa
- Adhesive Softening Point
When tested to ASTM D36 1000C Minimum
- Puncture Resistance at 20 deg.C.,
500 mm/min. > 800N

Preparation of Surface

5/36.3 All concrete surfaces to be waterproofed shall be smooth and free from projections or holes
which might cause puncture of the membrane. The surface shall be dry and immediately
before the application of primer or membrane, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of
dust and loose materials.

January 2023 5-16 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/36.4 Immediately after cleaning and drying of surface, priming should be applied in strict
compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Primer coat shall be allowed to cure
completely before membrane application. Membrane shall be laid parallel to traffic direction
and tangent to the bridge curve in such a manner that overlaps are never less than the
specified width. In all cases, waterproofing shall begin at the low point of the surface to be
waterproofed. End laps should be staggered one meter so that at no point are there more
than three thicknesses of membrane. It shall be installed with 100 mm side laps and 150
mm staggered end laps.

Application Details

5/36.5 At the edges of the membrane and at any point where it is punctured by appurtenances
such as drains or pipes, suitable provision shall be made to prevent water from getting
between the waterproofing and the waterproofed surface, as recommended by the
manufacturer.

5/36.6 Precautions must be taken to prevent injury to the finished membrane by any cause.

5/36.7 The bituminous wearing course should be laid as soon as possible after a minimum period
of four hours has elapsed from completion of the membrane.

Waterproofing Bridge Deck Slab - Type 2

General

5/36.8 Type 2 deck waterproofing membrane shall consist of a two part rapid curing liquid applied
system based on methacrylate resins. The complete system shall comprise of a primer to
ensure good adhesion to the substrate; the membrane and a tack coat to ensure good
adhesion to the bituminous road surfacing. The system must be suitable for use in Sharjah.
The temperature of the bituminous surfacing at the time of laying onto the waterproofing
membrane must be according to Clause 3/33.

Certification

5/36.9 The Type 2 waterproofing membrane system must hold a British Board of Agreement
Certificate.

Application

5/36.10 Application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Waterproofing Other Surfaces

5/36.11 Waterproofing membranes for structures other than top of bridge deck slab, shall consist
of an impervious laminate comprising a 0.3 mm PVC sheet and 1.5 mm of flexible self-
adhesive rubber/bitumen compound. The laminate shall withstand cracking of the substrate
up to a crack width of 0.6 mm and shall have a tear resistance (ASTM D1004) of 340 N/mm
longitudinally and 310 N/mm transversely, an elongation film (ASTM D638) of 210%
longitudinally and 160% transversely and a backing sheet tensile strength (ASTM D638) of
4.2 N/mm2 longitudinally and 4.8 N/mm2 transversely. Rubberized mastic and primer for
use with waterproofing membranes shall be special compounds provided by the
manufacturer of the membrane and formulated for its intended use.

5/36.12 Vertical and horizontal faces shall be made smooth, dry and free from nails or concrete
projections. It shall immediately be primed and allowed to completely dry before installation

January 2023 5-17 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

of membrane. Installation procedures shall be strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

5/36.13 Joints between sheets shall be lapped with end laps of at least 150 mm and side laps of at
least 100 mm. If the work must be left partially complete temporarily, the exposed edges of
outside strips of the membrane shall be finished with a trowelled bead of mastic.

5/36.14 Waterproofed surfaces to be backfilled or otherwise exposed to possible damage by plant

or other construction operations shall be protected by proprietary protection boards
specifically designed for this purpose and installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer recommendations. As an alternative to the waterproof membrane plus
protection boards a composite membrane consisting of a rubberized bitumen compound
and integral geotextile layer (min. 400 g/sq.m) shall be permitted. The protection boards
shall be a minimum of 6 mm thick.

5/37 RUBBERISED BITUMEN EMULSION

5/37.1 Rubberized bitumen for application to buried concrete surface as detailed on the drawings
shall comply with Municipality and consist of a water bound emulsion containing not less
than 65% of bitumen with fine particles of rubber dispensed in the bitumen, the consistency
being such that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal air temperature. The
rubber content of the dried film shall not be less than 10%.

5/37.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval three samples in one litre containers
of the rubber bitumen emulsion. The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer
certificates that the material complies with the requirements of the specification, and is
suitable for the intended purpose.

5/38 WATERSTOPS

5/38.1 Alternatives from those indicated on the drawings will be accepted only if the Engineer is
satisfied that their material and their performance are not inferior. The waterstop, used must
be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer instructions.

5/38.2 Waterstops shall be manufactured either from rubber or from polyvinyl-chloride (PVC), at
the discretion of the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. PVC waterstops
when tested in accordance with BS 2571, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following
properties:-

- Tensile Strength 13.78 N/[Link]

- Elongation at Break 300%
- BS Softness 45
- Specific Gravity 1.3

For rubber waterstops the rubber compound shall comply required standard except ASTM
D395-52 for compression and ASTM D2240-75 for hardness.

5/38.3 No splices will be permitted in straight strips. Strips and special connection pieces shall be
well cured in a manner such that cross section shall be dense, homogeneous and free from
all porosity. All junctions in the special connection pieces shall be full moulded. During

January 2023 5-18 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

welding or vulcanizing periods the joints shall be securely held by suitable clamps. The
materials at the splices shall be dense and homogeneous throughout the cross section.

5/38.4 If, after placing concrete, waterstops are materially out of position or shape or if voids are
found, the surrounding concrete shall be removed, the waterstop reset, and the concrete
replaced, all that the Contractor’s expense.

5/39 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS

5/39.1 Joint fillers in expansion joints for structures shall consist of a compressive non- extruding
board manufactured from bitumen impregnated fibres.

5/39.2 The physical properties of the materials shall conform to the requirement of ASTM D-1751.

5/40 COLD APPLIED JOINT SEALANT

5/40.1 Cold applied joint sealant shall be a multi-component, gun applied material of a grade
suitable for the hot climate with a service temperature of up to 70 degrees centigrade and
high resistance to ultra-violet exposure.

5/40.2 The compound shall comply with the "relevant standard" and approval by the Engineer.

5/40.3 The sealant must be suitable for the particular application whether the joint to be sealed is
horizontal or vertical and with the ability to accommodate any movement at the joint without
rupturing or losing adhesion.
5/40.4 The hardness of the joint sealant shall be no less than 20 on the “Shore A” scale. 5/40.5
The Contractor shall supply samples together with the manufacturers literature relevant to
any sealant for any application for the Engineer’s approval prior to use. Only high quality
products with demonstrable resilience to the local climate conditions shall be approved. If
a polysulphide based sealant is proposed for locations exposed to biological attack or wet
conditions then it should have a minimum 40% polymer content. All polysulphide based
sealant must utilize a manganese dioxide curing system.

5/40.6 The mixing, application and curing of the approved sealant shall be strictly in accordance
with the manufacturers recommendations.

5/40.7 The approved sealants shall be delivered to site in sealed containers showing date of
manufacture, batch number and shelf life.

5/41 BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT

5/41.1 General

Expansion joint assembly shall be as shown on the drawing.

Full details of the proposed suppliers with their technical specifications, maintenance
manual, design calculations, covering materials, dimensions and sizes shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval before the Contractor places an order.

All expansion joints shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer against any defect in material
and workmanship for a period of ten years.

January 2023 5-19 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The Contractor shall submit the detailed shop drawings and obtain the Engineer’s approval
before manufacture is commenced.

During placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under the expansion joint components,
relative movement between them and the supports to which they are fixed shall be
prevented.

Installation details shall be as shown on the drawings and as otherwise recommended by

the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

5/41.2 All anchoring steel plates, bolts and sockets shall be protected against corrosion. 5/41.3
Joint installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and in the presence of the manufacturers representatives.

5/42 LOCKABLE MEDIAN BOLLARD

5/42.1 Lockable median bollards shall be as shown on the drawings.

5/42.2 Movable bollard and locking mechanism shall be galvanized steel to BS 729 standard and
treated with anti-corrosion paint.

5/42.3 Post sleeve shall be 4 mm thick PVC pipe.

5/43 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM FOR THE PROTECTION OF EXPOSED CONCRETE

SURFACES

General

5/43.1 The coating system shall be an elastomeric system of single component products, a
weather resistant top coat used in conjunction with a penetrating primer. The coating shall
have the ability to provide in-depth protection for reinforced concrete structures against
corrosion associated with the ingress of chloride and sulphate ions, carbon dioxide and
other air-borne acid gases, and shall have the ability to allow water vapour to escape from
the structure.

The Coating thickness of every layer shall be specified either in mm or micron and shall be
verified by SCL.

Primer

5/43.2 The primer shall be a low viscosity reactive silane-siloxane/acrylic blend dissolved in a
penetrating organic carrier. The primer shall have the capability to penetrate and produce
a chemically bound hydrophobic barrier to prevent the passage of chloride and sulphate
icons. The primer should also be film forming to condition and stabilize the substrate prior
to the application of the topcoat. The primer should be applied in full accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.

Top Coat

5/43.3 The top coat shall be a pure aliphatic acrylic resin, decorative, high performance water
based, pigmented coating. It shall have resistance to water, carbon dioxide and other air-

January 2023 5-20 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

borne acids and have the ability to allow the passage of water vapour from within the
structure.

5/43.4 The top coat shall have elastomeric and flexural capabilities and should be applied in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

5/43.5 The system will, during trials, display the following properties when applied in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specification to samples obtained from concrete made without
additives.

Reduction in Water Absorption 82% minimum at 28 days

(measured against a control
concrete sample in accordance
with ASTM C642)

Reduction in Chloride Ion 90% minimum at 28 days Penetration

Water Vapour Transmission > 13g/m2/day

Carbon Dioxide Diffusion Equivalent to 500 mm

Resistance of 30 N/mm2 concrete.

Trial Panels

5/43.6 Prior to applying the system in the works, trial applications shall be carried out on trial
panels made by the Contractor under Clause 4/33. The trials will demonstrate the method
proposed for applying the system, coverage, coating thickness, colour and final
appearance of the coating. Representatives of the coating manufacturers shall be present
at the trials and the surface preparation and application of the coating shall be carried out
under their direction. The Contractor shall at his own expense surface coat as many panels
as required by the Engineer until a trial panel has been accepted by the Engineer as
satisfactory. The coated panel, when accepted will form the standard against which the
corresponding coating in the works will be judged. No application of the coating in the works
shall be undertaken until trials have been completed to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

Inspection of Concrete

5/43.7 The Contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of concrete surface
until he has received the Engineer’s Representative’s permission to do so and he shall not
apply cement slurry or mortar or any other coating to the concrete surfaces from which the
shuttering has been struck until the concrete has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer’s Representative.

Faulty Concrete Work

5/43.8 The Contractor shall on the written instruction of the Engineer remove and reconstruct any
such portion of the work which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsatisfactory as regards
quality of concrete, incorrect dimension of the cast portion, badly placed or insufficient
reinforcement, honeycombing or other such cause as shall render the construction not up
to the standard required and which in the opinion of the Engineer may prejudicially affect
the strength or durability of the construction.

Approval Prior to Coating Application in the Works

5/43.9 The Engineer’s approval must be obtained prior to applying the coating system in the
works. Before approval is given the Engineer will need to be satisfied as to the following:-

January 2023 5-21 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

a) All construction work in the immediate vicinity of the structure to be coated has been
completed.
b) The surface preparation of the structure has been completed.
c) The whole of the structure can be coated in a continuous operation.
d) Adequate measures have been taken to protect the property of third parties, including
vehicles, from coating splatters.
e) The weather conditions accord with the coating manufacturer’s direction for coating
application.

5/44 GEOGRIDS

5/44.1 The Quality Control Strength of the geogrid shall be 30 kN/m with peak strains of around
11% (longitudinal) and 10% (transverse). The loads at 2% and 5% strain shall be 10.5 kN/m
and 21kN/m respectively in both the longitudinal and transverse directions.

Tested in accordance with BS 6906 and expressed as the lower 95% confidence limit in
accordance with ISO 2602-1980 (BS 2846 Part 2, 1981).

5/44.2 The ribs of the geogrid shall be of rectangular cross section in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions with a minimum edge thickness of 1.35 mm.

The geogrid aperture size shall be approximately 37 mm x 37 mm.

5/44.3 The geogrid shall be manufactured from polypropylene sheet oriented in two directions so
that the resulting ribs shall have a high degree of molecular orientation which continues
through the area of the integral node.

5/44.4 The geogrid shall be inert to all chemicals naturally found in soils and shall have no solvents
at ambient temperature. It shall not be susceptible to hydrolysis shall be resistant to
aqueous solutions of salts, acids and alkalis, and shall be non- biodegradable.

5/44.5 The geogrid shall have a minimum of 2% finely divided carbon black, as determined by BS
2782 Part 4, Method 452B:1978, well dispersed in the polymer matrix to inhibit attack by
ultra violet light.

5/44.6 The typical strength of the nodes between the longitudinal and transverse ribs, as
determined by the Geosynthetics Research Institute. Drexel University, U.S.A, Test Method
GG2-87, shall be > 90% of the Quality Control Strength in both longitudinal and transverse
directions.

5/44.7 The geogrid shall be manufactured in accordance with the Quality Assurance requirements
ISO 9002 - 1987 (EN 29002/BS 5750, Part 2, 1987). If required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide evidence that the manufacturer’s Quality Assurance System has
been certified to conform with ISO 9002 (EN 29002/BS 5750) by an external authenticating
authority.

5/45 LITTER BIN

5/45.1 Litter Bin dimensions shall be 610 mm. diameter by 975mm. height.

January 2023 5-22 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

5/45.2 Slats shall be made from teakwood and treated with three coats of sadolin. The total
number of slats shall be 22 (twenty two) with slat size being 66 mm. by 32 mm.

5/45.3 Top shall be made from structural plastic foam moulded consisting of one piece moulded
dome with a spring loaded hinged flap.

5/45.4 Ashtray shall be made from 18 gauge galvanized steel and shall be coated with baked on
polyester powder coating.

5/45.5 Liner shall be fire retardant GRP.

January 2023 5-23 Section 5 – Ancillary Works

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 6

Works in Connection with Service

Authorities

January 2023 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

6/1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

6/2 EXCAVATION FOR EXISTING SERVICES
6/3 SERVICES DUCTS
6/4 EXCAVATION FOR DUCTS
6/5 BEDDING AND LAYING OF DUCTS
6/6 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES
6/7 TESTING DUCTS
6/8 MARKING AND RECORDING OF DUCTS
6/9 ELECTRICITY WORKS - GENERAL
6/10 ELECTRICITY WORKS - SUPPLY OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6/11 ELECTRICITY WORKS - INSTALLATION OF CABLES
6/12 WATER WORKS - GENERAL
6/13 WATER WORKS - MATERIALS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR
6/14 WATER WORKS - STANDARDS
6/15 WATER WORKS - PIPES
6/16 WATER WORKS - GRP FITTINGS
6/17 WATER WORKS - PHYSICAL AND CHEMICALREQUIREMENTS OF GRP
FITTINGS
6/18 WATER WORKS - VALVES
6/19 WATER WORK - MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES
6/20 WATER WORKS - HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PIPES
6/21 WATER WORKS - EXCAVATION LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES
6/22 WORKS - PIPE ANCHOR AND THRUST BLOCKS
6/23 WATER WORKS - CLEANING OF PIPELINES
6/24 WATER WORKS - TESTING PIPELINES
6/25 WATER WORKS - FINAL CLEANING AND STERILISATION
6/26 WATER WORKS - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINE
6/27 WORKS FOR ETISALAT - GENERAL
6/28 MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY ETISALAT
6/29 INSTALLATION OF PVC DUCT
6/30 WORKS FOR SHARJAH MUNICIPALITY DRAINAGE DEPT. (SM)
6/31 SETTING OUT (SM)

January 2023 Section 6 –TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

6/32 EXCAVATION FOR DRAINAGE PIPELINE (SM)

6/33 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES (SM)
6/34 GRP (GLASS REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN PIPES) (SM)
6/35 UPVC (THERMOPLASTIC PIPES) (SM)
6/35A ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS (SM)
6/36 TRENCH WIDTHS FOR PIPELINES (SM)
6/37 PIPELINES IN WIDE TRENCHES (SM)
6/38 PIPELAYING (SM)
6/39 PIPELINE BEDDED ON TRENCH BOTTOM (SM)
6/40 PIPELINES IN CONCRETE CRADLES AND SURROUNDS (SM).
6/41 PIPELINES ON GRANULAR BEDS (SM)
6/42 PLACING SURROUNDS TO PIPELINES (SM)
6/43 COMPACTION OF PIPE SURROUNDS (SM)
6/44 PIPELINES BELOW PERMANENT GROUND WATER LEVEL (SM)
6/45 BACKFILLING TRENCHES (SM)
6/46 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS ON GROUP B AND GROUP C PIPELINES
(SM)
6/47 STANKS TO PIPELINES IN GRANULAR BEDDING (SM)
6/48 THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS TO PRESSURE PIPELINES (SM)
6/49 PIPES PROTRUDING FROM STRUCTURES, CONCRETE SURROUNDS AND
ANCHOR BLOCKS (SM)
6/50 PROTECTION OF PIPELINE COMPONENTS (SM)
6/51 INDICATOR POSTS TO PRESSURE MAINS (SM)
6/52 ENCLOSING GRANULAR OR STONE SURROUND WITH FILTER FABRIC
(SM)
6/53 GROUTING OF PIPELINES (SM)
6/54 PIPEWORK WITHIN STRUCTURES (SM)
6/55 MANHOLES, CATCHPITS AND CHAMBERS (SM)
6/56 CATCHPIT/MANHOLE LININGS COVERS AND FRAMES
6/57 GULLIES AND CONNECTIONS (SM)
6/58 HOUSE CONNECTION LATERALS (SM)
6/59 TESTING AND CLEANING OF GRAVITY DRAINS (SM)

January 2023 Section 6 –TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

6/60 IRRIGATION WORKS - ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPE

6/61 IRRIGATION WORKS - GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) FITTINGS
6/62 IRRIGATION WORKS - VALVES
6/63 IRRIGATION WORKS - DISMANTLING JOINT AND FLANGE ADAPTOR
6/64 IRRIGATION WORKS - DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS
6/65 IRRIGATION WORKS - HYDRAULIC TEST
6/66 IRRIGATION WORKS - DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
6/67 IRRIGATION WORKS - BOLTS, PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
6/68 IRRIGATION WORKS - NON-DISRUPTIVE ROAD CROSSING

January 2023 Section 6 –TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 6 – WORKS IN CONNECTION WITH SERVICE AUTHORITIES

6/1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

6/1.1 This work consist of the provision of new services and/or the searching, protection,
diversion and relocation of the existing services for the following authorities:

- Ministry of Energy & Infrastructure (MOEI)

- Sharjah Electricity and Water Authority (SEWA)
- Etihad Water & Electricity (EWE)
- Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA)
- Emirates Telecommunications Corporation Ltd.
- Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC (du)
- Sharjah Municipality.
- Roads & Transport Authority, Roads Department.

6/1.2 The full scope of the new works required for the protection, diversion and relocation of
services cannot be determined at the tender stage and the Contractor shall allow in his
rates for any variation in quantities and for the non-continuous and interrupted nature of
the work.

6/1.3 The Contractor’s attention is particularly drawn to the procedures to be followed concerning
existing services and service diversions laid down in Section 1 of the specifications and all
current Administrative orders.

6/1.4 The service ducts shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer are to be provided
so that future services can pass through them without disturbing the road construction.

6/1.5 Position, types of ducts, pipes, cables, manholes etc. and constructional details are shown
on the Drawings but final locations will be determined on site by the Engineer after having
consulted with the concerned authorities.

6/1.6 The Contractor shall verify the position of services by digging trial trenches and pits and if
ducts, pipes, cables and manholes which are not marked on the Drawings are found, the
Engineer and the concerned Authority will then instruct on the action to be taken, if any.

6/1.7 All protected services, existing ducts found or newly laid ducts shall be marked with
approved markers (Sub-Section 6/8) of size and type shown on the Drawings or as
indicated by the Engineer. The location of markers shall be as shown on the Drawings. No
asphalt course with be laid unless the ends of the ducts or protected services have been
exposed and marked with markers.

6/1.8 No work concerning services will be started without having first informed and obtained
approval of the Concerned Authorities. Services works shall be executed in accordance
with the relevant clauses of the Specifications.

6/1.9 The protection of existing services shall be carried out before the earth work starts in the
vicinity of the services to be protected.

6/1.10 Where new cable/ducts are to be laid alongside, over or under the existing, the Contractor
shall take care to interfere as little as possible with the existing services and connections

January 2023 6-1 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

thereto and any damage shall be repaired by the Contractor to the approval of the
appropriate Authority or by appropriate Authority at the cost of the Contractor.

6/1.11 If some services have already been protected by the various Departments no protection
will be carried out under this Contract, but such protection can be extended and/or
upgraded as instructed by the Engineer on Site after having consulted with the Concerned
Authority.

6/1.12 All concrete works shall conform to the requirements of Section 4 of the Specification.

6/1.13 Road crossing ducts shall extend beyond the road line at each side of the road as shown
on the Drawings. When appropriate, the excavation for the road crossing and laying of
ducts, concreting etc., shall only be carried out on half the width of the road at one time,
the other half being left available for traffic. In this case the necessary traffic warning signs
on self-supporting tripods/cones shall be provided well ahead of the duct crossing work and
all care and attention exercised to avoid risk of traffic accidents during preparation and
execution of the work.

6/1.14 To prevent soil and/or sand blocking the ducts, the openings at both ends are to be
protected with appropriate blanking caps.

6/1.15 The Contractor shall be responsible for public safety during execution of work. He will take
all steps, including where necessary the provision of ropes, picket fence, etc., on each side
of the trenches and excavations with warning lights and night watchman etc. to ensure the
safety of the public. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to property or
injury to persons due to his negligence. Any instruction from the Engineer concerning the
safety aspects of the work must be carried out immediately, but the Contractor shall remain
responsible for the adequacy of the safety measures.

6/1.16 The Contractor shall after completing each duct, make the necessary arrangements with
the Services Authorities for testing and acceptance of the work.

6/1.17 The Contractor shall supply continuous warning tape for Services Authorities with the
following requirements.

a) The Contractor shall install approved warning tapes during backfilling work over
buried pipes, cables, conduits and ducts, as required. Warning tapes shall be
coloured and inscribed for identification according to the requirements of the
relevant Authority.

b) Warning tape shall be approved high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene
film 250 mm wide, and with a minimum thickness of 150 microns. Tape shall have
minimum tensile strength of 125 Kg/[Link]. longitudinally and 105 Kg/[Link].
laterally with an elongation factor of 350%.

c) Tape shall be printed with 50 mm high black lettering, alternatively in Arabic and
English. The complete wordings shall be repeated every 2 m along the tape. The
colours shall be vivid, glossy and permanent with a life expectancy of 40 years.

d) Warning tapes shall be placed with the inscriptions facing upwards. The level of
the tape relating to the top of service shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the relevant Authority.

e) Warning tapes over non-metallic services shall be backed with Aluminium foil to
facilitate detection.

January 2023 6-2 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/1.18 All trenches and other excavation shall be maintained in a dry condition and the Contractor
shall arrange a suitable dewatering system for any dewatering involved, in agreement with
the Engineer, to keep the working place clean and dry. The

Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his rates for all costs associated with this
work.

6/2 EXCAVATION FOR EXISTING SERVICES

6/2.1 The Contractor’s attention is again drawn to Section 1of the Specification, regarding
existing services and diversions, which must be strictly adhered to.

6/2.2 The position of existing services as shown on the drawings are for informational purposes
only and do not necessarily show exact locations, depths, spacings, and smaller services
such as house connections which are not normally indicated on such drawings. The
Contractor shall excavate by hand, take trial pits at regular distance and also at all road
intersections to locate existing services, their number, depth and route direction. As these
services are located the Contractor shall prepare shop drawings indicating the
aforementioned information.

6/2.3 After existing services, according to the Engineer’s instruction, have been exposed and if
according to the opinion of the Engineer and after approval of the concerned authorities it
is found necessary to proceed with the lowering or diversion, thereof, the Contractor shall
proceed with the relevant excavation in co-ordination with the said authorities.

6/2.4 The Contractor shall maintain records of such excavation in a form acceptable to the
Engineer. Two copies of such records shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis
or as agreed with by the Engineer.

6/2.5 The Contractor shall include all tools, labour, equipment and accessories as required to
complete the hand excavation. The Contractor shall include all materials, labour and
equipment necessary to protect the existing utilities, as well as any shoring and protection
during hand excavation.

6/2.6 All materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with the
specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

6/2.7 When directed by the Engineer, all such excavation shall be backfilled with suitable
material, placed and compacted, all in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications. The Contractor shall place fill material and compact with care to avoid
damage to the existing services. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all
damages caused by his construction operations.

6/2.8 The works relevant to the lowering of the existing service(s) will be started as soon as,
according to the Engineer, all the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent any
injury to person and/or property or services.

6/2.9 The excavation for lowering the existing service(s) shall be performed by hand down to the
elevation indicated by the Engineer and/or the concerned authority.

6/2.10 At all times the Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his expense, access to the
adjoining properties to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 6-3 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/2.11 Where hedges are damaged or destroyed the whole shall be restored and reinstated with
shrubs of the same kind as the hedge, planted in due season in an approved manner and
fenced on each side with post and rail stock proof fences finished on top with one strand of
galvanized barbed wire, or otherwise protected as required by the owners or occupiers and
the Engineer.

6/2.12 Where fences or walls are damaged or destroyed the whole shall be restored and
reinstated with like materials to the satisfaction of the owners or occupiers and the
Engineers.

6/2.13 The Contractor shall ensure that no trees are damaged or permanently removed in carrying
out the Contract except where directed due to the presence of permanent works.

6/3 SERVICES DUCTS

6/3.1 The Contractor shall supply (unless otherwise specified) and install all the necessary
service ducts required by the Contract. The duct material shall be as specified on the
Drawings. A sample of the proposed duct shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval prior to their use. (For ducts for works for Etisalat, refer to Sub-Section 6/28).

6/3.2 In general all duct laying work is subject to the approval of the Engineer and any particular
requirements of the concerned Authority.

6/4 EXCAVATION FOR DUCTS

6/4.1 The trench shall be excavated with the width and to the depth shown on the drawings or
as indicated by the Engineer.

6/4.2 The sides of pits and trenches shall be vertical and adequately supported at all times.
Excavation may if considered necessary be battered with a safe slope, but only with the
Engineer’s written permission.

6/4.3 The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded. Care shall be taken not to excavate
below the depths indicated. Where rock is encountered, the rock shall be excavated to the
required depth. Uneven surfaces of the bottom of trench shall be excavated 150 mm
deeper. Such depth in rock shall be backfilled with approved fill material and compacted as
specified and/or as directed by the Engineer.

6/4.4 Where ducts are laid in the line of the road construction, the bottom of the excavation shall
be compacted to not less than density of 95% M.D.D., as determined by BS 1377 Part 4
(method 3.5, 3.6) or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. The insitu density test shall
be carried out in accordance with BS 1377 Part 9 Method 2.2.

6/4.5 Excavated material shall, if found unsuitable as defined in the Specification, be disposed
of to an approved tip and replaced with suitable material. All surplus suitable excavated
material shall be used in road construction or disposed of in an approved manner.

6/4.6 Where split ducts are required for existing services crossing the works, hand excavation
shall be carefully undertaken until the position of apparatus to be protected is fully exposed.

January 2023 6-4 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/5 BEDDING AND LAYING OF DUCTS

6/5.1 As soon as possible after trench excavation, ducts of the required diameter shall be joined
in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

6/5.2 Ducts shall be laid to the lines and levels indicated on the Drawings with the required depth
of cover. Where the specified minimum cover cannot be achieved, or as otherwise directed
by the Engineer, they shall be bedded and surrounded with 150 mm of concrete Class
15/20.

6/5.3 Unless surrounded in concrete, ducts shall be bedded on a layer of sand 150 mm thick and
fully surrounded with sand to a depth of 300 mm above the duct barrel, well packed and
tamped. Filling with suitable material above this level shall be free from large stones. For
multiple ducts, the spaces between ducts are to be filled with compacted sand and the
ducts surrounded to a depth of 300 mm above the uppermost layer. Trench backfill shall
be compacted to the requirements of the Specifications.

6/5.4 The line of ducts shall be maintained as straight as possible. Short length of duct, but not
less than 600 mm, long may be used to achieve any required deviation in the duct runs.

6/5.5 Ducts shall be cut by the Contractor as necessary only at right angles to their length using
a saw in a simple cutting guide. The inside cut edges shall be thoroughly rounded off or
dressed before installation to prevent damage to cables drawn through the ducts.

6/5.6 Existing services shall be protected where necessary, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, using spilt uPVC ducts laid as described above, fully surrounded with 150mm of
concrete Class 15/20. The Contractor shall consult the Engineer prior to carrying out
protection works to agree the exact method.

6/5.7 The halves of the split ducts shall be wired together and wrapped twice with polythene
sheeting to prevent the ingress of concrete.

6/6 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES

6/6.1 After the cables/ducts have been laid, the trench refilling shall commence with approved fill
in compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm thick, each layer being well compacted by hand
with iron rammers weighing not less than 5 kg, until the trench has been filled to a height
of 300 mm above the top of the cable/duct.

6/6.2 The reminder of the trench shall then be refilled in compacted layers not exceeding 200
mm in thickness, each layer being well compacted, with power rammers, vibrating plate
compactors or other mechanical means of a type to be approved until the ground is
thoroughly consolidated up to the required level for surface reinstatement. Each layer shall
be compacted to not less than 95% of its maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377
Part 4 (method 3.5, 3.6). Should the quantity of the excavated material be not sufficient,
due to unsuitability or otherwise, for the process of backfill and fill, the Contractor shall
obtain the quantity required of such backfill and fill from approved borrow pits and transport
same to the site of the work at his own expense.

6/6.3 Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the Engineer
has verified that the cables/ducts have been installed in accordance with the Specification
and Drawings.

January 2023 6-5 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/6.4 Lumps and clods shall be broken up before use. Materials shall not be dropped from a
height and where directed, water shall be added to assist in adequate consolidation.

6/6.5 Where cover to cables/ducts is less than 900 mm, or where ordered by the Engineer,
protection in the form of concrete encasing shall be provided according to an approved
drawing or as ordered by the Engineer.

6/7 TESTING DUCTS

6/7.1 On completion of all ducting, two mops of appropriate sizes connected to each end of an
iron mandrel shall be passed twice each way to clean the ducts and to remove foreign
matter. All proving tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and the service Authority.
Should any obstruction or other defect be discovered it shall be removed or rectified
immediately to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

All testing is to be complete before commencement of asphalt works.

6/8 MARKING AND RECORDING OF DUCTS

6/8.1 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings each cable duct of length greater than 3 m shall
be provided with a drawcord of approved 15 mm diameter nylon rope. The length of each
15 mm drawcord shall be such that at least 1 m extends from each end of the duct. As soon
as each duct or set of ducts have been proved and the draw cords installed the ends shall
be plugged with a wooden or other approved bung and a single coat of bituminous paint
shall be applied over the end of the duct and the bung. The free end of drawcords shall be
stored in an approved manner. The Contractor shall ensure that all ducts are kept free from
dirt, rubble, water and other obstructions.

6/8.2 In kerbless stretches of new roadway the Contractor shall provide suitable cast aluminium
stud duct markers (Type 2) to be fixed into the road surface over the line of the respective
duct or ducts at each end of the duct run, shown on the Drawings. The head of the stud
shall be suitably inscribed in Arabic and English, with the approved abbreviation of the
concerned Authority, such as, D.E.C, E.T.C, etc. Should the markers not be placed
immediately on completion of duct runs, the Contractor shall expose the end of the duct to
satisfy the Engineer of its position when placing the marker. The stud to be provided will be
as per the products manufactured by approved manufacturers based in U.A.E. In this
regard the Contractor must submit his proposals with samples for approval.

6/8.3 In kerbed areas of new roadway Type 1 and Type 2 duct markers shall be used. Type 1
duct marker shall be of concrete construction, in situ or precast depending on the location,
as per the details shown in the Contract drawings, complete with approved abbreviation
cast thereon. The finished product shall be solid in appearance, free of segregation, honey
combing broken edges and other defects.

The cost of these particular markers will be subsidiary to the relevant duct provision item.

6/8.4 The Contractor shall prepare and maintain up to date drawings for each Service Authority
giving details of each duct laid including precise location, level, number and type, and these
drawings to be submitted to the Engineer.

January 2023 6-6 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SHARJAH ELECTRICITY AND WATER AUTHORITY WORKS

6/9 ELECTRICITY WORKS - GENERAL

6/9.1 The works relate to the following:

a) The installation, jointing and commissioning of low, medium and high voltage power
cable and pilot/telephone cable.

b) The relocation and protection of existing cables and pilot/telephone cables.

c) The provision of duct crossing for future development use, all in accordance with the
relevant sections of the Specification and to the satisfaction and approval of the
Engineer and SEWA representative.

6/9.2 Where existing cables require extension of existing protection ducts of concrete
encasement or where shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide such protection
by means of split PVC ducts with concrete surround all as per the relevant clauses of the
Specification. The longitudinal seam of the split duct shall be sealed with waterproof tape
to prevent the ingress of grout. The tape shall be denso or equivalent.

6/9.3 Elsewhere, following lowering as found necessary, additional duct(s) will be furnished and
installed alongside existing cables in accordance with the requirements of the SEWA and
relevant Contract Drawings.

6/9.4 If requested, and upon receipt of authorization by SEWA Engineer, the Contractor shall
excavate, remove de-energized cable(s), transport to store or dispose of as directed by
SEWA Engineer, and backfill the excavation. The cost of the excavation shall be paid under
the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities.

6/10 ELECTRICITY WORKS - SUPPLY OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES

6/10.1 The cables, pilot cables and enclosures, straight through joints, splitter boxes, jointing
accessories, PVC tiles, marker tape and earthing strip required for installation of cables
shall be supplied from SEWA Stores, as free issue items.

6/10.2 The 6.6 KV power cable is 3 core, 300 [Link] Copper or Aluminium Conductors
PLY/SWA/PVC according to BS 6480 – 1969,ISO-160-1980 in drum lengths of 250/400
meters respectively.

6/10.3 The 33 KV power cable is 3 core 400 [Link]. copper stranded CONDUCTOR HSL type
PLY/SWA/PVC and is in drums of 400 metre lengths.

6/10.4 The composite, 33 KV pilot/telephone cable comprises of 6 pilot cores of 2.5 [Link]. each
in two triple sleeves and 8 telephone pairs of 1/1.13 mm in four quad formations wound on
1000 metre drum lengths.

6/10.5 132 KV pilot cables comprises of 14 pair 1/1.13 mm copper conductor, polyethylene
insulated, paired, polyethylene sheathed, galvanized single wire armoured, PVC sheathed
wound on 1000 metre drum length.

January 2023 6-7 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/10.6 Cable tiles are made of high density PVC compound and are in 1 metre lengths with
provision of interlocking longitudinally 20 and 15 cms. wide tiles shall be laid centrally as a
physical cover over 6.6 KV, 33 KV power and pilot/telephone cables respectively.

6/10.7 Upon taking delivery, if the Contractor feels that material given is of inferior quality, he
should immediately bring to the notice of the SEWA and the Engineer.

6/11 ELECTRICITY WORKS - INSTALLATION OF CABLES

6/11.1 Trenching with mechanical aids shall be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer where
minimum of services exist, and where location of services is already effected, otherwise
only manual excavation shall be permitted.

6/11.2 The cables are to be laid in trenches to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. All cables,
screens and armouring will be solid earthed at each end of the route to the station earthing
system. Separate cable tiles are required for the main cables and for the pilot cables. The
tiles for the 33 KV cables shall be 1000 mm long and 200 mm wide. The tiles for the pilot
and 6.6 KV cables shall be 1000 mm long and 150 mm wide. The tiles are to be placed
centrally over each cable and are to be laid with ends interlocked with adjacent tiles. Plastic
warning tape shall be installed at the specified level.

6/11.3 Pressure testing of the cables will be carried out by DEC for the whole of each route. Any
failure of the joint or cable due to its mishandling shall be rectified by the Contractor at no
extra charges. All additional material required for making good the fault/damage shall be at
the Contractor’s cost. All work is to be guaranteed for one year by the Contractor.

6/11.4 The Contractor shall remove within a period of 15 days after completion of route, all the
empty cable drums from the works and transport to DEC stores.

6/11.5 Contractor shall supply ‘As laid drawings” for the cable circuit to a scale of 1:1000 indicating
the following:

- Layout of cable work

- Length size, type and grade of cables
- Location of each joint with respect to permanent landmarks available at site.
- Name of the circuit, Contract number, date of completion, Name of Contractor with
signature, SEWA’s Senior Distribution Construction Engineer’s approval.

6/11.6 After the route/circuit is completed, the Contractor shall take full care to clear the site
completely and leave it neat and tidy. All the remains i.e. excess earth, stones, tile pieces,
rubbish or any unwanted solid waste should be removed to tip.

6/11.7 Route markers as per the Drawings shall be provided along straight runs of cable at
locations approved by the Engineer and SEWA and generally at intervals not exceeding
100 meters. Markers shall also be provided to identify the change of the cables route and
also for location of every underground joint.

6/11.8 Even though the circuit may be energised due to compelling reasons, the taking over date
for maintenance/guarantee period shall be the date on which all the outstanding work
pointed out to Contractor is completed satisfactorily and official taking over certificate
issued to the Contractor.

January 2023 6-8 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/12 WATER WORKS - GENERAL

6/12.1 This section deals with the specification for works to be carried out in connection with Water
Service pipework to be ultimately taken over by the Sharjah Electricity and Water Authority.
Works shall comply with the current SEWA standard specification and this will take
precedence over the following.

6/12.2 The works include for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Water
Service installation, the layout for which is shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
include for all labour, materials, tools and tackle, complete with all trenching and backfill.

6/12.3 The Contractor shall include for the preparation for all necessary working Drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the location of other services and the correct setting out
of the installation.

6/12.4 The work also involves the exposing of existing water pipe lines for the purpose of
transferring existing house connections if any to the new distribution system and for the
connection of the new system thereto, and the recovery and disposal of all abandoned
existing connection lines, all as indicated in the Drawings or otherwise directed by the
Engineer.

6/12.5 The Contractor shall allow in his programme for the non-continuous nature of the work
relating to the water services.

6/13 WATER WORKS - MATERIALS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR

6/13.1 All materials shall be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, including but
not limited to pipes, collars, rubber rings, valves, hydrants and fittings.

6/13.2 The materials provided by the Contractor shall include all materials for temporary works,
planking and strutting, excavations, shuttering and formwork, staging and scaffolding,
approved filling materials, approved road surfacing and paving materials, all materials
required for repairing the internal coating of valves, etc., such as primer, coal tar enamel
etc., all concrete of each required class including reinforcing steel and mesh, all surface
boxes etc.

6/13.3 All materials supplied locally by the Contractor shall be of the best quality in their class and
of the respective kinds as described in the Contract and in accordance with the Engineer’s
instructions and to the satisfaction of SEWA. They shall be inspected from time to time at
the site during the progress of the work.

6/13.4 Any materials arriving on site found unsuitable shall be rejected. The Contractor shall
replace the rejected material at his own expense.

6/13.5 The Contractor shall, before supplying any local material, prepare and submit, at his
expense, to the Engineer for approval samples of materials which he proposes to use. Such
samples shall be retained by the Engineer. The materials represented shall not be used in
the works unless and until the samples have been approved in writing by the Engineer.

January 2023 6-9 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/14 WATER WORKS - STANDARDS

6/14.1 All calculations, drawings and submissions shall be in SI (System International) units.
Material items shall be to the latest BS (British Standard) or equivalent comparable
internationally recognized standard of construction and quality.

6/15 WATER WORKS - PIPES

General

6/15.1 Asbestos Cement (AC) pressure pipe shall conform to the requirements of ISO 160.
Pipe shall be manufactured in the U.A.E. All pipe and joints shall be supplied by one
manufacturer.

Class

6/15.2 AC pipe shall meet the requirements for Class 18 suitable for an operating pressure of 9
bars.

Pipe wall thickness shall meet all design requirements of Class 18 pipe as follows:

NOMINAL DIAMETER OUTSIDE DIAMETER

(MM) (MM) AT THE END
75 93
80 106
100 126
150 178
225 255
300 344
550 616
600 668
700 780
900 1000
1200 1320

Cement

6/15.3 All cement used in the manufacture of asbestos cement pipe and joints shall be a high
sulphate resisting cement conforming to BS 4027 : 1980. Copies of cement mill certificates
shall be submitted with each consignment delivered to site.

Joints

6/15.4 Asbestos cements pipe shall be provided with spigot ends to be joined with ‘Reka’ type
couplings with two rubber rings. Rubber rings shall conform to the requirements of BS 2494.
Joints shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 18 bars without any leaks even
when deflected to the angle specified below:

January 2023 6-10 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

NOMINAL DIAMETER MAX. JOINT DEFLECTION

(MM) ANGLE MM
DEGREES
up to 225 5
250 – 350 4
400 – 550 3
600 – 1000 2
1100 – 1500 1

Copies of test reports showing compliance to these requirements shall be submitted to

SEWA and the Engineer for approval. Joint lubricant shall be an approved vegetable-based
type and shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer.

Length

6/15.5 Asbestos cement pipe shall be manufactured in 3 metre lengths for diameters 225 (9”) and
smaller and in 5 meter nominal lengths for larger sizes.

6/15.6 Testing

Asbestos cement pipes shall be factory tested in accordance, with the ISO 160 - 1980
copies of test certificates shall be submitted for each consignment manufactured, and
delivered to site. Sampling and inspection shall be in accordance with section 5 of ISO 160
- 1980. Witnessing of factory testing by SEWA representative may be required before any
consignment is delivered to site. All compulsory and optional tests shall be carried out by
the manufacturer.

SEWA shall have the right to return up to 1% of pipes and joints delivered to site for factory
testing by the SEWA representative. All pipes testing shall be performed on immersed
samples.

6/15.7 Markings

Each pipe and all joints shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the following :-

i. The manufacturing standard.

ii. The manufacturer’s name.
iii. Manufacturing date.
iv. Nominal diameter (ND) in mm.
v. Pressure rating in bars (class).
vi. Inspection mark.

6/16 WATER WORKS - GRP FITTINGS

6/16.1 All the fittings (bends, adapters, tees, etc.) shall be GRP (Glass Fiber Reinforced) pressure
fitting which comply with the following specifications:-

General

6/16.2 This section covers the design, manufacture and testing of glass fiber reinforced (GRP)
pressure fittings for use with Asbestos Cement pipelines in nominal sizes 80 mm and larger.
GRP fittings shall be locally manufactured in the U.A.E.

January 2023 6-11 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Construction

6/16.3 GRP fittings shall have the following principal construction:-

 A corrosion resistant, resin rich liner having a minimum thickness of 0.5 mm. The
liner surface shall be reinforced with “C” glass mat impregnated with vinylester or
Epoxy Resin.

 A structural wall consisting of continuous glass filament windings and/or woven

rovings and chopped glass reinforcements and may include fillers, all impregnated
with Resin.

 A resin-rich exterior surface having a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm, impregnated

with resin.

6/16.4 No pigments shall be allowed in the GRP fittings.

Design Requirements

6/16.5 GRP fittings and flanges shall be designed for service at the following conditions:-

Maximum Operating Pressure 10 Bars

Minimum Site Test Pressure 15 Bars
Maximum Allowable Vacuum -1 Bar
Minimum Depth of Cover 1.0 Metre
Maximum Depth of Cover 4.0 Metre
Truck Loading (Wheel Load) 100 KN
Maximum Service Temperature 50 Deg.C.

6/16.6 Flanged fittings shall be designed for installation above ground (in Chambers) with no thrust
blocks.

6/16.7 Flanged branches on Spigot Tees and puddle (Wall) flanges shall be designed to resist
End thrust from closed valves.

GRP Joints

6/16.8 Spigot Joints, where specified shall have the same outside diameter (O.D.) as Asbestos
Cement (AC) pipe class 18 used by SEWA. The joint dimensions and tolerances shall be
equal to AC pipe spigots such that the joint remains water tight under all normal operating
conditions. The spigot ends shall be clearly marked with a Home line indicating the proper
insertion limit for the AC couplings.

6/16.9 Flanged Joints, where specified shall be GRP filament wound flanges manufactured from
Vinylester or Epoxy resin. Flanges shall be flat faced and drilled to BS 5404 PN 10 drilling
pattern. Full face rubber gaskets 3 mm minimum thickness shall be provided by the fitting
manufacturer.

6/16.10 Laminated or Adhesive Joints, used in the fabrication of fittings shall be equal or superior
in strength to the sections they join. The thickness of laminated joints shall not be less than
the wall thickness of the adjoining pipe section.

January 2023 6-12 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/17 WATER WORKS - PHYSICAL AND CHEMICALREQUIREMENTS OF GRP FITTINGS

Chemical Requirements

6/17.1 GRP fittings shall not impart any taste, odour or colour to drinking water. All resins used
shall be suitable for use in drinking water systems.

Dimensions

6/17.2 GRP fittings shall be produced in Metric sizes and shall be classified by their nominal inside
diameter (N.D.). The actual fitting inside diameter shall not be less than the following in the
table below:-

NOMINAL DIAMETER MINIMUM INSIDE DIAMETER

ND (mm) (mm)
80 78
100 98
150 148
200 198
225 223
250 248
300 298
550 546
600 595
700 695
750 744
900 892
1200 1190

6/17.3 Elbows of nominal diameter 300 mm and smaller shall be of the smooth radius type, having
a turning radius of 1.5 times the elbow nominal diameter. Elbows larger than 300 mm shall
be of a mitered type of nominal radius of 1.5 times the elbow nominal diameter so as to
produce as smooth as flow possible. All internal surfaces shall be finished smooth.

Flanges

6/17.4 The minimum GRP flange wall thickness shall not be less than that shown in the table
below:-

NOMINAL DIAMETER MINIMUM INSIDE FLANGE

ND (mm) THICKNESS (mm)
80 32
100 32
150 32
200 37
225 42
300 48
550 68
600 68
700 73
750 77
900 82

January 2023 6-13 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

NOMINAL DIAMETER MINIMUM INSIDE FLANGE

ND (mm) THICKNESS (mm)
1200 106

Wall Thickness

6/17.5 The wall thickness of GRP fittings shall be determined by the manufacturer to meet the
design requirements of these specifications but shall in no case be less than the values
shown in the table below :-

NOMINAL DIAMETER MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS

ND (mm) (mm)
80 3.2
100 3.2
150 3.2
200 3.2
225 3.4
300 3.6
550 4.4
600 5.7
700 6.3
750 7.3
900 9.5
1200 12.5

(Excluding liner and Exterior layer).

Mechanical Properties

6/17.6 GRP fittings shall meet the following minimum strength requirements:-

TEST METHOD MINIMUM VALUE

PROPERTY
Hoop Tensile Stress ASTM D2290 180 MPa

Axial Tensile Stress for ASTM D 638 40 MPa

spigot fittings
Axial Tensile Stress for ASTM D 638 90 MPa
flanged fittings
Stiffness (EI/D) BS 5480 : 1990 5000 Pa

Visual Requirements

6/17.7 GRP fittings shall be free from delamination, crazing, dry areas or cracks. Spigot ends shall
be free from end delamination, torn edges, gouges and shall be finished smooth to ensure
water tightness.

Testing GRP Fittings

6/17.8 The following tests shall be carried out by the fitting manufacturer at the intervals specified.
Test results and certificates shall be submitted to SEWA for each consignment delivered.
Witnessing of factory testing by the SEWA representative may be required.

January 2023 6-14 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SR. NO. TEST FREQUENCY

1. Visual Inspection Every Item

2. Dimensions Every Item

3. Hydraulic Pressure Once per 100 Flanged Items

4. Stiffness Once per 100 Equal Items

5. Longitudinal Tensile Stress Once per 100 Equal Items

6. Hope Tensile Stress Once per 100 Equal Items

All GRP pipes shall be tested at DCL for the following tests also.

1. Initial Longitudinal unit Tensile Strength by a Tensile Strip Test as per BS 4580 App.
“A”.
2. Initial specific stiffness under ring deflection in accordance with BS 4580 App. ‘H’.

Submittal/Drawings

6/17.9 Prior to start of production, the fittings manufacturer shall submit to SEWA dimensional
drawings of each fitting required for approval.

6/17.10 For flanged fittings, the manufacturer shall submit before delivery, the bolt-torquing
sequence and maximum recommended torque for each flange size supplied.

Markings

6/17.11 Each fitting shall be indelibly marked with the following:-

 Manufacturer’s name or Trademark

 Nominal Diameter (N.D) in mm
 Pressure rating in Bars
 Manufacturing Date
 Inspection Mark

6/18 WATER WORKS - VALVES

6/18.1 Sluice valves supplied shall be suitable for use IN SHARJAH, the valves shall be supplied
complete with gaskets and galvanized nuts and bolts. The sluice valves shall be in
accordance with BS 5163, latest edition. Manufacturer’s test certificates are required the
nominal pressure shall be 10 bar.

6/18.2 Double spigot valves with bevelled edges are required unless otherwise indicated.
The outside diameters of the machined ends shall fit with the specified pipes.

6/18.3 Valves greater than 300 mm dia shall be butterfly type valves.

6/18.4 The maximum tolerance shall be + 0.6 mm. It is preferred that the manufacturer makes an
allowance for the 300 microns epoxy coating during machining.

January 2023 6-15 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/18.5 Valves shall be grey cast iron, metal seated as per BS 1452 with a wedge of grey cast iron
and gun metal rings, the stem shall be of high tensile brass with a grey cast iron stem cap.
Toroidal sealing rings are required for stem sealing for all valves of 300 mm dia or less.

6/18.6 Valves up to and including 300 mm shall be clockwise closing without handwheel.

6/18.7 Where flanges are required they shall be drilled to PN 10 in accordance with the BS 4504
unless stated otherwise.

6/18.8 Additional markings on the valves shall be the year of manufacture and an individual
number which relates directly to the manufacturer’s test certificate.

6/18.9 The valves shall be coated externally and internally to 300 microns with an epoxy coating
suitable for use with drinking water, the primer shall be zinc rich and the preferred colour
of the coating is blue.

6/18.10 A certificate verifying the suitability of the epoxy paint for use with drinking water is required
from the manufacturer endorsed by the National Water Council, U.K., or similar body.

6/18.11 The manufacturer shall supply the original test certificate for each valve supplied, the
certificate shall relate to the individual number cast on each valve, the certificate shall give
the date of test.

6/19 WATER WORK - MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES

6/19.1 The manhole covers and frames shall be in accordance with the BS 497 : 1976 grade A
loading.

6/19.2 The frame shall be square with a circular clear opening of 600 mm diameter and be single
sealed.

6/19.3 The cover shall be badged “SEWA” in English and Arabic and also with the SEWA logo.
The pattern shall have the prior approval of the Sharjah Electricity and Water Authority.

6/19.4 The keys shall be provided for every 10 Nos. of covers supplied.

6/19.5 The cover and frame shall be coated with a suitable heavy duty abrasion resistant epoxy
paint to a minimum DFT of 375 microns.

6/19.6 SEWA reserves the right to request a manufacturer’s certificate certifying compliance with
the specification.

6/20 WATER WORKS - HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PIPES

6/20.1 Prior to undertaking any work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, his
proposal for the handling and storage of pipes and all fittings thereto. Such proposals shall
ensure that all pipes are properly handled and stored both by his staff and sub-contractors
staff.

January 2023 6-16 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/20.2 The storage surface should be as level as firm as possible and clear of rocks or solid objects
that might damage the pipes. Stockpiles should not exceed a certain height. This height is
limited for safety and practical reasons as per the following table :-

DN 800-400 450-600 700-1000 1000-1400 > 1500

Layer in 5 4 3 2 1
stockpile
Height <2m < 2.9 m < 3.0 m < 2.8 m < 2.0 m

6/20.3 Asbestos cement coupling rings shall be stored lying flat and particular care shall be taken
to prevent damage to the internal face of the ring or the turned ends of the pipes which may
affect the sealing of the coupling.

6/20.4 Rubber sealer rings and gaskets shall be stored in a cool, dry dark place away from grease,
oil and sunlight until required.

6/21 WATER WORKS - EXCAVATION LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES

6/21.1 The trench depth shall be according to the approved shop drawings but never less than 1.0
m between the ground level and the pipe crown level.

6/21.2 The Contractor shall excavate trenches to a sufficient depth and width according to the
following table:-

Where : is the width of the trench at the crown pipe level

DN (mm) B MIN. (mm) MAX. (mm)

80 - 200 600 700
250 700 800
300 800 900
350 – 2000 DN + 600 DN + 1000

6/21.3 The side of trenches shall be adequately supported at all times. Trench sides must be
vertical and no battering will be allowed without the express permission, in writing, of the
Engineer.

6/21.4 The Contractor shall thoroughly compact the bottom of the trench formation, the trench
shall be cleaned of all stones, soil and other debris that might have fallen therein.

6/21.5 Immediately following a prepared trench, pipes shall be laid and jointed on specified pipe
bedding material. Bricks or hard material shall not be placed under the pipes for temporary
support.

6/21.6 Prior to laying, each pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined both inside and outside
for any damage, and all dust, dirt and foreign matter shall be removed.

6/21.7 For assembling, the Contractor shall adhere to the following conditions:-

January 2023 6-17 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Preparation of the Reka Coupling

6/21.8 In order to avoid its damage the sealing rubber ring must be fitted into reka coupling just
before laying starts. Ensure that the groove of the rubber ring is carefully cleaned, the ring
is then fitted according to the following:-

a) Lay the coupling horizontally.

b) Fit the ring into the groove.
c) Check that the ring is uniformly and fully seated into the groove all the way round.
d) For large diameter (600 mm and above) two men are necessary to insert the ring.

Mounting the Coupling in the Pipe

6/21.9 Clean coupling and pipe with a soft brush and insert them fully. Lubricate the pipe end and
the coupling ring by means of a dry clean piece of cloth or a sponge. For lubricant use
Eternit supplied products soap. in dusty conditions lubricate generously the coupling only.

6/21.10 For small diameter pipes (Dia. <300) the coupling can be mounted by hand. Use a timber
block to protect the coupling and force the coupling into the correct position as indicated by
a black line on the pipe.

6/21.11 For larger diameters and where this method does not work the pulling can be achieved by
means of suitable mechanical devices. The gap between the pipes (15 mm) is achieved
automatically because the coupling stop at the level of the strap fixed to each end of the
pipe. N.B. It is essential to push the coupling to the home line and not beyond, otherwise
the pipes in the coupling will touch each other and consequently not allow any expansion.

6/21.12 Maximum deflection angles for curved pipelines shall be according to the following
schedule :-

DN O (mm) R (mm)

L = 3m L = 5m L = 3m L = 5m

80-250 5 290 963 38.18 57.33

300-350 4 232 399 97.71 71.25

400-600 3 175 262 63.6 95.5

700-1200 2 117 175 95.4 143.25

1300 1 59 88 190.8 286.50

Backfilling

6/21.13 The Contractor shall backfill the pipes as follows:

The backfilling material shall be brought up on both sides of the pipe first to the level of the
centre of the pipe line and then to height of 30 cm above the top of the pipe barrel. This
backfill material shall be placed in layers each not more than 15 cm thickness and shall be
carefully compacted for the full width of the trench with hand tools to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

January 2023 6-18 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Under The Road, Parking Areas and Footpaths

6/21.14 Backfill shall be in layers of thickness not exceeding 150 mm. Backfill shall have a minimum
soaked CBR (BS 1377 Part 4 Method 7) and compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (method 3.5 or 3.6). Backfill within
30 cm of road subgrade level shall meet the requirements of improved subgrade described
in Section 2 of the Specification. The insitu test shall be carried out in accordance with BS
1377 Part 9 Method 2.2.

Outside the Road

6/21.15 Backfill shall be in layers of thickness not exceeding 250 mm compacted carefully to a
minimum of 90% maximum Dry Density to the finished ground level. The insitu test shall
be carried out in accordance with BS 1377 Part 9 Method 2.2.

6/21.16 In order to prevent stones and soil from entering the pipe, a suitable cap and or plug shall
be provided with which the last pipe laid shall be closed when pipelaying is not actually in
progress. The plug shall be of the screw up expanding type or of tapered wood.

6/21.17 Where the cover to pipes is less than 1.0 m or where ordered by the Engineer, protection
in the form of concrete slabs above the pipe shall be provided according to an approved
drawing by SEWA.

6/22 WORKS - PIPE ANCHOR AND THRUST BLOCKS

6/22.1 Pipe anchor and thrust blocks, shall be constructed on pipelines at all bends, slopes greater
than 1/6 and shop ends, tees and as otherwise required by site conditions.

6/22.2 The thrust blocks shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with BS 8110. The
Structural Use of Concrete. The Contractor shall show that soil resistance is greater than
or equal to 1.2 times the force exerted by the pipe when tested to 9 bar pressure. The soil
resistance shall be calculated as the frictional resistance of the soil against the thrust block.
In calculating the passive resistance the co- efficient of passive pressure of the soil shall
be factored by 0.5.

6/22.3 The design of thrust blocks shall not be less than the dimensions given on the drawings.
This design is always subject to SEWA approval.

6/22.4 Before any internal pressure is applied to a pipeline, all the permanent concrete thrust
blocks shall have been cast in contact with the undisturbed ground and cured for a minimum
of 7 days.

6/22.5 Concrete Class 30 with Sulphate Resisting Cement shall be used for the construction of
thrust blocks.

6/23 WATER WORKS - CLEANING OF PIPELINES

6/23.1 On completion of construction, and before any sterilization, internal surfaces of pipelines
shall be cleaned thoroughly by flushing in such a way as to remove all oil, grit and other
deleterious matter.

January 2023 6-19 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/23.2 Flushing of the new pipeline may be carried out by temporary connections to the existing
water system if present in the working area. SEWA will charge for giving the water to the
Contractor as per normal rates. In the absence of mains water supply tankers shall be used.

6/24 WATER WORKS - TESTING PIPELINES

6/24.1 The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer of any tests two days before the
test is to be carried out. All tests must be witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
maintain written records of the tests and provide copies of the records to SEWA prior to the
completion of the project.

6/24.2 The Contractor shall provide all, water, fittings, pipe stoppers, test pump, pressure gauges
and the necessary equipment and tools for pipework testing. Hydraulic pumps, gauges and
apparatus shall be equipped with locking devices to prevent tampering during the test
period.

6/24.3 Prior to hydraulically testing the pipelines the Contractor shall provide adequate temporary
thrust blocks only at the ends of uncompleted sections. Pipes shall be partially backfilled to
about 500 mm above the crown of the pipe, in order to anchor the pipes during testing.
Joints and fittings, however, shall remain uncovered for inspection until the pipeline has
been tested satisfactorily.

6/24.4 The length of the section of pipeline to be tested may be determined by the
Engineer/Contractor but shall not exceed 500 metres. The levels of the length of pipe under
test shall be such that the minimum test pressure specified is achieved at all points whilst
the maximum test pressure specified is not exceeded at any point.

6/24.5 Valves shall not be used to isolate sections forming the pipeline whilst testing operation are
in progress.

6/24.6 Before testing the line should be filled slowly and evenly with water through any convenient
top or valve from the lowest point. At every high point an automatic air release valve must
be installed. After expelling all the entrapped air out of the test portion, all air release valves
should be closed. If it is not possible to fill the line from the lowest point an additional outlet
should be added at the inlet point to release air at that point and this line/section should be
kept filled for 24 hours before the pressure test.

6/24.7 The test pressure shall be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or 9 bar whichever is
greater. The pressure shall be raised slowly to the specified test pressure and maintained
at that pressure for a period long enough for the Engineer to examine the whole section
under test. Thereafter, for a period of not less than 4 hours, the leakage of water as
measured by the amount drawn into the pumps to maintain the pressure shall not exceed
0:1 liter per millimeter of pipe diameter per kilometer of pipeline per 24 hours for each 30
meters head of pressure applied at the lowest point. Expected losses due to absorption
shall be as specified by the pipe manufacturer.

6/24.8 The pipework, joints and connections shall be examined. Should leaks be detected the
pipework shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the test repeated.

January 2023 6-20 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/25 WATER WORKS - FINAL CLEANING AND STERILISATION

6/25.1 Upon completion of hydraulic tests the Contractor shall flush out the pipework with
chlorinated fresh water and a cleaning swab will be passed through the pipework, this
process will continue until the flushing water runs clear.

6/25.2 The Contractor shall prepare a solution of chlorinated dosing solution using calcium
hydrochloride at a rate of 77g/cu.m. of system water volume, or with chlorinated water
containing between 30 and 50 mg per litre of free chlorine. The solution shall be slowly
pumped into pipeline and a chloride level of 50 p.p.m. shall be maintained for a period of 8
hours. The pipework shall be flushed out, until the chloride level drops below 0.2 p.p.m. per
liter.

6/26 WATER WORKS - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINE

6/26.1 All final connections of new pipelines to existing pipelines will be carried out by the Sharjah
Electricity & Water Authority. The Contractor is to provide one week of notice to SEWA for
this work and shall render all necessary assistance.

6/27 WORKS FOR ETISALAT - GENERAL

General

6/27.1 The works relate to the protection and diversion of existing telephone duct lines, for major
trunk communications services alterations, including demolition and rebuilding where
instructed, to existing telephone manholes and joint boxes and the provision of duct
crossing for future development purposes. The layout of the works for Etisalat are shown
in the Drawings.

6/27.2 Where applicable, all civil works essential to the relocation/replacement of the existing
major coaxial cable systems including duct installation, manhole and joint box construction
shall be carried out by the Contractor within the stipulated Contract period for sectional
completion.

6/27.3 Where applicable, the installation of new Etisalat cables shall be carried out by Etisalat
within the time stipulated in the Contract.

6/27.4 Civil works for Etisalat other than the above shall be carried out by the Contractor according
to his approved programme.

Ducts

6/27.5 The installation of ducts of the required diameter shall be in accordance with Etisalat
Specifications as per Sub-Section 6/29.

Manholes and Joint Boxes

6/27.6 The existing manholes to be demolished and rebuilt and the new manholes to be
constructed, if shown on the Drawings, are for information purposes only and do not
necessarily show the exact locations thereof. Exact details and locations of these manholes
will be determined on site in accordance with the Etisalat Engineer’s instructions.

January 2023 6-21 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/27.7 The construction of new manholes shall be performed in accordance with the Drawings.

6/27.8 Manholes shall be as per types shown on the Drawings or as required by Etisalat. The
concrete mix shall be Class 30 according to the requirements of Section 4 of this
Specification.

6/28 MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY ETISALAT

6/28.1 PVC pipes, drawcord, manholes frame and covers, and all other fixtures and fittings will be
furnished by Etisalat. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for providing
labour and all equipment for loading at the Etisalat Stores, for transporting to site,
unloading, storing and fixing in position the above mentioned material. The Contractor’s
responsibility for material furnished by Etisalat shall begin upon the Contractor’s
acceptance at the place of delivery. All such materials can be examined and tested by the
Contractor, and all defective material shall be rejected by him at the time and place of
delivery.

6/28.2 All material found to be defective or damaged at this time will be replaced by Etisalat. Once
accepted by the Contractor at the place of delivery, he has no right for any claim. All
defective or damaged material discovered prior to final acceptance of the work shall be
removed by the Contractor and replaced by new approved material at his own expense.

65/28.3 In that event, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all material
furnished to or by him, accepted by him until it has been incorporated in the Works and
finally accepted by the Employer. Any material lost or stolen from the site shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense.

6/29 INSTALLATION OF PVC DUCT

(DUCT NO. 54D) AS SUPPLIED BY ETISALAT.

2/29.1 General: Duct No. 54D is manufactured from PVC. It is supplied in 6.0 metre effective
lengths, has an internal diameter of 90 mm and a nominal wall thickness of 3.25 mm. Each
duct length has a tapered socket at one end which will accept the barrel of the duct.
Couplings, Ducts 54A, 300 mm in length are also available for use with short lengths of
duct which have no socket. Couplings Duct, 54A shall not be used for duct leading into
buildings.

2/29.2 Trench: The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth; the trench bottom
shall be free from stones, level and well tamped. The duct shall be laid at standard depths
unless otherwise specified.

6/29.3 Formations: Duct No. 54D may be laid as a single duct or in multiway formation as follows:

a) Up to and including 9 ways in rectangular formation.

b) Over 9 ways rectangular formation with concrete surround.
c) The duct bank must be properly secured to the ground before concreting to avoid
displacement due to flotation.

January 2023 6-22 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Laying and Jointing

a) For Single way

6/29.4 The open starting end of the trench shall be blanked off with a board or boards, to act as
an anvil against which the duct can be driven home. The duct shall be recessed into the
wall of jointing chambers 10 mm from the inside surface. The surface of the duct shall be
roughened with glass paper or sand paper for its length in the jointing chamber wall.

6/29.5 The duct shall be laid on the trench bottom with the socket towards the duct layer; the
spigot end and the inside of the socket of the duct to be jointed shall be thoroughly cleaned
with dry rag.

6/29.6 The spigot end of the duct shall be offered to the socket initially pushed in by hand and
then to achieve proper engagement a suitable wooden batten is placed across the remove
socket and tapped with a hammer. Full engagement should be ensured. Occasionally, due
to variations in size, this cannot be achieved, in which case, excessive force must not be
exerted after a tight joint has been effected.

6/29.7 When jointing short lengths of duct together with a Coupling, Duct No. 54A, both spigot
ends and the inside of the Coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned with methylated spirits
applied with a clean rag. The spigot ends should be given a liberal coating of PVC Cement
and then fitted into the coupling. This operation involves using toxic and inflammable
materials.

b) For Multiway Up to and Including 9 Ways

6/29.8 The preparatory work and jointing shall be as for single way.

6/29.9 The first layer of ducts shall be laid on the prepared trench bottom so that their outer surface
touch each other and a minimum gap of 75 mm remains between the outside ducts and
the sides of the trench timbering where used. Wooden stakes or an approved alternative
shall be driven into the ground at 3 metre intervals along the trench to keep the ducts in the
correct position. Suitable material shall be placed to fill the spaces between the ducts and
the next layer of duct when the latter is bedded down. The second and subsequent layers
of duct shall be laid between the wooden stakes so that they are vertically above and then
bedded down to touch the ducts in the layer below, the spaces between the ducts being
filled in the same way with suitable fill material. The joints shall be staggered so that no
joint touches any other joint.

6/29.10 At approximately 5 meters from the jointing chamber at each end of the track, the duct
formation shall open to provide a gap between each duct, both vertically and horizontally,
of 25 mm using, spacers. Over this 5 meters section all spaces between the duct and the
trench wall shall be filled with well compacted fill.

c) For Multiway ducts over 9 ways

6/29.11 The preparatory work and jointing shall be as for single-way duct.

6/29.12 The first layer of duct shall be laid on the prepared trench bottom so that their outer surfaces
touch each other and a minimum gap of 75 mm remains between the outside ducts and
the sides of the trench, or trench timbering where used. Mild steel bars, 12 mm diameter
and of the required length shall be driven into the ground at 1.5 metre intervals along the
trench to keep the ducts in the correct position. The second and subsequent layer of duct
shall be laid between the mild steel bars so that they are vertically above and touching the
ducts in the layer below. The joints shall be staggered so that no joint touches any other

January 2023 6-23 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

joint. On completion of the assembly of the duct nest, 6 mm diameter mild steel bars shall
be placed horizontally across the uppermost layer of ducts and tied to the vertical bars.

6/29.13 Where the total number of layers of duct in any one formation exceeds 8 and the number
of ducts in each layer exceeds 2 the following shall apply. Between the two layers of duct
midway, or approximately midway, from the top and bottom of the duct nest an intermediate
layer of reinforced concrete, 75 mm in depth and with 12 mm mild steel reinforcing bars
conforming to the layout of reinforcing in the top cover detailed on the Drawings shall be
placed across the duct nest. The additional reinforcing required by this sub-paragraph shall
not be required in the 5 metre sections detailed in sub-paragraph 14 below.

6/29.14 At approximately 5 meters from the jointing chambers at each end of the track the duct
formation shall open out to provide a gap between each duct, both vertically and
horizontally of 25 mm. Banks of spacers shall be placed 325 mm and 1325 mm from the
jointing chamber wall to provide this spacing. Each spacer bank shall enclose all the ducts
except those in the bottom layer on which the spacer bank shall rest. Where sub-paragraph
13 applies, the 75 mm intermediate layer shall be reduced over 5 metre sections to provide
the required 25 mm spacing at the jointing chambers.

6/29.15 Where the total number of layers of duct exceeds three, concreting of spaced formations
shall be in stages such that the number of layers of duct laid and concreted at each stage
shall not exceed three. The concrete shall be brought to a level which shall not interfere
with laying of subsequent layers of duct and spacers.

6/29.16 Concrete class and workability as specified by Etisalat and approved by the Engineer shall
be used throughout.

The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct to give a finished minimum thickness
of 75 mm on both sides and to a depth of 130 mm above the top layer of ducts. Care must
be taken to ensure that each batch, as it is placed, is properly compacted without creating
unbalanced side thrust against the ducts. Each batch shall be vibrated using a vibrator
having a maximum diameter of 51 mm, the vibrator shall be lowered into the concrete
between the wall of the trench and the outside of the duct nest and shall not touch the duct.
In spaced formation sections care must be taken to ensure that the gaps between the ducts
are properly filled with concrete, the final layer of concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled.

6/29.17 With formations of four or more ducts wide, mild steel reinforcing bars conforming to the
Drawings shall be placed and wired in position before placing concrete over the uppermost
ducts of the completed nest.

6/29.18 In the case of column entry manholes, the duct formation shall open out to enter the
manhole as shown on the appropriate manhole drawing and at right angles to the entry
wall. The distance over which the transformation is made shall be no greater than is
necessary to satisfy the 5 meters minimum bedding radius for duct No. 54D. The ducts
shall be secured in position during concreting with spacers, built up to the required centers
or by reinforcing rods which may be encased in the concrete. The volume between the
separated duct formations shall be excavated and filled with concrete of the same quality
as that surrounding the duct formations.

Alternative Method of Jointing and Laying

6/29.19 Provided that space permits, duct No. 54D may be jointed above ground and fed into the
trench from one end. The leading end of each duct way being guided into position using a
suitable hooked tool made from 6 mm diameter mild steel reinforcing bar.

January 2023 6-24 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/29.20 Bends: Normally bends are not supplied since the duct is sufficiently flexible to provide a
minimum bending radius of 5 meters. Tighter bends should not be attempted otherwise
kinking of the duct may result.

6/29.21 Variations: Any variation of duct formation and/or depth shall only be carried out with the
prior agreement of the Engineer or Etisalat Civil Works Supervisor.

6/29.22 Backfill: (a) Backfilling of trenches where duct No. 54D has been laid without concrete
surround shall be carried out carefully in a manner that shall not disturb the duct formation.
Where duct No. 54D has been laid with concrete surround the end shuttering and trench
supporting timber, if used, shall be removed not less than 12 hours after the concrete has
been placed. Backfilling of the trench, in accordance with the Specifications shall not be
carried out until a further 48 hours have elapsed.

6/30 WORKS FOR SHARJAH MUNICIPALITY DRAINAGE DEPT. (SM)

6/30.1 These works consist of the provision of the pipeline road crossings for the future use of the
Sharjah Municipality Drainage Department and the diversion of existing pipelines as shown
on the Drawings. All materials shall be approved by Municipality and the Engineer prior to
use in the works. Clauses 6/31 to 6/59 detail the requirements for these works. Group A, B
and C pipes shall be in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.

6/30.2 For structural purposes pipes shall be classified into three groups:

Group A : Rigid pipes which do not depend on lateral support from the bedding and trench
sides for structural strength.

Pipe materials include:

Concrete
Clayware
Asbestos Cement Pitch Fibre
Grey Iron

Group B : Flexible pipes which depend on lateral support from the bedding and trenches
sides for structural strength and no prevent distortion.

Pipe materials include:

RP (Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic Pipes)

UPVC (Un plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride)
HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)
PP (Polypropylene)

Group C: Pipes which have some flexibility but which have sufficient strength to support
loadings without assistance from the ground.

Pipe materials include:-

Steel
Ductile Iron.

January 2023 6-25 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/31 SETTING OUT (SM)

6/31.1 Before any excavation for drainage is commenced the Contractor shall define the centre
line or other agreed reference line of the Works and erect the necessary profiles throughout
their full length if so required by the Engineer.

6/32 EXCAVATION FOR DRAINAGE PIPELINE (SM)

6/32.1 Trenches for pipes shall be excavated to a sufficient depth and width to enable the pipe
and any specified or agreed joint, bedding, haunching and surrounding, to be
accommodated. Trenches shall be of width not exceeding that shown on the Drawings. The
width of trenches for flexible jointed pipes shall not be less than the outside diameter of the
pipe plus 600 mm unless otherwise detailed on the drawings.

6/32.2 The sides of the trenches, manholes and other excavations shall be adequately supported
at all times. Trench sides must be vertical and no battering will be allowed without the
express permission, in writing, of the Engineer. Excavations deeper than 1.5m alongside
roads must be supported by trench sheeting.

6/32.3 The material excavated in forming pipe drains shall, if unsuitable, be removed from site and
shall be replaced with suitable material in accordance with the Specification.

6/32.4 All unsuitable excavated material shall be carted to tip.

6/32.5 No back throwing shall be allowed and all materials must be brought to the surface and
placed clear of the trench side.

6/32.6 The Contractor shall keep the trench excavation free from water at all times.

6/33 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES (SM)

6/33.1 Method Statements must be approved for the transportation, handling and storage of pipes
before any pipes are delivered to site.

6/33.2 All pipes shall be handled and stored in compliance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations subject to the approval of the Engineer and to the following limitations:-

6/33.3 Care shall be taken to prevent damage and distortion to the pipes, pipe end, fittings and
couplings during lifting and transportation.

Fittings and specials of any type shall be stored in a single layer only.

Pipes and fittings shall at all times be adequately protected from damage during transport,
storage and handling. Cracked or chipped pipes shall not be used in the permanent works.

Steel, ductile iron and large diameter plastic pipes shall be fitted in the factory with end
caps or reinforcement adequate to prevent distoration during transport, storage and
handling.

Pitch fibre and plastic pipes and fittings shall be protected from direct sunlight and
excessive heat. Deformed pipes and fittings shall not be used in the permanent works.

January 2023 6-26 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

All rubber gaskets, rings and jointing pieces for use with pipes shall be stored in a cool,
shaded store until use. No rubber gaskets, etc. shall be used if any perishing or
deterioration of the rubber due to being exposed to sunlight or any other reasons is evident.

6/33.4 At every point of loading or unloading, all pipes or casting must be handled by approved
lifting tackle. Unloading by rolling down planks or any other form of inclined ramp will not
be allowed.

Pipes shall not be unloaded from a vehicle by tipping or dropping.

6/33.5 Pliable straps, slings of nylon or rope shall be used to lift pipes, and steel cables or chains
will not be used without written permission.

Pipes shall be lifted by flat braided wire slings or band slings except in the case of externally
coated pipes and plastic pipes for which band slings having a width of at least 300 mm
shall be used. Wire rope slings shall not be used for any pipes. No pipe shall be lifted by
means of hooks applied to the ends of the pipe or by means of appliances such as grabs
and tongs.

6/33.6 Nesting of pipes for transportation will be permitted provided method statements
demonstrate that effective precautions will be taken to protect inner surfaces from damage.

6/33.7 All coated pipes shall be thoroughly inspected on arrival at site for detection of any damage
to the coatings which shall be made good in an approved manner.

6/34 GRP (GLASS REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN PIPES) (SM)

6.34.1 When pipes are transported or stacked they shall be supported on cradles conforming to
the shape of the pipe at not more than 5 meter centres. Pipes must on no account be
stacked directly on the ground but if individual pipes are placed on the ground prior to laying
care shall be taken to remove all rocks and any potentially damaging debris.

6.34.2 Pipes shall not be stacked higher than 2 pipes high, fitting shall be stored single.

6.34.3 Rubber rings shall as far as possible not be exposed to sunlight, and shall be protected
from exposure to greases and oils which are petroleum derivatives and from solvent and
other deleterious substances. The manufacturer’s approved jointing lubricants must be
used at all times.

6.34.4 GRP pipe and fitting laminate for storm water pumping mains shall consist of an inner
chemical resistant layer and an outer structural layer.

No pigments or dyes may be incorporated into the laminate and no sand fillers may be
present in the inner chemically resistant layer. Pipes and fittings for pressure mains shall
not incorporate sand in the outer structural layer unless permission to do so has been
obtained from the Engineer.

The inner chemically resistant layer shall be composed of either a vinyl ester or a bisphenol
A fumerate resin, suitably reinforced. This inner layer shall have a minimum thickness of 1
mm and the inner surface shall be reinforced with ‘C’ glass or synthetic tissue. The resin
content by weight reducing from approximately 90% at the inner surface to 65% - 75% at
the outer surface of the 1 mm liner.

January 2023 6-27 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The outer structural layer shall be composed of an isophthalic resin or equivalent reinforced
with ‘E’ glass woven rovings as appropriate to give a final product of sufficient strength to
meet the tensile and flexural requirements of the pipe. The exterior surface shall be
relatively smooth with no exposed fibers or projections.

Where the Engineer’s approval has been obtained to use a manufacturing process which
precludes the possibility of liner pre-gelling an acid resistant grade of ‘E’ glass
reinforcement shall be used.

The results of the strain-corrosion tests carried out in accordance with ASTM D3681 whilst
the pipe is exposed to 10% sulphuric acid at a temperature of 500C shall indicate that the
pipe has a lifetime of 50 years under operating conditions.

The following tests shall also be carried out by pipe manufacturers at their works. The
results of these tests shall be made available to the Engineer on request. The Engineer
shall also be allowed to witness some or all of the tests.

1. Works hydraulic tests

a) Pipes and fittings to be hydraulically tested to a rated pressure, if specified, or to

three times the maximum sustained operating pressure or to 25 bars internal
pressure whichever is the lesser.

The above tests to be in accordance with BS 5480 and for a minimum duration of
test to be 5 minutes.

b) Joints - 1 in every 100 pipes/fittings produced shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM D-3517-81.

2. Raw Materials - All raw materials shall be tested by sampling of consistency to their
Specification.

3. Wall thickness - This shall be measured for every pipe.

4. Stiffness - The test to be carried out to ASTM D2412 and at a frequency of 1 pipe
in 30.

5. Beam Strength - Tests to be in accordance with ASTM D3262 for gravity pipe and
ASTM D3517 for pressure pipe. A frequency of 1 pipe in 100 shall apply.

6. Reinforcement content - An analysis of glass reinforcement, resin and filler content

of a minimum of 1 pipe in 20 shall be made. The tests shall include analysis of the
inner 1 mm liner by separation from the structural layers before ignition.

The following shall apply to pipe design etc.:

a) the maximum pressure attained in the pipeline inclusive of surge shall not exceed
the maximum sustained working pressure rating of the pipe

b) the surge pressure amplitude (i.e. the difference between the maximum and
minimum surge pressure) shall not exceed one half of the maximum sustained
working pressure of the pipe.

c) the pipe shall have a minimum stiffness of 5000 N/m2.

January 2023 6-28 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

d) the maximum long term diametrical deflection shall not exceed 5%

e) wall strains shall be limited to values declared by the manufacturer on the basis of
long term performance test information. Typically, these shall be a maximum of
0.5%. When calculating wall strains using the formula.

e= (Df/D) x [(d/D) x t]

(Where e = strain, d = diametrical deflection in mm, t = pipe wall thickness in mm, D = pipe
diameter in mm and Df is a factor primarily dependant on the ratio of pipe stiffness to soil
stiffness and on the bedding) the values of Df to be adopted shall be as follows;

Pipe stiffness (N/mm2) Df

5,000 6
10,000 5
30,000 4

6/35 UPVC (THERMOPLASTIC PIPES) (SM)

6/35.1 Care shall be taken to prevent distortion or sagging of the pipes during transportation,
handling and storage. They shall be stored in the shade either on bearing timbers on a
level surface, staked to prevent movement, or in suitable racks. Not more than two layers
shall rest on the bottom layer, and for spigot and socket pipes, sockets shall be at alternate
ends so that no pressure comes on a socket. Bearing timbers shall be spaced at not more
than 1 metre and shall be wide enough to prevent denting of the pipe wall. Sharp edges
(e.g. of metal) shall be avoided. Similar care shall be taken with pipes in transit.

6/35.2 All thermoplastic pipes shall be shaded from direct sunlight during handling, storage and
laying.

uPVC pipe material shall consist ultraviolet degradation and shall incorporate a rodent
inhibitor.

6/35.3 The Contractor shall ensure that pipes do not come into contact with bituminous or other
hydrocarbon based materials.

6/35.4 uPVC gravity pipes shall comply with BS 4660, 5481 or other approved standard. Pipes
shall not exceed 6 meters in length. uPVC pressure pipes shall be Class ‘E’ to BS 3506.

All jointing for sewers shall be approved spigot and socket flexible joint with neoprene
rubber. Solvent welding will not be allowed.

Any pipe or part with discoloration, scratching, abrasion, pit marks or otherwise considered
unsuitable by the Engineer shall be rejected.

uPVC for slotted land-drains/slotted carried drains shall be uPVC pipes to BS 4660/ BS
5481 complying with the minimum infiltration rates laid down in BS 1194. The pipes shall
be perforated with holes or slots to a configuration subject to approval by the Engineer.
The minimum cross-sectional area of the perforations, at the inside surface of the pipe
barrel, shall be 2700 mm2 per metre run of pipe. uPVC (Thermo Plastic) pipes shall be
tested at DCL for Ring Stiffness as per BS EN ISO 9969 : 1995.

January 2023 6-29 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/35A ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS (SM)

6/35A.1 Asbestos cement pipes, joints and fittings shall be manufactured and tested to ISO 160 or
BS EN512 for all pipelines. Sulphate resisting cement with a medium to low C3A content
shall be used in the manufacture of asbestos cement pipes, joints and fittings.

Asbestos cement pressure and gravity pipes and joints shall be Class 18 unless otherwise
specified.

For gravity pipes the crushing strength shall be carried out on one percent of the total
number of pipes and joints. For pressure pipes the bursting test shall be carried out on one
percent of the number of pipes and fittings.

A jointing ring shall be provided at each end of the pipe this being rubber or neoprene or a
compound of both. Internal test pressure and the prevention of infiltration of groundwater
are to be the major design criteria of the joints. The Engineer shall be given details of
vacuum-type tests on the joints.

All bends and fittings required along the route of the pressure pipelines other than those
bends obtained by deflection of the pipe joints shall be of GRP material. Bends and fittings
shall be obtained from the same supplier as the asbestos cement pipes and shall be
compatible with the pipes and jointing system used.

Clearly visible, legible, indelible manufacturer's stamps including designated class of pipe
and production date shall be provided on the external face of all pipes.

For identification purposes, all asbestos cement pipes and fittings laid for drainage
application shall be externally coated with a black bituminous paint. Potable water pipelines
in asbestos cement are uncoated.

All relevant tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided by the Contractor
and he shall ensure that he has sufficient numbers of each tool available in order that the
work is never held up for the need of any such tool.

6/35A.2 Asbestos cement pipe shall be provided with spigot ends to be jointed with ‘Reka’ type
couplings with two rubber rings. Rubber rings shall conform to the requirements of BS 2494.

Joint lubricant shall be an approved vegetable-based type and shall be supplied by the pipe
manufacturer.

6/35A.3 Asbestos cement pipe shall be manufactured in 3 metre lengths for diameters of 100 mm
and smaller and in 5 metre nominal lengths for larger sizes.

6/35A.4 Asbestos cement pipes shall be factory tested in accordance with BS EN512:1995. Copies
of test certificates shall be submitted for each consignment delivered to site. Sampling and
inspection shall be in accordance with Section 6.4 of BS EN512:1995. Witnessing of factory
testing by the Engineer may be required before any consignment is delivered to site. All
compulsory and optional tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer.

Each pipe and joint shall be legibly and indelible marked with the following:

i. The manufacturing standard.

ii. The manufacturer’s name
iii. Manufacturing name
iv. Nominal diameter (ND) in mm

January 2023 6-30 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

v. Nominal Pressure rating in bars

vi. Inspection mark
vii. Date of manufacture
viii. ‘AT’ for products of type AT (Asbestos Technology)
ix. ‘NT’ for products for type NT (Non-Asbestos Technology)

6/36 TRENCH WIDTHS FOR PIPELINES (SM)

6/36.1 Nominal trench widths for single pipelines shall be defined as 1.50 times the diameter plus
300 mm subject to a minimum trench width of 750 mm.

6/36.2 Nominal trench width for two or more pipes in the same trench (laid in parallel with similar
invert levels) shall be defined as the sum of the internal diameters plus 450 mm between
the pipes, plus 450 mm.

6/36.3 Any excavation from the bottom of the trench to 300 mm above the level of the crown of
the pipe which exceeds the nominal widths defined above shall be filled with concrete or
the specified bedding materials as directed on site.

6/36.4 Except where wide trenches are required to suit ground conditions as defined below,
method statements may propose trench widths narrower than the nominal widths defined
but they must be sufficiently wide for safe working and to allow the pipes to be correctly
laid and jointed and the bedding and surround compacted.

6/37 PIPELINES IN WIDE TRENCHES (SM)

6/37.1 Wide trenches shall be constructed to not less than the defined widths for those categories
of Group B flexible pipelines in granular surround defined below.

6/37.2 Prior to commencing trench excavation in an area an assessment of the Modulus of

Deformation (E’s) shall be made of the soils likely to be encountered at springing level of
the pipes. In non-cohesive soils, approved static cone penetrometer tests shall be carried
out. In cohesive soils other approved methods shall be used to determine E’s. Tests shall
be carried out at intervals to be determined on site which in variable ground conditions may
be to every pipe length.

6/37.3 If the value of E’s determined from the results of such tests is greater than 2.5 MN/m2 then
trench width is not critical. If less than 2.5 MN/m2 then trench widths shall be constructed
as directed by the Engineer unless alternative means of increasing the passive resistance
of the trench sides are detailed or are proposed in method statements where economic or
environmental restrictions make wide trenches undesirable.

6/38 PIPELAYING (SM)

6/38.1 Pipes shall be laid and jointed in accordance with all relevant recommendations of the
manufacturer. Any variations between the manufacturer’s recommendations and this
Specification shall be highlighted in the Contractor’s Method Statements and a ruling will
be given with the approval.

6/38.2 Pipes shall be checked for soundness and be thoroughly cleaned out immediately prior to
laying.

January 2023 6-31 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/38.3 The setting of the pipeline to the required levels and alignments shall be carried out by
approved procedures such as boning between sight rails. Large diameter pipes, 1000 mm
diameter of greater, shall be individually set to level and line by instrument.

All spigot and socket pipes shall be laid with the socket pointing up the gradient.

6/38.4 For pipelines laid in trenches, pipejacks, headings and tunnels the permissible tolerances
in line and level unless otherwise specified shall be +/- 3 mm in level and +/- 12 mm from
centre line between manholes or access points. Also where a gravity pipeline or sewer is
shown as a straight line between manholes it will not be accepted as having passed the
final test unless a light can be sighted through the length concerned.

6/38.5 For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings pipes shall be laid with a
gap between the end of the spigot and the base of the socket, or between spigots. This
gap shall be not less than 6 mm or greater than one third of the straight draw test dimension
specified for the pipe joint and it shall be achieved by approved means, such as marking
the outside of the pipe or using removable metal or hardwood feelers.

When making flexible joints in large diameter pipelines, the weight of the pipe being placed
shall be supported by the lifting plant until the joint has been completed. The jacking
equipment shall provide a concentric thrust on the pipe.

6/38.6 Where flexibly jointed pipes are laid to curves the horizontal displacement at any joint as
laid shall not exceed three quarters of the maximum allowed by the manufacturer.

6/38.7 Pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by concrete anchor blocks.

6/38.8 For pipelines laid in headings the individual pipes shall not exceed 1.50 m in length and the
heading shall be driven complete from shaft to shaft before pipelaying is commenced.

6/38.9 After laying a length of pipeline but before preliminary testing is carried out, the pipeline
shall be checked for level and gradient on top of the pipes. If a pipe is not at the correct
level it shall be unjointed and removed, the bed shall be adjusted and the pipe shall be re-
laid and rechecked for line and level.

6/38.10 After the joint has been made and the preliminary testing completed the annular gap at a
socket or collar outside the flexible jointing ring shall be closed with fine grained clayey soil
or an approved joint sealant to prevent the entry of granular material, backfill material or
concrete.

6/38.11 The cutting of pipes for making up lengths shall be carried out by a method which leaves a
clean square end.

Concrete pipes shall be cut with a concrete saw or by hand. If cut by hand the end of the
pipe shall be trimmed even and square and if reinforced, the steel shall be cut flush with
the face of the concrete. If instructed by the Engineer the exposed ends of the steel shall
be protected with bitumen or a cement grout.

Asbestos cement pipes shall be cut with the tool supplied by the manufacturer or by a disc
cutter. Cut ends of pipes to be used in pipe runs shall be accurately reformed to the shape
required for the joint with a tool made for the purpose.

January 2023 6-32 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/39 PIPELINE BEDDED ON TRENCH BOTTOM (SM)

6/39.1 Where pipes are to be bedded directly on the trench bottom the formation shall be trimmed
to provide even bedding of the pipeline and to be free of extraneous matter that may
damage the pipe or its coating.

6/39.2 Joint holes at each pipe joint shall be scooped away in the trench bottom to enable the joint
to be made.

6/40 PIPELINES IN CONCRETE CRADLES AND SURROUNDS (SM).

6/40.1 Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete cradle or surround they shall be supported
initially above the trench bottom on concrete setting blocks. The blocks shall either be laid
accurately to level and covered with damp-proof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or shall
be provided with two hardwood wedges each to an approved pattern to enable the pipe
level to be adjusted.

6/40.2 The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the
pipes during laying and at least two concrete blocks shall be provided for each pipe.

6/40.3 The concrete shall be poured on one side of the pipe until it can be worked under the pipe
along its full length to ensure that no voids develop. The concrete shall then be brought up
equally on both sides of the pipe until the required level is reached.

6/40.4 Approved measures appropriate to the pipe material shall be provided to prevent flotation
or other movement during placement or curing of the concrete.

6/40.5 Concrete cradles to pipes of al diameters and surrounds to pipes of one meter diameter or
less shall be poured in a single operation. Concrete surrounds to pipes over one meter
diameter shall normally be poured in two lifts, with a horizontal joint not more than 100 mm
below the crown of the pipe. Concrete shall be prevented from entering pipe joints.

6/40.6 Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be interrupted over their full cross sectional area at
each pipe joint, by shaped expansion joint filler. The thickness of filler shall be 18 mm for
pipe diameters less than 450, 36 mm for pipe diameters 450 to 1200 and 54 mm for pipe
diameters greater than 1200.

6/40.7 In spigot and socket pipelines the joints in the bed shall be at the face of each socket, and
in all flexible joints the concrete shall be prevented from entering the pipe joint.

6/41 PIPELINES ON GRANULAR BEDS (SM)

6/41.1 Where granular bedding to pipelines are detailed the minimum thickness of bedding
material beneath the pipe shall be:-

6/41.2 150 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes not exceeding 300 mm internal
diameter except when bedded on rock.

The granular bedding material shall have a Compaction Fraction value not exceeding 0.20
determined by the following test:

January 2023 6-33 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

For testing pipe bedding material, a representative sample of about 40 Kg. shall be heaped
onto a clean surface and quartered to obtain approximately 10 Kg. The moisture content of
the sample should not differ materially from that of the main body of material, at the time of
use in the trench.

A 150 mm internal diameter open ended cylinder, 250 mm high, shall be placed on a firm
flat surface and loosely filled, without tamping, from the 10 Kg. sample. Any surplus material
shall be struck off level with the top of the cylinder. The area around the filled cylinder shall
be cleared of all surplus material and the cylinder then lifted clear of its contents and placed
alongside the material.

Approximately one quarter of the material shall then be replaced into the cylinder and
compacted by tamping vigorously with a 40 mm diameter metal rammer weighing about 1
Kg. until no further compaction can be obtained. This operation shall then be repeated for
each of the remaining quarters; tamping the final surface as level as possible.

The distance from the top of the cylinder to the surface of the final layer shall then be
measured and this value, divided by the height of the cylinder, shall be taken as the
Compaction Fraction.

6/41.10 Stone for land drains shall be clean, hard and durable nominal single size 20 mm and/or
nominal single size 63 mm in accordance with the following table and placed as shown on
the drawings.

TEST SIEVE PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING

MM NOMINAL SIZE OF SINGLE SIZE
STONE
63 mm 20 mm
75 100 --
63 85-100 --
37.5 0-30 100
20 0-5 85-100
14 -- --
10 -- 0-25
5 -- 0-5
2.36 -- --

6/41.3 200 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes exceeding 300 mm internal diameter
or for pipes for 300 mm internal diameter or less when bedded on rock.

6/41.4 The time interval between placing bedding material on the trench formation and
commencing pipelaying shall be as short as is practicable.

6/41.5 The bedding material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm with one pass
of a plate vibrator for gravel and two passes for sand or other approved equivalent
mechanical method. Hand tamping or punning will only be permitted where insufficient
space is available to allow the use of mechanical plant.

6/41.6 Recesses shall be formed in the bedding to accommodate pipe joints while ensuring
continuous even support along the pipe length. Bedding material shall be prevented from
entering pipe joints. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully placed
and hand compacted beneath the joint barrel to close any void left by the recess.

January 2023 6-34 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/41.7 Where the formation of the trench is of silt or soft clay and is below the natural water table
a 75 mm blinding layer of sand shall be substituted for the specified bedding material
directly above formation and carefully compacted if directed on site.

6/41.8 Where the pipeline is located beneath the permanent ground water level the granular
bedding material shall be laid on and enclosed within a filter fabric membrane.

6/41.9 The pipe bedding material should conform to manufacturers recommendations unless
otherwise specified. Granular bedding material for pipes shall consist of free draining, hard,
clean, chemically table, sand gravel or crushed stone. When tested in accordance with BS
812 Part 103 and gravel or crushed stone shall comply with the table below:

Bedding material shall be capable of producing a stable formation for pipe laying shall not
be subject to bulking or settlement due to changing weather or ground water conditions
after placing and consolidation.

Pipe Bedding Material

PERCENTAGE OF MASS PASSING

TEST PIPE DIA. PIPE DIA. PIPE DIA. PIPE DIA
LESS 300-525 600-1350 EXCEEDIN
THAN 300 mm mm G 1350 mm
mm
63 mm -- -- -- 100
37.5 mm -- -- 100 85-100
20 mm -- 100 85-100 0-25
14 mm 100 85-100 -- --
10 mm 85-100 0-50 0-25 0-5
5 mm 0-25 0-10 0-5 --
2.36 mm 0.5 -- -- --

6/42 PLACING SURROUNDS TO PIPELINES (SM)

Group A Pipe Materials

6/42.1 Except where concrete surrounds are detailed, either granular bedding material or
approved selected excavated granular material shall be introduced at both sides of the pipe
and compacted until it has been brought up to at least 150 mm above the crown of the pipe.

6/42.2 The methods of selecting excavated materials may include sieving either in bulk or above
the trench.

6/42.3 Wherever practicable the placing and compaction of the surround material shall be carried
out in sequence with the removal of the trench supports. In particular trench sheets or
boards shall be raised clear of each layer prior to its compaction.

Group B and C Pipe Materials

6/42.4 Except where concrete surrounds are detailed Group B and C flexible pipelines shall be
laid with granular bedding and surround, as specified, to at least 300 mm above the crown
of the pipe (unless concrete protection slabs are detailed).

January 2023 6-35 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/42.5 In narrow trenches and where the Contractor’s method of working involves the use of trench
sheets or other forms of trench support it is imperative that, unless the Contractor is
instructed to leave them in place and burn or cut off the tops, the trench supports are
carefully withdrawn to a point above the crown of the pipe as the backfill material is placed
to ensure that voids between surround and trench side will be eliminated.

6/43 COMPACTION OF PIPE SURROUNDS (SM)

6/43.1 The granular material shall be carefully laid and compacted at the sides of pipes according
to one of the following methods for alternative types of compaction plant as agreed with or
directed by the Engineer.

SURROUN MAX. ALTERNATIVE METHODS

D LAYER (NUMBER OF PASSES OF COMPACTION
MATERIAL THICKNESS PLANT)
(mm) HAND VIBRATING 100 KG
RAMMER PLATE POWER
RAMMER
Gravel 200 2 1 2
Sand 150 3 2 4

6/44 PIPELINES BELOW PERMANENT GROUND WATER LEVEL (SM)

6/44.1 For Group A, B and C pipelines located beneath the permanent ground water level by
granular bedding material or approved selected excavated granular material forming
granular bedding and surround shall be laid on and enclosed with a filter fabric membrane.

6/45 BACKFILLING TRENCHES (SM)

6/45.1 The backfilling of trenches shall be commenced as soon as practicable after the pipeline
works have been completed, tested and approved by the Engineer.

6/45.2 Trenches other than in roads and paved/tiled areas shall be backfilled with selected
excavated material unless otherwise specified in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted
thickness to not less than 90% of the maximum dry density determined by BS 1377 Part 4
(Method 3.5 or 3.6). The insitu density shall be determined by BS 1377 Part 9 (Method 2.1
or 2.2).

6/45.3 All filling materials which are in the opinion of the Engineer of a non-cohesive nature shall
be well watered to the approval of the Engineer in the layers specified to obtain the specified
compaction.

6/45.4 Any excavated material which is in the opinion of the Engineer unsuitable for backfill shall
be removed from the site by the Contractor and any deficiency of backfill shall be made
good with suitable material as ordered by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

6/45.5 Trenches in roads and paved/tiled areas shall be backfilled in layers not exceeding 150
mm (compacted thickness) with suitable materials as defined in Section 2 of the
Specification. Backfill shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 15% and compacted to not
less than 95% of the maximum dry density determined by BS 1377 Part 4 (Method 3.5 or

January 2023 6-36 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3.6). Backfill within 300 mm of the road subgrade level shall meet the requirements of
improved subgrade described in Section 2 of the Specification.

6/45.6 The backfill requirements for backfill around manholes and catchpits are as for trenches
except that the compaction by mechanical means shall commence from the excavation
formation level and to the specified densities.

6/45.7 Test to determine the compaction of the backfill shall be carried out for each layer and at
locations to be directed by the Engineer.

6/45.8 The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe until the depth of fill above
the crown of the pipe is at least 300 mm.

6/45.9 Regardless of the means of backfilling adopted it is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
that he satisfactorily backfills all excavations and causes no damage to permanent works
or adjacent structures and he shall at his own expense take all steps necessary to comply
with his obligations.

6/46 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS ON GROUP B AND GROUP C PIPELINES (SM)

6/46.1 All Group B and C pipelines will be subjected to in-situ deflection measurements. Any
section of pipe failing to meet the deflection criteria defined below shall have its surround
material recompacted, such procedure being repeated until the in-situ deflection is found
to be satisfactory. Pipes will be regarded as damaged and shall be removed from the trench
and condemned if their in-situ deflection at any time exceeds the values stated.

MATERI SDR DEFLECTION AT LEAST 2 DAMAGED

AL CRITERIA % AFTER WEEKS AFTER AND NOT
COMPLETION OF COMPLETING TO BE RE-
SURROUND THE TRENCH USED
PERMISSIBLE MAX.
RANGE VERTICAL MEASURED
DIAMETERED ONLY ANY PLANT
uPVC 10 - 15 0 - 1.0 1.0 2.25
uPVC 15 - 25 0 - 1.5 2.0 3.75
RP 30 - 40 0 - 1.5 2.0 4.50
RP 40 - 50 0 - 2.0 2.5 5.25
uPVC 25+
RP 50+ 2.5 3.0 7.5
PP 15+
HDPE 10+

6/46.2 ‘SDR’ is the Standard Dimension Radio, which is the ratio of pipe diameter divided by pipe
wall thickness.

6/46.3 In the above paragraph deflection shall be considered as the maximum difference between
the measured in-situ diameter and the stated non-deflected diameter on any axis divided
by the non-deflected diameter.

6/46.4 For pipelines of 600 mm diameter and above, internal measurements of deflection shall be
made continuously in both the vertical and horizontal planes and readings shall be recorded

January 2023 6-37 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

at each pipe joint, at the mid-point of each pipe length, at any point where the limiting
deflections above are exceeded and at any other point directed by the Engineer.

6/46.5 Where the length of pipeline between manholes or access points exceeds 100 metres the
measurements shall be taken progressively on completion of backfilling and shall be
verified after temporary reinstatement of the trench within reasonable limits of each access
point.

6/46.6 For pipelines smaller than 600 mm diameter deflections shall be checked by pulling through
an approved cylindrical plug dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected
diameter of the pipe.

6/47 STANKS TO PIPELINES IN GRANULAR BEDDING (SM)

6/47.1 Where pipes are laid on a granular bed or with a granular backfill, a stank, i.e. an
impermeable barrier shall be provided across the full width of the trench and for the
complete depth of the bedding and fill at manholes and chambers. Where the spacing
between manholes and chambers exceeds 100 m then a stank shall also be formed mid-
way between manholes or chambers except in the case of GRP pipelines. No intermediate
stank is required to GRP pipelines.

6/47.2 Stub pipelines from manholes or chambers laid for use as future connections shall be
constructed to such lengths as to clear existing and proposed road carriageways and to
clear the bedding and surround construction of the main pipeline to avoid future disturbance
of the main pipeline. Below the water table a stank shall be constructed through the bedding
of the future connection pipeline outside the main pipeline construction to facilitate future
dewatering operations.

6/47.3 The stank shall consist of:-

Either a 300 mm long plug of fine grained clayey soil or a 300 mm long plug of a mixture of
sand and bitumen consolidated in an approved manner.

or A mixture of sand and clay or the local material known as sabkha compacted
to form an impermeable barrier at least one meter in length.

or A layer of thick polyethylene cut to fit around the pipe across the full width of the
trench and laid on the granular bedding material at its natural repose angle.

6/47.4 All methods must form an impermeable barrier. Bitumen shall not be used for
thermoplastics pipes.

6/48 THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS TO PRESSURE PIPELINES (SM)

6/48.1 Underground pressure pipelines shall be provided with concrete blocks as follows:-

6/48.2 Thrust/anchor blocks shall be provided at every installed bend, tee or angle branch.

6/48.3 Anchor/thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines laid to gradients steeper than 1:20; up
to 1:15 every third pipe shall be anchored, up to 1:10 every second pipe and at 1:5 every
pipe shall be anchored.

January 2023 6-38 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/48.4 Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces of thrust blocks and on both
faces of anchor blocks.

6/48.5 Where details are not shown on the Drawings the Contractor shall prepare proposals for
thrust and anchor blocks and submit them to the Engineer for approval. Such approval shall
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the adequacy of his proposals.

6/48.6 Special details shall be shown on the Drawings or instructed at site where
environmental or ground conditions dictate.

6/49 PIPES PROTRUDING FROM STRUCTURES, CONCRETE SURROUNDS AND

ANCHOR BLOCKS (SM)

6/49.1 Unless otherwise detailed a pipeline at or below ground level protruding from a structure
shall have two flexible joints adjacent to the structure located as follows:-

PIPE DIAMETER DISTANCE TO DISTANCE BETWEEN FIRST

mm FIRST JOINT mm AND SECOND JOINT mm
(MAXIMUM) MIN. MAX.
Up to 300 150 450 2.5* dia.
300 to 1000 300 1.5* dia. 2.5* dia.
Above 1000 450 1.5* dia. 2.5* dia.

6/49.2 Method statements may propose that first joint be formed by building an appropriate sleeve,
collar or coupling into the wall of the structure and particular attention must be given to
maintaining circularity of the fitting. Where such a detail is proposed the sleeve, collar or
coupling must be capable of maintaining an effective seal under the specified deflection
and loading conditions specified for flexible joints.

6/49.3 In the case of Group ‘B’ pipe materials, particular attention will be placed on elliptical
deflection conditions.

6/49.4 These joints will be required at surrounds and anchor blocks unless directed otherwise on
site.

Group A and C Pipe Materials

6/49.5 Between the structure and the first joint any disturbed ground below the pipe will be
removed and replaced with concrete Class 40/20 in the form of a cradle, all to the direction
of the Engineer. The cradle shall not extend beyond the first joint.

6/49.6 Beyond the first flexible joint within the excavated working space of the structure the
concrete fill shall be brought up to 300 mm below the pipe invert only. Specified bedding
materials will then be used.

Group B Pipe Materials

6/49.7 Within the excavated working space for the structure disturbed ground below the pipe will
be removed and replaced with concrete Class 40/20 to within 300 mm of the underside of
the pipe. Specified bedding materials will then be used to support the pipe.

January 2023 6-39 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/49.8 The width of the concrete backfill shall be not less than the nominal widths.

6/49.9 Where a flexible pipe passes through a rigid concrete face to a structure or surround the
pipe shall be protected from stress concentration and possible fracture of the pipe at the
concrete face. A 10 mm thick neoprene or other approved synthetic rubber strip shall be
wrapped around and cemented to the pipe unless special wall protection units are used.

6/49.10 The precise configuration is detailed on the drawings but the neoprene will normally extend
through the width of a wall to a dry chamber or structure but will be limited to 150 mm or
100 mm in water retaining structures or manholes. Where a neoprene edge is exposed to
liquid (groundwater or liquid inside the structure) a sealant groove shall be formed if
detailed and filled with an appropriate, approved, joint sealant.

6/49.11 Care shall be taken to ensure that the rubber strip is not displaced during concreting.

6/49.12 Where a pipeline protrudes from a concrete surround, no protection from stress
concentration will be required if the surround ends at a flexible joint leaving the next pipe
free. If the surround ends on a pipe barrel the specified protection will be provided and, for
pressure pipes only, the protruding pipe will be wrapped from the edge of the neoprene
strip along to the next flexible joint at which the concrete surround is interrupted with an
approved compressible material such as damproof sheeting or building felt of minimum
thickness 2 mm.

6/50 PROTECTION OF PIPELINE COMPONENTS (SM)

6/50.1 All buried valves, couplings, flange adapters, and other metal components shall be encased
to guard against corrosion. Other pipe joints, valves and similar items on both buried and
exposed pipelines shall be cased where specified or shown on the drawings.

6/50.2 The encasing shall be by one of the following methods, as detailed.

1. Surrounding with concrete Class 40/20.

2. Enclosed by an approved hot-poured bitumen compound.
3. Wrapped with tape.

6/50.3 Method (2) shall not be used with plastic pipes. The item to be encased shall first be
cleaned and its original surface treatment made good. The surface shall be dry before
encasing is carried out, which shall not be done before the pipeline has been tested.

6/50.4 The bitumen compound shall be cast in purpose-built molds in accordance with instructions
issued by the supplier.

6/50.5 Before wrapping with tape the item to be encased shall be enclosed with an approved
mastic or inert putty-like filler which shall be moulded by hand so as to provide a smooth
surface for the tape. The tape shall be tightly spiral wrapped with 25 mm overlaps so as to
enclose the whole of the item and a minimum of 150 mm of pipe length on each side. The
enclosure shall be firmly pressed up to prevent air being trapped under the wrapping.

January 2023 6-40 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/51 INDICATOR POSTS TO PRESSURE MAINS (SM)

6/51.1 Where pressure mains pass through waste ground or across roads, the Contractor shall
erect indicator posts of approved precast reinforced concrete design at locations described
to him by the Engineer.

6/51.2 The depth, location and size of the pressure main shall be detailed in Arabic and English,
to an approved design, on an engraved plastic or non-corrodible plate attached to the post.

6/51.3 In addition at non-ventilated air valve chambers, the Contractor shall erect indictor signs on
posts, to an approved design, at locations described to him by the Engineer.

6/51.4 The words ‘WARNING GAS ON ENTRY’ together with an appropriate pictorial
representation shall be detailed in Arabic and English, to an approved design, on an
engraved plastic or non-corrodible plate attached to the post.

6/52 ENCLOSING GRANULAR OR STONE SURROUND WITH FILTER FABRIC (SM)

6/52.1 Where filter fabric is used to enclose granular bedding the fabric will be placed on the
proposed trench formation and carefully supported during pipe laying operations. When the
pipe has been laid complete with bedding to the correct level the filter fabric shall be closed
over the top of the bedding by forming a ‘lap’ of 300 mm minimum width onto the pipe barrel
from each side. All membrane joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 500 mm.

6/52.2 Where filter fabric is used to enclosed granular or stone pipe surrounds, the fabric will be
placed on the prepared trench formation and carefully supported during pipe laying
operations. When the pipe has been laid complete with surround to the correct level the
filter fabric shall be closed over the top of the surround by forming a ‘lap’ of minimum width
500 mm. All membrane joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 500 mm.

6/52.3 Care shall be taken not to puncture or damage the membrane in any way during the
operations or during backfilling of the trench.

6/52.4 Geotextile filter fabric shall be thermally bonded non-woven produced from continuous
filament synthetic fibre.

Where described in Contract or as directed by the Engineer the geotextile filter fabric shall
have the following properties

Grade 1

Nominal Weight = 210-240 g/m2

Mean Water Flow (100 mm head) = 35 L/S / m2
Upper limits of 90 percentile of pore sizes = 60 microns
Minimum tear strength (ASTM 1117) = 550 N
Minimum CBR puncture resistance
(DIN 54307E) = 2400 N

Grade 2

January 2023 6-41 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Nominal Weight = 130-150 g/m2

Mean Water Flow (100 mm head) = 50 L/S/ m2
Upper limit of 90 percentile of pore sizes = 120 microns
Minimum Tear Strength (to ASTM 1117) = 270 N
Minimum CBR puncture resistance
(DIN 54307E) = 1200 N

The fabric shall be protected from the effects of ultraviolet rays until it is to be used. The
fabric shall be laid with 300 mm laps on the prepared sub-strata.

6/53 GROUTING OF PIPELINES (SM)

6/53.1 Grouting shall be carried out in accordance with approved method statements which shall
include jetting and cleaning operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to grouting
abandoned pipelines or insertion of secondary pipes into existing pipelines.

6/53.2 The gravity and pressure pipeline lengths to be abandoned and grouted shall be agreed
with the Engineer.

6/53.3 Where a secondary sleeve pipe has been inserted through an existing pipeline the annulus
between the pipes shall be grouted.

6/54 PIPEWORK WITHIN STRUCTURES (SM)

6/54.1 Pipework shall be supplied to the general arrangements and limits indicated on the Contract
Drawings and shall be supplied complete with all joint rings, gaskets, washers to each side
of a bolted joint, nuts, bolts, grease and any other components necessary for the complete
installation.

6/54.2 The layout and design of the pipework shall be such as to facilitate its erection and the
dismantling of any section for maintenance of associated plant by inclusion of approved
mechanical couplings or flange adapters.

6/54.3 Where a common delivery pipe is used, individual pump delivery branches unless
otherwise shown on the drawings shall be jointed to it in a horizontal plane and angled to
prevent sharp changes of flow.

6/54.4 Adequate supporting and anchoring arrangements for all pipes shall be included which may
take the form of straps, stays, tie bars or concrete cradles.

6/54.5 All pipe hangers and supports inside pumping stations and valve chambers or other
structures shall be of good quality stainless steel. All fixing bolts shall be stainless steel
grade 316 S16.

6/54.6 Cast and ductile iron pipes shall be provided with puddle flanges where they pass through
the walls of underground or water retaining structures.

6/54.7 Small bore pipework for sump pumps, vents, etc. may be galvanized steel or approved
plastic materials.

6/54.8 All pipes connected to pressure vessels, pumps, etc. shall have flanged connections.

January 2023 6-42 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/54.9 All pipes shall be checked for alignment and mating of flanges and connections before
being secured. Pipes shall not be sprung into position.

6/55 MANHOLES, CATCHPITS AND CHAMBERS (SM)

6/55.1 Manholes and chambers shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings in the
positions indicated thereon or wherever else instructed by the Engineer and such
manholes, catchpits and chambers shall be watertight.

6/55.2 All manholes and collection chambers in contact with sewage shall be protected internally
with GRP lining which shall be of minimum thickness 7.0mm and which shall extent from
the benching up the walls, across the roof slab soffit and up the access shaft to lap onto
the manhole frame. It shall be designed to be capable of protecting the concrete for the
design life of the manhole.

6/55.3 Pipes entering and leaving manholes, catchpits and chambers shall be laid soffit to soffit
unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

6/55.4 The Contractor is reminded that all construction joints must be perfectly watertight and is
referred to the relevant clauses in other section of this specification.

6/55.5 The Contractor shall submit full details of his manhole, catchpit and chambers proposals to
the Engineer for approval prior to commencing the works.

6/55.6 Reinforced Plastic Sealing Plates

Covers for sewerage shall be provided in with a reinforced plastic sealing plate in
accordance with Clause [Link] (a). The design of cover, frame and sealing plate shall be
such that no load can be transferred from the cover to the sealing plate.

Reinforced plastic sealing plates to access covers shall be designed to provide a push-fit,
gas-tight seal with the cover frame. The sealing plate shall be in the form of a plug with a
flange to prevent the plate passing into the manhole. The seal shall be achieved by means
of an approved integral synthetic rubber gasket mechanically locked into the periphery of
the plate. The gasket shall be suitable for the service temperature range 00C to 600 C and
possess good weathering and ozone resistance. Any lubricant used on the seal shall be
silicon based. The underside of the plate shall have a resin-rich finish and there shall be
no exposed fibres. Cut and/or drilled faces shall be sealed with resin.

The plate shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm and be capable of withstanding a static
load of 150 kg. applied centrally over a 150 cm. square surface area with a deflection,
measured at the centre of the plate, not exceeding 25 mm.

A minimum of two number reinforced plastic lifting handles shall be provided per plate.
They shall be of the same materials as the plate and securely laminated to the plate or
fixed by stainless steel blind rivets.

The complete seal plate shall be resistant to 10% sulphuric acid at 500C for 100 days.

6/55.7 Rubberized Bitumen Emulsion: Rubberized bitumen for application to buried concrete
surface as detailed on the Drawings shall consist of a water bound emulsion containing not
less than 65% of bitumen with fine particles of rubber dispersed in the bitumen, the
consistency being such that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal air

January 2023 6-43 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

temperature. The rubber content of the dried film shall not be less than 10% when tested
in accordance with Municipality.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval three samples in one liter
containers of the rubber bitumen emulsion. The Contractor shall also submit to the
Engineer certificates that the material complies with the requirements of the specification.

6/55.8 Waterproofing for Structures: Waterproofing membranes for structures shall consist of a
self-adhesive sheet membrane comprising a multilayer polyethylene film coated on one
side with an elastic rubber/bitumen compound and where necessary be protected with
approved protection board. The membrane shall have a minimum overall thickness of
1.5mm and a tensile strength of 40 N/mm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM D638
and shall in all respects conform to the requirements of British Code of Practice 102.
Rubberized mastic and primer for use with waterproofing membranes shall be special
compounds provided by the manufacturer of the membrane and formulated for its intended
use. The system shall be suitable for application in tropical climates.

The surface to be treated shall be cleaned and primed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations before the application of the system. The materials shall
not be applied in rain, fog or sea spray.

6/55.9 Waterstops

1. Alternatives from those indicated on the drawings will be accepted only if the
Engineer is satisfied that their material and their performance are not inferior.

2. Waterstops shall be manufactured either from rubber or from polyvinylchloride

(PVC), at the discretion of the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.
PVC waterstops of the hollow centre bulb type shall be manufactured from low-
modulus PVC, where so described on the Drawings.

3. No splices will be permitted in straight strips. Strips and special connection pieces
shall be well cured in a manner such that any cross section shall be dense,
homogeneous and free from all porosity. All junctions in the special connection
pieces shall be full moulded. During the vulcanizing period the joints shall be securely
held by suitable clamps. The materials at the splices shall be dense and
homogenous throughout the cross section.

4. If, after placing concrete, waterstops are materially out of position of shape, the
surrounding concrete shall be removed, the waterstop reset, and the concrete
replaced, all at the Contractor’s expense.

5. Field splices for rubber waterstops shall be performed by hot or cold vulcanizing in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

6. Field splices for polyvinyl-chloride waterstops shall be performed by heat sealing the
adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. A
thermostatically controlled electric source of heat shall be used to make all splices.
The heat shall be sufficient to melt but not to char the plastic. Field splices shall be
carried out only by individuals trained and approved by the supplier.

7. Waterstops when being installed shall be cut and spliced at changes in directions as
may be necessary to avoid buckling or distortion of the web or flange. Field splices
shall develop watertightness equal to that of the unspliced material and have a
tensile strength of not less than 50 per cent of the unspliced material.

January 2023 6-44 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/56 CATCHPIT/MANHOLE LININGS COVERS AND FRAMES

6/56.1 Manhole covers and frame shall be with the exception of those for sewerage manholes
cast ductile iron of non-rock construction. Manhole/catchpit covers and frames shall be
heavy duty Grade ‘A’ complying with BS 497 : Part 1 or Class D to DIN 1229. Covers shall
be circular with 600 mm dia clear opening. All covers shall have a single seal and closed
keyways. A heavy grease seal is to be formed between the cover and frame to prevent the
ingress of sand.

Double triangular covers must be loosely coupled by stainless steel bolts with nuts provided
with an approved method to render the nuts incapable of both undue tightening or
loosening.

Holes provided in non-ventilating covers for lifting keys shall not penetrate through and
there shall be no projections above cover level.

6/56.2 Manhole and chamber covers shall have appropriate wording in English and Arabic as per
the Table in 6/56.6. Prior to manufacture of the covers the Contractor shall submit full size
stencils of the inscriptions to the Engineer for approval.

6/56.3 All covers and frames shall be delivered to site with a transit protection coating. Immediately
prior to the issue of the Certificate of Completion the cast iron items shall be power wire
brushed and protected with 375 microns of bitumen epoxy paint. Frames and covers shall
be placed immediately after completion of the manhole and chamber.

6/56.4 Approved list of suppliers for manhole/catchpit covers, gullies, frames.

1. Elkington
2. Passavant
3. Stanton
4. Selflock
5. Brikhouse Boards.

6/56.5 The Contractor shall guarantee that spare parts shall be available from the supplier for at
least 10 years after the completion of the works.

6/56.6 All covers and frames of a particular grade from a supplier shall be interchangeable and
shall be approved by the Engineer and Sharjah Municipality Drainage and Irrigation
Department.

Manhole and Chamber Covers and Frames

SURFACE SEWERAGE LAND

WATER DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE
Cover shape Size Circular Double Triangular Circular
of Opening 600 mm diameter (manholes) 600 mm
Square inspection diameter
(Chambers)
600 mm x 600 mm
Grade BS EN 124 BS EN 124 BS EN 124
Grade A Grade A Grade A
(Heavy Duty) (Heavy Duty) (Heavy Duty)
Material Ductile iron Ductile iron with 316 Ductile iron
SS bolts

January 2023 6-45 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SURFACE SEWERAGE LAND

WATER DRAINAGE
DRAINAGE
Protective 375 microns 375 microns 375 microns
Coating abrasion resistant abrasion resistant abrasion
heavy duty heavy duty resistant heavy
bitumen epoxy bitumen epoxy duty
bitumen epoxy
Key ways Closed Closed Closed
Seating Single seal non- Single seal non- Single seal non-
rock, filled with rock, filled with rock, filled with
grease to exclude grease to exclude grease to
sand sand exclude sand
Internal GRP No Yes No
sealing plate
Locking No No No
Inscriptions Stormwater Sewerage Stormwater
(Arabic & English) (Arabic & English) (Arabic &
English)

Covers for Pumping Stations and Associated Chambers shall be rectangular 600 mm x 750
mm or 600 mm x 900 mm or multiple of these sizes, as detailed on the drawings with the
concrete infill, and shall be heavy duty.

Where ventilated covers are detailed the total area of ventilation shall not be less than 5%
of the minimum clear opening area and the covers shall be provided with suitable protective
sand traps which shall seat in the access cover frame.

6/56.7 In general, the GRP linings and frames for manholes shall be similar in manufacture
to the GRP pipes.

The internal surface of the liner material shall be smooth and both the internal and external
surfaces of liners and formers shall be clean and free from defects such as protruding fiber,
voids, pits, bubbles, cracks, blisters or foreign matter what would impair their performance
in service.

Benching standing areas shall have an approved non-slip finish built into the GRP.

The external surface of the liner and former shall have suitable GRP lugs moulded on the
surface at appropriate spacings to allow adequate bonding to the concrete.

The liner and former material shall have adequate strength to withstand on and off loading
and site handling. It shall not excessively buckle or distort to effect circularity,
watertightness or continuity of laminate when a concrete surround is being placed. (Internal
bracing whilst pouring may be adopted at the Contractor’s expense).

Joints where permitted shall be as detailed as shall be made using an external purpose-
made sleeve or plate laminated by an approved technique to the liner and shall be equal
or superior in performance to the lining both in the circumferential and longitudinal
directions. Overbonding shall extend for a minimum of 150 mm either side of the joint.

January 2023 6-46 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Manhole Benching and Channels

a) Storm Water Drainage

6/56.8 Epoxy Mortar for Storm Water Drainage: All benching and channels in any manhole or any
other structure such as chambers, pump station wet-well etc. shall be formed to have a
minimum of 100 mm thickness of an approved epoxy-resin mortar system.

The epoxy mortar system shall be a trowellable, two component epoxy resin system
consisting of a prefilled base and unfilled reactor which when mixed shall produce a high
strength, impermeable and chemically resistant mortar.

The epoxy mortar system shall have excellent chemical resistance to sodium chloride and
sulphuric acid (shall pass the relevant chemical resistance test), and shall have high impact
resistance. Typical properties are given:

2 component epoxy mortar

Sag at 10 mm thickness
None Working Time ASTM C308 <90 min at 250C
Full Cure at 250C
3 to 7 days
Setting Time at 250 C 30 to 45 min.
Water Absorption ASTM C413 <0.07%
Compression Strength BS 6319 Part 2 >40 N/mm2 at 250C
7 days cure
Flexural Strength BS6319 Part 3 3 N/mm2 at 250C 7 days cure
Tensile Strength BS 6319 Part 7 8 N/mm2
Bond Strength BS 6319 Part 4 >30N/mm2
Density BS 6319 Part 1 1750 kg/m3

When placed on a concrete substrate the epoxy mortar system shall have an adhesive
strength of not less than the internal cohesive strength of concrete.

To achieve the necessary adhesion to the substrate an epoxy primer compatible for use
with the mortar and the substrate shall be applied.

The epoxy mortar, or the primer where required, shall be suitable for application onto a
substrate with a moisture content of 4% or less as measured by the ‘wet- check’ Moisture
Meter or other instruments approved by the Engineer.

The pot-life of the mixed mortar shall not be less than one hour at the temperature at the
place of application at the time of mixing. The Engineer may restrict application to such
time as the ambient temperature is sufficiently low for the specified pot-life to be ensured.

There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy mortar and
between coats of the same. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and
water soluble contamination shall be removed as specified above. Where dirt or dust has
become trapped in the primed surface it shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper.
The surface being primed shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations.

The mortar manufacturer shall stipulate primer and epoxy re-coat intervals for all curing
temperatures likely to be encountered and these shall be adopted with a maximum
tolerance of +4 hours. Where this is exceeded the surfaces to be re- coated shall be suitably
abraded to remove gloss and give key.

January 2023 6-47 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Mixing of the components shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and care shall be taken to avoid the entrainment of air in the mixes.

Wet thickness gauge shall be used by the mortar applicators continually to check the
sufficient mortar is being applied to achieve the required dry thickness.

Foul Water Drainage

All bending and channels in any manhole or any other structure such as chambers,
pumping station wet well etc. designed to handle sewage shall be formed of a minimum 7
mm thickness of GRP.

The quantity of GRP used for benching and channels shall be the same as specified for
pipes except that the surface of the benching shall have a durable non-slip surface.

6/57 GULLIES AND CONNECTIONS (SM)

6/57.1 Gullies shall comprise the gully cover and frame or gully grating and frame as specified and
the gully pot.

6/57.2 Road Gullies : Road gullies shall be polypropylene or GRP, conforming with BS 556, Part
2, 450 mm internal diameter by 900 m or 1050 mm deep, without trap, and with 150 mm
outlet. They shall be complete with GRP perforated grit bucket and incorporate a 200 mm
opening to the base.

The gully pot shall be surrounded by a minimum of 150 mm of concrete as shown on the
drawings.

6/57.3 Gully grating and frames shall be to Municipality Standard as indicated on the Drawing shall
be of the raised kerb type complete with sand seal, road retaining bar and an internal
removable GRP debris grating. The weir depth shall be a minimum of 165 mm and the
frame and cover are to be protected with 375 micron bitumen epoxy coating system at the
place of manufacture. The clear opening size shall permit removal of the GRP grit sand
bucket.

6/57.4 The gully pot shall be surrounded by a minimum of 150 mm of concrete as shown on the
drawings.

6/57.5 The connection into the carrier drain shall be 160 dia. uPVC pipe and if not made at a
manhole or catchpit shall be by means of an oblique junction which may be of either UPVC,
GRP or C1 and the assembly shall be surrounded in concrete as detailed on the drawings
and all shall be approved by the Engineer.

6/58 HOUSE CONNECTION LATERALS (SM)

6/58.1 A house connection lateral comprise the pipe work from the existing drainage of an
individual property or properties to a sewer and normally connects to the sewer at a
manhole or as may be directed by the Engineer and may include inspection chambers etc.
along its length.

January 2023 6-48 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/58.2 The position and other details of individual house connection laterals are not generally
shown on the drawings but will be determined by the Engineer as the work proceeds.

6/58.3 In general the house connection laterals and details of individual connection will be similar
to the typical and standard details shown on the drawing and as directed by the Engineer.

6/58.4 The Contractor shall in consultation with the Engineer prepare a detailed programme of
work for any connections within the boundary of private lands in order that any necessary
notices may be given by the employer to the owners or tenants before the Contractor’s
entry onto such private lands.

6/59 TESTING AND CLEANING OF GRAVITY DRAINS (SM)

6/59.1 All gravity drains and connections with water tight joints of 750 mm diameter or less, shall
be tested prior to covering with an air test or at the Engineer’s discretion with a water test
in accordance with Clause 6/59.2 and 6/59.3 in the presence and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Unless otherwise instructed non-pressure pipelines shall be tested in sections
between manholes. In addition pipelines shown as straight lines on the drawings shall be
subjected to a light test as detailed in the pipe laying specifications.

6/59.2 Air Test: The length of pipes under test shall be plugged and air pumped in until a pressure
of 100 mm of water is held in the manometer tube. After allowing a suitable time for
stabilisation of the air temperature the pressure shall without further pumping hold to not
less than 75 mm over a period of five minutes. Release of the air pressure shall be carried
out by removal of the stopper at the end of the pipeline away from the manometer which
will remain connected. Failure to carry out the air pressure release in this manner will render
the test invalid.

6/59.3 Water Test: The lower end of the length of pipe under test, and any junctions or connections
shall be plugged and the pipe shall be filled with water, to give an internal pressure of 1.20
m head of water at the crown of the pipe at the high end, but not more than 6 m at the low
end. After allowing a suitable period of time for absorption of water by the pipe the loss of
water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by addition water from a measuring
vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required to maintain the
original water level. The total quantity added should not exceed 7.5 litre per hour per 30
metre of pipe per metre of nominal internal diameter.

6/59.4 Gravity pipelines and manholes shall be tested for infiltration after backfilling. All inlets to
the system shall be effectively closed and any residual flow shall be deemed to the
infiltration.

The pipeline, including manholes, shall be accepted as satisfactory if the infiltration

including infiltration into manholes, does not exceed 1.0 litre per hour per metre of pipeline
per metre of nominal internal diameter.

Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the infiltration test, if there is any discernible
flow of water entering the pipeline at a point which can be located either by visual or closed
circuit television inspection, the Contractor shall take such measures as are necessary to
stop such infiltration.

6/59.5 The Engineer may require any length of pipe suspected of being damaged to be retested
by the water test at any time during the Contract.

January 2023 6-49 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/59.6 The bore, linearity and jointing of all drains, less than 300 mm diameter shall be checked
by drawing through each completed length of pipe a mandrel 750 mm long and 12 mm less
in diameter than the nominal bore of the pipe, unless an alternative method of checking is
agreed by the Engineer.

6/59.7 During the Contract the Contractor shall keep the interior surfaces of all pipelines and
manholes etc. free from any cement, bricks, soil or other superfluous matter, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

6/59.8 On completion of the works, or earlier if the Engineer agrees or directs, all manholes, drains
and connections, which are complete shall be flushed from end to end with clean water and
left clean and free from obstructions.

6/60 IRRIGATION WORKS - ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPE

6/60.1 General: Asbestos Cement (AC) pressure pipe shall conform to the requirements of BS EN
512. All pipes and joints shall be manufactured by an approved by the Sharjah Municipality
AC pipe manufacturer having successful similar experience in the manufacture and supply
of high pressure AC pipe. Evidence of such experience shall be included in the tender
submission. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9002 OR BS 5720 Part 2.

6/60.2 References: The latest issue of the following standards are applicable where referenced in
the following specifications:

BS 5750 1987
BS EN 512 1995
BS 2494 1986
BS 4027 1980
ISO 2785 74year
ISO 9002 1987

Full range of AC pipe diameters used for the entire project (150 to 1200 mm dia.) must be
U.A.E manufactured and delivered by the same manufacturer.

6/60.3 Class: AC pipes shall meet the requirements for Class 18, suitable for an operating of 9
bars up to and including 1000 mm and 10 bars above 1000 mm dia. Pipe wall thickness
shall meet all the design requirements for class 18 pipe as follows.

Nominal Diameter Outside Diameter at

The pipe end
mm mm

80 106
100 126
150 178
200 234
225 255
250 288
300 344
350 402
400 456
450 508
500 560
550 616

January 2023 6-50 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

600 668
700 780
800 888
900 1000
1000 1110
1200 1320

All pipes shall withstand full vacuum (-1 bar).

6/60.4 Cement: The cement in the manufacture of asbestos cement pipes and joints shall be of
high sulphate resisting cement conforming to BS 4027:1980. Copies of cement mill
certificate shall be submitted with each consignment of pipe delivered to the site.

6/60.5 Joints: Asbestos cement pipes shall be provided with spigot ends to be joined with ‘Reka’
type couplings using two rubber rings. Rubber rings shall conform to the requirements of
BS 2494. The Joints shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 18 bars without
any leaks when deflected to the angle specified below:

Nominal Diameter Max. Joint Deflection

Angle
mm Degrees

up to 225 5
250 – 350 4
400 – 550 3
600 – 1000 2
1200 1

AC pipes joints to be designed to provide sealing in negative pressure surge: -1

bar (full vacuum) against internal and external pressures.

6/60.6 Length: Asbestos Cement pipes shall be manufactured in 5 metre nominal length for all
range of diameters.

6/60.7 Width of AC Reka Joints

Nominal Dia. Width of AC

mm Joint mm

75 104
80 104
100 120
150 120
200 150
225 150
300 150
350-500 200
550 240
600 240
700 240
800 – 1100 270
1200 300

January 2023 6-51 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/60.8 Design Calculations: Structural pipe design calculation as per ISO 2795-1974 shall be
submitted to the Engineer, if requested, for review and approval.

6/60.9 Testing: Asbestos Cement pipes shall be factory tested in accordance with BS EN 512.
Copies of test certificates shall be submitted for each consignment manufactured and
delivered to site, and all compulsory and optional tests shall be carried out by the
manufacture. The Engineer may instruct the return of up to 2 percent of pipes and joints
delivered to site for factory testing. The cost of returning the pipes and joints to the factory,
and for testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

The pipes which are damaged in testing shall be replaced with new pipes at no additional
cost by the Contractor.

6/60.10 Markings: Each pipe and joint shall be legibly and illegibly marked with the following:

i. Manufacturing standard
ii. Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
iii. Manufacturing date (pipe only)
iv. Home line positions at pipe ends (pipe only)
v. Nominal Diameter (ND) in mm (inside and outside)
vi. Pressure rating in bars (Class) (inside and outside)
vii. Inspection mark
viii. Coupling ‘homeline” position on spigot ends.

6/60.11 External Coating: The bitumen coating shall comply with the requirement of BS 3416, 1975
Type 1 and II for back shinning coating.

The painting shall be applied as per manufacturers recommendation and shall be applied
on clean dry surface by using hand wire brush.

Pipe and joints shall be coated for differentiation with uncoated AC water pipeline.

6/60.12 AC Pipe Joint Lubricant: Soft soap as recommended by the pipe manufacturer
shall be supplied and applied for pipe joint lubricant. The soap shall be odourless and paste
like consistency. The soap should be washable with water. It shall be vegetable-based and
shall be free from fish, whale, or other animal oils and fats, free from resins and any
poisonous material. It shall be supplied in packings of 20- 25 kgs. Net. Soft soap shall be
supplied by the pipe supplier.

6/61 IRRIGATION WORKS - GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) FITTINGS

All fittings (including bends, tees, reducers and flanges) used with AC pipelines shall be
GRP (Glassfibre reinforced plastic) fittings and shall comply with the following specification:

AWWA C-950-88 AWWA Standard for ‘Fibreglass”

(Glass Fiber Reinforced Resin) Pressure Pipe

BS 5480 : 1990 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastics (GRP) Pipes and Fittings for use
for Water Supply or Sewerage; Parts 1&2.

6/61.1 General: This specification covers the design, manufacture and testing of glassfibre
reinforced plastic (GRP) pressure fittings for use with Asbestos Cement pressure pipe in
nominal sizes 80 mm and larger. GRP fittings and pipe shall be designed and manufactured

January 2023 6-52 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

in accordance with AWWA C950-88 and the requirements herein. All components shall be
produced by one manufacturer.

The manufacturer shall be approved by Sharjah Municipality and must demonstrate the
experience and capability to produce fittings of the same diameter and pressure range as
those required. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9002 or BS 5750 Part:2. Full
range of fittings diameters used for the project must be manufactured and delivered by the
same manufacturer.

6/61.2 Construction: GRP fittings shall have the following principal construction:

i. A corrosion resistant, resin rich having a minimum thickness of 0.5 mm. the liner
surface in contact with water shall be reinforced with ‘C’ glass veil or mat
impregnated with Vinylester or Epoxy Resin. The liner shall be continuous along
the circumference of the pipe and shall be of uniform thickness and composition.

ii. A structural wall consisting of continuous glass filament findings and/or woven
roving and chopped glass reinforcement, and may include fine fillers, all
impregnated with Isophthalic, Vinylester or Epoxy resin as required.

iii. A resin-rich exterior surface having a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm.

iv. No dark pigments shall be allowed in the GRP fittings.

6/61.3 GRP fittings and flanges shall be designed in accordance with AWWA C950 for service at
the following conditions:

Maximum operating pressure 16 Bar

Maximum allowable vacuum -1 Bar
Minimum depth of water 1.0 meter
Maximum depth of cover 3.0 meter
Truck loading (wheel load) 90 KN
Service temperature (Maximum) 40 deg.C

Flange x flange fittings shall be designed for installation above ground (in chambers)
without thrust blocks. Flanged branches on spigot tees shall be designed to resist end
thrust from closed valves.

The pressure rating for GRP pipe or fittings shall be based on the long term hydrostatic
design pressure established as per Section [Link]-2 (a) of this Specification with a
design factor of 2.0.

Spigot joints, where specified shall have the same outside diameter (OD) as approved by
Sharjah Municipality for Asbestos Cement (AC) pipe to which it is to be joined. The joint
dimensions and tolerances shall be equal to AC pipe spigots such that joint remains
watertight under all normal operating and surge conditions. The spigot ends shall be clearly
marked with a ‘homeline’ indicating the proper insertion limit for the AC couplings. The
spigot width shall not be less than half the AC coupling joint width.

Flanged joints, where specified shall be GRP filament wound flanges manufactured from
Epoxy or Vinylester resin and glass reinforcements. Flanges shall be flat faced and drilled
to BS 4504 PN 16 drilling pattern. GRP flange gasket (full face) design and thickness shall
be as recommended by the GRP fitting manufacturer. Hand lay-up flanges shall not be
acceptable.

January 2023 6-53 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Laminated or Adhesive joints used in the fabrication of fittings shall be equal or superior in
strength to the sections they join. The thickness of laminated joints shall not be less than
the wall thickness of the adjoining pipe section. All hand laminations or windings shall utilize
only one type of resin throughout.

6/61.4 Chemical Requirements: GRP fittings shall be not impart any taste, odour or colour to
drinking water. GRP pipe/fittings shall be certified and listed for potable water use by the
water research center (WRC)m UK, in accordance with BS 6920 or by the National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) – USA in accordance with NSF Standard 14 and shall comply
with Clause 1/12.8.

6/61.5 Dimensions – GRP fittings shall be produced in Metric sizes and shall be classified by their
nominal inside diameter (ND). The actual fittings inside diameter shall not be less than that
shown in the table below:

Nominal Diameter (ND) Minimum Inside

(mm) Diameter (mm)

80 78
100 98
150 148
200 198
225 223
250 245
300 298
350 348
400 397
450 447
500 497
550 547
600 597
700 696
800 795
900 895
1000 995
1200 1195

All standard fittings up to and including diameter 300 mm used in the distribution system
shall be filament wound on precision steel moulds. Standard 90 and 45 degree bends of
nominal diameter 300 mm and smaller shall be of the smooth radius type, having a turning
radius of 1.5 times the bend nominal diameter. Fittings diameter 350 mm and larger may
be of the moulded or miltered (manufactured from GRP pipe sections) construction and
internal surfaces shall be finished smooth.

The thickness of GRP flanges shall not be less than shown in the table below:

Nominal Diameter (ND) Minimum GRP Flange Thickness

(mm) (mm)

80 – 100 38
150 – 200 44
225 46
250 – 350 54
400 58
450 64

January 2023 6-54 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

500 – 600 68
700 72
800 78
900 85
1000 88
1200 108

The wall thickness of GRP fittings shall be determined by the manufacturer to meet the
design requirements of this specifications but shall in no case be less than the minimum
thickness shown in the table below:

Nominal Diameter ND Minimum Pipe Thickness

(mm) (mm)

80 – 400 6.0
450 6.7
500 7.5
550 8.2
600 9.0
700 10.0
800 11.5
900 13.0
1000 14.5
1200 17.5

Flange drilling shall be as per BS 4504 PN 16.

6/61.6 Mechanical Properties: GRP fittings shall meet the following minimum strength
requirements:

Property Test Method Minimum

Value per
Table

1. Hoop Tensile ASTM D2290 Portable 10

Strength of AWWA C950
For class 250 psi

2. Axial Tensile ASTM D638 Per table 11

Stress BS 5480 of AWWA C950
For class 250 psi

3. Axial Tensile ASTM D638 70 Mpa

Stress for BS 5480
Flg.x [Link]

4. Stiffness ASTM D2412

(E1/D3) BS 5480

Dia < = 300 10,000 Pa

Dia > 300 5,000 Pa

January 2023 6-55 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/61.7 Visual Requirements: GRP fittings shall be free from delamination, crazing, dry areas or
cracks. Spigot ends shall be free from end delamination, torn edges and gauges and shall
be finished smooth to ensure watertightness. All laminates shall be fully cured with a
minimum Barcol hardness of 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2583.

6/61.8 Testing :

(1) Routine Tests: The following test shall be carried out by the GRP pipe/fitting
manufacturer at the frequency specified. test results and certificates shall be
submitted to the Engineer for each consignment delivered. Witnessing of factory
testing by the Engineer may be required. The Sharjah Municipality and the
Engineer shall have the right to return up to 2% of the material delivered back to
the factory for inspection and/or testing by its Representative at no additional cost.
Test methods shall be in accordance with AWWA C950 5480.

Test Frequency

i) Visual Inspection Every item

ii) Dimensions Every time
iii) Hydraulic Pressure Once per
at 24 bars for 30 seconds 10 Flg. X Flg. items
iv) Stiffness Once per 100 items
v) Barcol hardness Every item
(resin cure)
vi) Axial & Hoop Tensile Once per 100 items
Stress

vii) All GRP pipes used for fittings fabrication shall be factory pressure tested
at 24 bars for 60 seconds. All GRP pipes shall be tested at DCL for the
following tests also.
3. Initial Longitudinal unit Tensile Strength by a Tensile Strip Test as per BS
4580 App. “A”.
4. Initial specific stiffness under ring deflection in accordance with BS 4580
App. ‘H’.

(2) Qualifications (type) Tests: The following tests shall be carried out on actual
pipe/fittings produced by the manufacturer to establish and accept the design basis
for the products. These tests are not routine quality control tests.

a) Long term hydrostatic design pressure of the GRP pipe or fitting shall be
established in accordance with AWWA C950 Section 2.4.2

b) Short term hoop tensile strength shall be within the ultimate strength of the
pipe fittings. Laminated joints and flanged joints shall withstand a
hydrostatic test pressure of 3.5 times the rated working pressure with no
signs of leakage or weep. For flanged joints, the flanges shall be blinded
and the ends unrestrained during the test.

6/61.9 Submittals/Drawings: Prior to start of production, the fittings manufacturer shall submit to
the Engineer detailed drawings of each fitting required for approval. Design calculations,
samples and sample testing may also be required by the Engineer for approval at no extra
cost to the Client.

January 2023 6-56 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

For flanged fittings, the manufacturer shall submit before delivery, the recommended
gasket details, the bolt torquing sequence and maximum recommended torque for each
flange size supplied.

6/61.10 Markings: Each fitting shall be indelibly marked with the following:

- Manufacturer’s name or trade mark

- Nominal diameter (ND) in mm (inside and outside)
- Pressure rating in bars
- Manufacturing date, month & year
- Inspection mark
- Coupling “homeline”, ‘position’ position on spigot ends

6/61.11 Tangential Flanged Tee: This shall be used as washout tee which shall have a bottom
tangential flanged outlet. Tee shall be spigot x spigot x branch flange. The size and the
configuration of the Tee shall be as detailed on the drawings. The detail of product and
engineering data shall be submitted. Spigot ends of tee shall be compatible with AC joint
used for this project/contract.

6/62 IRRIGATION WORKS - VALVES

6/62.1 All valves and flanges shall have minimum pressure rating of 16 bars manufactured to
British Standards. The flange to flange length of the valve shall conform to ISO 5752 Series
3, 14 or 15 as specified below with various valve types. All construction bolts shall be of SS
Grade 316. Valves shall be non-rising stem types and the stem shall be SS Grade 316
TI/1.4571 or cast aluminium bronze with gun metal or Bronze stem nut. All valves to be
suitable for sewage final effluent.

6/62.2 Gate Valves shall comply with BS 5163. Gate Valves which are hand-wheel operated shall
have anti-clockwise opening. Maximum force required at the circumference of the hand-
wheel to open the valve against unbalance pressure should not exceed 500N. All valves
shall include a double ‘O’ Ring releasing system which complies with Clause 9 of BS
5163./1986. Hand-wheel shall have marked words ‘open’ and ‘close’ in English with rotation
direction arrows. Hand- wheel shall be protected with epoxy coating.

Stem of the valve to be of stainless steel. Seats on body and wedge to be made from
stainless steel for sizes above DN 400. Upto size DN 400 Resilient seated gate valves are
preferred with ductile iron wedge fully covered with rubber on all sides and with replaceable
stem nut.

Valve body to have epoxy resin coating of 300 microns (dft) inside and outside. Valve stem
seals shall be of the stuffing box and gland form for valves above DN 400 and of the double
‘O’ ring system enclosed in stainless steel PN material for size up to DN 400.

Flanges shall be of faced and drilled to PN 16 unless to suit already existing pipework and
approved by the Engineer.

6/62.3 Butterfly valves shall comply in all respects with BS 5155 : 1984. Body with all flanges faced
and drilled for PN 16 and the disk shall be made of Ductile cast iron corresponding to BS
2789-73 Grade 500/7. Disk shall be mounted on stainless steel shafts located in PTFE
lined self-lubricating bearings with synthetic nitrile rubber shaft seal.

The valve disc shall be the double offset eccentric type – single offset for DN 1000 and
larger – fitted with a non-ageing sealing element of NBR (nitrile Rubber Profile Seal) or

January 2023 6-57 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

similar approved material held in place by an adjustable one-piece clamping ring secured
with Stainless Steel adjusting set screws mechanically locked in place (not resin bonded).
The profile seal shall provide a bi-directional tight shut off, against a solid rolled in body
seat ring of Stainless Steel.

The valve disk shall be as streamlined as possible to ensure low head losses and secure
movement without disk flutter.

The disk stub shafts shall be manufactured from Stainless Steel, and positively keyed to
the valve disk and incorporate a key securing device (valve disks pinned to stub shafts are
not acceptable).

The stub shaft bearings shall be of maintenance-free self-lubricating PTFE lined bushes,
and shaft seals of NBR or equivalent.

The epoxy coated valve gearbox shall be fitted with a sealed for life maintenance- free
travelling fork and nut gearbox, suitable for buried service duty and capable of easy
operation at full pressure differential equal to nominal pressure, enclosed in cast iron
casing, grease packed, with ball thrust bearings coupled with handwheel and position
indicator.

Travelling fork and nut gearboxes shall be used for small and medium sizes, slider- rank
gearbox for bigger ones, according to the pressure rating.

6/62.4 Non-return valves shall be of the single door swing check type including hydraulic damper
lever arm and balancing weights. The disk shall be resilient seated. Valves shall be
provided with removable covers on top of the body to enable hinges and disk to be
inspected and removed. Spindle should be made of stainless steel.

Valves shall be provided with air release lock on the removable cover. Face to face length
of non-return valves shall be either two times nominal dia plus 100 mm or to ISO 5752
series 10. All construction bolts and valve spindle shall be stainless steel grade ASTM 316
L. If application allows short body type check valves to ISO 5752 series 14 with hydraulic
damping device will also be acceptable.

This short body tilting disk check valves must meet following requirements.

The check valves shall be the double flanged type of short body (face-to-face dimension to
ISO 5752 Series 14) drilled to BS 4504 PN 16. The body shall be of ductile cast iron to BS
2789-73, grade 500/7 or better.

The valve disk shall be of the same material as the body and be as streamlined as possible
to ensure low head losses.

Shafts of high-tensile ferric chrome-nickel steel. Disk seat ring of stainless chrome-nickel
steel.
Precise seal of the valve disk inserted in ring of stainless steel. This seal provides tight
sealing of the valve at pressure below 2 bars.

Bearing bushes shall be self-lubricating/PTFE lined and maintenance free.

The check valves shall be equipped with lever and counter weight and if necessary
according to application with Hydraulic damping device for setting the closing time.

January 2023 6-58 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The hydraulic damping device shall be used to damp closing and opening shocks of the
valve and shall act in both limit positioning (damped opening range 10 degrees and damped
closing range 15 degrees).

6/62.5 Surge anticipator relief valves shall be fluid actuated and have a single moving assembly.
A flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved, nylon fabric reinforced synthetic elastomer
diaphragm shall be integral with this assembly to form a sealed chamber, operating free of
drag or wear. The diaphragm shall not be used as a seating surface. This assembly shall
have a stem which is fully guided by separate upper and lower bearings to preclude binding
or deflection. When the valve is in the closed position sealing at the seat shall be
accomplished by the contact and a smooth seat surface. The seat design shall be
removable and not have edges that will induce seal cutting, or wear at low flows.
Progressive throttling of flow shall be accomplished by a characterized profile quad ring
retainer washer. The valve body and cover shall be of cast iron. An FDA approved fused
epoxy coating shall be applied to the internal and external exposed surfaces of these
components after cleaning and degassing. This coating shall be standard on all basic
valves 2-16. All internal valve components shall be removable and repairable while the
valve body remains in the line. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and
there shall be no pistons operating the valve or controls. Valve sizes 2-3” shall be standard
equipped with a flow-clean strainer mounted in the inlet supply port of the main valve. Valve
sizes 4” and larger shall be standard with an externally mounted y-strainer for protection of
the control circuit and WATTS ball valves to isolate the pilot system from the main valve.

The valves shall open on a low or high pressure wave. The high pressure relief pilot shall
be set to open at any pressure above the normal operating pressure of the system. The
high pressure control shall be adjustable, spring loaded, normally closed, direct acting,
diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlled pressure exceeds the spring
setting. The low pressure pilot shall be set to open the main valve at any pressure below
normal system operating pressure.

6/62.6 It shall be an adjustable spring loaded, direct acting, normally open, diaphragm actuated
valve. The low pressure control shall control the filling of a hydraulic accumulator which
opens the main valve and prevents the main valve from remaining open an excess amount
of time. The control system shall have adjustable opening and closing speed needle valves.
The specification shall note when valve 6” and larger are to be installed with the system in
a horizontal position.

6/62.7 All valves shall have a drain plug at the bottom of the body.

6/63 IRRIGATION WORKS - DISMANTLING JOINT AND FLANGE ADAPTOR

6/63.1 Dismantling Joint

This shall be used on GRP, AC, cast and ductile iron and steel pipes and joints between
each of the materials as shown on the drawings. This shall provide flexibility at installation
stage of flanged pipework systems.

The dismantling joint to comprise a flange adaptor, flange spigot piece and tie bars, in a
complete package and to allow a greater adjustment length allowance at the installation
stage. Adjustability to be provided by the combination of a flange adaptor and flanged
spigot. Up to 50 mm of longitudinal adjustment (dependent upon diameter) to be available
due to telescopic action of the spigot within the flange adaptor. Once the final installation
position is achieved bolt up procedures for the flange adaptor and tie bars to be applied.

January 2023 6-59 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The dismantling joint shall be fitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation. Flanges shall be NP 16 rating.

Steel for spigot and flange adaptor body in accordance with BS EN 10025:1990 Grade Fe
430 A.

Rubber gasket to BS 2494:1990 or to suit service. Steel for studs to BS 970:Part 1:1983
Grade 070 M20.

Steel for tie bolts to BS 1506:1990:Table 1: Type 630-860

6/63.2 Flange Adaptor

This shall be used on GRP, AC, cast and ductile iron and steel pipes to enable plain-ended
pipe to be connected either to flanged pipe or flanged valves or other fittings. Flange
adaptor to be provided with flat mating faces, suitable for bolting to rised faces.

Flange adaptors to suit pressure rating of the flange PN16.

The overall pressure rating of the assembled adaptor to be equal to that of the lower rated
component, either pipe or flange.

Form of adaptor (straight sleeve, expanded sleeve or tapped flange) to be chosen as per
site requirements.

Material:

 For < 150 mm [Link] – ductile iron, end flange – malleable cast iron.
 For > 150 mm [Link] – ductile iron
 For < 300 mm [Link] flange – rolled steel.
 For > 300 mm [Link] – fabricated rolled steel, end flange – rolled steel.

Material Specification

 Rolled steel section, mild steel plate – BS 4360: 1986 Grade 43A
 Blackheart malleable cast iron – BS 6681:1986 Grade B32-10
 Whiteheart malleable cast iron – BS 6681:1986 Grade W34-04
 Ductile iron – BS 2789:1985 Grade 420/12
 Studs and nuts to be SS Grade 316 to BS 970: Part 1:1983 Grade 070 IG20.

6/64 IRRIGATION WORKS - DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS

6/64.1 Ductile Iron Fittings shall comply with ISO 2531 PN10 and made of ductile iron according
to ISO 1083 a grade 500 having min. tensile strength of 500 N/[Link]. Fittings to have
surface prepared by sand blasting to Swedish Standard 515 059900 – 1967 and have
fusion bonded epoxy coating of minimum 300 microns dry film thickness inside and outside
and shall comply with Clause 1/12.8.

6/64.2 Bolts, nuts and washers to be in stainless steel type 316. Flanges for all pipes and fittings
to be faced and drilled for 10 m bars pressure.

6/64.3 Flange gaskets to be 3 mm thickness made of rubber (GU G7-306).

January 2023 6-60 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

6/65 IRRIGATION WORKS - HYDRAULIC TEST

6/65.1 The types and grades of valves etc. shall be subject to hydraulic tests at manufacturer’s
works in accordance with the requirements of the respective British Standards. Valves and
fittings unless specified otherwise shall be suitable for working pressure of 16 bars
minimum.

6/65.2 Body tests shall be applied with the fitting in the open position and each side opened to
atmosphere alternatively where appropriate.

6/66 IRRIGATION WORKS - DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

6/66.1 Where pipes of dissimilar metals are joined, provide dielectric (insulating) couplings,
fittings, unions or flanges.

6/67 IRRIGATION WORKS - BOLTS, PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

6/67.1 All bolts for couplings, covers, flanged joints, etc. to be of SS 316 stainless steel.

6/67.2 Piping hangers, supports and anchor points shall be fabricated to British or approved
equal standards. The hangers, rods, supports and other supporting devices and
accessories shall be capable of supporting at least twice the line load of the products being
supported. Pipe hangers and supports and all bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall be of good
quality stainless steel.

6/67.3 Brackets for guide rails/ropes shall be of stainless steel.

6/67.4 Fixing to concrete to be done using chemical anchor of approved by the Engineer
manufacturer.

6/68 IRRIGATION WORKS - NON-DISRUPTIVE ROAD CROSSING

6/68.1 Thrust Boring activities or any other non-disruptive/trench less works (ND/TL) as referred
in Article 8 of Administrative Order No. 16 shall be carried out under the following standard
conditions of NOC’s for thrust bore or ND/TL across any road. Additional specific condition
may be laid down for a particular road when the NOC is granted, depending on usage.

a) Excavation for access/reception pit shall be carried within caisson/sheet piles

driven to a toe depth of 0.25 H or lesser depth as supported by calculations.
Caissons/sheetpile shall be placed at a minimum offset of 5 m from the edge of
any asphalt pavement or as specified in the NOC.

b) The excavations must be well guarded by crash barriers, barricades, cones, tapes,
flashing lights as directed by Road Department and Sharjah Traffic Police from
time to time.

c) Break tank must be provided in discharge line to monitor silt migration during any
dewatering. If silt is observed, the dewatering operation must be stopped
immediately.

January 2023 6-61 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

d) The road levels must be recorded at thrust bore or ND/TL locations at 2m intervals
upto 20 m on either side along each lane divider line, and this record of initial levels
be submitted to Roads Department as initial reference in an approved format and
prior to any dewatering work. All levels to be recorded during 2300 hours to 0600
hours and no lane closure will be permitted during the day time. The traffic
diversion for levels must be approved by Roads & Transport Authority Roads
Department Traffic Unit and Police before any work is carried out. The points where
initial and subsequent levels are to be taken should be fixed with Hilti type nails for
repeatability. Surface paint, chalk or other marks are not acceptable.

Any subsidence of soil or road structure shall be immediately brought to the notice
of Roads Department and all operations must be immediately stopped until such
time as full extent of damage is determined.

The levels on predetermined points must be jointly observed every alternative ay

to determine subsidence (if any) upto the end of dewatering. The final levels shall
be taken jointly with consultant and Roads & Transport Authority Roads
Department representative at three months from the date of removal of dewatering
lines or as directed by Roads & Transport Authority Roads Department. A report
on final levels shall be submitted through Consultant to Roads & Transport
Authority Roads Department not later than 2 weeks from the date of final level.

e) The pipe jacking method shall be such that the steel sleeve must at all the times
have a 1 m plug of soil in the pipe and no occasion unsupported advance bore
excavation to be carried out.

f) The access and reception pit areas must be fully lit during night time, and noise
and dust pollution be kept to minimum to avoid disturbance to local residence.

g) In the event of damage to roads, service or adjacent structures that may occur due
to the thrust bore or ND/TL operations, the entire repairs and compensation will be
to Contractor’s account. The reinstatement shall be carried out as per method
statement to be agreed with an executed to the approval of Roads & Transport
Authority Roads Department.

h) NOC approval is subject to approval by Traffic Engineering Department of Sharjah

Police as well as Roads & Transport Authority Roads Department.

January 2023 6-62 Section 6 –Works in Connection with Services

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 7

Street Lighting

January 2023 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

7/1 GENERAL
7/2 CABLES
7/3 EARTHING
7/4 TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION
7/5 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR MASTS
7/6 EXISTING STREET LIGHTING FACILITY
7/7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONVENTIONAL (up to 16 Meters) ROAD LIGHTING
POLES (COLUMNS) & BRACKETS.
7/8 STREET LIGHTING LUMINARIES AND FLOOD LIGHTS
7/9 SPECIFICATIONS: LOW VOLTAGE FLEXIBLE POWER CABLES FOR
CONVENTIONAL LIGHTING COLUMNS & LUMINARIES
7/10 SPECIFICATION FOR MID-HINGED HIGH MAST
7/11 LOW VOLTAGE FLEXIBLE POWER CABLE FOR MID-HINGED HIGH MASTS
7/12 CROWN HIGH MAST
7/13 AVIATION LIGHT
7/14 LIGHTING BENEATH OVER-BRIDGES
7/15 GANTRY SIGNS ILLUMINATION
7/16 LAMPS
7/17 SPECIFICATION FOR STREET LIGHTING SERVICE CUTOUT
7/18 FEEDER PILLAR SPECIFICATION
7/19 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS PREVAILING IN SHARJAH
7/20 LIGHTING REQUIREMENT

January 2023 Section 7 –TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 7 – STREET LIGHTING

7/1 GENERAL

7/1.1 General Conditions: All Control cabinets, cables, lighting masts including holding down
bolts with nuts and washers, brackets, luminaries, flood lights, lamps, service cut-outs and
appurtenances will be supplied, delivered, installed tested and commissioned by the
contractor, or as itemised in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall supply and install all cabling and warning tapes required for the
roadway lighting starting from the SEWA substation to the end of the lighting circuit.

The SEWA shall install any new sub-stations required for the system.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the civil works of the roadway lighting system
(except as otherwise specified) the layout for which is shown on the drawings. This work
may include road sign illumination and under-bridge lighting.

The works include also the provision and installation of duct crossings for service cables.
The installation of ducts to the required diameter shall be according to Section 6 of these
Specifications.

The position, type of ducts and constructional details are shown on the Drawings but final
location will be determined on the basis of the approved shop drawings by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall liaise with the Roads & Transport Authority Street Lighting Section
Engineer and co-ordinate his activities where appropriate, with the Sharjah Electricity and
Water Authority.

The base/foundation connection to be adequately grouted. No site welding will be

permitted. Galvanized steel holding down bolts shall be conforming to BS 4360 Grade 50C.
The Contractor shall supply a precision made steel template to ensure correct horizontal
and vertical holding down bolt alignment with 2 nuts below and on top of mast base-plate.

All stainless steel components shall be of Grade AISI 316.

Materials and equipment shall be suitable for use under the prevailing conditions of a harsh
marine environment.

In calculating the rating of electrical cables, switch-gear and all items of equipment, the
necessary derating factors shall be determined and applied to ensure that the equipment
will operate satisfactorily and meet its design criteria.

The electrical supply system shall be 380/220 volts, 3-phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz and supplies
shall be made available at appropriate locations by SEWA.

Layouts of conduits are to be detailed by the consultant. The Contractor shall confirm the
detail and submit to the Engineer for approval before commencing construction of any
structure.

Reference Standards

The installation shall comply with:

January 2023 7-1 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Regulation for electrical installation (Sixteenth Edition) the Institution of Electrical

Engineers, London.

Relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice, or equivalent as approved by the

Engineer.

Standards and Recommendations issued by the International Electro-Technical

Committee.

United Arab Emirates Electricity and Water Regulations and Guide and the general
requirements of the local supply authority.

Chartered Institution of Building Services Guide Book (IES) for external lighting.

CEI

VDE

International Commission of Illumination (CIE) recommendations on lighting.

All Standards and Codes referred to shall be the latest issue at the time of invitation to the
Tender.

Main Power Supply

The Contractor shall contact the supply authority at an early stage of the Contract to make
all the necessary arrangements for the power supply.

The supply for the lighting masts will be from new and/or from existing feeder pillars located
as shown on the Drawings. Power supply to new feeder pillars shall be from new, or existing
SEWA sub stations as shown on the drawings.

The supply will be 3 phase and neutral 380/220V, 50 Hz.

Check of Equipment Supplied by Others

The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment supplied by others forming part of his
installation shall be new and in accordance with the standards required. Any defect must
be reported in writing within seven days of receipt of the equipment in order to allow
changes to be made or replacements instructed by the Engineer.

The following are the general conditions under which the cable shall operate:-

Electrical energy is generated as three phase alternating current at a frequency of 50 +/-

5%.

The working voltage on any of the systems does not normally exceed fluctuations
+/- 10% above the nominal voltage.

The material covered by this specification shall be suitable for operation during the varying
atmospheric and climatic out door conditions in Sharjah.

January 2023 7-2 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/2 CABLES

7/2.1 Distribution Cables

All cables accessories and materials shall be of the best quality and most suitable for local
climatic conditions and shall be such that the cable shall withstand without damage, any
conditions arising from short circuits, switching operations and sudden variations of load
and voltage as may be met under normal working conditions. The cable shall be suitable
to be buried directly in saline soil. The Contractor shall submit for approval a sample cut-
piece of each type of cable and one metre length of any cable size with the required
embossment or with non-erasable print. The materials are to be accompanied by
manufacturers installation instructions. The specification provides for manufacturing,
testing of four core power stranded copper conductor XLPE/SWA/MDPE cable, rated
service voltage 600/1000 volts.

7/2.1.1 Construction

Conductors: The conductors shall be stranded plain annealed copper in accordance with
IEC Publication 228: Conductors of Insulated Cables or BS 6360 : 1981.

The conductors shall comply with the test requirements mentioned at Clause 9 of BS 6360
: 1981 and test certificates from independent authorities / labs. shall be submitted.

Insulation: The insulation shall be XLPE (GP8) complying with table 16 of BS 5467 : 1989
and BS 6899 in addition to IEC Publication : 502:1983 Table III.

Test Certificates from independent approved bodies / authorities to be submitted prior to

delivery to site.

The insulation thickness shall comply with BS 5467 : 1989 Clause 6, Table 16. Core
insulation colours shall be Red-Yellow-Blue-Black.
The insulation shall meet the Test Requirements mentioned in the following standards:-

Section three of IEC Publication 502 : 1983.

Clause 20 of BS 5467 : 1989 relating to compatibility. Clause 5 of BS 6746 : 1984.

BS 6469 : 1984.

BS 6234 : 1987.

Clause 5, Table 5 of BS 5467 : 1989 relating to insulation.

Bedding: The inner sheath shall be black extruded PVC bedding complying with the
requirements of BS 5467 : 1989 and BS 6746:1984 for Type 9 compound or IEC Publication
: 502:1983.

Fillers and Binders: Non hygroscopic synthetic fillers to be applied integrally with the
bedding in accordance with BS 5467 : 1989 Clause 8 and IEC Publication : 502:1983 to
form a compact and circular cable.

The fillers and binders shall comply with the compatibility test given in Clause 20.1 of BS
5467:1989.

Wire Armour : The armour shall consist of a single layer galvanized steel round wires of
appropriate size mentioned in Table 16 of BS 5467 : 1989, and IEC Publication 502:1983.

January 2023 7-3 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The armour wires must cover the entire periphery of the inner sheath as per BS 5467 :
1989.

Armour Tests: Samples of galvanized steel armour wires shall be tested for mechanical
strength and electrical resistance in accordance with BS 5467 : 1989, and BS 1442 : 1969,
respectively.

Testing requirements for zinc coatings on steel wire and for quality requirements shall
comply with BS 443 : 1982. Test Certificates from independent approved
authorities/laboratories shall be submitted prior to delivery to site.

Oversheath: The oversheath shall be MDPE (Medium Density Polyethylene) type TS2
complying with BS 6234 : 1987.

Thickness of oversheath should comply with BS 5467 : 1989, table 16 or IEC Publication
502 : 1983.

7/2.1.2 Testing of Cables

Tests on the complete cable shall be carried out according to the schedules given in Table
5 under Clause 15 of BS 5467 : 1989. Test Certificates from independent approved
authorities / laboratories shall be submitted prior to delivery to site.

7/2.2 Earth Cable

This specification provides for manufacturing and testing of single core stranded copper
conductor PVC cable (non-armoured). The cable, in general, shall comply with BS 6004 :
1984.

7/2.2.1 Construction

Conductor: The conductors shall be stranded plain annealed copper in accordance with
IEC Publication 228: Conductors of Insulation Cables or BS 6360 : 1981.

The conductor shall comply with the test requirements mentioned at Clause 9 of BS 6360
: 1981 and test certificates from independent authorities / laboratories shall be submitted.

Insulation: PVC insulation complying with the requirements of BS 6746 : 1984 for Type 9
compound Radial thickness of insulation and outer diameter according to Table 1 of BS
6004 : 1990.

Compliance to the requirements shall be checked with the appropriate tests listed in Table
8 of BS 6004: 1990. Test Certificates from independent approved bodies/laboratories shall
be submitted prior to delivery to site.

Insulation Colour : Yellow-green.

Cable Identification: The oversheath may be engraved or embossed along two lines with
the following legend, complying with BS 5467 : 1989 or where PVC oversheath is used,
embossing process must be applied.

First Line: “ROADS & TRANSPORT AUTHORITY STREET LIGHTING 600/1000 V”

The letters and figures shall be upright block characters. The maximum size of the
characters shall be 13 mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter

January 2023 7-4 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

of the cable or 5 mm whichever is greater. The gap between the end of one legend and the
beginning of the next shall not be greater than 150 mm.

Second Line: “ XXXX 19XX UAE 4 XXX MM CU 3955 M”

This shall be equally spaced with the first line along the circumference. An identification of
the manufacturer, year, country, number of cores x conductor cross section, type and
metering length shall be marked at regular intervals on the sheath. This shall not affect the
spacing between repetitions of the legend for the voltage designation.

Sealing and Drumming of Cables: Before dispatch, the manufacturer shall cap the ends of
all cables so as to form a seal to prevent the ingress of water during transportation and
installation.

All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer’s seals, labels or other proof of
origin intact. The labels and seals shall be retained for inspection by the Engineer.

Each drum length of cable shall be allotted a distinctive and separate reference number.
This number shall appear on the Test Sheets covering the respective length of cable and
shall also be clearly marked on the cable drum. All cables shall be capped on the drum to
prevent the ingress of water.

7/2.3 Cable Installation

7/2.3.1 General

The arrangements of cables and all methods of installation shall be subject to approval by
the Engineer.

Cables shall be installed in one length from terminal point to terminal point. The radius of
each bend or change in direction of the route of any cable shall not be less than the
minimum stated in paragraph 59 of the current issue of UAE Electricity Regulations and
Guide, the IEE Regulations, the relevant BS specifications, or the cable manufacturer’s
recommendations, whichever is the greater.

Multi-core cables carrying alternating current for three phase working shall be laid strictly
in accordance with the IEE Regulations.

The Contractor shall lay in the trench along with the power cable a single core copper
earthing cable of not less than 16 [Link] diameter for 4 x 16, 4 x 25 and 4 x 35 [Link] dia,
25 [Link] for 4 x 50 [Link] dia. and 35 [Link] for 4 x 70 [Link] dia power cables
respectively. The earthing cable shall run all the way from the feeder pillar to the last
column on each circuit. Looping of the earthing cable shall be made inside each column.

7/2.3.2 Cables Laid Directly in the Ground

The Contractor shall excavate trenches along approved cable routes to the minimum
depths shown on the detailed drawings.

All loose rock, stones and other sharp materials shall be removed from the trench.

The Contractor shall supply washed sieved sand and cable warning tapes. He shall supply
and lay these materials along the trench route as specified in the drawings.

The Contractor shall lay, level and compact clean sand in the bottom of the trench to a
depth of 75 mm before laying the cables. After laying the cables he shall then cover them

January 2023 7-5 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

with a further 75 mm of clean sand, level and compact. The backfilling of the trench,
including the laying of PVC warning tape, shall then be completed in accordance with
Clauses 6/45.2 and 6/45.5

The Contractor shall leave for future use in cable trench loops of one meter cable at the
entry and exit duct of each foundation.

7/2.3.2 Cables Laid In Ducts

Where cables cross under roads and paved areas they shall be drawn into ducts provided
complete with temporary tapering wooden plugs of suitable diameter to prevent the ingress
of soil into the ducts.

7/2.3.3 Cables In Concrete Trenches shall be installed in a support system comprising moulded
reinforced nylon hooks and clamps attached into a heavy gauge galvanized steel channel
fixed to the walls by stainless steel Grade AISI 316 cast-in ragbolts or by stainless steel
AISI 316 threaded studs grouted into percussion-drilled holes with polyester resin anchor
grout.

7/2.3.4 Cables Fixed To Steel Work or Concrete Walls

XLPE insulated cables installed on steel work shall be held in moulded reinforced nylon
hooks and clamps which shall be spaced so as to avoid sagging of cables. In no instance
shall the spacing of the cleats exceed 750 mm.

All cleats and runs of cables shall be arranged in the nearest and least obtrusive manner.

Al steel work required for supporting cable cleats, shall be galvanized and painted as
specified for Miscellaneous Metal work.

7/2.3.5 Cables in Saddles

Where MICC/PVC cables are required to be fixed in saddles, PVC sheathed copper fixing
saddles shall be used. Saddles shall be fixed with stainless steel grade AISI 316 the PVC
saddle sheath which would allow galvanic action between the saddle and its fixing.

Runs shall be neat and free from kinks, care being taken in the routing to avoid risk of
damage to or interference with other equipment.

7/2.3.6 Cable Support Spacing

Spacing of cable supports shall be as laid down for the relevant size and type of the cable
in the UAE Electricity Regulations and Guide. The IEE Regulations and the relevant BS
Specification.

7/2.4 Termination of Cables

All jointing materials shall conform to the relevant requirements of the British Standard/IEC
Standard and the Contractor shall state the types of compounds he proposes to use.

All cables shall be colour-coded in accordance with the IEE Regulations. In the final sub-
circuits, cores shall be identified by the colours red, yellow or blue as appropriate. Tapes
and sleeves will not be permitted.

The Contractor shall allow for at least 300 mm of the cable to be cut off immediately before
the termination is made. This requirement shall apply to all cable ends.

January 2023 7-6 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

All cable ends are to be sealed against the ingress of water, deleterious matter, etc.

7/3 EARTHING

7/3.1 Earthing System

Contractor shall install an earthing system to the last column/mast of every circuit including
all feeder pillars as shown on the Drawings. The earth installation shall in general be in
accordance with British Code of Practice CP 1013, and in accordance with the requirement
of Sharjah Electricity & Water Authority and the UAE Electricity and Water Regulations.

Where the requirements of the UAE Electricity and Water Regulations and Guide differ
from those of the IEE Regulations, the former shall prevail.

Electrodes shall consist of 16 mm minimum diameter hard drawn copper rod driven
vertically to a minimum depth of 3.0 m. Rods shall be complete with hardened steel tip and
driving cap. Rods shall be capable of being extended in lengths, as necessary, by the
provision of permanent screw mechanisms.

A PVC coated earth continuity conductor of 75 mm2 cross-section copper cable shall be
inserted between the earthing stud in the pillar or lighting column and the earth electrode.
The connection of the copper tape cable to the earth electrode shall be made by means of
a suitable conductor clamp. After final acceptance tests, the connection shall be wrapped
in petrolatum impregnated tape.

The earthing conductors shall have a minimum current carrying capacity in accordance
with CP 1013.

Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the summer water table
by minimum of 2 metres.

Earth electrode distance should not exceed 5 metres out of centre of foundation of last
column, and at an agreed location adjacent to the feeder pillar.

7/3.2 Earth Electrode Terminations

Every connection of an earthing leads to an earth electrode shall be made in a pit

measuring approximately 300 mm x 300 mm x 300 mm. The connection shall be soundly
made by use of hard soldered joints, or clamps. All earth electrodes and earthing leads
shall be of copper.

The contractor shall ensure that throughout the installation all metallic parts of all
equipment, other than current-carrying conductors, are bonded to form a continuous path
by way of connecting the armouring (or earth conductors) of the local authority’s cables at
feeder pillars, sub stations, etc.

After installation, the pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on pit.

January 2023 7-7 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/4 TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION

After cable laying and installation of earthing systems the Contractor will perform the
following tests:-

7/4.1 Continuity of Conductors

A test shall be made to verify the continuity of each conductor, including the earth continuity
conductor of each circuit.

7/4.2 Insulation Resistance Test

This test will be applied to each section of cables and will comprise of:

Phase to phase insulation resistance.

Phase to neutral insulation resistance.
Phase to earth insulation resistance.
Neutral to earth insulation resistance.

The resultant insulation resistance for any of the above measurements shall not be less
than 8 to 10 mega ohm per metre cable length and measured with 1000 volt.

For these tests, a voltage not less than 2.5 times the normal voltage of the supply shall be
applied for the measurement of insulation resistance.

7/4.3 Earth Resistance Test

To be performed with specific calibrated earth resistance metre. The resistance of any point
in the earth continuity system of the installation to the main earth electrode shall not exceed
1 ohm, and the resistance to earth at this termination shall not exceed 0.5 ohm.

Inspection certificates, completed by the Contractor shall be generally in accordance with

IEE regulations.

Brand type and calibration report of test equipment used for testing the electrical installation
by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

These calibration reports are to be submitted to the Roads & Transport Authority Street
Lighting Section along with the test results prior to the commencement of the maintenance
period.

Owing to the highly corrosive nature of the sub-soil at certain locations the Sharjah
Electricity and Water Authority shall be consulted regarding the metal to be used for the
earth termination.

7/5 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR MASTS

Concrete for the foundations shall be Class 30 in accordance with Section 4 of these
Specifications.

The cement content shall be increased by 10% if any part of the foundation is below the
water table.

January 2023 7-8 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with shop drawings with supporting design
calculations for approval prior to construction of the foundations.

A sample foundation is to be approved by the Engineer and Roads & Transport Authority
Roads Lighting Section before commencement of the work and the same standard is to be
maintained throughout the contract.

Denso tape shall be placed on the exposed section of the threaded part of the holding down
bolts before casting the foundations. After concreting the bolts shall be thoroughly cleaned,
greased and checked with a template to ensure accurate placement.

7/6 EXISTING STREET LIGHTING FACILITY

Street lighting services which fall within the site of the works which are damaged by the
Contractor shall be repaired/rectified by the Contractor within 24 hours. The Contractor
shall be responsible for obtaining road closure permission where applicable and to provide
necessary material and manpower.

7/7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONVENTIONAL (up to 16 Meters) ROAD LIGHTING

POLES (COLUMNS) & BRACKETS.

7/7.1 General

The road lighting poles are intended to hold more lanterns, and consist of one or more
parts: a post, possibly an extension piece and, if required a bracket. The road lighting poles,
in general, shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649: Part 1 to 8.

7/7.2 Specific

Pole upto a height of 14 meters shall be of one solid piece other than the bracket. Poles of
16 meters height shall be made of not more than two sections.

The light poles shall be suitable for supporting a lantern array as shown on the drawing.

The pole shaft shall have an octagonal cross section, continuity tapered and longitudinally
welded. The welding of the steel lighting pole shall be metal-arc welding complying with BS
5135. No circumferential weld shall be accepted.

All pole shafts shall be provided with substantial rigid flange plate, thickness as per drawing,
with an opening for cable entry.

The plate shall be welded with the shaft with 2 Butt welds from inside and outside. The
weld shall be metal-arc welding complying with BS 5135.

The pole shaft shall be fabricated from a high strength structural steel complying with the
requirements of BS 1840.

The steel used for the fabrication of the shaft shall be of material conforming to BS 4360,
‘weldable structural steels’, Grade 50C, aging resistant and suitable for hot dip galvanizing.
Alternatively, steel conforming to or better than Euronorm 25-72 grade FC 360B shall be
used in accordance with BS 5649: Part 3: 1978.

January 2023 7-9 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The flange plate shall be fabricated from mild steel conforming to BS 4360, Grade 43C.

The brackets shall be fabricated from steel conforming to BS 4360, Grade 43C.

The anchor bolts, shall be fabricated from steel conforming to BS 4360, Grade 50C or
Euronorm 25-72 grade FC 360B as per BS 5649: Part 3: 1978. Each anchor bolt to be
provided with 2 Nos. nuts and 2 nos. washers.

Poles, Flange plates/base plates, doors, brackets, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be
protected against corrosion from inside and outside in compliance with the requirements of
BS 729: 1971 (The minimum average zinc coating weight on one side should not be less
than 714 g/sq. meter) and clause 4.2, 4.3, and 4.4 respectively of BS 5649: Part 4:1978 or
EN 40: Part 4.

Poles with bracket(s) and lantern(s) shall be able to withstand a wind-speed of 160 km/hr.
including gust factor. The maximum stress for a wind-speed of 160 km/hr. shall not exceed
50% of the minimum strength of the material. The design loads shall meet the requirement
of BS 5649: Part 6: 1982.

The maximum horizontal and vertical deflection at the top of a pole, shall not exceed the
value given in Clause 6.5 of BS 5649: Part 7: 1985.

The maximum allowable tolerances for the pole, bracket(s), base plate/flange plate and
anchor bolts shall comply with BS 5649: Part 2: 1978 and EN40: Part 2.

The relevant thickness and dimensions of poles, brackets, doors, base plate/flange plate
and anchor bolts shall be as shown on the drawings.

The poles and vertical parts of the arm bracket(s) shall be constructed, so that the exterior
surfaces of the poles shall be free from protuberances, dents, cracks or other imperfections.
Appropriate wrapping and packing is to be done before shipping to maintain this quality
and to preserve the finish during shipping and storing. Anchor bolts shall be packed in
wooden boxes.

The lighting pole to be adequately reinforced and strengthened at the location of the
inspection compartment opening to compensate for loss in section of the post at this point.

The poles shall have a base compartment with a vandal resistant, dust and waterproof door
for housing the service cut-out. The door opening shall be of adequate dimension as shown
on the drawing for easy access and maintenance.

A galvanized corrosion resistant steel clamp for fixing a wooden board for mounting the
service cut-out shall be welded inside the base compartment. The wooden board must be
provided in the compartment. It shall be easily removed and refixed to steel clamp provided.
The wooden board shall be not less than 20 mm thickness seasoned Marine Ply and be of
the same size as the compartment door and shall be non-hygroscopic and rot resistant.

The base compartments and cable ways shall comply with the requirements of BS: 5649:
Part 5: 1982.

A 30 mm long threaded stud of corrosion resistant steel carrying 2 nuts and 2 washers to
be provided for earth connection. The stud to be located in an easy accessible place near
the inspection cover inside the lighting column (stud diameter to be of M8 size) in
compliance with Clause 5 of BS 5649: Part 5: 1982 or ENO: Part 5.

January 2023 7-10 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The door shall be flush and secured by a positive action lock which forces the door out
when opening. All loose parts of the locking device shall be so arranged that they are held
captive on the door when it is in the open position. All the moving parts of the locking device
shall be stainless steel of Class 316 - material. An approved neoprene sealing gasket shall
be affixed to the door opening to ensure a water-proof and dust proof enclosure to IP 53.
There shall be a stainless steel chain (6 mm), class 316 material strength, between the
pole and the door to ensure the door cannot be lost if incorrectly secured.

The structural design of the poles (columns) shall be tested in accordance with BS 5649:
Part 8: 1982. Test certificates from independent approved authorities/laboratories shall be
submitted along with the tender.

Bolts, nuts and washers shall be tested at DCL for coating thickness as per BS EN ISO
1461 : 1999.

7/7.3 Miscellaneous Requirements:

Offered material shall be supplied exactly as indicated on specifications and drawings.

Shipment will be allowed only after the approval of the free sample given by the Contractor.

Erected poles shall be clean, free from dust, debris and damages.

A test certificate from an independent laboratory shall be submitted confirming the

galvanisation coating weight and component composition, as specified elsewhere.

7/7.4 Design Information

The Contractor shall submit for approval the following design calculations and data prior to
the fabrication of any part of the light poles or brackets.

Shop drawings showing general dimensions of all components of the pole including
mounting bracket(s) for single and multiple luminaries array.

Detailed scaled shop drawings of both pole and luminaries mounting brackets.

Shop drawings giving the details of the fixing and locking system between the pole and the
luminaries mounting bracket.

The total maximum load moments for each section under maximum stresses.

Computation of stresses in the base plate and anchor bolts, under maximum wind load with
maximum number of luminaries in place. Consider the weight and the windage area of each
luminaire to be 12.5 kg and 0.15 sq. metre respectively.

Maximum deflection at the top of the pole, under conditions and wind velocities mentioned
earlier.

Contractor may submit any new treatment method for extra protection against corrosion of
the base plate area and up to the height of 300 mm.

Detail calculations of the necessary strength for anchor bolts to be used should be
submitted for different height of pole.

Means of assembling two section poles (e.g. 16 m poles) shall be indicated in detail.

January 2023 7-11 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Impact resistance calculations at a height of one metre above the base plate of the column.

Maximum tolerable impact calculations to shear the plate from the pole from an impact
point one metre above the flange plate.

Materials specification for each parts of the column.

Contractor shall provide along with the samples, table showing all data and all test results
mentioned under this Clause and indicate deviations from contract specifications, if any.

7/8 STREET LIGHTING LUMINARIES AND FLOOD LIGHTS

7.8.1 General

The luminaries and flood lights shall be designed to receive one high pressure sodium
and/or mercury lamp, with internal control gear necessary for the operation of the lamp.
Luminaries shall operate on 220 Volts AC, +/- 10% at 50 Hz +/- 5%.

The street lighting luminaries and flood lights shall follow the provisions of the latest
versions of the following standards.

1. BS 4533
2. BS 4533 : Part 102 Section 102.3 : 1990
3. BS 1615
4. BS 1470
5. BS EN 60922 : 1991
6. BS EN 60923 : 1991
7. BS 6500 : 1990
8. IEC 568 Part 1 and 2
9. BS 4533 : Part 103 : Section 103.1 : 1988
10. BS 5489 Part 1, 2 & 3 : 1992
11. BS 5225 : Part 1
12. BS 5101 (Part 1) and (Part 2) 13. BS 6193 : 1990
14. BS 3772 : 1990
15. BS 2011 (Part 1.1: 1989 and Part 2.1 all).

7/8.2 Construction

The luminaries and flood lights shall accommodate lamps with cap base E40 size, as
complete with the following assembly.

Injected moulded silicon aluminium alloy casting body in two compartments as per Clause
A2, Section 1.4 of BS 4533 Part 1.

Super purity one piece aluminium reflector of grade S1 of BS 1470 with an anodic coating
of not less than grade AA10 of BS 1615.

Strong very high thermally resistant and mechanically transparent protector. The protective
bowl or diffuser shall be made of toughened glass.

Neoprene gaskets/or high quality felt gaskets silicon.

Stainless steel hinges, mounting clips and fastening bolts, Grade AISI 316.

January 2023 7-12 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Movable porcelain lamp holder with position markings and anti-vibration fixation device.

Complete control gear (as per BS 4782: 1971) mounted on easy removable
equipment mounting board.

Two adjustable cable entries.

A terminal block for the connection of incoming supply cables shall be provided in
luminaries incorporating auxiliaries and shall be situated as close as possible to the point
of entry of the supply cable and shall be readily accessible.

All means of clamping the electrical supply cables shall be provided in the lantern where
necessary to relieve the termination of strain. The cable clamp arrangement shall not
damage the insulation of the cable.

Protective sheath for power supply cable, and expandable nylon cable grip for wiring,
conforming to BS 6500: 1990.

Brass earth terminal set-in housing.

Cover for the control gear compartment shall be same as that indicated in para 2 of this
Clause.

The lamp caps and the lamp holders shall meet the requirements of BS 5101 (Part 1) and
BS 5101 (Part 2) respectively.

7/8.3 Mechanical Requirements

Luminary shall be with separate compartments for the optical system and for the control
gear.

The tightness of the optical compartment shall be IP65, according to the I.E.C. 598- 1
standard (International Electrotechnical Commission). This tightness degree shall be
achieved by the use of neoprene gaskets or silicon gasket. The design of the luminary shall
be such that the sealing gasket will never be exposed to sunlight or to the luminous flux
emitted by the lamp.

The tightness of the control gear compartment shall be IP54 or better, according to the IEC
598-1 standard

The opening of the control gear compartment shall allow a complete and easy visual check
of all electrical parts and shall be suitable for easy access and easy maintenance.

The mechanical strength of the body its accessories and the protector of the luminary shall
be sufficient to withstand without any damage the drop test as per BS 2011 Part 1.1: 1989
& Part 2.1 Ea.

The luminary shall be able to withstand without any damage a wind speed of 160 Km/h
including gust factor.

Special precautions shall be given to the choice of materials which shall be able to resist
without any damage or aging or alteration in its structural or physical properties, the severe
Gulf climatic conditions, as indicated under Clause 7/19, in addition, to the heat emitted by
the lamp.

Fixing shall be of an effective locking means using stainless steel bolts.

January 2023 7-13 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The weight of the luminary including protector cover and control gear shall not exceed 15
kg.

The luminary in general shall comply with the requirements mentioned at BS 2011.

All fixings which carry the weight of the lantern and internal accessories shall be provided
with suitable locking devices to prevent the dislodgement of any part of the lantern by
vibration either in service or in maintenance. Compliance shall be checked as per BS 2011
Part 1.1: 1989, and Part 2.1 Ea to Ef.

7/8.4 Electrical Requirements

Provision for one lamp for each lantern shall be made. The electrical accessories such as
ballasts, ignitors and capacitors shall be prewired and preassembled on metallic supports
that are fixed into the control gear compartment.

Special care shall be taken to allow easy maintenance and quick replacement of the
accessories. They shall be bolted (and not riveted) on the removable supports. The
supports shall be laid down in the compartment and in no case shall be suspended by bolts,
for security reasons and maintenance facilities.

All electrical accessories shall be able to withstand, in continuous operation and without
any damage, the temperature existing inside the control compartment, in an ambient
temperature of 50 degree C. Cable connections to the lamp holder within the lantern shall
be of the heat resistant type with silicon or glass fibre or other approved insulation. The
arrangement shall comply with BS 4533.

The cable feed terminals and the earth screw shall be fixed inside the control gear
compartment. A cable holder shall be mounted near the terminals. An isolating conduit shall
be fitted to protect the incoming feeder cable. The arrangement in general shall comply
with BS 4533.

A separate set of control gear shall be provided for the lam p comprising one choke
associated with one capacitor, one ignitor and starter (instant type) if any. The control gear
should be encapsulated in an approved enclosure conforming to IP 54 tightness. Terminals
of all ballasts, capacitors, ignitors (if any) and starters shall be shrouded. The ballast shall
be designed to operate the lamp and control it continuously in ambient temperatures
ranging from 0 degree C to 80 degree C.

The ignitors shall be solid state fully electronic, non-timed, multi-pulse, superimposed,
pulse type which shall not require the use of tapped ballasts nor be dependent on external
capacitors. The ignitor shall not produce a high voltage pulse across the ballast windings,
and shall have screwed terminals. The ignitor shall be fully encapsulated impervious to the
ingress of moisture, and shall have a temperature rating not less than 90 degree C.

The choke shall be of reactor, non-tapped and tropicalised of Class H Insulation and
Vacuum impregnated with an unsaturated polyester resin of not less than thermal class H
(180 degree C. in accordance with IEC 85:1984). The capacity of the choke should be such
as to keep the illumination of the lamp within the design limit. The capacitor shall be of the
diphenyl impregnated type and shall be in a leak proof metal container fitted with an internal
discharge resistor. The permitted operating temperature of the capacitor shall be marked
on its case and shall be 85 deg. C.

January 2023 7-14 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The capacitors shall have value sufficient to raise the power factor of the complete system
to 0.85 or better. Each lamp shall operate using only one choke and one capacitor. Any
combination of two or more capacitors to have the equivalent value of capacitance will not
be accepted. Choke and capacitors shall comply with the latest BS EN 60922: 1991 & BS
EN 60923: 1991.

The control gear shall be supplied by the lantern manufacturer and shall be incorporated
in a separate compartment in a way that heat emitted by lamp is not conducted or
transferred to the gear components. It shall also be distinctly marked with the month and
year of manufacture, in addition, to the standard marking.

The lantern shall have a screw type lamp holder. The lead at the higher potential above
earth shall be connected to the centre contact.

The operating temperature and thermal endurance characteristics shall conform to Clause
17, Section 2.7, Part 2 of BS 4533.

7/8.5 Photometrical Requirements:

The lamp fitting shall be adjustable to allow the luminous flux distribution to be adapted to
the geometrical installation conditions.

The adjusting devices of the lamp shall be sufficiently sturdy, and designed in a way it
cannot be disturbed, during its normal life time (vibrations) or during maintenance
operations (lamp replacement).

This device shall have permanent marking so that the lamp position recommended by the
manufacturer can be easily realized.

The photometrical classification of the luminaries, according CIE Nr. 34 publication shall
incorporate the following characteristics, depending on the lamp position adjustment:

- Longitudinal flux control: Throw - intermediate or long

- Transverse flux control : Spread - Narrow or average
- Glare control : SLI - Greater than 3.

7/8.6 Photometrical Performance Requirement

Computer calculation relating to illuminance and luminance results detailed hereinafter

shall be submitted. The overall luminance uniformity ratio (UO) & longitudinal luminance
uniformity ratio (UI) which will be achieved on roadway, values of glare control (G),
threshold increment (TI) and specific Lantern Index (SLI) wherever applicable.

For the luminance calculation, the road surface to be considered is the R4 type with QQ =
0.08 according to CIE Standards.

The calculations shall be performed in accordance with CIE Nr. 30 publication and shall be
based on the data given in the drawings. These computer calculations shall achieve the
results mentioned in the drawings.

These results are to be achieved taking into consideration a total maintenance factor of 0.8
(dust depreciation factor x lamp lumen depreciation factor).

If possible to have more spacing the computer calculations shall determine the maximum
spacing of poles to be adopted to achieve the above results.

January 2023 7-15 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/8.7 Documents to be submitted with the offer

The manufacturer shall supply following technical documentation and information for each
type of luminaries for the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer does not
absolve the Contractor of the contractual obligations regarding the performance and
compliance to the specification requirements.

Catalogue sheet of the luminary

Detailed construction drawing of the luminary Polar diagram of luminous intensity in road
way vertical plane and transverse vertical plane.

Utilisation factor curve for actual inclination of luminary. Isolux diagram for actual inclination
of luminary.
Intensity table, in the C-gamma co-ordinates recommended by CIE Nr. 27 Publication.

Computer calculation printout showing the illumination and luminance levels. Longitudinal
Uniformity Ratio (UI), overall Uniformity Ratio (UO), specific lantern index (SLI), glare
control mark (G) and threshold increment (TI).

Tightness test certificate conforming to IP65 protection degree for the optical compartment
of the luminaries and the IP54 protection degree for the control gear compartment. This
test certificate shall be issued by an independent official laboratory.

Shock test certificate confirming the resistance of the body to an impact energy as per
Clause 4.4 Section 1.4 of BS 4533, Part 1. This test certificate shall be issued by an
independent official laboratory.

Wind resistance certificate confirming that no damage will occur to the luminary at winds
up to 160 km/hr. for a short period. This certificate shall be issued by an independent official
laboratory.

Total weight of the luminary (with lamp and control gear)

Power factor of one complete luminary (under normal working conditions) Total electric
consumption of the luminary, including control gear losses. Rated lumen output of the lamp
under nominal conditions.
Depreciation curve of the luminous flux with burning hours. Luminous flux variation with the
main voltage
Make and type of ballast and capacitors separately with their electrical characteristics, e.g.
Impedance, power factor, Temperature rise (t), max. temperature (tw) and power losses.

The Contractor shall submit with his tender full details of areas using the same type of
luminaries in the Middle East and Gulf Area.

A computer program according to CIE standard on USB Flash Drive should be supplied in
the matrix program for the offered luminary.

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval dimensional drawings of the control
gear arrangements showing the exact position of chokes and capacitors within the lantern.

7/8.8 Materials to be submitted with the offer

The Contractor shall submit along with the offer 5 sets of luminaries of each type to equip
5 mast for examination and photometrical test on site.

January 2023 7-16 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The materials to be accompanied by manufacturer’s assembling and erection instruction.

The contractor shall carry out site testing after installation work is completed for photometric
performance in accordance with the contract specification requirements. All the test shall
be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. The luminance measuring device shall be
provided by the Engineer.

The final acceptance of any submitted offer shall be strictly depending on the photometric
and electrical performance test on site.

7/9 SPECIFICATIONS: LOW VOLTAGE FLEXIBLE POWER CABLES FOR

CONVENTIONAL LIGHTING COLUMNS & LUMINARIES

7/9.1 General:

The following specifications are for manufacturing and testing of circular, flexible, copper
conductor, confirming to harmonized code H05 VV-F, 300/500 Volts grade, PVC insulated,
sheathed cable rated for 70 deg. C. as per BS 6500 Table 16, which is to be used inside
the lighting columns between luminaries and service Cut-out.

7/9.2 Conductors:

The conductors shall be stranded plain/tinned annealed copper in accordance with BS

6360: 1981 Class 5 flexible conductor.

The conductor shall comply with the test requirements mentioned in BS 6500 : 1990 and
test certificates from independent authorities/labs. shall be submitted.

7/9.3 Insulation

The insulation shall be PVC insulation Type T12 complying with BS 6500: 1990 suitable for
70 deg. C.

Test Certificates from independent approved bodies/authorities to be submitted with the

offer as evidence.

The insulation thickness shall comply with BS 6500 : 1990 Table 16.

Core insulation colours of each core shall be as per Table 16 of BS 6500: 1990. The
insulation shall meet the Test Requirements mentioned in BS 6500.

7/9.4 Sheath

Type: The sheath shall be PVC type TM2 complying with the latest edition of BS 6500.

Thickness: Thickness of sheath should comply with Table 16 of BS 6500: 1990.

Testing: Tests on the complete cable shall be carried out according to BS 6500: 1990. Test
Certificates from independent approved authorities/laboratories shall be submitted with the
offer as evidence.

Cable Identification: Cable identification shall be according to BS 6500: 1990.

January 2023 7-17 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/10 SPECIFICATION FOR MID-HINGED HIGH MAST

7/10.1 Mid-Hinged Mast

All masts and brackets shall be designed to meet the wind loading requirements of British
Standard CP3 Chapter V, Part 2: 1972, and ILE Technical Report No. 7. The design must
consider wind velocities of 160 kph. including a gust factor of 1.3.

The steel used for the construction of the mast and bracket shall have a tensile strength of
no less than 4450 kg/[Link]. to BS 4360 and all welding shall be in accordance with BS
5135.

All manufacturer’s certificates shall be supplied with respect to the steel used in the mast.

The mast shaft shall have an octagonal cross-section continuously tapered and
longitudinally welded. No circumferential weld shall be acceptable, except at the mid-
hinged point.

The high mast shall be designed to accommodate a set of four luminaries and associated
brackets for achieving the luminance level requirement as specified elsewhere.

A door opening shall be provided in the base of the mast of adequate dimensions to permit
clear access to equipment namely Control Gear, and Cut-outs complete with a close fitting
weather-proof door having a heavy duty lock. The door seam tightness shall conform to IP
54 standard. The opening shall be adequately reinforced to maintain the strength of the
mast.

The base flange shall be free of laminations and the welded connection to the mast shall
fully develop the strength of the section. The base plate shall be manufactured as per the
loading requirement or as specified elsewhere.

Inside each mast there shall be a galvanized steel earthing bolt with a diameter of M8.

The entire mast and bracket shall be hot-dip galvanized internally and externally according
with BS 729: 1971.

All component parts or fasteners shall also receive the same hot-dip galvanized treatment,
threaded components centrifugally spun to remove local excess of zinc.

Galvanizing shall be performed in such a manner as will provide a minimum coating weight
of 714 gr/sq. m of surface (minimum 100 microns DFT).

Coating weight shall be determined by a suitable magnetic or electronic measuring device.

However, in case of dispute, the Engineer may direct that a stripping test in accordance
with BS 729 be carried out.

The mast shall be of a suitable dimension to accommodate the control gear and cut-out in
the bottom compartment.

The spindle of mid-hinged mast shall be stainless steel grade AISI 316.

All bolts, nuts, locking screws and door chain shall be stainless steel Grade AISI 316.

January 2023 7-18 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Copper braid for electrical conductivity to be provided between fixed and movable sections.

The mast shall have a special arrangement in order to impose no stress or pulling force
upon the mast internal cabling.

At mid-hinged point there shall be arrangements to prevent ingress of water, moisture and
dust (Minimum IP54).

Stainless steel rod of grade AISI 316 shall be provided for slip joint adjustment.

The cables support plate at mid-hinged point shall be provided to secure the lantern wire
to eliminate any stress on power cables.

Provision of securing the movable part with the fixed part in lowered position shall be made
by using hooks and rope.

All calculations showing the maximum forces encountered in the mast while lowering or
raising the mast to be submitted.

All calculations showing the maximum forces on the foundation and the mast holding down
bolts while lowering or raising the mast to be submitted.

All calculations showing the forces encountered by the wind loading to be submitted.

All calculations showing the max top flexation under given wind load and the forces
occurring on the holding down bolts to be submitted.

All calculations showing the maximum forces and pressure encountered by the mast raising
and lowering equipment during operation to be submitted.

Details of the power supply cable tension release facility in the top of the mast to be
submitted.

The Contractor shall depute a Technician at site to demonstrate the assembly procedures.

The mast shall be hinged approximately midway above the base so that it may be
raised/lowered by means of externally operated rope and counter weight. The rope shall
be portable and to be easily detachable for use with other high masts.

The Contractor shall afford every facility for the inspection of the mast and shall carry out
tests on materials and welds as may be instructed by the Engineer and the Employer.
Materials or workmanship which are not in accordance with the Specification shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and risk.

7/10.2 Luminaries Specification

The luminaries of the mid-hinged high mast shall be as per Clause 7/8 or as specified
elsewhere.

January 2023 7-19 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/11 LOW VOLTAGE FLEXIBLE POWER CABLE FOR MID-HINGED HIGH MASTS

7/11.1 General

Low Voltage cable shall be used inside the high mast between the luminaries and service
cut-out. The following specifications are for manufacturing and testing of 3 core x 4 [Link]
flexible, copper conductor, 450/750 Volts grade, rubber insulated, sheathed cable rated for
85 deg. C as per the below mentioned standards:

IEC 245 Part 4

VDE 082 BS 6007: 1983.

The maximum and the minimum overall diameter of the cable shall be 16 mm and 13 mm
respectively.

7/11.2 Conductors

The conductors shall be stranded plain/tinned annealed copper in accordance with IEC
publication 228: Conductors of Insulation Cables or BS 6460: 1981 or VDE 0295 Clause 5.

The Conductor shall comply with the test requirements mentioned in BS 6007: 1983 and
test certificates from independent authorities/labs. shall be submitted.

7/11.3 Insulation

The insulation shall be rubber insulation complying with BS 6007: 1983 suitable for 85 deg.
C.

Test Certificate from independent approved bodies/authorities to be submitted with the offer
as evidence.

The insulation thickness shall comply with BS 6007: 1983 Clause 11.3, table 12 and the
applications mentioned in the same standard or as per VDE 0281/4.85 and IEC 245.

Core insulation colours of each core shall be as per Clause 6 of BS 6007: 1983 or to VDE
0293.
The insulation shall meet the Test Requirements in the following standards.

a) BS 6007: 1983
b) IEC 245 Part 4
C) VDE: 0282

7/11.4 Fillers & Binders

Non hygroscopic synthetic fillers to be applied integrally with the bedding in accordance
with BS 6007: 1983 Clause 7 to form a compact and circular cable.

7/11.5 Oversheath

Type: The oversheath shall be rubber type EM2 complying with the latest edition of BS
6007 : 1983.

Thickness: Thickness of oversheath should comply with Clause 9.3 of BS 6007 : 1983.

January 2023 7-20 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/11.6 Testing: Tests on the complete cable shall be carried out according to the schedules given
under Clause 12, 13 and 14 of BS 6007: 1983. Test Certificates from independent approved
authorities/laboratories shall be submitted with the offer as evidence.

7/11.7 Cable Identification: Cable identification shall be according to BS 6007: 1983.

7/12 CROWN HIGH MAST

7/12.1 Lighting Requirements

The general lighting requirements shall be as set out on the drawings.

The numbers, locations, types and aiming angles of luminaries and high masts shown on
the drawings are indicative only. The final design shall be determined by the Contractor
from the manufacturer’s photometric data. The calculations shall be submitted to the
Engineer in the form of drawings of the roadway system, overprinted with pole/mast
positions, showing illuminance levels, and overall illuminance uniformity.

For the luminance calculation, the road surface to be considered is the R4 type with Q0 =
0.08 according to CIE standards.

The calculations shall be performed in accordance with CIE Publication No. 30 regarding
the grid of calculated points and of observer positions. Computer calculations shall
demonstrate the achievement of the following minimum lighting criteria.
Average illuminance level: greater than 50 lux Overall uniformity ratio
Uo = L min/L av: not less than 0.5

These results shall be achieved taking into consideration a total maintenance factor (dust
depreciation factor x lamp lumen depreciation factor) of 0.80.

7/12.2 Flood Lighting Masts

7/12.2.1 General: Lighting mast height shall be as shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere.
Masts shall be equipped with a mobile crown arrangement.

7/12.2.2 Structure and Construction:

The mast shall not be more than 3 and 3 sections, other than the luminaires carriage for 30
and 40 meters high masts respectively.

The mast shall be suitable for supporting the array of lanterns.

The column shaft shall have a polygonal cross-section, continuously tapered and
longitudinally welded. The welding of the steel column shall be metal-arc welding complying
to the provision of BS 5135. No circumferential weld shall be accepted.

The shaft shall be manufactured and fabricated from a high strength structural mild steel
plate, single thickness without laminations complying with the requirements of BS 1840,
cut and folded to form a polygonal section.

The shaft shall be delivered in separate sections to be assembled on site by slip-on joint
system.

January 2023 7-21 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The steel used for the fabrication of the shaft shall be of material complying to BS 4360,
weldable structural steel, grade 50C, aging resistant and suitable for hot dip galvanising.

All mast shafts shall be provided with substantial rigid flange plate, with an opening for
cable entry.

The plate shall be welded to the shaft with 2 Butt welds-to one from inside and the other
from outside. The weld shall be metal-arc welding complying with the requirements of BS
5135.

The luminary’s carriageway and the anchor bolts shall be fabricated from steel confirming
to BS 4360, grade 50C. Anchor bolt to be provided with 3 Nos. nuts & 2 Nos. washers.

Mast with luminaire carriage and mobile ring and lantern shall be able to withstand a wind-
speed of 160 km/hr. including gust factor. The design loads shall meet the requirement of
BS 5649: Part 6: 1982.

The Mast and vertical parts of the arm brackets shall be constructed straight. The exterior
surfaces of the mast shall be free from protuberances, dents, cracks or other imperfections.

The lighting mast to be adequately reinforced and strengthened at the location of the
inspection compartment opening to compensate for loss in section of the mast at this point.

The masts shall have a base compartment with a vandal resistant, dust and water proof
door.

The door opening shall be provided in the base of the mast and it shall be of adequate
dimension to allow clear and easy access to the equipment mounted therein. The door shall
be fitted with a heavy duty lock. All the moving parts of the locking device shall be stainless
steel Grade AISI 316. An approved reference sealing gasket shall be affixed to the door
opening to ensure a water proof and dust proof enclosure to IP 53. The base plate shall be
free from laminations and shall be fully welded to the mast base.

The structural design of the masts shall be tested in accordance with BS 5649: Part 8:
1982. Test certificates from independent approved bodies shall be submitted for approval
by the Engineer.

Assembly of masts shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

7/12.2.3 Hot Dip Galvanising:

The poles, flange plates, base plate, doors, luminaire carriage, anchor bolts, nuts and
washers shall be protected against corrosion from inside and outside.

The operation shall consist of dipping the steel parts into a zinc bath at a temperature of
450 deg. C. after completion of the treated comprising of degreasing, pickling, rinsing,
fluxing and drying separately. The galvanising shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of BS 729 : 1971 (The minimum average zinc coating weight on one side
shall not be less than 715 g/m2).

Masts shall be finished and painted as specified elsewhere.

7/12.3 Lowering and Raising Devices

The lowering raising device with latching mechanism allows for load to be removed from
hoisting unit when luminaries ring is latched in.

January 2023 7-22 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The lowering and raising system shall consist of, but not limited to:

- Driving Head
- Mobile Ring
- Hoisting Unit

7/12.3.1 Driving Head

The driving head shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel (refer to 7/12.2.3 above) and
shall be fixed to the top of the plate by a flange secured to the most top by at least 6 bolts.

The driving head shall be pre-assembled and tested in the factory prior to shipment and
supplied complete with 3 stainless steel ropes (Grade AISI 316) and associated double-
pulley assemblies and electrical power cable. Each steel rope and power cable shall have
their own separate arm, housing the pulleys made of stainless steel, grade AISI 316
mounted on self-lubricating ball bearings and seamless axles.

The housing cable, 3 units, shall be made of stainless steel grade AISI 316. Each cable
shall have a safety factor of not less than 5 times the safe working load of winch. The
hoisting cables shall be of three connectors allowing regulations from ground.

Three latching sleeves assuming correct positioning, entering and locking of the mobile
part of the crown when raised and locked in final position shall be provided.

The locking system shall take up vibration free all horizontal and vertical loads of the mobile
part of the crown even when exposed under the most severe climatic conditions.

The top of the driving head shall be covered with a canopy made of 3 mm thickness
aluminium sheet.

The latching and unlatching operations shall be regulated by two limit switches located at
the base of the mast, easily reachable through the inspection door.

The mobile part is fastened in raised position to the fixed part of the head gear by means
of 3 positive latching system protected against corrosion, and the suspension cables shall
be tension free. Both latching system and the suspension cables to be approved by the
Engineer.

All bolts, nuts and washers of the pole shall be made of stainless steel grade AISI 316.

The electrical power cable shall be round, extra flexible, 500/750 Volt grade, with EPR
insulation and HOFR outer sheath rated for 85 deg. C.

They shall be capable of withstanding the mechanical stresses produced by the anchoring
and pulley system and shall be suitably rated to carry the maximum electrical loading. Outer
sheath shall be suitable for exposure to strong sun-light and a marine environment, and
shall be coloured black.

Arrangements shall be provided to ensure that the power cables and stainless steel wire
ropes are separated before passing over their respective pulleys, and close- fittings guides
shall protect the pulleys to prevent ropes and cables leaving the pulley grooves.

January 2023 7-23 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/12.3.2 Mobile Ring:

The mobile ring shall be fabricated and coated against corrosion according to the pole
specification. It shall be complete with lanterns and brackets to suit lighting design
requirements consisting of flood lights and control gear boxes.

During lowering and raising operations the mobile ring shall smoothly and without any
sideward movement/rotation slide along the shaft with 3 groups of plastic rollers at 120
degrees.

All bolts, nuts and washers of mobile ring shall be made of stainless steel grade AISI 316.

7/12.3.3 Hoisting Unit:

Suitable numbers of drum winches, with base flanges for mounting on holding down bolts
shall be fitted in the bottom of mast for operation by hand and power-tool, for raising and
lowering the mobile ring. The winch shall be fitted with a friction winch clutch, ratchet and
pawl, and the handle. Spindle-plate shall have a safety pin- locking device. Winches shall
be totally enclosed to exclude dust and blown sand from gears and oil baths.

The mobile ring shall be raised and lowered by means of remote control push button panel
box 10M away. The control box shall conform to IP 55 heavy duty anticorrosion, protected
against U.V. of sunlight, and shall have proper locking arrangements.

Winch power tools shall be portable multi-speed, reversible units incorporating a torque
limiting device. They shall be supplied with a flexible supply cable and a remote control
switch to allow winches to be operated from a distance of 10 meters. A supporting system
shall be provided to securely locate power tools during operation. Power tools shall be rated
to raise the crown from ground to mast top in not more than 15 minutes.

One spare winch power tool set shall be handed over to the Engineer on completion of the
contract.

7/12.4 Electrical Equipment

The driving head shall be designed to accommodate a round power cable. Plugs and
sockets shall comply with IEC304-1, and IEC 309-2.

Internal control panels within mast bases shall incorporate a main circuit breaker for
isolation of main power, and outgoing MCBs for the rising multi-core cables. They shall
have the facility for terminating incoming power cables and shall be fitted with weatherproof
plug and socket arrangement to allow connection of the rising multi- core cables. Control
panels shall be complete with a 16A, 220V weatherproof socket and ELCB of appropriate
rating to supply the winch power tool. Control panels shall receive protective treatment as
specified and shall be sealed to IP 54 of BS 5490.

On the mobile ring a weather proof (IP 65 grade of protection) distribution box made of 3
mm. thick aluminium sheet, housing the terminal clamps and a powered socket with cable
for flood lights, ground test shall be provided. The protective treatment of the distribution
box shall be as specified elsewhere for other panels.

All cable glands shall be made of brass conforming to BS 6121.

The contractor shall supply and install 2.5 mm2, 3 core butyl rubber insulated and sheathed
flexible cords to be pulled through flexible conduits for the connections between terminal
boxes, control-gear boxes and individual flood light fittings.

January 2023 7-24 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

An earthing terminal shall be provided within the mast base, located so that easy access
for connection/disconnection of the copper earthing tape can be achieved.

7/12.5 Warning Labels

To avoid wrong operations the supplier shall put inside the inspection door cover warning
labels in Arabic and English language.

7/12.6 Miscellaneous Requirements

Offered material shall be supplied exactly as indicated on specifications and drawings.

Shipment will be allowed only after the approval of the Engineer.

On completion of installation, exposed nuts and bolts heads of holding down bolts shall be
capped with grease filled UPVC caps.

7/12.7 Design Information

The Contractor shall submit for approval the following, design parameters, calculations and
data prior to the fabrication of any part of the masts or brackets.

General dimensions of all components of the mast include mounting mobile ring and
multiple luminaries array.

Detailed scale drawings of both mast and luminaries mounting brackets.

Details of the fixing and locking system between the mast and the luminaries mounting
bracket.

The total maximum load moments for each section under maximum stresses.

Computation of stresses in the base plate and anchor bolts under maximum wind
load with maximum number of luminaries in place.

Maximum deflection at the top of the mast, under conditions and wind velocity mentioned
earlier.

Supplier may submit any new treatment method for extra protection against corrosion
of the base plate area and up to the height of 300 mm.

Detail calculations of the necessary strength for anchor bolts to be used. Means of
assembling of mast’s sections shall be indicated in details.
Impact resistance calculations at a height of one meter above the base plate of the column.

Maximum tolerable impact calculations to shear the plate from the mast and from an impact
point one meter above the flange plate.

Materials specification for each parts of the column.

7/12.8 Test Certificate

The Contractor to provide with each mast a detailed test certificate:

- for mast shaft materials and accessories;

January 2023 7-25 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

- for the electrical power supply system;

- for the hoist system;
- for galvanization coating weight and component composition; and
- for anchor bolts, nuts and washers for both material and galvanization.

7/12.9 Important Note

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written guarantee that the hoisting and
latching systems used in the mast shall work maintenance free for a period of at least 20
years from date of commissioning.

The Engineer reserves the right to reclaim from Contractor any cost involved for repair or
replacement of any item related to the hoisting and latching system used during the twenty
years period.

7/12.10 Flood Light Luminaries Specification

The flood lights shall be of 1 x 1000 Watt high pressure sodium lamp, with control gear
housed in a separately mounted 3 mm aluminium powder coated whether-proof box on the
frame, necessary for the operation of the lamp. Luminaries shall operate on 220 Volts. AC,
+/- 10% at 50 Hz +/- 5%. The flood lights shall be as per the requirements of specification
of Clause 7/8.

Complete control gear (as per BS 4782: 1971) mounted on easy removable equipment
mounting board housed in a separately mounted weather-proof box on the frame. Each set
of control gear shall be separately fused at the mast head with 20 amp MCB. The control
gear boxes shall be made of 3 mm thick aluminium sheet and shall receive epoxy powder
coating on both inside and outside surfaces. The box door shall have polyimide type hinges
and two Alen key type locking devices made of stainless steel grade AISI 316.

An approved locking device shall be provided with luminaries to allow this to be locked in
its set position.

7/13 AVIATION LIGHT

Aviation lights to be provided and installed to the top of high mast of higher than 30 meters.
The aviation light is to be in accordance with the Civil Aviation requirements and shall be
permanently powered.

The lights are to be fixed to the mobile ring and positioned so luminaries can be easily
replaced.

7/14 LIGHTING BENEATH OVER-BRIDGES

General: Area flood lighting shall be provided under the flyovers. Flood lights shall be
positioned as designed by the Contractor to the requirements of Specification Clause 7.17,
and to the Engineer’s approval.

Floor Light Luminaries: Flood lighting luminaries shall be of the high pressure sodium type
as per the flood lighting specification mentioned elsewhere and with internally housed
control-gear with appropriate lens and reflector. Each luminaire shall house appropriate

January 2023 7-26 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Lamp wattage associated control gear and power factor correction capacitor to achieve the
luminance level required beneath flyovers.

Control of under-bridge flood lights shall be from the nearest road lighting control panel.
Cabling to luminaries shall be concealed in ducts and conduits cast into structures, with
suitable junction boxes at changes of direction.

7/15 GANTRY SIGNS ILLUMINATION

7/15.1 Luminaries and Conduits

Lighting luminaries for the illumination of gantry signs shall be high pressure mercury and
comply with the requirements of the relevant Clauses of BS 4533; Section 102.3 and 103.1.
Other requirements will comply with the specification for Flood Lighting described
elsewhere, and internally housed control-gear. Each luminaire shall house a 1 x 400 watt
high pressure mercury lamp.

Wiring to lighting luminaries shall be by means of PVC cables in a GI pipe. GI pipe shall be
securely fixed to structural steel work by distance saddles and a flexible conduit from GI
pipe to luminaire.

Final connections to lighting luminaries shall be carried out by short lengths of EPR
insulated, butyl-sheathed flexible cable. The interface between the PVC cable system and
the flexible cable shall be a weather-proof 3-pin socket outlet and plug.

7/15.2 Control of Gantry Sign Luminaries

Gantry sign luminaries shall be controlled by road lighting control panel. The control box
for each gantry shall be mounted on the steel structure and shall be complete with all
electrical accessories required. Main power supply shall be taken from the nearest feeder
pillar by XLPE/SWA/MDPE cabling as specified elsewhere.

7/15.3 Gantry Sign Lighting Requirements

The gantry sign lighting shall be as per CIE No. 35 (TC-4.6) 1978, and shall have a
maintained average luminance of 180 candelas per square meter (for white letters) and the
ratio of the maximum luminance of one colour in a specified area to the minimum luminance
in the same area shall not exceed.

- 2.5 for the inner zone of each area with a definite colour;
- 5 for the outer zone of each area with a definite colour; and
- 8 over the total area of the sign face.

Whereas the inner area shall be that area bounded by a similar rectangle of length and
height equal to 70% of the overall length and height of the rectangular area located
symmetrically within the sign.

The maintained average luminance value are to be based upon the total of lantern dirt
depreciation factor and a lamp lumen depreciation factor of 0.65.

January 2023 7-27 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/16 LAMPS

The lamps required shall comply with the following

Table 7.16.1 - Street Lighting Lamps

Type Power into Total Luminous Lamp Life Time hr.

Lamp (Watt) Flux (1m) Base ([Link])
High 125 6,400 E27 16,000
Pressure 250 15,500 E40 16,000
Mercury 400 23,000 E40 16,000
Vapour
High 70 7,000 E27 24,000
Pressure 150 16,000 E40 24,000
Sodium 250 2700 E40 24,000
1000 48,000 E40 24,000
13,000 E40 24,000
Rapid
Start 58 5,200 G13 12,000
HG TLD
Tube
Light

Remarks:

1. The high pressure mercury vapour lamps shall be milky white colour.
2. The high pressure sodium lamps shall be clean tubular type and golden white
colour.
3. The tube light specified above shall be white/33 colour, 5 feet long and 26 mm
diameter.
4. Lamp thread: Tin copper or chrome plated copper.
5. Operating Voltage : 220 Volts +/- 10% at 50 Hz +/- 5%
6. At half life, the maintained luminous flux shall not be less than 75% of the initial
luminous flux.
7. The high pressure mercury vapour lamp shall conform to BS 3677: 1982.
8. The high pressure sodium vapour lamp shall conform to BS 6193: 1988.
9. Failure rate shall not exceed 3% in the first 100 burning hours.
10. Test Certificate from approved independent laboratories shall be submitted along
with the tender documents.

7/17 SPECIFICATION FOR STREET LIGHTING SERVICE CUTOUT

7/17.1 Application

The street lighting service cut-out are required to be installed at the base of columns (poles)
for protecting the luminaries fixed at the top of the columns against short circuits.

7/17.2 Rating

The service cut-out shall be rated at 380V/220V, 50 Hz. operation, at 50 deg. C amb. temp.
and 95% relative humidity.

January 2023 7-28 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/17.3 Standard

The street lighting service cut-out shall conform to the provisions of BS 5486 (Part 1)
- 1977 or IEC 439.

7/17.4 Construction

The typical arrangement of a street lighting services cut-out along-with dimensions and
materials of construction are shown in the drawings.

7/17.4.1 The street lighting service cut-out shall consist of:

- Housing with cover

- Fuse carriers of required numbers
- 4 Terminal Blocks, R, Y, B, N
- 2 Brass cable glands with shrouds, for sizes mentioned in the BOQ
- 1 Knock-out for Brass cable glands, 3 c x 10 [Link] - 4 Nylon cable glands with
shrouds of best quality, 3c x 4 [Link]
- 1 N-terminal, 6-way 10 [Link]
- 1 E-terminal, 6-way 10 [Link]

Fuse Holder shall be DIN rail mounted fully insulated and capable to accept
cylindrical H.R.C. fuses of suitable rating with fuse dimensions of 10 x 38 mm.

7/17.4.2 Terminal Assembly:

4 cable terminals (3 phase and 1 neutral) shall be fixed to a high quality phenolic fibre
board, or glass fibre reinforced insulator. The dielectric strength of the insulator shall not
be less than 2 Kv/mm.

The flexural strength of the insulator shall be not less than 1000 kg/cm2 the insulator
material to be in accordance to DIN 7735 type 2081 or similar approved.

Each cable terminal assembly shall be capable of accepting 2 Nos. sector shaped copper
cables of not less than 35 mm2 each.

Each incoming and outgoing terminal shall be bolted to an electrolytically tinned

H.C.H.D. copper bar of 40 x 5 mm cross section.

Each cable terminal shall have the provision to connect and to tap off a lugged 4 mm2
phase coloured wire of not less than 10 cm. long.

The tap of wire shall be bolted on to the main terminal by using a M5 x 15 mm slit head
screw with spring washer.

1 No. lugged tap of wire in phase colour to be provided and fitted on each terminal.

All terminal parts to be made from materials which are not subject to develop corrosion
when used in combination with each other.

A high quality flexible phase insulating barrier shall be provided between all terminals as
well as on both sides of the end terminals. The phase barrier shall protrude sufficiently on
all sides of the terminal to ensure electrically safety.

January 2023 7-29 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Brass cable glands shall conform to BS 6346/1969 and shall be type BW, complete with
lock nut. They shall be mounted together with a 1 mm thick tinned copper plate, linking
them together. The copper plate shall be bonded to an external earth stud and to the earth
bar.

Neutral and earth bars shall be of nickel plated brass, accepting 10 mm2 cable sizes. The
earth bar shall be solidly bounded to the metal housing.

7/17.4.3 Housing:

The housing consists of a base plate, holding all components and glands, and a removable
cover. The material shall be electrogalvanised sheet steel, polyester powder coated to a
film thickness of min. 100 microns, against corrosion under Sharjah climatic conditions. The
plate shall be 3 mm thick and the cover 1.25 mm thick. Protection class shall be IP 44. The
base plate shall have 2 Nos. rear fixing holes of 7 mm diameter.

The cover fixing screws shall be captive. The overall dimensions are shown in the drawing.

7/17.4.4 Testing:

The cut-out shall be tested as per the provisions of BS 5486 Part 1 : 1986 and IEC 439-1 :
1985 Clause 8, and routine test certificates shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.

7/17.4.5 Materials to be submitted with the offer:

Each contractor shall submit with his offer three numbers of each type of cut-out required
for, and fully assembled. The materials to be accompanied by manufacturers operating
instructions.

7/18 FEEDER PILLAR SPECIFICATION

7/18.1 General

This section contains a description and the specifications for the lighting control panels as
indicated on the drawings, described in the Bill of Quantity and as specified herein:

The panel shall consist of a single compartment cabinet with one door opening. All panels
shall be constructed fully suitable for permanent out door installation for the control of road
way lighting. (Each control panel shall have two single phase 40 amp MCB complying with
BS 3871 : Part 1 : 1984 and connected to the outgoing side of KWH meter suitable to supply
power to a traffic control panel.)

The cabinets (Feeder Pillars) shall be constructed in a way to ensure easy installation of a
direct 3-phase KWH direct reading meter. All cabling for connecting the meters shall be
installed by the Contractor (KWH meters will be supplied by Sharjah Electricity and Water
Authority and installed by the contractor)

The cabinets (Feeder Pillars) with a capacity of 210 amp and above shall be delivered with
a 3-phase, CT operated KWH meter, the meter shall be fused and installed in the cabinet
ready for operation.

The meter and CT must be approved and calibrated by the Sharjah Electricity & Water
Authority prior to installation. All calibration cost to be borne by the Contractor. A signed
SEWA test report for each meter to be submitted to the Engineer. Each complete feeder

January 2023 7-30 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

pillar must be accompanied by a copy of the SEWA KWH meter test certificate. The copy
to be placed inside the cabinet in the drawing pocket. Each feeder pillar must be furnished
with a single line “As-Built” wiring diagram.

7/18.2 Equipment Housing

Housing shall be to standards equivalent to BS EN 60529:1991.

The enclosure shall be fabricated from high grade aluminium sheet with thickness not less
than 3 mm. The sheet aluminium enclosure shall be coated with a thermosetting powder of
an epoxy resin base modified by polyester resins. The enclosure shall be provided with a
smooth finish and excellent protection against corrosion for 10 years maintenance free
outdoor use. It should also have excellent chemical protection properties against acid, salt,
water and solvents. All other sheet metal should be hot dip galvanized in accordance with
BS 729: 1986.

The panel enclosure shall be made suitable to withstand the dynamic stresses in the event
of a short-circuit. The doors shall be Neoprene gasketed to provide protection against the
ingress of moisture and dust to degree IP55 of IEC 529. The gasket shall be adequate to
maintain this protection at 60 degree C. ambient.

The enclosure shall have 4 louvers (ears) for diagonal ventilation. Prevention of the ingress
of dust through louvers shall be provided to maintain the degree of protection of IP 55 of
IEC 529. The colour of the enclosure must be beige (RAL 7032).

A pre-fabricated sloped canopy of suitable dimensions to protect the cabinet from water
and direct vertical sunlight shall be provided. The material shall comply with the
requirements mentioned at Para 19/20.2.1 above

An air gap not less than 1.5 cm shall be present between the canopy and the cabinet.

The compartment doors shall have robust weather-proof hinges of polyimide type with
suitable and substantial lockable latching device. A metal pocket for the schematic diagram
and the “As-Built” diagram shall be provided in the enclosure door. The diagram shall not
be stuck to the enclosure. The enclosure door shall have two locks of flush non-rusting
type with separate keys (two numbers) to each panel. All keys shall have the same profile
and design to match all doors. Non-rusting materials shall mean stainless steel Grade AISI
316 or gun metal.

An ultra violet resistant reinforced window with a suitable dimension (approximately

10 cm x 10 cm) is to be supplied on the panel door opposite to the proposed location of the
KWH meter.

The door shall be designed in a manner that opening of 180 degree can be attained. An
anodised aluminium label, preferably dual colour, bearing “Roads & Transport Authority” in
both Arabic and English, 50 cm size in first row, and “Street Lighting Panel” in 25 mm size
for the second row shall be attached to the door in a proper location and firmly attached
with rivets. All hinges are to be gun metal or stainless steel.

The enclosure shall be provided with a door switch-operated internal illumination lamp
circuit complete with self-contained control gear fluorescent tube suitably protected from
accidental damage and located in the top side of the panel.

The panel shall have full size neutral and earth bar completely bonded to the main shell
and connected to the door by a braided copper wire. Provision shall be made in the

January 2023 7-31 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

enclosure to terminate the earth busbar with the earth electrode outside the panel. The
earth bar is to be tin plated copper.

Four numbers of openings in the bottom plate anchoring the feeder pillar to the concrete
foundation shall be provided. Dimension, location and size of anchor bolts to be used is to
be specified. A 3mm Bakelite plate has to be included, separating the aluminium bottom
from the concrete base. The controller housing panel shall allow building up equipment
complying with IEC 439 and BS 5486 Part 1 : 1990.

The equipment mounting panel shall be hot dip galvanized steel sheet not less than
3 mm thick epoxy coated, or 5 mm Pertinax and shall be easily installed and removed from
the front of the cabinet in assembled form. All devices and equipment shall be accessible
from the front of the panel. All hinges and locks are to be easily removable/replaceable.

The panel shall be provided with a removable gland plate of maximum 1 mm thickness
near the bottom to fix compression type brass glands along with earth tag. All incoming and
outgoing cables shall enter and leave the cabinet at the bottom.

Cable gland entry holes are to be factory punched and are to be the knockout type or sealed
with appropriate rubber cover. The number of cable entry holes shall not be less than six
and shall be according to the cable size and the unused relative dimension are to be
specified by the Engineer.

The feeder pillar dimensions shall be within the range specified herein:

Height : 1000 mm (without canopy) : Dimensions +/- 10mm

Width: 750 mm
Depth: 250 mm
and consist of the following: (over leaf).

7/18.3 Contractor / AC.3

All contactor shall be provided to control simultaneously all outgoing circuits.

The remote control contactor shall be of the single coil actuated, electrically operated,
suitable to carry not less than the rated current of the main circuit breaker at 60 degree C.
ambient and shall be obtained without the use of latches or semi- permanent magnets.

The contactor shall comply with BS 5424: Part 1: 1977 and shall be for AC3 class duty.
Rated insulation voltage for 660 V AC. The contactor shall have minimum making and
breaking capacity in accordance with utilization category AC 3 of IEC 158-1 and shall be
suitable for minimum class II intermittent duty. Ambient operation temperature shall be in
the range of -10 degree C to 90 degree C.

The contactor components must be suitable for continuous duty and for repetitive load
switching. The contactor selected shall be such that all current carrying and live parts shall
be properly shielded and it shall not be possible to come into accidental contact with them.
All contact assemblies shall be dust protected, and an arrangement for easy removal of the
coil shall be provided (Preferably slide in type). The coils of all contactors shall be suitable
for operation at a voltage of 220 +/- 10 to 15% and frequency of 50 Hz. operation. The
pickup of the coil shall be from 0.75 to 1.1 of the voltage. The operation of the contactor
shall be by means of a photocell.

January 2023 7-32 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/18.4 Circuit Breaker (Incoming MCCB)

There shall be one moulded case circuit breaker for the incoming feeder to each control
panel. It must be rated for three phases, 380V A.C. 50 Hz to IEC 157-1 and BS EN 60947-
2: 1992 specifications as indicated on the drawings.

Moulded case circuit breakers shall be suitable to accommodate auxiliaries and under-
voltage release. They shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a short circuit capacity
withstand of not less than 50 KA at 380V, and shall be suitable for 60 degree C. ambient
temperature operation with the prevailing enclosure condition. Pad locking facility for the
MCCB shall be provided. The exposed incoming terminals shall be provided with a suitable
insulated cover up to the equipment mounting plate in order to allow no access to the live
incoming terminals. There shall be minimum clearance of 300 mm between the incoming
glanded cable and input terminals of the MCCB.

Bus bars shall be provided throughout the main power circuit. All bus bars are to be tin
plated copper and colour sleeved according to phase.

The capacity of the Terminal sockets for MCCB shall be 185 [Link] stranded Cu/A1 cables
through suitable terminal tin plated copper bars.

7/18.5 Wiring and Cabling

All secondary internal wiring within the control cabinet shall be with heat resisting, 1000V
hard grade PVC/XLPE Insulated copper cables, colour coded or sleeved for easy phase
identification suitable for the circuit rating, arranged neatly and firmly attached. All the wiring
leads shall be so arranged to allow current reading with a clip-on ammeter on each phase
of main incoming and all outgoing circuits. All wiring shall be housed in wiring trunking
conforming an integral part of the enclosure whenever possible.

Bus bars shall be of the same amperage ratings at 60 degree C. ambient at enclosure
condition as the main circuit breaker and shall be made of tinned copper flats and round
bars complying with BS 159. They shall be colour sleeved for easy phase identification and
adequately supported to withstand dynamic stresses in the event of short circuit. Exposed
bus bars shall be insulated and screened to prevent accidental contact in live conditions.
An earth or ground bar not less than 40 mm x 4 mm shall be solidly bolted with stainless
steel bolts of grade AISI 316 to the main body of the control cabinet.

Sufficient vacant area (25 cms x 30 cms minimum) shall be left for future installation of a
KWH meter. Wooden back board shall be provided for the installation of a KWH Meter.

All wire terminals into connectors shall have wire ends or straight lugs. All the wires selected
should have the amperage rating at 60 degree ambient and sufficient allowance for
enclosure derating.

The suppliers’ attention is drawn to that fact that:

all incoming cable feeders to the panel shall be armoured, solid aluminium conductors, 4
core, XLPE insulated and PVC over-sheathed; all outgoing cable feeders from the panel
shall be armoured, stranded copper conductors, 4 Core, XLPE insulated and PVC over-
sheathed. The outgoing terminals shall be suitable for 2 cables of 70 mm2, 50 mm2, 35
mm2 and 25 mm2; therefore, all the connectors must be suitable to receive these types of
cable.

All output cables shall be connected through rugged terminals. All terminals shall be
designed for sector shaped stranded copper conductors. All incoming and outgoing cables

January 2023 7-33 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

are to enter from the bottom of the enclosure and hence all the connections must be done
at the bottom and not at the sides.
All cables and wires must be colour coded as per the following detail. Blue, Red and Yellow
for phases
Black for neutral
Green/Yellow for the earth wherever required.

7/18.6 Fuse and Fuse Base

There shall be a LV HRC system consisting of fuse boxes, fuse cartridge and accessories
complying with BS 88.

The fuse base shall be suitable for cylindrical type fuses of size 22 x 58 mm and the base
shall be of modular construction suitable for Din Rail mounting. The bases are to be made
of thermo setting, self-extinguishing material rated for 100A. Metal parts, contacts and
springs are to be zinc plated and passivated for protection against corrosion. All modular
fuse carriers with shielded terminals shall be similar to Legrand 21471 single pole or
equivalent.

Cylindrical cartridge type fuse links suitable for the bases are to be used. They shall
conform to IEC 269-2 and BS 1361 (1986) or DIN 43620 and shall withstand a rapture
capacity of 100 KA. Fuses shall be of a low internal loss and low internal temperature rise.
All fuse are to be protected by insulating shield or similar.

Each feeder pillar must have one number 4 Amps single phase HRC fuse with base for the
cabinet internal lamp circuit.

Each feeder pillar shall have one number single phase 20 Amps ELCB and appropriate
corrosion resistant switched socket outlet (3 pin square British type with box pattress) as
per BS 1363 (1984) appropriately located and neatly and tightly fitted inside the enclosure.

7/18.7 Cable Glands

All cable glands shall be brass compression type cable glands complying to BS 6121 with
earth tags and lock buds for XLPE/SWE/PVC/MDPE cables 4 core. All cable glands to be
supplied with matching cable sleeves.

Cable lands shall be weatherproof, with inner and outer seals suitable for steel wire
armoured cables. The contractor shall drill for the installation of the glands where
necessary.

Glands shall be fitted with PVC shrouds filled with waterproof plastic compound and made
fast to the cable with PVC tape.

Glands shall be fitted with earthing rings to allow connection of protective conductors. The
contractor shall carry out all work involved in terminating the cables, supplying
weatherproof plastic compound, PVC shrouds, tape, etc., all subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

7/18.9 Control System

The switching of the lighting luminaries shall be through an automatic control arrangement
comprising of a photocell and selector switch.

January 2023 7-34 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Photo-Electric Switch:

The cabinet shall be equipped with a photo-electric switch of the following specification:

The photo-electric control switch or cell for the control cabinet shall operate from a supply
voltage of 220 Volts and be rated for a load of 100 Watts. They shall be adjustable for
turning on and turning off within a range of 5-2000 lux. It shall be suitable for operation
within 0 degree to +60 degree C. temperature range. It shall have a fail-safe feature so that
the lighting remains energised in the event of component failure. The photo-electric control
switch shall be housed and mounted inside the control cabinet. An on-off auto switch of 5
amp rating shall be provided and properly labelled for controlling and by-passing the photo-
electric cell. A resistor type surge protection shall be provided in parallel to the photocell
switch. Photocell to be fitted inside the cabinet behind a factory made transparent ultra
violet resistant window of size 10 cm x 10 cm. The photo-electric cell shall be fully
electronically operated type.

Selector Switch

A selector switch for performing the following functions shall be provided in the cabinet

- Auto ON/OFF
- ON
- OFF

7/18.10 Power Supply Distribution Panels-Documents and Information to be

submitted

The Contractor shall submit the relevant design calculations, drawings and data for
approval prior to the fabrication of any panels, which is to include but shall not be limited to
the following:-

General dimensions of the panel anchor bolts, opening locations and gland plate openings.

Detailed scale drawing for the fixed components in the panel including important
maintenance and operating instructions of the manufacturer.

General description of the material, manufacturing, fabrication, coating and treatment of

feeder pillar panel.

Door hinges, locks and flaps drawings (including materials).

Internal cabinet ventilation (circulation and air flow design).

Detailed general arrangement drawing.

Single line diagram.

Chart showing yearly on/off times according to the latitude of Sharjah indicated above.

7/18.11 Testing

The cabinets and internal main circuitry shall be manufactured and tested in accordance to
the testing specifications of BS 5486 Part 1: 1990 and IEC 439-1: 1985 Clause 8.

The Contractor shall submit ASTA or KEMA tests certificates for routine and type test from
independent approved laboratories/bodies to show the compliance of his product.

January 2023 7-35 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/18.12 General

The Contractor shall submit three samples of each type of feeder pillar panel complete with
all auxiliaries and ready for installation for Engineer’s approval.

However, the approval of Engineer does not absolve the Contractor of the contractual
obligations as to the performance compliance to the specification requirements.

All components, catalogues, manufacturers ratings, cables glands calculations and

detailed drawings are to be attached with the sample submittals.

The Contractor shall submit to Roads & Transport Authority ASTA and/or KEMA test
certificates for Feeder Pillars along with the samples.

7/18.13 Specifications for Loop Detectors

Reference to the Roads Department Circular No. 12/97 the following NEVER FAIL LOOP
SYSTEM (Performed Detectors) shall be implemented for all stop line detectors.

The following specification and installation instructions have to be followed carefully.

The Contractor to supply, install and test the above mentioned loops according to the
satisfaction of the Roads Lighting Section.

7/18.13.1 Loop Detectors for Temporary Works:

Specifications

 Heads and tails (lead-ins) shall be constructed of 3/8” (9.5mm) O.D. hydraulic
flex hose.
 Heads and tails shall be completely filled with hot rubberized asphalt.
 Tees at junction of head/tail shall be schedule 80 CPVC.
 Lead-ins shall be twisted 3 times per foot minimum.
 Wire shall be 20-gauge, stranded, Teflon-coated, single conductor (Military- MIL-
W-16878/4 Type E, 200 degree centigrade 600V.
 Wires shall be continuous through head and tail - no splices.
 All loops shall be tested three ways prior to shipment resistance to ground
(measured in megaohms), resistance (measured in ohms), inductance (measured
in microhenries). All test results (readings) to be sent to Sharjah identified per loop.

Installation instruction

 Mark on the ground location in Loops in accordance to STOP LINE.

 Make sure that the pavement is clean from dust and moisture.
 Open loop on the ground.
 Cut 30 cm piece tape and fold in two, then placed under TEE.
 Secure corners with strips of tape
 Cover loop with asphalt tape.
 Press tape in order to adhere with asphalt. 7/18.13.2 Loop Detectors for
Permanent Works

January 2023 7-36 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Specification

 Loops shall be constructed from polypropylene conduit with 3/8” I.D. (9.5 mm) 5/8”
O.D. (16mm).
 Conduit shall be filled with hot rubberized asphalt which allows the loop to remain
flexible once cooled, prevent incursion of moisture and set the turns of wire firmly
in place.
 Loops shall have 5” expansion/contraction joints at intervals along the loop to allow
for movement of the pavement and to prevent breakage on the wire and/or conduit
due to this movement. Each expansion/contraction joint shall have a 9” long
schedule 80 polypropylene cover slide to be placed over the joint.
 The encapsulated copper loop wire shall be 20 gauge, stranded, Teflon- coated,
single conductor. (Military-MIL-W-16878/4 Type E 200 degree centigrade, 600V
Loop shall have 4 turns.
 Loop shall have one continuous wire through the loop head-in to prevent loop
malfunctions due to spicing.
 Lead-in wires shall be encased in a non-conductive 2250 psi flex hose constructed
with a seamless extruded polyester fiber braid reinforcement and a non-
conductive, seamless extruded urethans non-perforated jacket. Fill lead-in hose
completely with hot rubberized asphalt. Twist wires in all lead-ins a minimum of
three turns per foot for the entire length of the lead- in. Attach lead-ins to loop heads
with a schedule 80 CPVC tee.
 All loops shall be tested three ways prior to shipment resistance to ground
(measured in megaohms), resistance (measured in ohms), inductance (measured
in microhenries). All test results (readings) to be sent to Sharjah identified per loop.

Installation Instruction

Loops are installed in a grove on the surface of WET-MIX or AGGREGATE ROAD BASE
(according to Road Design). Refer to the enclosed sketch.

 Remove loop from container and unfold 24 hours before installation. Verify
dimensions and test.
 Mark on the ground location of loops in accordance to design STOP LINE.
 Open loop on the ground and mark the place.
 Excavate trench 30 x 30 mm by hand tools.
 Slide sleeve over the expansion/contraction joint and tape ends of sleeve directly
to conduit.
 Place loop in the trench.
 Cover loop with Fine Asphalt mix (remove big size stones).
 Compact asphalt with hand compactors.
 Lead cable from kerbstone to manhole protect in a 1” PVC conduit.
 Protect exposed lead wires during construction. 7/18.13.3 General
 For both types of installation mentioned above, the following procedures the
Contractor has to follow.
 Contractor to call the Municipality representative and check the received loops
before laying. The pass approval shall allow the Contractor to start installation.
 Contractor to follow the mentioned installation instructions.
 Municipality to check finally that the loops have not been damaged after laying of
asphalt and completion of the works.
 The end of the lead cable to be kept safely in the nearest bypass chamber
constructed especially for the loop detectors.
 The Contractor has to take great care from day of receiving the loops to the
handing-over date to avoid any damage that may occur to the insulation of the
supplied loops.

January 2023 7-37 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/19 METEOROLOGICAL AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS PREVAILING IN SHARJAH

The average prevailing local conditions at Sharjah City shall be assumed as follows:

Max. Ambient Temperature 55 deg.C

Min. Ambient Temperature 1 deg.C
Design Ambient Temperature 50 deg.C
Max, incident light intensity (energy) 780 m/W/cm2
Light intensity (measured under the sun
approximately 50,000 Lux
Max. metal temperature under sun 85 Deg. C
Min. Barometric Pressure 998 mb
Max. Barometric Pressure 1030 mb
Average Barometric Pressure 1015 mb
Max. Ambient Humidity 100%
Min. Ambient Humidity 20%
Design Ambient Humidity 80%
Max. Design Wind Velocity 160 Km/hr.
Average Yearly Rainfall 80 to 150mm

The climate of Sharjah is relatively mild from November to April, and hot from May to
October with high relative humidity.

Under certain combinations of the above climatic conditions considerable condensation

may take place.

Particular attention should be paid to the prevailing corrosion conditions. A considerable

amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere which together with the extremely high
ambient humidity, can produce severe corrosion problems.

Distribution of rainfall is irregular, and the precipitation amounts are normally of no

significance, but attention should be paid to the fact that sudden heavy rainfalls in a very
short period of time can occur.

The prevailing wind directions are from the North and West. Strong winds are common with
maximum velocities exceeding 160 km/hr. and sandstorms and duststorms occur in the
summer months.

January 2023 7-38 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

7/20 LIGHTING REQUIREMENT

Table 20.1

HPS LUMINARIES 1000W 400W 250W 250W 150W 125W

WATTAGE
No. of luminaries per 4 2 1 1 1 1
pole
Installation height (m) 25 14 10 8 10 6

Max. Spacing of poles 110 50 45 30 45 25

(m)
Width of the road (m) 15 11 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3

Number of lanes 4 3 2 2 2 2

Set back from kerb line - - 3.45 3.45 3.45 1.0

(m)
Center median width 10 6 - - - -
(m)

Table 20.2

HPS LUMINARIES WATTAGE 1000W 400W 250W 250W 150W

Average luminance level Lav 3.0 2.5 1.5 0.8 1.0

Overall uniformity ratio Uo, higher 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
than
Longitudinal uniformity ration UI 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
higher than
Glare control mark: G 6 6 6 6 6

Threshold increment TI 10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

January 2023 7-39 Section 7 –Street Lighting

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 8

Concrete Pile Foundations

January 2023 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

8/1 DESCRIPTION
8/2 MATERIALS
8/3 GROUND CONDITIONS
8/4 TOLERANCES
8/5 PILING METHOD AND PROGRAMME
8/6 PILING RECORDS
8/7 DAMAGE TO ADJACENT SERVICES AND STRUCTURES
8/8 CONCRETE FOR PILES
8/9 REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES
8/10 BORING FOR PILES
8/11 DRILLING FLUID
8/12 PLACING CONCRETE
8/13 EXTRACTION OF CASING
8/14 TEMPORARY BACKFILLING
8/15 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
8/16 CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS
8/17 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES
8/18 LOADING TESTS
8/19 FAILURE OF PILE
8/20 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE
8/21 PROTECTION OF PILING FROM CHEMICAL ATTACK
8/22 CLEARANCE OF WORKS

January 2023 Section 8 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 8 – CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

8/1 DESCRIPTION

8/1.1 All pile foundations shall be bored cast-in-place concrete piles and shall be constructed as
indicated on the Drawings and in compliance with these specifications.

8/2 MATERIALS

8/2.1 The materials for the manufacture of the reinforced concrete shall be in accordance with
Section 4 - "Concrete Works".

8/2.2 The temporary steel casings and the permanent casings or liners shall be cylindrical, of the
diameter indicated on the Drawings and shall 'be of sufficient strength to maintain shape
and location during boring and placement of concrete. The casings shall be sufficiently
watertight to exclude ground water during placing of concrete.

8/2.3 In case drilling mud is used, bentonite, as supplied to the site and prior to mixing shall be
in accordance with Specification DFCP 4 of the Oil Companies Materials Association.

8/3 GROUND CONDITIONS

8/3.1 Factual information and reports on site investigation for the Works will be provided to
tenderers. However, in the event that a full report is given, including interpretations,
opinions or conclusions, no responsibility is accepted by the Employer.

8/3.2 The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstances which indicates
that in the Contractor's opinion the ground conditions differ from those reported in or which
could have been inferred from the site investigation reports or trial pile results. '

8/4 TOLERANCES

8/4.1 SETIING OUT

Setting out of the main grid line shall be carried out by the Contractor. The installation of
marker pins at pile positions as required by the Engineer shall be accurate to 75 mm in any
direction. An additional tolerance for a pile head cut off below ground level will be permitted
in accordance with Sub-Section 8/13.8 and/or 8/16.

8/4.2 VERTICALITY

At the commencement of installation, the equipment governing the alignment of the bored
pile, shall be made vertical to a tolerance of within 1 to 100. The maximum permitted
deviation of the finished pile from the vertical is 1 in 75.

January 2023 8-1 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

8/4.3 RAKE

The equipment governing the direction and angle of rake shall be set to give the correct
alignment of the pile within a tolerance of 1 in 50. The piling rig shall be set and maintained
to attain the required. rake. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the
specified rake is 1 in 25 for piles raking up to 1:6 and 1 in 15 for piles raking more than 1:6.

8/4.4 FORCIBLE CORRECTIONS TO PILES

Forcible corrections to concrete piles to overcome errors of position or alignment shall not
be made. Forcible corrections may be made to other piles only if approved and where the
pile shaft is not fully embedded in the soil.

8/5 PILING METHOD AND PROGRAMME

8/5.1 The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of piling and the
plant he proposes to use. Any alternative method to that specified shall be subject to
approval.

8/5.2 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day of the intended programme of piling for
the following day and shall give adequate notice of his intention to work outside normal
hours and Public Holidays.

8/5.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed sequence and timing for boring
piles, having regard to the avoidance of damage to adjacent piles.

8/5.4 Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for... temporary
lowering of the water table by well pointing or. Any other method shall be subject 'to the
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall however remain fully responsible for any
effects of such ground treatment or control of the level of water tables upon the existing
roads, building and structures in the vicinity of works.

8/5.5 Any proposals by the Contractor for underpinning, needling and shoring of existing
structures in the vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the Contractor and be
subject to approval of the Engineer.

8/6 PILING RECORDS

8/6.1 The Contractor shall keep records as follows for the installation of each pile and shall
.submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than noon of the next
working day after the pile was installed. The signed records will form a record of the work.

Any unexpected boring conditions shall be noted in the records.

Data to be recorded
a. Contract
b. Pile reference number (location)
c. Pile type
d. Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter.
e. Nominal diameter of underrearn/base.
f. Standing groundwater level from direct observation or given site investigation data.
g. Date and time of boring.

January 2023 8-2 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

h. Date of concreting
i. Ground level at pile position at commencement of installation of pile (commencing
surface).
j. Working level on which piling base machine stands
k. Depth from ground level at pile position to pile to
l. Toe level.
m. Pile head level as constructed.
n. Pile Cut-off level.
o. Length of temporary casing
p. Length of permanent casing.
q. Soil samples taken and in situ tests carried out during pile formation or adjacent to
pile position.
r. Length and details of reinforcement.
s. Concrete mix.
t. Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in practice.
u. All information regarding obstruction delays and other interruptions to the
sequence of work.

8/7 DAMAGE TO ADJACENT SERVICES AND STRUCTURES

8/7.1 If damage will be, or is likely to be, caused to mains, services or adjacent structures, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for making surveys, monitoring
movements or vibrations, and minimizing or avoiding such damage.

8/7.2 The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner and at such times so as to
minimize noise and disturbance.

8/8 CONCRETE FOR PILES

8/8.1 Concrete for piles shall be Class 30 or as shown on the drawings and shall be in
accordance with Section 4 of the Specification and the following requirements:

8/8.2 When a designed mix is specified the Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the mix
proportions to achieve the required strength and workability, but the Engineer will be
responsible for specifying the minimum cement content and any other properties required
to ensure durability.

8/8.3 The Concrete shall have sufficient workability to enable it to be placed and compacted by
the methods used in forming the piles.

8/8.4 For piles exposed to potentially aggressive ground or groundwater, approved measures
shall be taken to ensure durability. Reference should be made to Building Research
Establishment Design 363 published in the U.K. relating to sulphate attack.

8/8.5 The cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/CU.m. Where concrete is to
be placed under water or drilling mud by tremie the cement content shall be not less than
380 kg/CU.m., or where the pile will be exposed to sea water 400 kg/CU.m.

8/8.6 All concrete aggregates, cement and water shall be sampled and tested as frequently as
deemed necessary by the Engineer as detailed under the relevant clauses in section 4
concrete work. All test samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own expense.

January 2023 8-3 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

8/8.7 Trial mixes shall be prepared for concrete in accordance with BS 5328, showing that the
proposed mix proportions and manufacture will produce a concrete of the strength and
quality required, having adequate workability for compaction by the method to be used in
placing.

8/8.8 The Contractor shall keep a detailed record of the results of all tests on concrete and
concrete materials. Each test shall be clearly identified with the piles to which it relates.

8/9 REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

8/9.1 The reinforcement for the piles shall conform to the requirement of SECTION 4 of the
specification.

8/9.2 Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall be assembled with additional support, such as
spreader forks and lacings, necessary to form a cage which can be lifted and placed without
permanent distortion.

Intersecting bars shall be fixed together by approved means. Hoops, links or helical
reinforcement shall fit closely around the main longitudinal bars and be bound to them by
approved wire, the ends of which shall be turned into the interior of the pile. Reinforcement
shall be placed and maintained in position to provide the specified projection of
reinforcement above the final cut-off level.

8/9.3 The cover to all reinforcement in cast-in-place piles shall be not less than 75mm unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Spacers shall be designed and manufactured using
durable materials which will not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement or spalling of the
concrete cover.

8/9.4 The number of laps in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of each bar is effective across the joint
and shall be made so that there is no detrimental displacement of the reinforcement during
the construction of the pile.

8/10 BORING FOR PILES

8/10.1 Prior to boring the Contractor shall check the casing position for each pile during and
immediately after placing the casing, and agree it with the Engineer.

8/10.2 Where the open bore is unstable, temporary casing, or bentonite suspension may be used
to support the wall of the bore prior to concreting.

8/10.3 Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which have recently been cast and which
contain workable or unset concrete that a flow of concrete could be induced from or damage
caused to any of the piles.

8/10.4 The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner and at such times as to minimize
noise and disturbance.

8/10.5 Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for temporary
lowering of the water table by well pointing or any other method shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall however remain fully responsible for any

January 2023 8-4 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

effects of such ground treatment or control of the level of water tables upon the existing
roads, buildings and structures in the vicinity of the Works.

8/10.6 Any proposals by the Contractor for underpinning, needling, and shoring structures in the
vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the Contractor and be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.

8/10.7 Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform cross-
section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be free from
internal projections and encrusted concrete which might adversely affect the proper
formation of piles.

8/10.8 Where piles are bored under water or bentonite suspension in 'an unlined state, the
insertion of a full- length loosely fitting casing to the bottom of the bore prior to placing
concrete will not be permitted.

8/10.9 Where boring takes place through unstable water bearing strata, the process of excavation
and the depth of temporary casing employed shall be such that soil from outside the area
of the pile is not drawn into the pile section and cavities are not created outside the
temporary casing as it is advanced.

8/10.10 Where the use of drilling fluid is specified or approved for maintaining the stability of a bore,
an adequate temporary casing shall be used in conjunction with the method so as to ensure
stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has been placed. During construction
the level of drilling fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintained within the cased or stable
bore so that it is not less than 1.0 m above the level of external standing groundwater at all
times.

In the event of rapid loss of drilling fluid from a pile excavation, the bore shall be 'backfilled
without delay and the instruction of the Engineer shall be obtained before boring at that
location is resumed.

8/10.11 All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension on the
Site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Discarded bentonite shall be removed
from the Site without undue delay. Any disposal of the bentonite shall comply with the
regulations of the Sharjah Municipality.

8/10.12 Pumping from pile bores shall not be permitted unless the bore has been sealed against
further water entry by casing or unless the soil is stable and will allow pumping to take place
without ground disturbance below or around the pile.

8/10.13 For a pile constructed in a stable cohesive soil without the use of temporary casing or other
form of support, the pile shall be bored and concrete shall be placed without such delay as
would lead to significant impairment of the soil strength.
8/10.14 Each pile bore which does not contain standing water or drilling fluid shall be inspected
directly or indirectly prior to concrete being placed in it. This inspection shall be carried out
from the ground surface in the case of piles of less than 750mm diameter. Torches or other
approved means of lighting, measuring tapes, and a means of measuring verticality shall
be provided. For piles of 750mm diameter or larger, equipment shall be provided by the
Contractor to enable his representative and the Engineer to descend into the bore for the
purpose of inspection. Any method of descent and the equipment used shall comply with
the requirements of BS 5573.

8/10.15 On completion of boring and where inspection of a dry pile bore indicates the necessity,
loose disturbed 'or softened soil shall be removed from the bore. Where pile bores contain
water or drilling fluid, a cleaning process shall be employed before concrete is placed.

January 2023 8-5 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Large debris/or accumulated sediment shall be removed using appropriate approved

methods, which shall be designed to clean while at the same time minimizing ground
disturbance below the pile bases. Water or drilling fluid shall be maintained at such levels
throughout and following the cleaning operation that stability of the bore is preserved.

8/11 DRILLING FLUID

8/11.1 Bentonite, as supplied to the Site and prior to mixing, shall be in accordance with
Specification DFCP 4 of the Oil Companies Materials Association.

8/11.2 A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacture of the bentonite
powder, showing the properties of each consignment delivered to the Site. This certificate
shall be made available to the Engineer on request.

The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range (in
centipoises) and the gel strength range (in newton’s per square meter) for solids in water.

8/11.3 Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly. with clean fresh water to make a suspension which
will maintain the stability of the pile bore for the period necessary to place concrete and
complete construction. The temperature of the water used in mixing the bentonite
suspension, and of the suspension when supplied to the borehole, shall be not lower than
5 deg. C.

8/11.4 Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions shall be
taken to modify the bentonite suspension or prehydrate the bentonite in fresh water so as
to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of piles.

8/11.5 The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall be
proposed by the Contractor for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The
frequency may subsequently be varied as required, depending on the consistency of the
results obtained, subject to approval.

Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable apparatus.
The density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension .shall be measured daily as a check on
the quality of suspension being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read
to within 5g/L. Tests to determine density, viscosity, shear strength and pH value shall be
applied to bentonite supplied to the pile bore. For average soil conditions the results. shall
generally be within the ranges in Table 1.

The tests shall be carried out until consistent working pattern has been established,
account being taken of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite
suspension and previously used bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent
behaviour, the tests for shear strength and pH value may be discontinued, and tests to
determine density and viscosity shall be carried out as agreed with the Engineer. In the
event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength and pH value
shall be reintroduced for a period if required.

January 2023 8-6 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Table 1

PROPERTY TO BE RANGE OF TEST METHOD

MEASURED RESULTS AT 20O C.

Density Less than 1.10 g/ml Mud Density Balance

Viscosity 30-90 seconds Marsh Cone method

or
less than 20 cP Fann Viscometer

Shear Strength 1.4 – 10 N/m2 Rehometer

or
4 - 40 N/m2 Fann Viscometer

pH 9.5 – 12 pH indicator paper strips

or
electrical meter

The testing methods pertaining to the above table should confirm to API ¬RP13B (standard
procedure for testing drilling fluids).

* Where the Fann Viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by
a number 52 sieve (300 u) prior to testing.

8/12 PLACING CONCRETE

8/12.1 The method of placing and workability of the concrete shall be such that a continuous
monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section is formed.

8/12.2 The concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would allow the previously placed
batch to have hardened. The method of placing shall be approved.

8/12.3 The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of concrete
to avoid arching of the concrete in temporary casing. No soil, liquid or other foreign matter
which would adversely affect the performance of the piles shall be permitted to contaminate
the concrete.
8/12.4 Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile bore shall be in accordance with the
standards shown in table 2.

The concrete shall be of the workability approved when in its final position and shall remain
sufficiently workable for all pile construction procedures to be safely completed.

January 2023 8-7 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE 2

PILING MIX SLUMP TYPICAL CONDITIONS OF USE

WORKABILITY MINIMUM RANGE
mm mm
A 75 75-150
Placed into water free permanently lined
bore of 600mm dia. or over, or where
casing level lies below temporary casing;
reinforcement widely spaced, leaving
ample room for free movement of concrete
between bars.
B 100 100-200
Where reinforcement is not spaced
widely; where cut-off level of concrete
is within temporary casing; where pile
bore is water- free and the diameter is
C 150 150 or less than 600mm.
more Where concrete is to be placed by
tremie under water or drilling mud or
by pumping

8/12.5 Internal Vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete.

8/12.6 Approved measures shall be taken to ensure that the structural strength of concrete placed
in all piles is not impaired through grout loss, segregation or bleeding. Concrete shall be
directed vertically into the center of each vertical pile so that grout is not lost from the initial
discharge.

8/12.7 Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no accumulation
of silt or other material at the base of the boring, and the Contractor shall ensure that heavily
contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the
tremie pipe, has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole.

8/12.8 Concrete to be placed under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie and shall not
be discharged freely into the water or drilling fluid. Pumping of concrete may be approved
where appropriate.

8/12.9 A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an
approved sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.20 the
placing of concrete shall not proceed. In this event the Contractor shall modify or replace
the bentonite as approved to meet the Specification.

8/12.10 The concrete shall be a rich coherent mix of high workability and cement in accordance
with Subsection 8/8.5 and mix C, Table 2. The concrete shall be placed in such a manner
that segregation does not occur.

8/12.11 The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall
extend to the base of the bore and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to
prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the tremie and the water or
drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has previously been
placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting. A

January 2023 8-8 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the
pressure from it exceeds that from the water drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe
of the tremie shall be not less than 150 mm for concrete made with 20mm aggregate. It
shall be so designed that external projections are minimized, allowing the tremie to pass
within reinforcing cages without causing damage. The internal face of the pipe of the tremie
shall be free from projections.

8/12.12 No concrete shall be placed until all driving within a radius of 4.5 meters has been
completed, nor until 'all the shells for anyone' cluster have been completely driven. If this
cannot be done, all driving within above limits shall be discontinued until the concrete in
the last pile cast, has been set for at least seven days.

8/12.13 Unless designated as basement piles all piles shall be placed with their tops at least 1
metre above pile cut-off level in their respective pile caps. All boreholes, except for
basement piles or unless otherwise specified, shall be filled with concrete to the top of the
hole so that the Engineer can be assured that all the bentonite has been displaced by the
concrete.

8/13 EXTRACTION OF CASING

8/13.1 Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently
workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. During extraction the motion of the casing
shall be maintained in an axial direction relative to the pile.

8/13.2 When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained
within it to ensure that pressure from external water, drilling fluid or soil is exceeded and
that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.

8/13.3 The concrete level within a temporary casing shall be topped up where necessary during
the course of casing extraction in such a way that the base of the casing is always below
the concrete surface until the casting of the pile has been completed.

8/13.4 Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess heads of water or drilling
fluid could occur as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement of water or fluid
by the concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls of the pile bore. Where
two or more discontinuous lengths of casing (double casing) are used in the construction
the proposed method of working shall be approved by the Engineer.

8/13.5 For piles cast in dry bores using temporary casing and without the use of a permanent
lining, pile heads shall be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming,
a sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The casing level shall be within
the tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 3 but shall not be above the
commencing surface level. No pile shall be cast with its head below standing water level
unless approved measures are taken to prevent inflow of water causing segregation of the
concrete as temporary casing is extracted; and where applicable, the standing water level
for each pile shall be agreed with the Engineer, and this level is to be treated as the cut-off
level for the purpose of calculating tolerance.

8/13.6 For piles cast in dry bores within the permanent lining tubes or permanent casings, or where
their cut- off levels are in stable ground below the base of any casing used, pile heads shall
be cast to a level above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a sound concrete
connection with the pile can be made. The casting level shall be within the tolerance above
the cut-off level shown in 'Table 4; but shall not be above the commencing surface level

January 2023 8-9 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

8/13.7 For piles cast under water or drilling fluid, the pile heads shall be cast to a level above the
specified cut- off so that, after trimming to remove all debris and contaminated concrete, a
sound concrete connection with the pile can be made. The casing level shall be within the
tolerance above the cut-off level shown in Table 5, but shall not be above the commencing
surface level. Cut-off levels may be specified below the standing groundwater level, and
where this condition applies the borehole fluid level shall not be reduced below the standing
groundwater level until the concrete has set.

8/13.8 Where the cut-off level of piles lies at depths greater than 10m below the commencing
surface, than the tolerances given in Tables 3 -5 will be varied after discussion with the
Contractor and before commencement of the piling to take account of the special conditions
which apply.

8/13.9 During extraction of temporary casings, where circumstances are such that newly placed
unset concrete is brought into contact with external groundwater, precautions shall be
taken to ensure that the internal concrete pressure at all levels within the pile exceeds the
external groundwater pressure.

TABLE 3. Casting tolerance above cut-off level for piles cast in dry bores, using
temporary casing and without the' use of a permanent lining.

CUT-OFF DISTANCE BELOW CASTING TOLERANCE ABOVE

COMMENCING SURFACE H,m CUT-
OFF LEVEL m
0.15 -10.00 0.3+H/12+C/8
Where C=length of temporary
casing below the commencing
surface *

* If H is greater than C this tolerance is no longer applicable and the tolerances in

Table 4 will apply.

TABLE 4. Table Casting tolerance above cut-off level for piles cast in dry bores within
permanent lining tubes or permanent casings, or where their cut-off levels are in
stable ground below the base of any casing used.

CUT-OFF DISTANCE BELOW CASTING TOLERANCE ABOVE

COMMENCING SURFACE H,m CUT-
OFF LEVEL m
0.15 -10.00 0.3+H/10

TABLE 5. Casting tolerance above Cut-off level for piles cast under water or drilling
fluid*.

Cut-Off Distance Below Casting Tolerance Above Cut-

Commencing Surface H,m Off Level m

0.15 -10.00 1.0+H/12+C/8

Where C=length of temporary
casing below the commencing
surface *

January 2023 8-10 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

* In cases where a pile is cast so that the cut-off is within a permanent lining tube,
the appropriate tolerance is given by deletion of the casing term C/8 in the table.

8/14 TEMPORARY BACKFILLING

8/14.1 After each pile has been cast, any empty bore remaining shall be protected and shall be
carefully backfilled as .soon· as possible with the approved materials.

8/15 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

8/15.1 Disposal of excavated material shall be carried out by the Contractor as necessary to
facilitate the works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

8/16 CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS

8/16.1 When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the Contractor shall take
care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any cracked or defective
concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an approved manner to provide a full
and sound section at the cut-off level.

8/17 INTEGRITY TESTING OF PILES

All testing shall be carried out as per Laboratory Testing Clause.

8/17.1 Where integrity-testing is called for but the method is not specified, the method to be
adopted shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be one of the following:

a. Sonic Method ASTM -0 5882: 1996

b. Vibration Method ASTM -0 4945: 1996
c. Sonic Logging ICE - Section9 : 1996

8/17.2 Other methods may be adopted to the approval of the Engineer and subject to satisfactory
evidence of performance.

8/17.3 In the cast-in-place concrete piles, integrity tests shall not be carried out until 7 days or
more have elapsed since pile-casting unless otherwise approved.

8/17.4 Where the method of testing requires the positioning of sensing equipment on the pile head,
the head shall be clean, free from water, laitance, loose concrete, over spilled concrete and
blinding concrete, and readily accessible for the purpose of testing.

8/17.5 The testing shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm in accordance with the OM
Administrative Decision No.(160) for year 2000.

8/17.6 The interpretation of tests shall be carried out by competent persons and the full test results
and findings shall normally be given to the engineer within 10 days of the completion of
each phase of testing. Full details of the ground conditions and construction method shall

January 2023 8-11 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

be made available to the specialist firm when required in order to facilitate interpretation of
the tests.

8/18 LOADING TESTS

All testing shall be carried out as per Laboratory Testing Clause.

8/18.1 Each test pile and working pile to be tested shall be loaded axially to 2.0 times and 1.5
times the working load respectively as specified on the Drawings. The tests shall not be
commenced until the concrete has reached 90% of its design strength and shall be
maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for such further period as the Engineer may
direct.

8/18.2 Loading tests shall be carried out (according to BS 8004 Clause 7.5.5) at the date ordered
on individual piles selected by the Engineer.

8/18.3 Piles selected by the Engineer shall be tested as follows:

a. The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer and shall be
measured within an accuracy of 2 percent. Settlements shall be measured within
an accuracy of 0.25mm.
b. The test load and unloading shall be applied in suitable increments and as
smoothly and expeditiously as possible.

c. The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of settlement
does not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.

d. The amount of settlement shall be recorded before the next load increment.

e. The full test load shall be maintained for 48 hours and the total settlement
recorded.

f. The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of recovery does
not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.

g. The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next load reduction.

h. The Contractor shall, within 24 hours of the completion of the test, submit to the
engineer for each pile tested graphs showing:

- Load and settlement plotted above and below a common base line of time

- Settlement and recovery plotted vertically against a base line of time

i. The settlement of the pile under the test load and the recovery of the pile after its
subsequent removal shall be within the limits agreed with the Engineer.

8/18.4 The temporary caps will be cut away and the debris removed by the Contractor.

8/18.5 The Contractor shall keep detailed records in collaboration with the Engineer of the
settlement and recovery of the pile as the increment of load are applied and removed
respectively.

January 2023 8-12 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

8/18.6 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with two copies of his records of each test.

8/18.7 If the tests indicate that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the piles are unsatisfactory for the
working load, the Contractor shall at his own expense replace the tested pile in a suitable
position and if necessary support to be given to the structure to be carried.

8/18.8 The Contractor shall bear the cost of any additional work made necessary as a result of
the unsatisfactory pile or piles. The Contractor shall also satisfy the Engineer that any piles
constructed prior and subsequent to the results of the tests being known are capable of
carrying the specified working load. Further tests shall be carried out, if required by the
engineer, and any piles deemed to be unsatisfactory by the Engineer shall be replaced or
augmented by further piles. No extra cost will be accepted or extension of time granted in
connection with the foregoing work.

8/18.9 The Contractor shall state in his proposals the measures he intends to take if the ultimate
load of any pile fails to reach the required value under the loading test, with regard to
lengthening, redriving and retesting of the test pile, and also to the provision of additional
piling to augment or replace the tested pile. No extra cost will be accepted or extension of
time granted in connection with the foregoing work.

8/19 FAILURE OF PILE

8/19.1 A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions apply:

- On completion of a load test, the residual settlement after rebound exceeds 6 mm.
- The test load as specified in. the contract shall not have been achieved.
- The maximum settlement exceeds 1 % of the least lateral dimension of the pile
under ultimate load.

8/20 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE

8/20.1 In the event of a pile failing a load test, notwithstanding any contrary proposals by the
Contractor, the Engineer may insist on the following methods of rectification (as a minimum)
:
When a trial pile -an additional trial pile shall be driven as directed by the Engineer and
tested. If this second trial pile fails, the Engineer shall order such changes in the design of
the pile as he considers necessary.

When part of the main piling operation -a further pile in the same group shall be tested. If
this second test pile fails, the Engineer shall order such changes in the design of the
pile/pile. group as he considers necessary.

8/20.2 In the case of the first pile of the main piling operation failing a test load, but subsequent
piles passing the load test, a new pile shall be driven to replace the defective pile in a
position agreed by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.

8/20.3 In the event of additional works being carried out as a result of new piles being required
under this Clause, the cost of this additional work will be at the expense of the Contractor.

January 2023 8-13 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

8/21 PROTECTION OF PILING FROM CHEMICAL ATTACK

8/21.1 All Piles shall have protective sleeve for a minimum depth of 3 m below the cut-off level of
the pile. This sleeve shall be plastic or metal bedded in mastic to form a fully water-proofed
seal to the concrete.

8/22 CLEARANCE OF WORKS

8/22.1 Upon the completion of the works the Contractor shall clear away and remove from the Site
all constructional plant, equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, etc. and leave the whole of
the Site and Works clean and in perfect condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 8-14 Section 8 – Concrete Pile Foundations

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 9

Pipes and Pipeworks

January 2023 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

9/1 PIPE MATERIALS

9/2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES
9/3 GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING
9/4 CONVENTIONAL (OPEN TRENCH) PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
9/5 PIPEWORKS WITHIN STRUCTURES
9/6 MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES
9.7 SHARJAH MUNICIPALITY STANDARDS FOR COVERS AND GRATINGS

January 2023 Section 9 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 9 – PIPES, PIPEWORKS, MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

9/1 PIPE MATERIALS

9/1.1 Pipe Classifications and Pressure Ratings

The designated pressure rate shall be embossed at both ends of each class of pipe of
standard length.

For structural purposes pipes shall be classified into two groups:-

Group A : Rigid pipes which do not depend on lateral support from the bedding and
trench sides for structural strength.

Pipe materials include:-

Concrete
Clayware
Asbestos Cement
Pitch Fibre
Grey Iron

Group B : Flexible pipes which depend on lateral support from the bedding and
trench sides for structural strength and to prevent distortion.

Pipe materials include:-

GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic)

uPVC (unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride)
HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)
PP (Polypropylene)

Pressure pipes shall be supplied to the following rated pressure classifications:-

Asbestos Cement 18 bar

GRP 12 bar
uPVC 12 bar (12 bar rated uPVC pipes used to allow for
temperature derating).

9/1.2 Joints Requirements and Limitations

Unless pipes are detailed with rigid joints or are specified differently all pipelines shall be
jointed with approved mechanical, flexible joints with elastomeric joint rings. The whole joint
assembly shall be compatible with the pipe construction and with the specified performance
of the completed pipeline.

9/1.2.1 Flexible Joints

Flexible joints shall be as a separate sleeve coupling and double spigot assembly with two
sealing rings.

January 2023 9-1 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Elastomeric joint sealing rings shall be manufactured to EN-681-1 from ethylene propylene
rubber (EPDM) and shall have a hardness measured in International Rubber Hardness
Degrees (IRHD) compatible with the pipe material.

Deflection: The completed joint shall be capable of accepting the following ranges of
deformation when subjected to internal pressure without losing its seal at the specified test
pressure, without direct contact between spigot and socket/coupling and without inducing
stresses or strains in the pipe material beyond the safe working limits.

Table 9-1. Minimum Allowable Angular Deflection for Flexible Joints

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE DIAMETER (mm) ANGULAR

DEFLECTION
(DEGREES)

All materials up to 200 3

(except concrete and Over 200 to 500 1.75
clay pipes) Over 500 to 1350 1
Over 1350 0.5

Straight draw: Not less than 10 mm or the following proportions of the length of the longest
pipe/unit at any joint:

1% for polyethylene pipes

0.5% for polypropylene, polybutylene or ABS pipes.
0.3% for GRP and uPVC pipes
0.1% for asbestos cement pipes.

Shear: Pipe materials which are listed in structural Group A shall be loaded to 10
times DN (mm) in newtons in accordance with BS EN-512. Pipe materials
which are listed in structural Group B shall be subjected to a load of 17.5
N/mm of pipe diameter in accordance with ASTM D4161.

If the approved standard for a pipe material does not include a shear test
for the jointing system, this test shall be carried out in accordance with test
procedure of another appropriate pipe material standard.

9/1.2.2 Flanged Joints

Flanged pipes shall incorporate an annular gasket at the Joints and these gaskets shall be
manufactured to BS 4865 from ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM) 3.0 mm thick and shall
be dimensioned to full face of the pipe flange and to suit the flange drillings. The hardness
of the rubber (IRHD) shall be to the manufacturer's recommendations to suit the pipe
material but for pipe materials in Group A shall be in the range 66 to 75.

9/1.2.3 Flange Adaptors

The adaptors shall be manufactured from rolled steel or approved material with an
approved coating and be capable of withstanding the pressure tests of the pipeline in which
they are incorporated. The adaptors shall accommodate a deflection at least 3o between
adjacent pipes in any direction and they shall be capable of accommodating a movement
of 10 mm between the ends of pipes they connect.

January 2023 9-2 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The adaptors shall be protected as stated in Clause [Link]. The adaptors shall be jointed
as instructed by the manufacturer.

9/1.2.4 Bolted Couplings

Bolted couplings shall be flexible couplings and shall be capable of withstanding the
pressure tests of the pipeline in which they are installed. They shall also be capable of
accommodating the deflections and movements specified for flange adaptors.

9/1.2.5 Nuts and Bolts

All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of stainless steel grade 320S17 to BS 970: Part 1 or
DIN 17440:1.4571 and shall remain unpainted. PTFE washers shall be fitted beneath
stainless steel washers for both bolt head and nut.

9/1.2.6 Shipping and Handling

All elastomeric joint sealing rings and gaskets for flanged pipes shall be supplied and
transported in light proof packaging so as to prevent damage due to ultra violet radiation.
The Contractor shall provide suitable storage facilities to prevent ultra violet exposure until
use.

9/1.3 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings

Asbestos cement pipes, joints and fittings shall be manufactured and tested to ISO 160 or
BS EN 512 for all pipelines. Sulphate resisting cement with a medium to low C3A content
shall be used in the manufacture of asbestos cement pipes, joints and fittings.

Asbestos cement pressure and gravity pipes and joints shall be Class 18 unless otherwise
specified.

For gravity pipes the crushing strength shall be carried out on one percent of the total
number of pipes and joints. For pressure pipes the bursting test shall be carried out on one
percent of the number of pipes and fittings.

A jointing ring shall be provided at each end of the pipe this being rubber or neoprene or a
compound of both. Internal test pressure and the prevention of infiltration of groundwater
are to be the major design criteria of the joints. The Engineer shall be given details of
vacuum-type tests on the joints.

All bends and fittings required along the route of the pressure pipelines other than those
bends obtained by deflection of the pipe joints shall be of GRP material. Bends and fittings
shall be obtained from the same supplier as the asbestos cement pipes and shall be
compatible with the pipes and jointing system used.

Clearly visible, legible, indelible manufacturer's stamps including designated class of pipe
and production date shall be provided on the external face of all pipes.

For identification purposes, all asbestos cement pipes and fittings laid for drainage
application shall be externally coated with a black bituminous paint. Potable water pipelines
in asbestos cement are uncoated.

All relevant tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided by the Contractor
and he shall ensure that he has sufficient numbers of each tool available in order that the
work is never held up for the need of any such tool.

January 2023 9-3 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The following mechanical test shall be checked with the SCL. According to ISO – 160 and
BSEN-512.

1. Crushing Test:
When tested in accordance with ISO-160 pipe samples shall have a minimum crushing
strength of 44 N/mm2 for immersed samples or 48.5 N/m2 for dry samples.

When tested in accordance with BSEN-512, pipe samples shall have a minimum crushing
load of 60* DN K N/m (DN in (m)).

2. Bending Test:
When tested in accordance with ISO-160 pipe samples shall have a minimum bending
strength of 24.5 N/mm2 for immersed samples or 27N/mm2 for dry samples.

When tested in accordance with BSEN-512, pipe samples shall have a minimum bending
load meeting the requirement of Table 6 BSEN-512.

9/1.4 Unlplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes and Fittings (uPVC)

uPVC non-pressure pipes and fittings shall be manufactured and tested to BS 4660 for
pipes upto and including 160 mm diameter and BS 5481 for pipes greater than 160 mm
diameter; and to BS 3505 for pressure pipes.

The following tests should be included for uPVC pipes:

1. Reversion Requirements:
When three samples from each combination of pipe size and material formulation to be
tested by the method described in BS 5481 Appendix A at no point around a specimen
shall the length change more than 5%. After testing the specimens shall show no faults
e.g.: racks, cavities or blisters

2. Stress Rupture: (BS 5481) Test Parameters requirements.

TEST & MINIMUM TIME HOOP STRESS REMARKS

TEMPERATE TO MN/m3 BAR*
FACILITATE
OC h
20 ± 1 1 42 420 1*bar = 105 N/m2
= 100Kpa
60 ± 1 1000 10 ± 0.1 100 ± 1

3. Impact Resistance: BS 5481

Samples of each combination of pipe size and material formulation shall have a true impact
rate (TIR) below 10% at a confidence level of 90%.

uPVC pipes and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
Pipes shall be BS kite marked.

uPVC pipes shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet degradation. A rodent inhibitor shall
be incorporated in the material of the pipe. Pipes shall be manufactured with integral flexible
rubber ring joints.

January 2023 9-4 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

uPVC pipes for gravity pipelines shall have a standard dimension ratio, D:t (diameter to
thickness), of between 35 and 45.

The Contractor shall advise the manufacturer of the climatic and transporting conditions at
the site of the works and shall seek his advice on the storage of uPVC materials on site.
Subject to the Engineer's approval this advice shall be followed at all times.

Any pipes exhibiting cracks, notches or deep scratches or other damage will be condemned
and shall not be incorporated into the permanent work under any circumstances.

9/1.5 uPVC Pipes for Land Drains

Pipes for slotted land drains/slotted carrier drains shall be uPVC pipes. Prior to perforation,
the basic pipe shall be manufactured to BS 4660 and BS 5481, kite marked, and shall
comply with the requirements of Clause 9.1.4 of this specification relating to uPVC pipes
for non-pressure application. The slots shall be designed to give at least the minimum
infiltration rates laid down in BS 5911: Part 114. The final configuration of the slots shall
be subject to approval by the Engineer.

The slots shall be cleanly machine cut and be not less than 3 mm or greater than 4 mm in
width. The slots shall be in one 180° segment of the barrel in one or more longitudinal
rows, the slots in each row being spaced equidistantly. Where more than one row of
perforations are provided the slots shall be staggered. No slots shall be nearer to the ends
of the barrel than the spacing between two adjacent slots. The spacing between slots in
any row may vary up to ± 20 mm.

The minimum cross-sectional area of the perforations, at the inside surface of the pipe
barrel, shall be 2700 mm2 per metre run of pipe but shall not affect the structural integrity
of the pipe. Care must be exercised to prevent impact damage when placing stone
surround and during backfilling operations over the pipes.

9/1.6 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes and Fittings (GRP)

9/1.6.1 General

Pipe manufacturers must be members of, or affiliated with, a quality control or certification
authority relevant to the pipes or fittings proposed for incorporation in the Works. ISO 9001
certification is required for pipe manufacturers.

GRP pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5480. Resins shall
comply with BS 3532 or ASTM D1763. GRP pipe and fittings shall be at least adequate to
achieve a minimum working life of 50 years under all applicable loading, environmental and
installation conditions. The pipes and fittings shall be designed to withstand up to 5% long
term deflection in their installed conditions.

GRP pipe and fittings shall be supplied with a rated pressure of 6 bar for gravity pipes and
shall be suitable for service temperatures up to 50oC.

GRP pipe and fittings shall be composite laminate consisting of a corrosion resistant inner
liner, a structural layer and an exterior layer as follows:

1. The resin-rich inner liner shall have a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm, consisting of ‘C’
glass veil backed with chopped strand ‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass all impregnated with
vinyl ester resin.

2. The structural layer shall be reinforced with ‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass impregnated with

January 2023 9-5 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

isophthalic resin but a vinyl ester resin may be used throughout. Silica sand may be
included as a stiffener agent.

3. The exterior resin-rich layer shall have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm consisting of
‘C’ glass veil impregnated with isophthalic or vinyl ester resin.

Silica sand aggregates as defined in BS 5480 shall contain no impurities. Fillers as defined
in BS 5480 shall not be used. The silica sand content of the pipe material shall not exceed
50% in accordance with the test type submitted for approval.

The resin shall be cured to reach a hardness not less than 90% of the resin manufacturer's
recommended hardness using a prescribed test.

A manufacturer's tolerance of ± 1.00% shall be allowed on the nominal diameter of the

pipe. The pipes shall be supplied in standard lengths of 3, 6 or 12 metres with a tolerance
of ± 25.00 mm. The deviation from straightness of the bore of the pipe shall not exceed
0.30% of the effective length or 15.00 mm whichever is smaller and shall apply when
measured on site. Up to 10% of the pipes will be allowed in random lengths.

The ellipticity of any pipe when measured resting freely on the ground shall not be more
than 2% of the mean diameter at any point. No pipe known to have undergone a deflection
greater than 7% shall be incorporated into the Works.

Stiffness shall be minimum 5000 N/m 2 for all pipes but for pipes to be used in pumping
stations and valve chambers the stiffness shall be minimum 10,000 N/m2 and pipes for use
in microtunnelling or similar jacking operations the stiffness shall be minimum 50,000 N/m 2
unless enclosed in concrete.

The hoop flexural modulus shall be demonstrated by application of the

following equation:

Stiffness of the pipe = EI/D3

Where : E= bending modulus of pipe wall

2
circumferentially (in N/m ).

I= moment of inertia of pipe wall per

unit length (in m4/m)

D= nominal pipe diameter in metres

Calculations shall be provided to show that the proposed form of pipe manufacture will give
the specified physical properties identified in this specification.
Pipes shall have a resistance to longitudinal tensile force per unit of circumference as
under:-

Nominal Diameter (mm) Initial Ultimate Resistance (N/mm)

up to 700 100
700 to 1,000 120
1,000 to 1,600 160
1,600 to 2,400 250
2,400 to 4,000 300

When subjected to a parallel plate loading test no evidence of crazing or cracking shall be
evident with a deflection of 10% and no structural failure with a deflection of 20%.

January 2023 9-6 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Evidence from the manufacturer shall be provided of the satisfactory completion of the
"strain corrosion test" on a sample of pipe representative of those to be supplied together
with an assurance that such tests are continuing. Testing shall be in accordance with BS
5480 or ASTM D-3681. The appearance of blisters, delamination, wicking or any other
structural degradation of the test sample will constitute failure of the test notwithstanding
the wording of the standard test procedure.

The jointing system shall be an approved coupling system. Where the system involves
separate reinforced plastic couplings of sockets formed by a lay-up process subsequent to
pipe production, the resins used shall be clear and non-pigmented to permit visual
examination within the laminate.

Where GRP laminate is cut, exposed ends shall be sealed with a suitable resin and
approved prior to incorporation into the Works. Where such cutting and sealing takes place
at site the resins used and the methods of storage, mixing, application and curing shall be
strictly to the manufacturer's recommendation. Before any such work takes place the
manufacturer's representative shall visit the site to demonstrate and give clear procedural
advice to the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.

GRP pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in colour, opacity,
density, and other physical properties.

GRP pipe and fittings shall be smooth and both the internal and external surfaces shall be
clean and free from delamination’s, cracks, bubbles, pinholes, pits, blisters, foreign
inclusions and resin-starved areas that due to their nature, degree or extent detrimentally
affect the strength and serviceability of the pipe.

Unless authorized by the Engineer, repair will not be permitted on any pipes with defects
as listed below and such pipes shall not be incorporated into the works:-

(1) A scratch of greater depth than 0.30 mm.

(2) Cracks of any type on the inside of the pipe.

(3) Cracks on the outside, longer than 200 mm circumferentially or 6 mm longitudinally.

(4) Delamination’s.

(5) Damaged ends including bubbles, cracks, voids, exposed reinforcement or

extraneous matter.

(6) Internal protruding fibers.

(7) More than 25% of the external area with protrusions of any sort.

(8) Air voids and blisters exceeding 5 mm diameter or 1 mm in depth, greater in area
than 0.50% of internal or 1.00% of external surfaces.

(9) Pitting to more than 5% of the internal or 10% of the external surface area and
individual pits more than 1 mm diameter or 0.5 mm in depth.

(10) Wrinkles over than 3% of the surface area and individual wrinkles more than 2 mm
deep.

January 2023 9-7 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

9/1.6.2 GRP Pipes and Fittings for Pumping Stations and Valve Chambers

The design of GRP pipe and fittings for pumping stations and valve chambers shall
incorporate all the requirements of these specifications except for the following over-riding
or supplemental stipulations.

GRP pipe and fittings inside pumping stations and chambers shall be designed for use
above ground with no thrust blocks and shall have sufficient axial strength to resist end
thrust, temperature and bending stresses.

GRP pipe and fittings shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 10,000 N/m2 and a minimum
wall thickness of 10 mm.

The design working pressure for pipes and fittings shall be 10 bar and the service
temperature shall be 50°C. A minimum surge allowance of 40% above the working
pressure shall be included in the design of pipes and fittings. Copies of the design
calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The basis of design shall be
checked by conducting 'type' tests on representative sample(s) of manufactured materials,
in accordance with the requirements of BS 5480 or ASTM D2992.

The wall of the pipes and fittings shall be made up of:

1. A resin-rich inner liner of 1.5 mm minimum thickness, consisting of ‘C’ glass veil, and
'ECR/ADVANTEX' glass and impregnated with vinyl ester or epoxy resin.

2. The structural layer consisting of ‘ECR/ADVANTEX’ glass reinforcements impregnated

with vinyl ester or epoxy resin. Silica sand shall not be used.

3. An exterior resin-rich layer of 1.0 mm minimum thickness, reinforced with a ‘C’ glass
veil and impregnated with vinyl ester or epoxy resin.

No dark pigments, sand or aggregate fillers shall be used for pipes and fittings. Ultra Violet
stabilizers shall be incorporated in the pipe and fitting construction.

GRP pipe and fittings for pumping station and valve chamber pipework shall have a suitably
designed restrained joint capable of withstanding the design operating pressure with no
leaks and without the use of thrust blocks.

The acceptable jointing system shall be GRP flanges. GRP flanges shall be machine
filament wound using 'E' or 'ECR/ADVANTEX' glass fiber reinforcements and vinyl ester or
epoxy resin. Hand laid up flanges shall not be permitted. Flanges shall be drilled to BS
4504 (metric units) type PN 10.

9/1.6.3 Factory Testing

The following tests shall be carried out on manufactured GRP pipe and fittings at the
intervals specified. Test methods shall be in accordance with BS 5480 or ASTM equivalent.
Witnessing of factory testing by the Engineer's Representative will be required prior to
delivery of the material. Copies of the Manufacturer's test reports shall be submitted to the
Engineer after each consignment of pipe or fittings delivered to the site.

January 2023 9-8 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

All GRP standard pipe and pipe used for fitting fabrication shall be factory pressure tested
to 20 bar for pressure pipes and 12 bar for non-pressure pipes.

The following tests shall be conducted on all GRP pipe and fittings:

- Dimension measurements (Wall thickness, Diameter, Length)

- Visual inspection
- Barcol Hardness (Resin Cure)

Mechanical property testing shall be conducted on 1% of GRP pipe and fittings produced.
Other tests for quality assurance shall be carried out on representative sample(s) as
required by BS 5480 or ASTM equivalent.

In addition to the Factory Testing, the following mechanical tests shall be carried out at
Sharjah Central Laboratory:

- Longitudinal Unit Tensile Strength (Tensile Strip Test) BS5480App. A

- Longitudinal Unit Tensile Strength (Beam Test) BS5480App. B
- Hoop Tensile Strength (Split Disc Test) ) BS5480App. D

- Initial Specific Stiffness and Resistance to Structural Damage under Ring Deflection BS
5480 Appendix H.

The following properties shall be checked with DCL according to BS 5480 or equivalent
standards:

Mechanical Properties

MIN. MIN. INITIAL MIN.

SPECIFICTANGENTIAL LONGITUDINAL INITIAL
NOMINAL INITIAL STIFFNESS PA TENSILE HOOP
SN SERVICE
DIAMETER STRENGTH TENSILE
KN/m STRENGTH
KN/m
1 250 Irrigation 10 000 107 600
2 300 Irrigation 10 000 122 720
3 150 Sewerage 10 000 100 360
4 200 Sewerage 10 000 102 480
5 400 Sewerage 10 000 150 800
6 500 Sewerage 10 000 177 1000

9/1.6.4 Installation

GRP pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instruction. A field representative of the manufacturer shall be made available as and when
required during the installation of the GRP pipe and fittings. All flanges shall be tightened
in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions using a torque wrench.

9/1.7 Polyethylene Pipes (HDPE or HPPE)

9/1.7.1 General

Polyethylene (PE) pipe, either high density polyethylene (HDPE) or high performance
polyethylene (HPPE) pipe shall be manufactured to conform to the requirements of CP 312

January 2023 9-9 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Part 1 and 3, and BS 6437 or DIN 8075. Where pipes are used for renovation work, pipes
shall be of short lengths or short length conforming to the requirements of the method
selected and the available working space in the manholes or drive shafts. Longer lengths
may be used for new installation where conventional open trench methods of construction
are employed.

The base polymer shall be polyethylene with a derived density greater than 930 kg/m3
when determined in accordance with the method required by BS 3412. The base polymer
shall be blended with additives that are necessary for the manufacture, storage and use of
PE pipes for sewer lines, including antioxidants, carbon black and UV stabilizers.

The material in pipe form shall have a thermal stability of at least 15 minutes when tested
in accordance with the isothermal method for differential thermal analysis.

The ovality of pipes up to and including nominal size 250 mm shall not exceed 0.02 the
nominal size (mm). The ovality of pipes greater than nominal size 250 mm shall not exceed
0.035 the nominal size (mm).
The ends of the pipe shall be cut, cleanly and squarely, to within the following tolerances:

Nominal Size (mm) Maximum Out of squareness

180 - 225 4 mm
250 - 315 5 mm

The calculated 24 hour and 50 year creep module shall be not less than the values given
below when tested in accordance with either the pipe ring in tension or the three point bend
method.

Property Minimum Mean Requirement

Short term flexural creep

modulus (24 hour) Es 350 MPa

Long term flexural creep 130 MPa

modulus (50 year) El

The jointing system for polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer’s recommendations subject to approval by the Engineer.

9/1.7.2 Wall Thickness

The polyethylene (HDPE or HPPE) pipe shall be Type 50 i.e. shall be designed to sustain
a maximum working stress of 50 bar at 20°C. The wall thickness shall be based on a
nominal pressure rating (PN) of 10 bar.

When manufactured in conformity with BS 6437, the wall thickness of HDPE pipe shall be
as follows:-

Table 9-2. Required Wall Thicknesses of HDPE Pipes

NOMINAL MEAN OUTSIDE WALL THICKNESS (mm)

SIZE (mm) DIAMETER (mm) INDIVIDUAL [Link]
VALUES
Min. Max. Min. Max. Max.
180 180.0 181.2 16.4 18.9 18.3

January 2023 9-10 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

NOMINAL MEAN OUTSIDE WALL THICKNESS (mm)

SIZE (mm) DIAMETER (mm) INDIVIDUAL [Link]
VALUES
225 225.0 226.4 20.5 23.6 22.8
250 250.0 251.5 22.8 26.3 25.3
280 280.0 281.6 25.5 29.4 28.3
315 315.0 316.8 28.7 33.0 31.8

9/2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PIPES

9/2.1 General

Method Statements must be approved for the transportation, handling and storage of pipes
before any pipes are delivered to site.

All pipes shall be handled and stored in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations subject to the following limitations:-

Pipes shall be transported, handled and stored with such packing and in such a manner
that damage does not occur and that contact is avoided with sharp edges which may cause
damage. During transit, pipes and fittings shall be well secured and adequately supported
along their length.

At every point of loading or unloading, all pipes or castings must be handled by approved
lifting tackle unless specified elsewhere. Unloading by rolling down planks or any other
form of inclined ramp will not be allowed. Pipes shall not be tipped or dropped.

Pliable straps, slings or rope shall be used to lift pipes, and steel cables or chains will not
be used without written permission.

Nesting of pipes for transportation will be permitted provided method statements

demonstrate that effective precautions will be taken to protect inner surfaces from damage.
All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly inspected on arrival at site after off-loading and
prior to installation for detection of any damages.

Since the pipeline is a newly installed one, any pipe with either any type of damage or any
type of deviation from specifications, other than minor discrepancy in coatings that could
be rectified in an approved procedure, shall be summarily rejected and shall NOT be
incorporated into the Works.

Suitably smooth and level storage areas shall be provided at or near the site and made
secure to prevent unauthorized access.

Pipes of different sizes and thickness shall be stocked separately.

9/2.2 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes (GRP)

When pipes are transported or stacked they shall be supported on cradles at least 100 mm
wide, conforming to the shape of the pipe placed at not more than 3 metres centres.

January 2023 9-11 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Pipes must on no account be stacked directly on the ground but if individual pipes are
placed on the ground prior to laying care shall be taken to remove all rocks and any
potentially damaging debris.

The number of layers in a stack shall not exceed the following:

Internal Diameter of Pipe (mm) Maximum Number of Layers

Up to 500 5
500 to 700 3

The end pipes in each row shall be strapped to the battens. Pipes shall not rest on their
sockets.

9/2.3 Thermoplastic Pipes

Pipes and fittings of plastic materials smaller than 300 mm diameter may be handled
manually and those equal or larger than 300 mm diameter shall be lifted using a single
fabric or large diameter rope sling. There shall be enough slack in the sling to keep the
hook at least 600 mm over the pipe. Use of wire rope chains and fork lifts shall not be
permitted.

Care shall be taken to prevent distortion of the pipes during transportation, handling and
storage. They shall be stacked either on bearing timbers on a level surface staked to
prevent movement, or in suitable racks. Not more than two layers shall rest on the bottom
layer, and for spigot and socket pipes, sockets shall be at alternate ends so that no pressure
comes on a socket. Bearing timbers shall be spaced at not more than 1 metre and shall be
wide enough to prevent denting of the pipe wall. Sharp edges (e.g. of metal) shall be
avoided. Similar care shall be taken with pipes in transit. Where shaped battens are used,
they shall be at least 100 mm wide and not more than 1.5 meters apart. The end pipes in
each row shall be strapped to the battens. The pipe shall not be stacked any higher than
five (5) layers.

All thermoplastic pipes shall be shaded/protected from direct sunlight during handling,
transportation, storage and lying.

The Contractor shall ensure that thermoplastic pipes do not come into contact with
bituminous or other hydrocarbon based materials.

Determination of Ring Stiffness of Thermoplastic pipes BS EN ISO 9969: 1995 (Mechanical

Testing) shall be tested in Sharjah Municipality Central Laboratory.

9/3 GRANULAR MATERIAL FOR PIPE BEDDING

Granular material for pipe bedding shall be free-draining, hard, clean, chemically stable
gravel or crushed stone to BS 882 and shall be graded in accordance with BS 882 : Part 2
as shown in the following table:-

January 2023 9-12 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Table 9-3. Grading of Granular Material for Pipe Bedding

TEST SIEVE PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING SIEVE

( mm) FOR PIPE FOR PIPE
DIAMETERS UPTO DIAMETERS 400 mm
600 mm AND ABOVE
63 - -
37.5 - -
20 - 100
14 100 85 - 100
10 85 - 100 0 -50
5 0 -25 0 -10
2.36 0 -5 -

Notes:

1) For pipes 400 mm to 600 mm diameter, either grading is acceptable.

2) Total acid soluble sulphate content of the material when tested in accordance with
BS1377 shall not exceed 0.3 percent by weight of sulphate expressed as SO3
(sulphur trioxide).

3) The material shall have a Compaction Fraction value not exceeding 0.15.

4) For uPVC pipes only rounded aggregates will be permitted but for all other pipe
materials crushed aggregates may also be used.

9/3.1 Stone for Land Drains

Stone for land drains shall be nominal single size 20 mm in accordance with the following
table or the manufacturer’s recommendations if different, and placed as shown on the
drawings. The stone shall also comply with the general requirements of Clause 9.3.

Table 9-4. Grading of Stone for Land Drains

TEST SIEVE (mm) PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT
PASSING SIEVE
75 -
63 -
37.5 100
20 85-100
14 -
10 0 - 25
5 0- 5
2.36 -

9/3.2 Compaction Fraction Test

January 2023 9-13 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

For testing pipe bedding material, a representative sample of about 40 kg shall be heaped
onto a clean surface and quartered to obtain approximately 10 kg. The moisture content of
the sample should not differ materially from that of the main body of material, at the time of
laying. The latest shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5955: 2001.

A 150 mm internal diameter open ended cylinder 250 mm high, shall be placed on a firm
flat surface and loosely filled, without tamping, from the 10 kg sample. Any surplus material
shall be struck off level with the top of the cylinder. The area around the filled cylinder shall
be cleared of all surplus material and the cylinder then lifted clear of its contents and placed
alongside the material.

Approximately one quarter of the material shall then be replaced into the cylinder and
compacted by tamping vigorously with a 40 mm diameter metal rammer weighing about 1
kg until no further compaction can be obtained. This operation shall then be repeated for
each of the remaining quarters, tamping the final surface as level as possible.

The distance from the top of the cylinder to the surface of final layer shall then be measured
and this value, divided by the height of the cylinder, shall be taken as the Compaction
Fraction which should not exceed 0.15.

9/4 CONVENTIONAL (OPEN TRENCH) PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION

9/4.1 General

This section applies to conventional open-trench pipe works. Non-conventional pipeworks

have been detailed in other Sections.

9/4.2 Nominal Trench Widths

Nominal trench widths for single pipelines shall be defined as 1.50 times the diameter plus
500 mm, subject to a minimum trench width of 750 mm.

Nominal trench widths for two or more pipes in the same trench (laid in parallel with similar
invert levels) shall be defined as the sum of the internal diameters plus 450 mm between
the pipes, plus 750 mm.

Any excavation from the bottom of the trench to 300 mm above the level of the crown of
the pipe which exceeds the nominal widths defined above shall be filled with concrete or
the specified bedding materials as directed on site.

A detailed method statement shall be submitted by the Contractor for agreement by the
Engineer to demonstrate an understanding of the correct method of laying GRP and other
pipes.

Pipelines in Wide Trenches

No wide unsupported trenches shall be permitted, in general, within the area of the Works
and therefore all trenches should conform to the minimum trench widths stated above and
shall be supported with the use of approved trench sheeting or sheet piles. However in
exceptional circumstances wide trenches may be approved by the Engineer in which cases
the following shall apply:-

- Wide trenches shall be constructed to not less than the defined widths for those
categories of Group B flexible pipelines in granular bedding defined below.

January 2023 9-14 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

- Prior to commencing trench excavation in an area an assessment of the Modulus

of Deformation (E's) shall be made of the soils likely to be encountered at springing
level of the pipes. In non-cohesive soils, approved static cone penetrometer tests
shall be carried out prior to excavation. In cohesive soils other approved methods
shall be used to determine E's. Alternatively, standard penetration tests may be
required by the Engineer prior to excavation to suite pipe manufacturer’s standard
method of deflection and trench widths. Tests shall be carried out at intervals to be
determined on site which in variable ground conditions may be to every pipe length.

- If the value of E’s determined from the results of such tests is greater than 2.5
MN/m2 then trench width is not critical. If less than 2.5 MN/m2 then trench widths
shall be constructed to the widths defined in the following table unless alternative
means of increasing the passive resistance of the trench sides are detailed or are
proposed in method statements where economic or environmental restrictions
make wide trenches undesirable.

Table 9-5. Wide Trench Widths for Non-Cohesive Soils

STATIC CONE MODULUS OF WIDE TRENCH WIDTHS

PENETROMETER DEFORMATION (mm)
TEST (KG/cm2) E'S (MN/m2)
8.5 - 7.7 2.50 -2.25 2.5 * dia.
7.7 - 6.1 2.25 -1.80 3.0 * dia.
6.1 - 3.1 1.80 -0.90 4.0 * dia.
3.1 0.90 5.0 * dia.

Alternative solutions to wide trench conditions may be adopted including increasing

stiffness of the pipes used or encasing with concrete as agreed by the Engineer.

9/4.3 Pipelaying and Jointing

Pipes and fittings shall be laid and jointed in accordance with all relevant recommendations
of the manufacturer. Any variations between the manufacturer’s recommendations and this
specification shall be highlighted in the Contractor’s Method Statements and a ruling will
be given with the Engineer’s agreement.

Pipes and fittings shall be checked for soundness and be thoroughly cleaned out
immediately prior to laying and jointing.

The setting of the pipeline to the required levels and alignment shall be carried out by
approved procedure such as boning between sight rails or the use of laser systems. Sight
rails, if used, shall be at a suitable height vertically above the line of pipes or immediately
adjacent thereto, and there shall, at no time, be less than three sight rails in position on
each length of pipelines under construction to any one gradient. Large diameter pipes, 1000
mm diameter or greater, shall be individually set to level and line by instrument.

For pipelines laid in trenches and headings the permissible tolerances in line and level
unless otherwise specified shall be ± 3 mm in level and ± 12 mm from centerline between
manholes or access points. Also where a gravity pipeline or sewer is shown as a straight
line between manholes it will not be accepted as having passed the final test unless a full
circular light can be sighted through the bore of the pipe for the length concerned.

For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings pipes shall be laid with a
gap between the end of the spigot and the base of the socket, or between spigots. This

January 2023 9-15 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

gap shall be not less than 6 mm or greater than one third of the straight draw test dimension
specified for the pipe joint or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, and it shall be
achieved by approved means, such as marking the outside of the pipe or using removable
metal or hardwood feelers.

The annular space between the pipe and the socket at a flexible joint shall be sealed with
an approved joint sealant to prevent the ingress of loose material or concrete. Sealing shall
be done on completion of a satisfactory preliminary testing prior to concreting or backfilling,
but not prior to the test.

For uPVC pipes solvent welded joints with parallel sockets shall not be permitted unless
made in the manufacturer's workshop.

Where flexible jointed pipes are laid to curves the angular displacement at any joint as laid
shall not exceed three quarters of the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
Flanged pipes shall incorporate an annular gasket at the joints. The gaskets shall cover the
full face of the flange and shall have holes cut them in corresponding to the bolt holes in
the flanges. However, in pipes fixed vertically a plain ring covering the flange between the
bolt circle and the bore of the pipe may be used. Gaskets shall be manufactured as
specified in Clause [Link].

When flanged joints are to be made the Contractor shall follow manufacturer’s guidelines
for the tightening of nuts and bolts.

The Contractor shall make sure that all joints are made strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

Pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by concrete anchor blocks
or other means of restraint approved in advance by the Engineer.

After laying a length of pipeline but before preliminary testing (specified in Section 6) is
carried out, the pipeline shall be checked for level and gradient on top of the pipes. If a pipe
is not at the correct level, it shall be unjointed and removed, the bed shall be adjusted and
the pipe shall be re-laid and rechecked for line and level. After the joint has been made and
the preliminary testing completed the annular gap at a socket or collar outside the flexible
jointing ring shall be closed with fine grained clayey soil or cotton waste to prevent the entry
of granular material.

Pipelines shall be temporarily capped when pipe laying ceases to prevent the ingress of
foreign matter. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipes remain clean and free from
obstructions, and if required by the Engineer, the pipelines shall be cleaned out using
approved methods and equipment which do not damage the internal lining of the pipes and
manholes.

9/4.4 Pipelines in Concrete Cradles and Surrounds

Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete cradle or surround they shall be supported
initially above the trench bottom on concrete setting blocks. The blocks shall either be laid
accurately to level and covered with damp-proof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or shall
be provided with two hardwood wedges each to an approved pattern to enable the pipe
level to be adjusted.

The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the
pipes during laying and at least two concrete blocks shall be provided for each pipe.
Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be of Class A. The concrete shall be poured on one
side of the pipe until it can be worked under the pipe along its full length to ensure that no

January 2023 9-16 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

voids develop. The concrete shall then be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until
the required level is reached.

The length of pipeline laid in any one operation before concreting the pipeline shall be that
which in the opinion of the Engineer permits accurate laying of the pipeline and concreting
in an efficient and proper manner. Approved measures appropriate to the pipe material
shall be provided to prevent flotation or other movement during placement or curing of the
concrete.

Concrete cradles to pipes of all diameters and surrounds to pipes of one metre diameter or
less shall be poured in a single lift. Concrete surrounds to pipes over one metre diameter
shall normally be poured in two lifts, with a horizontal joint not more than 100 mm below
the crown of the pipe. Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be interrupted over their full
cross sectional area at each pipe joint, by shaped expansion joint filler. The thickness of
filler shall be 18 mm for pipe diameter less than 450, 36 mm for pipe diameter 450 to 1200
and 54 mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200.

In spigot and socket pipelines the joints in the bed shall be at the face of each socket.
In all flexible joints the annulus of the pipe socket shall be sealed with an approved sealant
to prevent the concrete from entering the pipe joint.

When support to excavations is provided, building paper or an approved material shall be

placed against that support before concreting to facilitate withdrawal of the support.

9/4.5 Pipelines on Granular Beds

Where granular beddings to pipelines are detailed the minimum thickness of bedding
material beneath the pipe shall be:-

150 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes not exceeding 300 mm internal
diameter.

200 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes exceeding 300 mm internal diameter.
The time interval between placing bedding material on the trench formation and
commencing pipe laying shall be as short as is practicable.

The bedding material shall extend to the full width of the trench and shall be compacted in
layers not exceeding 200 mm. The bedding material shall be carefully compacted using a
plate vibrator or other approved equivalent mechanical method. Sufficient passes of a plate
vibrator or other approved mechanical method are required to achieve positive deflection
of flexible pipes to ensure that final deflections are within the specified limits. Hand tamping
or punning will only be permitted where insufficient space is available to allow the use of
mechanical plant.

Recesses shall be formed in the bedding to accommodate pipe joints while ensuring
continuous even support along the pipe length. Bedding material shall be prevented from
entering pipe joints. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully placed
and hand compacted beneath the joint barrel to close any void left by the recess.
Where the formation of the trench is of silt or soft clay and is below the natural water table
a 75 mm blinding layer of sand shall be substituted for the specified bedding material
directly above formation and carefully compacted if directed on site.

9/4.6 Placing Surrounds to Pipelines

In narrow trenches and where the Contractor's method of working involves the use of trench
sheets or other forms of trench support it is imperative that the trench supports are carefully

January 2023 9-17 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

withdrawn to a point above the crown of the pipe as the backfill material is placed to ensure
that voids between surround and trench side will be eliminated. Where the Contractor is
instructed to leave trench supports in place, the tops shall be burned or cut off.

9/4.6.1 Group A Pipe Materials

Except where concrete surrounds are specified or shown on the drawings, either granular
bedding material or approved selected excavated granular material shall be introduced at
both sides of the pipe and compacted until it has been brought up to at least 150 mm above
the crown of the pipe.

The methods of selecting excavated materials may include sieving either in bulk or above
the trench.

Wherever practicable the placing and compaction of the surround material shall be carried
out in sequence with the removal of the trench supports. In particular trench sheets or
boards shall be raised clear of each layer prior to its compaction.

9/4.6.2 Group B Pipe Materials

Except where concrete surrounds are detailed Group B flexible pipelines shall be laid with
granular bedding and surround, as specified, to at least 300 mm above the crown of the
pipe.

9/4.6.3 Compaction of Pipe Surrounds

The granular material shall be carefully laid and compacted at the sides of pipes according
to one of the following methods for alternative types of compaction plant as agreed with or
directed by the Engineer.

Table 9-6. Alternative Methods for Compaction of Pipe Surrounds

SURROUND [Link] ALTERNATIVE METHODS (MINIMUM

MATERIAL THICKNESS NUMBER OF PASSES OF
(mm) COMPACTION PLANT)
HAND VIBRATING 100 KG
RAMMER PLATE POWER
RAMMER
Gravel 200 2 2 2
Sand 150 3 4 4

The Contractor must demonstrate that alternative methods of compaction will provide
positive deflection of flexible pipes during installation.

9/4.6 Pipelines below Permanent Groundwater Level

For Group A and B pipelines located beneath the permanent groundwater level and for all
slotted pipes any granular bedding material or approved selected excavated granular
material forming granular bedding and surround shall be laid on and enclosed within a
geotextile filter fabric membrane.

9/4.7 Backfilling of Trenches – Pipelines/Structures

January 2023 9-18 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

After completion of placement and compaction of the surrounds to the pipelines backfilling
of trenches for pipelines shall proceed using selected excavated materials in accordance
with the specifications for earthworks.

The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe until the depth of fill above
the crown of the pipe is at least 300 mm. Services warning tapes shall be placed over the
pipelines as specified in Clause 9.4.15.

The backfill requirements for trenches around structures shall be the same as that for
pipeline except that compaction by mechanical means shall commence from the formation
level (to the specified densities).

9/4.8 Deflection Measurements on Group B Pipelines

9/4.8.1 General

All Group B pipelines will be subjected to in-situ deflection measurements. Any section of
pipe failing to meet the deflection criteria shall have its surround material re-compacted,
such procedure being repeated until the in-situ deflection is found to be satisfactory.

In the above paragraph deflection shall be considered as the maximum difference between
the measured in-situ diameter and the stated non-deflected diameter on any axis divided
by the non-deflected diameter.

For all pipes the horizontal and vertical deflections shall be measured at each end at points
100 mm and 1.5 m away from the joint and at 3.0 m intervals thereafter, or as directed by
the Engineer. For pipe lengths of less than 3.0 m these deflections shall be measured at
each end at a point 100 mm away from the joint and at the mid-point.

For pipelines smaller than 600 mm diameter deflections shall be checked by pulling through
an approved cylindrical plug dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected
diameter of the pipe.

Alternately, a deflectometer of a form that can be drawn through the pipeline and be
capable of measuring diametric dimensions both vertically and horizontally may be used
for deflection measurement of pipes of diameter less than 600 mm. The deflectometer shall
be calibrated for each diameter regularly in the presence of the Engineer to maintain the
accuracy of the instrument. The device shall also provide a means of identifying where
each deflection measurement was taken along the length of a pipeline. This shall be in the
form of either a continues printout or a visual display on a remote monitor.

For pipes of 600 mm diameter and greater the device shall be in the form of a telescopic
spring loaded rod graduated for each diameter to show percentage deflections.

The Contractor shall tabulate the results of the measurements and copies shall be
submitted to the Engineer immediately after each set of measurements has been taken.

9/4.8.2 Deflection Measurements - GRP Pipes

The measurement shall be taken on at least three separate occasions:

1. After the pipe surround material has been placed and compacted to 300 mm above the
pipe crown.

January 2023 9-19 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

2. On completion of all backfill material up to final ground level but before the dewatering
is removed. This measurement shall be taken within one day of completion of
backfilling.

3. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.

Pipes exhibiting any negative deflection in the vertical in (1) above and/or pipes exhibiting
a deflection in excess of 2% in (2) above or 4% in (3) above shall be exposed and the
surround replaced and re-compacted. Should any deflection exceed 7% that pipe shall be
replaced. Any pipe removed for this reason shall be taken from site and not incorporated
in the permanent works.

All pipes exposed for re-compaction and pipes replaced for any reason shall subsequently
be subject to the three deflection checks listed above. Deflection checks shall also be
carried out on adjacent pipes for 50 m either side of the re-compacted or removed pipes.
9/4.8.3 Deflection Measurements - uPVC and other Plastic Pipes
The measurement shall be taken on at least two separate occasions:

1. As soon as a pipeline has been installed, tested and the trench backfilled, but before
the dewatering is removed.

2. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.

If any of these tests indicate that the deflection may exceed the permitted values the pipe
or pipes shall be replaced. Any pipe removed for this reason shall be taken from site and
not incorporated in the permanent works.

All pipes replaced for any reason shall subsequently be subject to deflection checks as
described above. Deflection checks shall also be carried out on adjacent pipes for 20 m
either side of the removed pipes.

The permissible positive or negative deflections on the pipelines shall be as follows (a

reduction in the diameter is considered to be a negative deflection):-

After Initial Installation 3%

Long Term 5%

9/4.9 Stanks to Pipelines in Granular Bedding

Where pipes are laid on a granular bed or with a granular backfill, a stank, i.e. an
impermeable barrier, shall be provided across the full width of the trench and for the
complete depth of the bedding at intervals not exceeding 50 m, and generally mid-way
between manholes or chambers.

The stank shall consist of:-

Either a 300 mm long plug of fine grained clayey soil or a 300 mm long plug of a mixture of
sand and bitumen consolidated in an approved manner.

Or a mixture of sand and clay or the local material known as sabkha compacted to form an
impermeable barrier at least one metre in length.

Or a layer of thick polyethylene cut to fit around the pipe across the full width of the trench
and laid on the granular bedding material at its natural repose angle.

January 2023 9-20 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

All methods must form an impermeable barrier. Bitumen shall not be used for thermoplastic
pipes.

9/4.10 Thrust and Anchor Blocks to Pressure Pipelines

Underground pressure pipelines shall be provided with concrete blocks as follows:-

Thrust/anchor blocks shall be provided at every installed bend, tee or angle branch.

Anchor/thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines laid to gradients steeper than 1:20, up
to 1:15 every third pipe shall be anchored, up to 1:10 every second pipe and at 1:5 every
pipe shall be anchored.

Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces of thrust blocks and on both
faces of anchor blocks.

Where details are not shown on the drawings the Contractor shall prepare proposals for
thrust and anchor blocks including calculations and submit them to the Engineer's
Representative for approval. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the adequacy of his proposals. Special details shall be shown on the
drawings or instructed at site where environmental or ground conditions dictate.

9/4.11 Pipes Protruding from Structures, Concrete Surrounds and Anchor Blocks

Unless otherwise detailed a pipeline at or below ground level protruding from a structure
shall have two flexible joints adjacent to the structure. A band of an approved concrete
encasement rubber shall wrap around the pipe prior to placement of any concrete such that
the rubber protrudes 25 mm from the concrete. The pipe shall be laid so the distance to
first exposed flexible joint and the distance between first and second joint are as follows:-

Table 9-7. Requirements for Flexible Joints for Protruding Pipes

PIPE DIAMETER MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN

(mm) DISTANCE TO FIRST AND SECOND
FIRST JOINT (mm) JOINT(mm)
MIN. MAX.
Up to 300 150 450 2.5 * dia.
300 to 1000 300 1.5 *dia. 2.5 * dia.
above 1000 450 1.5 * dia. 2.5 * dia.

In the case of Group B pipe materials, particular attention will be placed on elliptical
deflection conditions.

These joints will be required at surrounds and anchor blocks unless directed otherwise on
site.

9/4.11.1 Group A Pipe Materials

Between the structure and the first joint any disturbed ground below the pipe will be
removed and replaced with Class B concrete in the form of a cradle, all to the direction of
the Engineer. The cradle shall not extend beyond the first joint.

Beyond the first flexible joint within the excavated working space of the structure the
concrete fill shall be brought up 300 mm below the pipe invert only. Specified bedding
materials will then be used.

January 2023 9-21 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

9/4.11.2 Group B Pipe Materials

Within the excavated working space for the structure disturbed ground below the pipe will
be removed and replaced with Class B concrete to within 300 mm of the underside of the
pipe. Specified bedding materials will then be used to support the pipe.

The width of the concrete backfill shall not be less than the nominal trench widths except
for any permanent shuttering against temporary trench supports to facilitate removal of
such trench supports after concreting.

Where a flexible pipe passes through a rigid concrete face to a structure or surround the
pipe shall be protected from stress concentration and possible fracture of the pipe at the
concrete face. A 10 mm thick neoprene or other approved synthetic rubber strip shall be
wrapped around and cemented to the pipe unless special wall protection units are used.

The neoprene will normally extend through the width of a wall to a dry chamber or structure
but will be limited to 150 mm or 100 mm is exposed to liquid (groundwater or liquid inside
the structure) a sealant groove shall be formed if detailed and filled with an appropriate,
approved, joint sealant.

Care shall be taken to ensure that the rubber strip is not displaced during concreting.

Where a pipeline protrudes from a concrete surround, no protection from stress

concentration will be required if the surround ends at a flexible joint leaving the next pipe
free. If the surround ends on a pipe barrel the specified protection will be provided and, for
pressure pipes only, the protruding pipe will be wrapped from the edge of the neoprene
strip along to the next flexible joint at which the concrete surround is interrupted with an
approved compressible material such as damp-proof sheeting or building felt of minimum
thickness 2 mm.

9/4.12 Protection of Pipelines and Pipelines Components

9/4.12.1 Pipelines

Protection of pipelines shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations

which shall be included with submission details for agreement by the Engineer. The
minimum requirements are shown below:

Class A concrete protection slabs as detailed on the drawing shall be provided over the
uPVC pipelines under roads when cover to pipe is equal or less than 1.2 m for a gravity
line; and for pressure line at any depth. In case of GRP pipe concrete surround shall be
provided as per drawing if the depth of cover is less than 1.5 m and the pipeline lies within
a strip of 20 m each side of the centre line of the Road Corridor.

9/4.12.2 Pipeline Components

All buried valves, couplings, flange adaptors, and other metal components shall be encased
to guard against corrosion. Other pipe joints, valves and similar items on both buried and
exposed pipelines shall be encased where specified or shown on the drawings.

The encasing shall be by one of the following methods, as detailed.

(1) Surrounding with Class B concrete.

(2) Enclosed by an approved hot-poured bitumen compound.
(3) Wrapped with tape.

January 2023 9-22 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Method (2) shall not be used with plastic pipes.

The item to be encased shall first be cleaned and its original surface treatment made good.
The surface shall be dry before encasing is carried out, which shall not be done before the
pipeline has been tested.

The bitumen compound shall be cast in purpose-built moulds in accordance with

instructions issued by the supplier.

The protective wrapping tape shall be open-weave cotton or synthetic fibre or woven glass
fibre coated on both sides with an even coat of petrolatum (petroleum jelly) containing a
filler. The tape and paste shall be suitable for use in the prevailing climatic soils pumped
liquid and ground water conditions.

Before wrapping with tape the item to be encased shall be enclosed with an approved
mastic or inert putty-like filler which shall be moulded by hand so as to provide a smooth
surface for the tape. The tape shall be tightly spirally wrapped with 25 mm overlaps so as
to enclose the whole of the item and a minimum of 150 mm of pipe length on each side.
The enclosure shall be firmly pressed out to prevent air being trapped under the wrapping.

9/4.13 Indicator Posts to Pressure Mains

Where pressure mains pass through open ground, not adjacent to roads, or where the
danger of accidental breakage by excavation is evident, the Engineer may instruct the
erection of indicator posts of an approved design. Details of the indicator post construction
and spacing shall be shown on the drawings or be directed by the Engineer.

The depth, location and size of the pressure main shall be detailed in Arabic and English,
to an approved design, on an engraved plastic or non-corrodible plate attached to the post.
In addition at all air valve chambers, the Contractor shall erect indicator signs on posts, to
an approved design, at locations described to him by the Engineer.

9/4.14 Enclosing Granular or Stone Surround with Geotextile Filter Fabric

All slotted pipes and pipes laid beneath the permanent groundwater level the granular
bedding material shall be laid on and enclosed within a geotextile filter fabric.

Filter fabric used for subsurface drainage works shall consist of long-chain synthetic
polymer fibers composed of at least 85 percent by mass polyolefin, polyesters, or
polyamides. They shall be formed into a network such that the filaments or yarns retain
dimensional stability relative to each other, including selvedges.

The fabric shall be stabilised against ultra-violet light, inert to commonly uncounted
chemicals and chemical properties of the in-situ soil and water, and it shall conform to the
following minimum requirements:

Table 9-8. Requirements for Geotextile Fabric for Subsurface Drainage

PROPERTY TEST METHOD MIN. REQUIREMENTS

Grab Strength (N) ASTM D 4632 800
Puncture Strength (N) ASTM D 4833 355
Burst Strength (kPa) ASTM D 3786 2000
Trapezoid Tear (N) ASTM D 4533 220

January 2023 9-23 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

PROPERTY TEST METHOD MIN. REQUIREMENTS

Permeability (m/s) ASTM D 4491 10-4
Apparent Opening Size (mm) ASTM D 4751 0.6
Ultraviolet Degradation ASTM D 4355 70 @ 150 h
(Percent Retained Strength)

Where filter fabric is used to enclose granular or stone pipe surrounds, the fabric will be
placed on the prepared trench formation and carefully supported during pipe laying
operations. When the pipe has been laid complete with surround to the correct level the
filter fabric shall be closed over the top of the surround by forming a 'lap' of minimum width
500 mm. All membrane joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 500 mm.

Care shall be taken not to puncture or damage the membrane in any way during installation
or during backfilling of the trench. Fabric damaged or displaced before or during installation
or during placement of overlaying aggregate material shall be replaced or repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be maintained wrapped in a heavy-
duty protective covering and protected from direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays and
temperatures greater than 60oC.

9/4.15 Underground Services Warning Tapes

Service protection tapes shall be installed above all sewage, drainage and irrigation
pipelines and pressure mains constructed or exposed under this contract excluding
individual service connections.

For pipelines with the top of the pipe barrel more than 900 mm below finished surface level
the tape shall be placed over the centreline of the pipeline at 600 mm below finished surface
level during backfilling and compaction operations. For pipelines with less than 900 mm
cover to the top of the pipe barrel the tape shall be placed over the centreline of the pipe at
300 mm above the top of the pipe barrel during backfilling, compaction and reinstatement
operations.

The tape shall be continuous over pipelines and at joints between tapes from separate rolls
the joint shall be lapped a minimum of one metre.

Tapes shall be durable and detectable by electro-magnetic means using low output
generator equipment. They shall remain legible and colour-fast in all soil conditions at pH
values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.

The tapes shall be flexible with a minimum width of 150 mm and thickness of 150 microns
and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

Site tests to confirm detectability of the warning tapes after installation and backfill shall be
performed when ordered by the Engineer.

Text in Arabic and English indicating the protected services lying below the tape shall be
permanent ink bonded to resist prolonged chemical attack by corrosive acids and alkalis
with the message repeated at a maximum interval of two metres. Tapes shall be colour
coded as follows, with black text as indicated. The sign and styles of the text shall be
approved by the Engineer.

January 2023 9-24 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Sewers : Yellow
CAUTION : Sewer below

Sewage pressure mains : Yellow

CAUTION : Sewage pressure main below

Drains : Yellow
CAUTION : Drain below

Drainage pressure main : Yellow

CAUTION : Drainage pressure main below

Irrigation pressure mains : Orange

CAUTION : Irrigation pressure main below

9/5 PIPEWORKS WITHIN STRUCTURES

(1) Pipework shall be supplied to the general arrangements and limits indicated on the
Contract drawings and shall be supplied complete with all joint rings, gaskets, washers
to each side of a bolted joint, nuts, bolts, grease and any other components necessary
for the complete installation.

(2) The layout and design of the pipework shall be such as to facilitate its erection and the
dismantling of any section for maintenance of associated plant by inclusion of
approved mechanical coupling or flange adaptors.

(3) Where a common delivery pipe is used, individual pump delivery branches unless
otherwise shown on the drawings shall be jointed to it in a horizontal plane and angled
to prevent sharp changes of flow direction.

(4) Adequate supporting and anchoring arrangements for all pipes shall be included which
may take the form of straps, stays, tie bars or concrete cradles. All pipe hangers and
supports inside pumping stations and valve chambers or other structures shall be of
320S17 stainless steel. All fixing bolts shall be stainless steel grade 320S17.

(5) GRP pipes shall be provided with puddle flanges where they pass through the walls
of underground or water retaining structures.

(6) Small bore pipework for sump pumps, vents, etc., may be an approved plastic
material.

(7) All pipes connected to pressure vessels, pumps, etc., shall have flanged connections.

(8) All pipes shall be checked for alignment and mating of flanges and connections before
secured. Pipes shall not be sprung into position.

January 2023 9-25 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

9/6 MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES

9/6.1 General

The Contractor shall construct all manholes, chambers, and special structures including
transition chambers and outfall structures as indicated on the drawings and herein
specified.

Manholes, chambers, and special structures shall conform in shape, size, dimensions,
materials, and other respects to the details indicated on the drawings appended to
Particular Specification Vol. 2 – Part II (Appendix A) or as ordered by the Engineer.

9/6.2 Construction of Manholes, Chambers, and Special Structures

All manholes, chambers, and special structures shall have reinforced-concrete bases as
detailed on the drawings. Manhole bases for storm-sewers less than 600 mm and bases
for chambers may be precast or cast in place at the Contractor's option and as approved
by the Engineer. For precast reinforced-concrete manhole bases, openings for pipes shall
be cast in the base at the required location during its manufacture. Field cut openings will
not be permitted. All other manhole and special structure bases shall be cast in place as
indicated on the drawings.

Manhole and chamber cover slabs shall be cast in place reinforced-concrete as marked on
the drawings. The ductile iron frames and covers for manholes and chambers shall be
brought to grade by the number of courses of concrete blocks shown on the drawings or
as instructed by the Engineer and a reinforced concrete frame into which the ductile iron
frame is embedded.

Class B concrete shall be cast to a minimum thickness of 150 mm around the concrete
blocks for rigidity or as detailed on the drawings.

The inverts shall conform accurately to the size of the adjoining pipes. Side inverts shall be
curved and main inverts (where direction changes) shall be laid out in smooth curves of the
longest possible radius which is tangential, within the manhole, to the centerlines of
adjoining pipelines all as indicated on the drawings and instructed by the Engineer.

The ductile iron frames, grates and covers shall be to the Sharjah Municipality standard
frame, grate and cover as indicated on the drawings and hereinafter specified in Clause
9.7.

All benching and channel shall be formed with Class A concrete unless shown otherwise
in the drawing. 7 mm minimum GRP laminate shall be applied to benching and channel.
Manhole walls shall be plain Class A concrete formed to the shape and thickness shown
on the drawings by the use of sound formwork material to give a fair faced finish.

Pipes entering and leaving manholes, chambers and special structures shall be laid soffit
to soffit unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Details of pipelines entering and leaving
manholes, chambers, etc., shall be as specified for pipes protruding from structures in
accordance with Clause 9.4.11.

All construction joints to manholes, chambers and special structures shall be perfectly
watertight. Waterstop across joints in structures as specified in Clause 4/26.3 shall be
provided where detailed in the drawings or as directed. Joints shall be fully scabbled.

January 2023 9-26 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Manholes and chambers shall be completely constructed as the Works progress and as
each one is reached by the pipework. Frames and covers shall be placed immediately after
the completion of the manhole and chamber.

9/6.2.1 Road Guidelines

Gullies shall comprise the gully grating and frame and the polypropylene gully pot, all as
shown on the drawing.

The gully pots shall be supplied with a fibre glass sand bucket with lifting handle, as detailed
in the drawing. The sand bucket shall have perforations in its upper part and small holes 3
mm in diameter in its bottom part. The total area of perforations shall not be less than
20,000 sq. mm and the minimum diameter of each hole shall be 50 mm. The depth of the
bucket shall not be less than 750 mm.

The gully pot shall be surrounded by a minimum of 150 mm of concrete as shown on the
drawing.

The connecting pipe between the gully pot and the drain/manhole shall be 160 mm dia.
uPVC.

The connection into the drain pipe shall be made by means of an oblique junction which
may be of uPVC.

9/6.3 Access Covers, Frames, and Grates

9/6.3.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all ductile iron frames, grates, and covers conforming to the
details shown on the drawings, and as specified in Clause 9.7 to Sharjah Municipality
Standards.

The Contractor shall submit for approval detailed shop and working drawings of all castings
before fabrication. Such drawings shall be obtained from the supplier(s) he chooses to
select from the approved list of Sharjah Municipality (see Clause 9.7.1).

The castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even-grained ductile iron, smooth, free
from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of every nature which would render
them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Covers and frames contact surfaces
shall be machined and the compatible frames and cover carefully marked to ensure correct
covers and frames are matched on site.

If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain from the supplier/ manufacturer a
guarantee that replacement component parts will be available for a minimum period of 10
years from the issue date of the Completion Certificate. All covers, frames and grates shall
be delivered to Sharjah with a transit protective packaging or wrapping. Any damage
occurring to the approved coating system shall be made good prior to installation.

One set of pricing and lifting keys of approved design shall be supplied by the Contractor
with each twenty manhole covers and frames supplied.

9/6.3.2 Access Covers and Frames

All access covers and frames shall be of heavy duty construction complying with BS EN124
and the requirements of the Sharjah Municipality Standards (Clause 9.7). With the

January 2023 9-27 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

exception of those for sewerage manholes, access covers and frames shall be sand tight
with seating’s designed to be non-rocking unless detailed otherwise.

Double triangular covers must be loosely coupled by stainless steel bolts with nuts provided
with an approved method to render the nuts incapable of both undue tightening and
loosening.

Holes provided in non-ventilating covers for lifting keys shall be appropriately shaped
pockets which shall not penetrate through and there may be no projections above cover
level.

Both sides of covers and frames shall be protected with an approved epoxy coating system
appropriate to the Sharjah environment. The coating system may be applied at the place
of manufacture or in Sharjah under controlled application conditions approved by the
Engineer.

Covers for sewerage manholes and chambers shall also be provided with a reinforced
plastic sealing plate. The design of cover, frame and sealing plate shall be such that no
load can be transferred from the cover to the sealing plate.

Access covers shall be as follows:-

(1) Sewerage

(a) Manhole covers shall be 600 mm x 600 mm square clear opening double triangular
heavy duty, embossed with the word 'Sewerage' in Arabic and English.

(b) Inspection chamber covers shall be single seal 600 mm x 600 mm square clear
opening heavy or medium duty, embossed with the word 'Sewerage' in Arabic and
English. Alternately, 600 mm x 600 mm square clear opening double triangular covers
may be used subject to approval by the Engineer.

(2) Storm/Land drainage

Manhole covers shall be non-ventilated, 600 mm diameter clear opening double semi-
circular heavy duty with sealing plate, embossed with the word 'Storm' in Arabic and
English.

(3) Pumping Stations, Associated Chambers and Where Specified

They shall be rectangular 600 mm x 750 mm or 600 mm x 900 mm or multiples of these

sizes, as detailed on the drawings with concrete infill, and shall be heavy duty.

Where ventilated covers are detailed the total area of ventilation shall not be less than 5 %
of the minimum clear opening area and the covers shall be provided with suitable protective
sand traps which shall seat in the access cover frame.

9/6.3.3 Reinforced Plastic Sealing Plates to Access Covers

Reinforced plastic sealing plates to access covers shall be designed to provide a push-fit,
gas-tight seal with the cover frame. The sealing plate shall be in the form of a plug with a
flange to prevent the plate passing into the manhole. The seal shall be achieved by means
of an approved integral synthetic rubber gasket mechanically locked into the periphery of
the plate. The gasket shall be suitable for the service temperature range 0oC to 60oC and
possess good weathering and H2S resistance. Any lubricant used on the seal shall be

January 2023 9-28 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

silicon based. The underside of the plate shall have a resin-rich finish and there shall be no
exposed fibres. Cut and/or drilled faces shall be sealed with resin.

The plate shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm and be capable of withstanding a static
load of 150 kg applied centrally over a 150 cm square surface area with a deflection,
measured at the centre of the plate, not exceeding 25 mm.

A minimum of two number reinforced plastic lifting handles shall be provided per plate.
They shall be of the same materials as the plate and securely laminated to the plate or
fixed by stainless steel blind rivets.

The complete sealing plate including gasket shall be resistant to 10% sulphuric acid at 50oC
for 100 days.

9/6.3.4 Road Gully Gratings and Frames

Road gully gratings and frames shall be of ductile iron construction to BS EN124 badged
to Sharjah Municipality Standard (Clause 4.7), and having a minimum waterway of 900 sq.
cm. The grating and frame shall be of a non-rocking construction and shall be dimensioned
as detailed in the drawing.

Gully gratings shall be of the raised kerb type complete with sand seal, road retaining bar
and a removable GRP debris bucket. The weir depth shall be a minimum of 165 mm and
the frame and cover are to be protected with an approved epoxy coating system
appropriate at the place of manufacture or in Sharjah under controlled application
conditions approved by the Engineer. The clear opening size shall permit removal of the
GRP grit sand bucket.

9.7 SHARJAH MUNICIPALITY STANDARDS FOR COVERS AND GRATINGS

Table 9-9. Standards for Covers and Gratings for Storm/Land Drainage

MANHOLE GULLY GRATINGS PUMPING

REQUIREMENT IN ROAD OUT OF FLUSHED UPSTAND STN. ACCESS
ROAD KERB KERB COVER
Double Semi- Double
Shape Circular Semi- Square - Rectangular
Circular
Size of clear 600 x 750
600 dia. 600 dia. width Nom.450 weir dpt 165
Opening 600 x 900

Standard BS EN BS EN BS EN BS EN BS EN124
124 124 124 124

Strength D400 C250 D400 150 KN

(A 350) (B 150) (A 350) (B 150) D400

Material Ductile Ductile Ductile Ductile Ductile

Iron Iron Iron Iron Iron

Protective
Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy
Coating
Ventilation No No - - No

January 2023 9-29 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

MANHOLE GULLY GRATINGS PUMPING

REQUIREMENT IN ROAD OUT OF FLUSHED UPSTAND STN. ACCESS
ROAD KERB KERB COVER
Construction Solid Solid - - Concrete Infill

Sealing Plate Yes Yes - - -

Inscriptions Storm Storm Storm Storm Storm

Tightness Yes Yes - - -

Rocking No No No - No

Locking No No No - No

Interchangeability Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Other - - - GRP GRID Special Keys

Suppliers 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1, 2

Table 9-10. Standards for Covers and Gratings for Sewerage

HOUSE PUMPING STN.

CONNECTION ACCESS
REQUIREMENT MANHOLE
CHAMBER COVER

IN ROAD OUT OF
ROAD
Double Double
Shape Square Rectangular
Triangular Triangular
Size of clear 600 x 750
600 x 600 600 x 600 600 x 600
opening 600 x 900
Standard BS EN124 BS EN124 BS EN124 BS EN124

Strength D 400 (A 350) C 250 (B 150) C 250 (B 150) D 400

Material Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron

Protective Coating Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy

Ventilation No No No No

Construction Solid Solid Solid Concrete Infill

Sealing Plate Yes Yes Yes -

Inscriptions Sewerage Sewerage Sewerage -

Tightness Yes Yes Yes -

Rocking No No No No

January 2023 9-30 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

HOUSE PUMPING STN.

CONNECTION ACCESS
REQUIREMENT MANHOLE
CHAMBER COVER

IN ROAD OUT OF
ROAD
Locking No No No -

Interchangeability Yes Yes Yes Yes

Other - - - Special Keys

Suppliers 1-5 1-5 1-5 1, 2

9.7.1 Approved List of Suppliers

1. ELKINGTON
2. PASSAVANT
3. STANTON
4. SELFOCK
5. GLYNWED BRICKHOUSE

January 2023 9-31 Section 9 – Pipes and Pipework

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 10
Brickwork and Blockwork

January 2023 Section 10 – Brickwork and Blockwork

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

10/1 MATERIALS
10/2 CONSTRUCTION

January 2023 Section 10 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 10 – BRICKWORK AND BLOCK WORK

10/1 MATERIALS

10/1.1 Concrete Bricks and Blocks

All concrete Brickworks & Blockworks shall conform to DM Local Order # 44/1990.

Concrete bricks and blocks shall be constructed from Class B (sulphate resisting Portland
Cement) concrete but the coarse aggregate shall be 10 mm to 5 mm. The blocks shall be
cast in clean oiled moulds.

They shall be free from cracks, uniform in size, true to shape, free from deleterious matter,
clean, hard, impervious with smooth faces in appearance similar to normal Class B
concrete and with well-defined arises.

Bricks and blocks shall not be incorporated into the Works until they have matured under
suitable conditions for 28 days.

10/1.2 Bricks

Engineering bricks and special purpose bricks such as radial bricks, weir bricks, copings
and bull nosed bricks shall have an average compressive strength of at least 69 N/mm 2
and an average absorption not exceeding 4.5 percent by weight measured by a standard
boiling or vacuum method.

Faces of engineering bricks to be exposed to the weather or liquids shall not be wire cut.

Bricks for arches and circular work of 1.5 metres and less in diameter shall be purpose
made radial bricks..

10/1.3 Sand and Mortar

Sand for mortar shall comply with the following table:-

Table 10-1. Sand for Mortar

PERCENTAGE BY MASS PASSING SIEVE

RENDERING BRICKWORK/GENERAL
SIEVE SIZE PURPOSES
5.00 mm 100 100
2.36 mm 90 - 100 90 - 100
1.18 mm 70 - 100 70 - 100
600 microns 40 -80 40 - 100
300 microns 5 -40 5 -70
150 microns 0 -10 0 -15

10/1.4 Lime and Mortar

Lime for cement-lime and lime-sand mortar shall be the hydrated type.

January 2023 10-1 Section 10 – Brickwork and Blockwork

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

10/2 CONSTRUCTION

10/2.1 General

Bricks and blocks shall be properly stacked on level hard standing. Broken blocks shall be
removed from the site.

Bricks shall be adequately protected from inclement weather.

During hot and dry weather bricks and blocks shall be wetted as necessary and the tops of
walls shall be wetted before a course is laid

All faces of brickwork or blockwork will be kept clean and no rubbing down of exposed faces
will be permitted.

Vertical faces of all bricks shall be well buttered before being laid and the whole well grouted
at each course.

Brickwork and blockwork should be built in a uniform manner. Corners and other advanced
work should be raked back and not raised above the general level more than 1.0 m at one
lift.

All blocks shall be laid on even full beds of mortar; vertical faces of all blocks shall be well
buttered before being laid and the whole well grouted at each course.

The overall dimensions of four blocks laid in mortar shall not exceed by more than 25 mm
the overall dimensions of the same blocks laid dry.

10/2.2 Engineering Brickwork

All concrete Brickworks & Blockworks shall conform to DM Local Order # 44/1990.

Unless otherwise specified or ordered all engineering brickwork shall be built in English
bond.

In all engineering brickwork the overall dimensions of four bricks laid in mortar shall not
exceed by more than 25 mm the overall dimensions of the same bricks laid dry.

When concrete is to be faced with brickwork, header bricks shall be built into every fourth
course and at intervals of 2 bricks horizontally so as to project 1/2 brick into the concrete.
Headers in successive courses shall be staggered.

10/2.3 Blockwork

All concrete Brickworks & Blockworks shall conform to DM Local Order # 44/1990.

All blockwork shall be built level, plumb and true to line with all perpends in line vertically.

Blockwork shall be built in stretcher bond and alternate courses shall be bonded in at all
junctions. All blockwork shall be set in gauged mortar as described to the lengths, heights
and thicknesses shown on the drawings. Fair and fair-faced work shall be kept perfectly
clean and no rubbing down of blockwork will be allowed. Blockwork to be plastered shall
have joints struck off flush and left rough.

January 2023 10-2 Section 10 – Brickwork and Blockwork

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

10/2.4 Cement Mortar

Mortar for precast concrete units, brickwork and blockwork shall be gauged in the
proportions of one part of cement to three parts of sand. Lime shall only be added if
specifically ordered.

Cement mortar shall be mixed on a clean surface in small quantities sufficient only for 30
minutes work and shall not be remixed or worked up again after setting or hardening; any
mortar that has become set or hard shall be rejected and removed from the site.

Ingredients shall be measured in proper boxes and shall be turned over and thoroughly
mixed on a wooden platform.

10/2.5 Cement Lime Mortar

Cement lime (gauged) mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement, one part of lime
and six parts of sand by volume (1:1:6). All materials shall be accurately gauged using
gauge boxes and shall be thoroughly mechanically mixed.

Mortar that has begun to set shall not be revived or re-used.

10/2.6 Cement Mortar Rendering

Cement mortar rendering shall consist of two or more coats; the undercoat shall be 13 mm
thickness and scored to form a key for the final coat which shall be not less than 6 mm in
thickness. The finished coat shall be worked with proper metal floats, and the face left with
an even and polished surface. The mortar for the undercoat of the rendering shall be
gauged in the proportion of one part of cement to three parts of sand, and the finished coat
shall be in the proportion of one part of cement to two parts of sand.

For at least 24 hours before rendering is applied the concrete or brickwork face or previous
coat of rendering shall be thoroughly soaked with water, and the finished rendering shall
be watered at least four times a day and kept damp for a period of a least fourteen days
after completion. Not more than three days shall elapse between the application of one
coat and its being covered up with a second or finishing coat. All arises shall be sharp and
linear.

When rendering is to be applied to brickwork, the joints shall be raked and cleaned out to
a depth of 13 mm.

January 2023 10-3 Section 10 – Brickwork and Blockwork

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Section 11
Inspection and Testing of
Pipelines and Structures

January 2023 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and Structures

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB-SECTION DESCRIPTION

11/1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF PIPELINES

11/2 TESTING OF PIPELINES
11/3 TESTING OF VALVES
11/4 TESTING OF RENOVATED AND REPLACED PIPELINES
11/5 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

January 2023 Section 11 – TOC

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SECTION 11 – INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINES AND

STRUCTURES

11/1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF PIPELINES

The Contractor shall ensure during and after construction that the pipes remain clean and
free of all silt, mortar, debris and other obstructions, and if required by the Engineer, the
pipelines shall be cleaned out using approved methods and equipment which do not
damage the internal lining of the pipes and manholes. When work is not in progress the
open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an approved watertight plug or
stopper to prevent the ingress of deleterious matter into pipelines.

After backfilling pipe trenches and completing chambers, hatch boxes, etc., and before the
trench surfaces are reinstated, the interior of pipelines shall be cleaned of silt and debris
by approved methods for inspection by the Engineer's Representative as follows:-

All newly constructed pipelines of 600 mm (nom.) internal diameter and smaller shall have
a loose plug passed through them to show that they are clear of obstruction and free from
deflection. The loose plug shall be dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected
diameter of the pipe. Alternately, a deflectometer capable of measuring diametric
dimensions both vertically and horizontally may be used as specified in Clause 9.4.8.

All newly constructed pipelines greater than 600 mm (nom.) internal diameter will after
cleaning be inspected from the inside and the Contractor shall provide a suitable trolley for
this purpose.

In addition gravity pipelines or sewers shown as straight lines between manholes on the
drawings shall be subjected to a light sighting test as detailed in the pipe laying specification
Clause 9.4.3.

Pipelines, manholes, chambers/structures will be inspected again before being put in

service or taking over (whichever is sooner) and if required by the Engineer's
Representative shall be cleaned again in whole or in part by suitable means which may
include, if directed, flushing with clean water. All shall be in accordance with BS EN 14161:
2003.

11/2 TESTING OF PIPELINES

11/2.1 General

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water used for testing
and cleaning of pipelines which shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer.
All water required for testing and cleaning shall be provided by the Contractor at his cost.

Prior to commencement of flushing or testing, approval shall be obtained to the methods

and programme for testing and to the method of disposal of all fluids used for flushing or
testing purposes. Under no circumstances will permission be given for the discharge of
such fluids into the existing sewerage system.

January 2023 11-1 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts which are not part of a
live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any resulting damage made
good after use.

If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably protected with
fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by the general public and will not
be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved means of preventing the formation of mosquito
larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be employed.

Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be applied in the presence of the Engineer's
Representative. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours before hand of
his intention to test a section of pipeline. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide
complete plant and all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as may be necessary for effectively testing
the pipelines to the specified pressures.

Pipelines shall be properly completed and supported before being put under test. No testing
will be permitted until seven days after thrust blocks and other holding down works have
been completed.

For both gravity and pressure pipelines only testing of new, renovated, or replaced sections
of pipelines and fittings will be required under the Contract, in accordance with this
Specification, unless detailed otherwise. Such testing will be carried out before making final
connections to the existing network. However where tees or other fittings are inserted into
existing pipelines and where lengths of pipeline are replaced no backfilling will be allowed
at the tees or fittings or at the joints between new and existing pipework until the pipeline
has been returned to service and a visual inspection of all such fittings and joints made at
the network pressure.

Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail the Contractor shall replace
defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective work as instructed
following which cleaning and testing will be repeated until the Engineer's Representative
certifies the pipeline to be satisfactory.

11/2.2 Testing of Non-Pressure Pipelines

All non-pressure pipelines of 600 mm nominal diameter or smaller shall be given a

preliminary air test when the pipeline is bedded and jointed before backfilling and a final
water test after backfilling in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Unless otherwise instructed non-pressure pipelines shall be tested in sections between

manholes.

Preliminary and final air and water tests will not normally be applied to pipelines greater
than 600 mm (nom.) internal diameter and acceptance of these pipelines will be dependent
on satisfactory visual inspection of the pipes and joints.

Air Test (Preliminary Test)

After a length of pipeline is bedded and jointed, and before backfilling, it shall be given a
preliminary test as detailed below:

1. The Contractor shall plug all pipe outlets with suitable plugs, and brace each plug
securely where needed.

2. Air shall be pumped in slowly to the pipe until a pressure of 100 mm head of water is
indicated on a manometer connected to the system.

January 2023 11-2 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3. After the internal pressure of 100 mm is obtained, two minutes shall be allowed for the
air temperature to stabilize within the pipe.

4. Air may be added to restore the pressure to 100 mm.

5. During a further period of 5 minutes (without further pumping of air) the pressure should
not fall below 75 mm.

6. Release of the air pressure shall be carried out by removal of the stopper at the end of
the pipeline away from the manometer which will remain connected.

Failure to carry out the air pressure release in this manner shall render the test invalid.

7. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4 hours after sunrise
or earlier than 4 hours before sunset during the summer period unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.

Water Test (Final Test)

After backfilling the length of pipeline under test, it shall be given the following final test:

1. All branches and open ends shall be closed with suitable stoppers, secured with
longitudinal braces before testing commences.

2. Water shall be filled from the lowest point and air allowed to escape. No entrapped air
shall remain in the pipeline while testing.

3. An internal pressure equivalent to a head of water of depth to invert of the pipeline plus
1.25 m, or 4 m head whichever is greater shall be maintained for 30 minutes to allow
for initial absorption of water.

4. After that, the test pressure shall be maintained for 60 minutes and water added shall
be measured.

5. Pipeline shall be treated as passed if water consumption in 60 minutes does not exceed
7.5 litres per metre of diameter per 30 m of length of pipeline under test.

Where in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative the above test is not sufficiently
indicative of water tightness by reason of high ground water levels the test will not be
applied. Acceptance of the pipelines will then depend on satisfactory inspection or testing
for infiltration as referred to below, and air test of the pipeline in manhole lengths.

The Engineer may require any length of pipe suspected of being damaged to be retested
by the water test at any time during the contract period.

Infiltration Test

After completion of backfilling and restoration of normal subsoil conditions, all gravity
pipelines and manholes shall be examined for infiltration as follows:

1. All inlets to the system shall be closed sufficiently to prevent the entrance of water.

2. Pumping of groundwater shall be discontinued for at least 3 days prior to the test for
infiltration.

January 2023 11-3 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

3. The section of the pipeline under test, including manholes, shall be accepted as
satisfactory if the infiltration does not exceed 1.00 litre per hour per metre of pipe line
per metre of nominal internal diameter.

Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the infiltration test, if there is any discernible
flow of water entering the pipeline at a point which can be located either by visual or closed
circuit television inspection, appropriate measures shall be taken to stop such infiltration.

11/2.3 Testing of Pressure Pipelines

All pressure pipelines of 675 mm or more internal diameter shall have each joint individually
tested by means of an approved joint testing apparatus.

Pipelines of less than 675 mm shall be subjected to a preliminary air test as soon as a
length of pipe has been laid and before backfilling. Pressure pipelines shall then be given
a final test using water after they have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected.

Preliminary pressure testing of pipelines may be carried out if so required by the Engineer
with partial backfill only and exposed joints, but the stability and safety of the Works must
be ensured at all times.

Each test shall be restricted to pipes of one class. Pipelines shall be tested in sections not
exceeding 500 metres or between valve positions. In addition the whole pipeline shall be
tested upon completion. Particular care must be taken to isolate air valves, etc., not to apply
higher pressure than specified at any point on the pipelines and to ensure that the pipelines
are adequately anchored before any test is carried out.

Gauges used for testing pressure pipelines shall be capable of reading increments of 0.1
metre head. Before any pressure gauge is used, the Contractor shall arrange for it to be
checked independently and a dated certificate of its accuracy shall be provided to the
Engineer. Calibration of pressure gauges shall be carried out at regular intervals as
required by the Engineer

Air Test (Preliminary Test)

As soon as a length of pressure pipe has been laid and before backfilling, when applicable
and when ordered it shall be subjected to the following preliminary test:

1. The Contractor shall plug all pipe outlets with suitable plugs, and brace each plug
securely where needed.

2. Air shall be pumped in slowly to the pipe until a pressure of 300 mm head of water is
indicated on a manometer connected to the system.

3. After the internal pressure of 300 mm is obtained, two minutes shall be allowed for the
air temperature to stabilize within the pipe.

4. Air may be added to restore the pressure to 300 mm.

5. The test will not be satisfactory if the air pressure falls to less than 275 mm during a
period of 5 minutes without further pumping of air.

Water Test (Final Test)

Pressure pipelines shall be given the following final test using water after they have been
backfilled, cleaned and inspected:

January 2023 11-4 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

1. All the joints of the pipeline shall be left open for the purpose of inspection for leakage
if any, where practicable or instructed by the Engineer.

2. Pipe ends shall be closed with suitable stoppers, secured with longitudinal braces/thrust
block, before testing commences.

3. Water shall be filled slowly (to prevent possible water hammer) from the lowest points
and air allowed to escape through an air vent fixed for the purpose at the highest points
of the pipeline section under test. No entrapped air shall remain in the pipeline while
testing.

4. Pressure in the pipeline shall then be raised steadily upto and maintained at the rated
pressure for a period of 30 minutes to allow for absorption and achieve conditions as
stable as possible for testing.

5. If no leakage has been observed, pumping shall then be resumed and the pressure
slowly raised to the specified test pressure.

6. Unless specified elsewhere or directed otherwise by the Engineer, the test pressure
shall be 900 KN per square metre (91.8 m head of water).

7. Test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump for a period of
60 minutes and the amount of makeup water required to maintain the pressure shall be
accurately measured (to the nearest 1/8 litre).

8. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if all the following conditions are
satisfied:
a. No water is visible coming out of the pipe or joints at any point;

b. Amount of make-up water required does not exceed 1 litre per hour per
100 mm diameter per kilometer of pipeline under test;

c. The loss of the pressure during the test period does not exceed 70KN per
square metre.

11/3 TESTING OF VALVES

Valves and all pipelines appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested together with the
pipeline in which they are installed. Valves shall be tested for operation under working
pressure and shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and are
installed to tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.

11/4 TESTING OF RENOVATED AND REPLACED PIPELINES

All non-pressure pipelines renovated or replaced by slip lining, soft lining, or pipe bursting
methods shall be given an air test or water test per Clause 11.2.2 in the presence and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 11-5 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

11/5 TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

All water retaining structures shall be visually inspected to confirm that there is no
infiltration. Where it is required by the Engineer, water retaining structures shall be tested
for watertightness. The structure shall be filled with water and shall stand for a period of
three days, to allow for absorption. The structure shall be considered satisfactory if,
subsequent to this period, there shall be no fall in level over a period of 24 hours (after
making the allowance for rainfall and evaporation) and there shall be no visible leaks, or
damp surface areas.

This shall be carried out before any backfilling and before the application of any external
concrete protection has taken place. Any damages revealed as a result of such tests shall
be made good to satisfaction of the Engineer.

January 2023 11-6 Section 11 – Inspection and Testing of Pipelines and

Structures
Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

APPENDICES

January 2023 Appendices

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

APPENDIX A – SCHEDULE OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TO BE

SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE SITE LABORATORY

All material and work testing to be carried out by contractor’s site laboratory with a 10% random test by
Sharjah Municipality laboratory.

Site Laboratory

The Contractor shall supply and maintain Site Laboratory in full working condition as to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Laboratory shall be stationary and located within the vicinity of the Engineer Office. It shall
be constructed of weatherproof prefabricated construction or rented facility and have a floor area of not less
than 100 square meters, the laboratory shall be fully air conditioned with all utility, services, furniture,
equipment, apparatus and fittings. The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for maintaining the
building utilities and all testing equipment in full working order during the progress of the works and the
contractor shall provide disposable supplies such as filter paper, trichloro-ethylene, speedy moisture
reagent and other items required from time to time in connection with the work.

The laboratory shall include, furnished office, Asphalt test equipment, Soil and concrete test equipment,
washroom and toilet. Prior to the start of the works, the Engineer shall inspect the laboratory to ensure its
compliance with this Specification. On completion of the works, the laboratory will be removed, and the site
will be made good and clean and the laboratory and equipment will remain the property of the contractor.

The following laboratory equipment are as a guidance to the contractor for the testing requirements. The
contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment to carry out all required testing of the works as per
Specification requirement. If the site laboratory is not capable of satisfying any test, the Engineer has the
right to order the contractor to carry out the required tests in an independent laboratory on the contractor
expense. If the contractor fails to comply with this specification at any time during the contract period, the
Engineer may order any of the followings:

1. Stoppage of all the work until the specification has been complied with.

2. Order any required sampling and testing to be performed at any other laboratory designated by
the Engineer at the contractor expense.

January 2023 A -1 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Testing Equipment

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

SOIL SECTION

1. General purpose electric oven, capable of thermostatic control at 1

any temperature up to 150° C, dimensions 615x950x430mm.

2. Hot Air oven, stainless steel interior range up to 250°C, internal 2

dimensions 455x405x355mm

3. Semi-automatic balance 25kg x 1 grm. capacity.

a. With a scoop type pan and set of weights 1

b. With a flat type pan and set of weights 1
c. Balance to weight 25 kg 1
d. Balance to Max. tang 1

4. Semi-automatic, top loading balance capacity 2 kg x 0.1 grm or 1.2 1

kg x 0.01grm.

5. Liquid limit apparatus 1

6. Tools for the above + one glass plate 2

7. Vacuum desiccator and vacuum pump 1 each

8. Silica Gel 2 kg

9. Porcelain Evaporating Dishes, 150mm dia. 4

10. Mortar and Pestle 1

11. Soil colour chart 1

12. Organic Impurity test set 1

13. Spatula (palette knives) stainless steel 150mm long blad 3

14. a. Beakers Pyrex 600ml. and covers 4

b. Beakers (Polythene) 600 ml. 6

15. Pycnometers 2
16. a. Thermometers (Glass) 0 - 100° C 3
b. Thermometers (Glass) 0 - 200° C 2
c. Maximum, Minimum Thermometers 3
d. Electronic digital thermometers 2

17. Wash Bottles (Plastic) 3

18. Containers for moisture contents with covers:

January 2023 A -2 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

a. Small size (500 grm capacity) 50

b. Large size (2 kg capacity) 30

19. French Volume measures for insitu densities (complete with tools 2 sets
and 6 spare balloons)

20. a. 200ml dia. and 300mm dia. sieve sets. Sieve sizes 7", 5" 2 sets
3", 2
1/2", 2", 1 1/2", 1", 33/4", 1/2", 3/8", 3/16" , No. 4, 8, 10, 40,
100,
b. 200 lid and receiver. 6
c. Sieve brushes (brass I Hair) 1
Motorized Sieve Shaker

21. Graduated Cylinders (100 ml, 500 ml, and 1000 ml). 3 each

22. a. C.B.R. Moulds 6" dia x 7 " height (including collar and base 24
plate)
b. Perforated base plate for the 24
c. above Solid Spacer disc. (2.416" 12
d. thick) Swell gauge I sell tripod 6
e. Surcharge weights (5 lb. - annular) 24
f. surcharge weights (5 lb. split) 24
g. Filter paper (watman No. 5) 16cm dia. 1 box

23. a. Proctor Mould (To ASTM D 1557) complete 1

b. Standard compaction hammer (2.5 kg. wt-305 1
c. drop) Automatic Proctor and CSR compactor machine 1

24. Modified compaction mould (To ASTM D 1557) 152 mm dia. and 2
125mm height complete with collar and base plate.

25. Heavy compaction hammer (4.5 kg. wt 457 mm drop) 2

26. a. Metal straight edge (300mm long) 2

b. Soil mixing tray approximately 100cm x 10cm 2

27. Mixing tools (Spatulas, garden trowels, wooden hammer and 2 sets
scoops)

28. a. C.B.R./ Marshall Tester 1

b. Proving ring 50 kN capacity (for CBR) 1
c. Proving ring 28 kN capacity (for Marshall test) 1
d. Penetration dial gauge 1
e. Bracket for the above dial 1
f. Penetration piston 1

29. Sand pouring apparatus:

a. 200mm sand pouring cylinder and calibrating cylinder 1 each

b. Metal tray (200mm dia. hole) 2
c. Pocket Penetrometer 2

January 2023 A -3 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

30. a. Sand cone (152 mm) 2

b. Plastic Container 12
c. Density plate 2
d. Tools for insitu density test 2sets

31. Plastic bags (Large and small sizes) 200 each

ASPHALTIC MATERIAL SECTION

32. a. Rotary separator (Extraction machine) 2

b. Filter papers for the above. 200

33. a. Marshall Hammer 1

b. Stand for the above 1
c. Moulds for Marshall specimens, including and base 6

34. a. Breaking head stability mould 1

b. Flow measuring meter 1

35. Sample extruder for Marshall specimens 1

36. Thermostatically controlled water bath 1

37. Hot plates 2

38. laboratory asphalt warmer (air bath) 1

39. Stainless Steel bowl (round bottom) 1 gallon capacity Bitumen 3

40. Penetrometer and 20 needless 1

41. Ring and ball apparatus 1

42. a. Stopwatch 1
b. Internal time ringer 1

43. Bacon sampler 1

44. Vernier Calliper 1

45. Bubbard-Carvick Specific Gravity Bottle 1

46. Bench mounting asphalt mixer 1

47. a. Automatic Penetrometer 1

b. Set of needless of the above test (2 x 3 no.) 2 sets
c. Containers for the above test 24

48. a. Laboratory thermometers (Rototherm-metallic) 180 mm 6

long and 100 - 450° F)
b. Pocket digital thermometer (50 - 250 °C) 6

January 2023 A -4 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

49. a. Core Drill (Petrol driven core cutting machine) 1

b. 100mm dia. Water swivel attachment 2
c. Extra core barriers for the above 2
d. Counterweights for the core drill unit 1 set

50. Portable gas cooker with gas cylinder 1

51. Pair of asbestos gloves; shovels, levelling float 2 each

52. a. Trichloro-ethylene ( 45 gal. drums) 2 drum

b. Paraffin Wax 10 kg
c. Paper bags (Cement bag size) 300
d. Trichloro-ethylene recovery still 1

53. Apparatus for sand equivalent test (Complete set without motorized 1
shaker)

54. Metallic trays:

a. 30cm square 6
b. 50cm square 3

55. Rolling straight edge model 141 RRL or ELE 1

56. 300mm dia sieve set. Sieve sizes 2", 1 1/2", 1", 3/4", 1/2", 3/8", No. 1 set
4, 8, 10, 20, 40, 80, 100, 200 including lid and pan

57. 2000 kN compression machine (twin gauge) 1

58. 150 mm cube moulds 24

59. 150 mm dia. x 300 mm high cylinder moulds 12

60. Mortar capping mould (for 150mm dia. cylinders)

a. Steel capping plate 1

b. Pair of capping collars Set
c. Mould oil 10

61. Automatic recording vicat apparatus 1

62. Mortar Mixer 1

63. Mortar Moulds 6

64. Galvanised steel tank to accommodate 100 No. 150 mm cubes not 2
more than 2 deep

65. Aggregate crushing value apparatus (complete set) 1

66. Square tamping bars to B.S. 1880 – 1970 3

January 2023 A -5 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

67. Slump Test :

a. Slump cone 2
b. Tamping rod 2

68. Compacting Factor Test

a. C.F. Apparatus 1
b. Compacting rod 1
c. Levelling Floats 4

69. a. Pycnometer ( 1 kg size to B.S. 1377) 3

b. Sand absorption cone 1
c. Tamping rod for the above 1
d. Wire basket for S.G. 1
e. Density bottles (100 ml) 3

70. Flakiness I Elongation gauges 1 each

71. Riffle boxes :

a. 1 1/2" chute 1
b. 1 1/2" chute 1
c. Speedy moisture tester (Large Model) 1
d. Calcium carbide power (Containers) 10

72. Air Entrainment meter (complete set) 1

73. General Items

a. Wheel barrow 1
b. Plastic buckets 4
c. Plastic containers 6
d. Screw-drivers (Large and small), set of spanners for cubes 2 boxes
and pliers

74. For Non-destructive Testing

a. Type 'N' 1
b. Cover meter 1
c. Electrometer coating gauge 1
d. Pundit ultrasonic concrete tester (complete set) 1
e. Additional transducer 200 kHz 2
f. Portable digital thermometers 2

75. Arrangements for the following tests must also be provided :

a. Soundness test (ASTM C-88)

b. Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C131 & C535)

76. Geological hammer and chisels 2 each

77. Clinometer and band lenses 1 set each

January 2023 A -6 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

SN. REQUIRED DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

78. Laboratory stereo microscope with polarising kit, bulbs etc. 1

79. Safety goggles and gloves As requested

80. If site conditions warrant, provisions for insitu C.B.R. or plate As requested
bearing test.

All the supplied equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor at the end of project. The contractor
is obliged to replace any instrument or part thereof sent for repairs.

Specifications:

The Contractor shall supply the Engineer at the beginning of the Contract with one set each of latest
Edition of the following Publications:

i. Full sets of relevant AASHTO, ASTM, Asphalt Institute and BS Standards, Specifications, codes of
practice, and design manuals as mentioned in the Tender Documents.

ii. AASHTO MATERIALS - Part 1 and 2 plus all annual interim specifications until the end of the
contract

iii. A policy on the geometric Design of Roads and Streets - AASHTO Plus all interim additions or
amendments

iv. Standard specification for Highway Bridges - AASHTO plus interim addition and amendments

v. Manual on foundation investigations AASHTO plus interim addition and amendments.

vi. Special procedures tor testing soil and rock for Engineers purposes - ASTM. Plus interim addition
and amendments

vii. Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement (CESMM) Fourth Edition.

viii. Sharjah Traffic Control Devices Manual Volume 1 & 2

January 2023 A -7 Appendix A

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

APPENDIX B – SCHEDULE OF ENGINEER’S OFFICES AND

EQUIPMENT

B.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain in good repair (inclusive of daily cleaning) site
offices to the satisfaction of the Engineer and his staff. The office, access roads and hardstanding
together with equipment, furnishing, fittings and supplies as indicated in the appropriate appendix
hereto shall be ready for occupation not later than one week before any temporary or permanent
works commence, and will be required during the execution of the works and for up to one month
after completion of the works or as required and directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
remove the offices or stop the services without prior written consent from the Engineer and
Employer.

The offices, furniture and equipments for the use of Engineer’s staff shall be new and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. No used offices, furniture and equipments shall be used.

The Contractor shall bear all expenses incurred, no matter of what nature, by the Engineer due to
the failure of the Contractor to complete and hand over to the Engineer the office or any of their
fittings, furniture and equipment within the stipulated period.

Roads and Transport Authority will not provide any area of land free of charge for the erection of
the office for the Engineers and Contractor. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to
provide such area of land on his own cost and risk. The Contractor’s own offices shall also be
located on the same land but no workshop, stores, fabrication or manufacturing facilities shall be
permitted therein.

All utilities necessary for operating the Engineer’s office shall be supplied by the Contractor
including provision of power, hot and cold water supply, sanitary fittings and drainage connections.

The Contractor shall ensure an uninterrupted supply of water and power to the office and the
electrical installation shall provide for simultaneous use of all electrical appliances. The drinking
water supply shall be to the satisfaction of the appropriate Health Authority and the Engineer

The Contractor shall take measures for the disposal and purification of sewage water from the
office and by means of enclosed underground tanks sufficient in number and size and shall further
take care of the regular disposal of the contents of the tanks and domestic water from the office.

The Contractor shall bear all installation, rental, recurring and removal charges and expenses
related thereto including payment for electricity, fuel and water used.

The Contractor shall provide supplies of consumable materials such as general office equipment,
stationery, and refreshments, etc. as required and directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide within the office a dry process photocopying machine capable of
producing A3/A4 sizes together with all spares and maintenance etc. for the exclusive use of the
Engineer.

The Engineers office shall have a floor area and the number of working rooms and utility rooms as
indicated in Appendix B hereto. Shaded parking areas for 7 No. of vehicles shall be provided
adjacent to the office for the Engineer. The Contractor shall include for cleaning the Engineer’s
offices and washing of the vehicles.

January 2023 B -1 Appendix B

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of and the insurance of the office and contents
and for all plans, documents, paper, and other articles contained therein.

The area of the office shall be properly fenced off with gates to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

PPE (Safety hats, safety shoes, goggles, ear protection devices, dust masks, etc.) shall be provided
by the Contractor to all the Engineer’s staff.

Upon completion of the whole of the works, the Engineer’s office complete with all fittings and
facilities thereto including sewage and waste water disposal, facilities shall become the property of
the Contractor and be removed and the site made good.

The Contractor shall provide all items listed in the attached Schedules.

The office requirements on this contract are as follows:

ROOM DESCRIPTION MINIMUM NO.

NO. SIZE

1 Employer’s Representative 4m x 4m * 1

2 Resident Engineer 4m x 4m * 1

3 Conference Room 6m x 4m 1

4 Engineers 4m x 4m 1

5 Inspectors / Surveyors / Document Controller 4m x 4m 2

6 Toilet / Kitchen / Store 4m x 2m 3

* Plus separate private bathroom

January 2023 B -2 Appendix B

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

Schedule of Furniture and fittings

The Contractor shall provide brand new furniture and fittings for the site offices as indicated in the schedule
of offices, and it shall be to the satisfaction of Engineer’s and his approval.

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT ROOM NO. AND QUANTITY

1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Executive desk with two locking drawers & revolving No. 1 1 - - - -
chair
2. Conference table to accommodate 8 people with No. - - 1 - - -
revolving chair
3. Desk with two locking drawers, side table and No. - - - 1 4 -
revolving chair
4. Visitor Chair – Steel Frame No. 2 2 - 2 2 1

5. Four drawers steel filing cabinet No. 1 1 - 1 2 1

6. Side table for drawings No. 1 1 - - - -

7. Four tier filing tray and Waste paper basket No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE

8. Mobile phone (Latest smartphone, minimum 8GB No. 1 1 - 2 4 -

RAM and 128GB ROM with post-paid billing)
9. Portable dry powder fire extinguisher No. - - - - 1 1

10. Max. – Min. thermometer No. - 1 - - 1 -

11. Refrigerator 18 cubic feet No. - - - - - 1

12. Refrigerator 5 cubic feet No. 1 1 - - - -

13. Microwave Oven, Water filter, Sink Unit and Electric No. - - - - - 1
Kettle (each)
14. Laser multi-function Printer (copier/scanner/printer) No. - - - - 1 -
with paper sorter
15. Personal Computer: Processor Core i7, 16 GB RAM, No. 1 1 - 1 4 -
1 TB Hard Disk, DVD writer, 21” Monitor, Windows 11
operating system, Norton Antivirus 360, Microsoft
Office software, all with licenses and shared with
Internet connection.
16. Refreshments (Hot and Cold) No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE

17. Consumables including stationery, photocopy No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE

papers, glossy papers for digital camera, etc.
18. Site Office cleaning and maintenance No. AS REQUIRED ON SITE

January 2023 B -3 Appendix B

Client: Sharjah Roads & Transport Authority (Roads) Volume 2, Part I – General Specifications

B.2 – VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

The Contractor shall provide and maintain the following vehicles for the Engineer use:

New Pick-up 4-wheel Drive Double Cab. Vehicles with a driver for each vehicle

Year of Manufacture : 2023/2024

Engine Capacity : 2700 cc onwards
Transmission : Automatic
Air Conditioning : Must

The vehicles supplied shall be approved by the Engineer, but shall remain the property of the Contractor.

The contractor shall provide the above vehicle (including the cost of fuel, maintenance, insurances, salik,
etc.) starting from commencement date until the completion of the whole works.

January 2023 B -4 Appendix B